TIA Service Training 1 S

SN3lA1315
Ausnpu! Joj saamsuy
NIVHIIS
u!u!eii apvueS-V11
LS DIPANIS
s Tinsnpui pup
suo
uolletuomv Joj buluIpiLL
SIEMENS
Information and Training
Automation and Drives
SIMATIC S7
TIA-Service Training 1
1.
The SIMATIC S7 System Family
2.
Training Units and Addressing
3.
Installation/Maintenance of the
Programmable Logic Controller
4.
The SIMATIC Manager
5.
Symbols
6.
Hardware Configuration
7.
Hardware Commissioning
8.
Block Architecture and Block Editor
9.
Binary Operations
ST-SERV1 Course
AL: N
ECCN: 5D992
10. Digital Operations

Export Regulations
AL
Number of European resp. German export list.
Goods with labels not equal to "N" are subject to export authorization.
ECCN
Number of US export list. (Export Control Classification Number). Goods
with labels not equal to "N" are subject to re-export authorization for
export to certain countries.
Indication Goods labeled with "AL not equal to N" (here: technical documentations)
are subject to European or German export authorization when being
exported out of the EU.
Goods labeled with "ECCN not equal to N" (here: technical
documentations) are subject to US re-export authorization.
Even without a label, or with label "AL:N" or "ECCN:N", authorization may
be required due to the final whereabouts and purpose for which the
goods are to be used (here: technical documentations).
Decisive are the export labels stated on order acknowledgements,
delivery notes and invoices.
This document was produced for training purpose.

SIEMENS assumes no responsibility for its contents.
11. Introduction to HMI and PROFIBUS DP
12. Rewiring a User Program
13. Introduction to Micromaster
14. Documenting, Saving, Archiving
The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its contents is not permitted
without express written authority. Offenders will be liable to damages. All rights,
including rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design, are
reserved.
15. Closing Exercise
(--) SIEMENS AG 2009
16. Solutions
Name:
Course: from
to
17. Training and Support
Instructor:
18.
Infoline
Tel:
01805 23 56 11
Fax:
01805 23 56 12
Internet: http://www.siemens.com/sitrain
19.
Version V5.9.1
(for STEP? V5.4 SP3. WinCC flexible 2008. Starter V4.0)
20.
1
SIEMENS
SIMATIC S7
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_01E.1
2.1 SITRAIN Training for

qtr Automation and Industrial Solutions
Contents
Page
...... 2
Objectives
3
SIMATIC S7 Overview ................................................................................................................... 4
What does "Totally Integrated Automation" Mean
...... 5
The SIMATIC S7/C7 and WinAC Controllers
...... 6
S7-200
........................................................................................................................................... 7
S7-200 Micro Controller
8
S7-200: Modules / Expansion Modules (EM)
...... 9
S7 - 300 Automation System .......................................................................................................... 10
S7-300: Modules ............................................................................................................................ 11
S7-300: CPU Design ...................................................................................................................... 12
S7-400 Automation System ............................................................................................................ 13
S7-400: Modules ............................................................................................................................ 14
S7-400: CPU Design ...................................................................................................................... 15
SIMATIC Embedded Automation - Overview .................................................................................. 16
Device Spectrum of SIMATIC Embedded Automation .................................................................... 17
An Application Example for PC-based Automation ........................................................................ 18
SIMATIC Microbox 427-B RTX "Embedded PC" ............................................................................ 19
SIMATIC S7- mEC (Modular Embedded Controller) ........................................................................ 20
PG/PC Requirements for Installing STEP 7 ..................................................................................... 21
Installing the STEP 7 Basic Package .............................................................................................. 22
STEP 7 Tools ................................................................................................................................. 23
STEP 7 Software Packages (Examples) ......................................................................................... 24
If You Want to Know More about the Topic "TIA" ............................................................................ 25
More Information ............................................................................................................................ 26
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 1
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_01E.2
V,

Automation and Industnal Solutions
Page
Contents
Programming Sequence Control Systems with S7- GRAPH ............................................................ 27
The State Diagram Method S7- HiGraph ......................................................................................... 28
Programming in the High Level Language S7- SCL ......................................................................... 29
CFC - Tool for Graphic Interconnection of Si Blocks ....................................................................... 30
Process Diagnosis with S7- PDIAG ................................................................................................. 31
Testing User Programs with S7- PLCSIM ........................................................................................ 32
Runtime Software for Closed-loop Control Engineering Tasks ......................................................... 33
Communicating with SIMATIC NET ................................................................................................. 34
Operator Control and Process Monitoring with SIMATIC HMI .......................................................... 35
Process Visualization and Operator Control with WinCC ................................................................. 36
Process Automation with SIMATIC PCS 7 ....................................................................................... 37
DRIVES Technology ....................................................................................................................... 38
The SINAMICS Family .................................................................................................................... 39
Page 2
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Objectives
Upon completion of the chapter the participant will ...
have an overview of the SIMATIC S7 system family
be familiar with the S7-300 and S7-400 automation systems
have an overview of the modules available for these automation
systems
understand the concept of "Totally Integrated Automation" (T.I.A.)
be familiar with the programming devices
be familiar with the PC requirements for working with STEP7
be familiar with the tools of the STEP7 basic programming package
have an overview of the most important tools used in the T.I.A.
concept
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_01E.3
Page 3
li SITRAIN Training for
vi
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
SIMATIC S7 Overview
SIMATIC Software
SIMATIC PG
SIMATIC PC
SIMATIC HMI
k:
kr:
kt
tail.
111
YYYYYYYYiY
MPI Network
Industrial Ethernet
SIMATIC NET
PROFIBUS
aI
SIMATIC
Controller
A e
PROFIBUS DP
iy
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_01E.4
AS-Interface
47.
Introduction
For the operation of machines, equipment and processes in almost all areas of
manufacturing you require control elements in addition to energy supply. It must
be possible to initiate, control, monitor and end the operation of any given
machine or process.
Hard-wired
Controllers -> PLC
In the hard-wired controllers of the past, the program logic was governed by
the task-specific wiring of contactors and relays.
Today, programmable logic controllers are used to solve automation tasks. The
logic stored in the program memory of an automation system does not depend on
equipment design and wiring and can be modified at any time with the help of a
programming device.
Totally Integrated
Automation
Production processes are no longer seen as individual partial processes, but

rather as integral components of an entire production process.
The total integration of the entire automation environment is today achieved with
the help of:
one common software environment that integrates all components and tasks
into one uniform easy to use system
a common data management (central database)
a common communication between all participating automation components.

Page 4
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
What does "Totally Integrated Automation" Mean
WinCC
PCS7
/
/
w
w
D)
SIMATIC S7
LE]
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_01E.5
11 SITRAIN Training for
Totally Integrated
Automation
The new SIMATIC family unifies all devices and systems, such as hardware
and software, into a uniform, powerful system platform.
In this platform existing barriers between computer, PLC, and process control
have been overcome. Operator control and monitoring are improved.
Advantages
This totally integrated automation offers you, among other things, the following
advantages:
A scalable hardware platform. The optimal (price/performance)

functionality (PLC or computer) can be chosen for the task to be solved.
An open totally integrated automation environment. An existing

system can be easily extended, or future automation solutions can be
integrated.
Existing investments retain their value. The transition from an existing
SIMATIC, TELEPERM or TI environment can be carried out very easily.
Powerful software increases the productivity in the implementation of a

project reducing the engineering and life cycle costs. In addition, expenses for
commissioning, maintenance and service are reduced.
SIMATIC is based on Windows standards and can thus easily use their
applications (standard software) and communication mechanisms.
Page 5
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
The SIMATIC S7/C7 and WinAC Controllers

modular
forrirru
r rrr11
Upper and
middle
performance
range
inir1.11
SIMATIC S7 - 400
Lower and
middle
performance
range
complete
modular
TV lwillFPimIll
=LED
SIMATIC S7 - 300
Micro PLC
SIMATIC C7 6xx
corn act
SIMATIC S7 - 200
SIMATIC S7
Logo
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_01E.6
G
_
gler

SIMATIC S7
The programmable logic controller family consists of the Micro PLC (S7-200)
performance range, the lower/middle performance range (S7-300) and the
middle/upper performance range (S7-400).
SIMATIC 07
This complete system is the combination of a PLC (S7-300) and an operator

panel of the HMI operator control and process monitoring system. The integration
of programmable logic controller and operator panel in one device makes
complete machine controls in the smallest space and at an economical price
possible.
WinAC
WinAC is a PC-based solution. It is used when various automation tasks (control,

visualization, data processing) are to be solved with a PC.
Page 6
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
S7-200
S7-22x
S7-21x
SIEMENS
SF
RUN
STOP
SIMATIC
0'7-200
10.0
10.1
10.2
10.3
10.4
10.5
11.0
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
11.5
Q0..01
.40
IQ
Q 11 ,0
Q0.2
Q0.3
Q0.4
Q0.5
10.6
Q0.6
M.7
Q07
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Features
CPI . 214
18.09.2009
SERV1_018.7
lir
Modular small control system for the low-end performance range,
Performance-graded range of CPUs,
Extensive selection of modules,
Expandable design with up to 7 modules,
Backplane bus integrated in the modules,
Can be networked with

- RS 485 communications interface or
- PROFIBUS or
- connected with Industrial Ethernet,
Central PG/PC connection with access to all modules,
No slot rules for peripheral modules,
Own software,
"Complete package" with power supply, CPU, I/O in one device,
"Micro PLC" with integrated functions.

Page 7
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
S7-200 Micro Controller
Status Indicators
Status Indicators
for Integrated DO
lk
SIEMENS
SINAlIC
ST-200
SF
RUN
STOP
- Potentiometer
- Memory Card
- Mode Selector
PPI Connection
.1,
-I,
..5...6.2
11
.0
4
irirliqjak
214-'RD22-0Y130
Status Indicators
for Integrated DI
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
iv-
18.09.2009
SERV1_01E.8

Mode Selector
For manual mode selection of the CPU:

STOP
= Stop mode, the program is not executed.
TERM
= Program execution, read/write access possible from PG.
RUN
= Program execution, read-only access possible from PG.
Status Indicators
(LEDs)
SF
RUN
STOP
DP
Memory Card
Slot for memory card. A memory card saves the program contents in the event of
a power outage without the need for a battery.
PPI Connection
The programming device / text display or another CPU is connected here.
= Group error; internal CPU fault; red

= Run mode; green
= Stop mode; yellow
= PROFIBUS-DP (only CPU 215)
This enables you to access several controllers from a PG or text display. As well,
the S7-200 CPUs use the Network Read (NETR) and Network Write (NETW)
instructions to read and write to each other (peer-to-peer communication).

Page 8
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
S7-200: Modules / Expansion Modules (EM)
#1drerla ,
i s
i
rd 'Afrawdrifir
0
artr010:4:00:ffir
40191111ftliffilpr
I / 0 Modules
Function Modules (FM)
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Expansion
Modules (EM)
18.09.2009
SERV1_01E.9
Communications
Processors (CP)

Digital input modules:

24VDC
- 120/230VAC
Digital output modules:
- 24VDC
- Relay
Analog input modules:
- Voltage
- Current
- Resistance
- Thermocouple
Analog output modules:
- Voltage
- Current
Communications
Processors (CP)
Using the CP 242-2, the S7-200 can be connected to an AS-Interface as the

master. In that way, 31 AS-Interface slaves can control up to 248 binary
elements. This greatly increases the number of inputs/outputs of the S7-200.
Other communications modules are the modem and PROFIBUS-DP expansion
modules. The SIMATIC NET CP 243-1 can be used to connect to Industrial
Ethernet.
Accessories
Bus connector

Page 9
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Features
18.09.2009
SERV1_01E.10
4F
Modular small control system for the lower and middle performance range
Performance-graded range of CPUs
Extensive selection of modules
Expandable design with up to 32 modules
Backplane bus integrated in the modules
Can be networked with

-
Multipoint Interface (MPI),
PROFIBUS or
Industrial Ethernet or
PROFINET
Central PG/PC connection with access to all modules
No slot rules for peripheral modules,
Configuration and parameter setting with the help of the "Hardware

Configuration" tool
Page 10
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
S7-300: Modules
Q
PS
(optional)
V Q
CPU
IM
Q Q Q
CP:
SM: SM: SM: SM: FM:

(optional) DI
DO
Al
AO - Counting
- Positioning
- Closed-loop
control
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
- Point-to Point
- PROFIBUS
- Industrial Ethernet
18.09.2009
SERV1_01E.11
gr.
Signal Modules
Digital input modules:
24VDC, 120/230VAC
(SM)
Digital output modules:
24VDC, Relay
Analog input modules:
Voltage, Current,
Resistance, Thermocouple
Analog output modules:
Voltage, Current
Interface Modules
(IM)
The IM360/1M361 and 1M365 make multi-tier configurations possible.

The interface modules loop the bus from one tier to the next.
Dummy Modules
(DM)
The DM 370 dummy module reserves a slot for a signal module whose
parameters have not yet been assigned. A dummy module can also be used to
reserve a slot for installation of an interface module at a later date.
Function Modules
(FM)
Perform "special functions":

Counting
Positioning
Closed-loop control.
Communications
Processors (CP)
Provide the following networking facilities:

Point-to-Point connections
PROFIBUS
Industrial Ethernet
Accessories
PROFINET.
Bus connectors and front connectors

Page 11
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
S7-300: CPU Design

CPU 315-2DP until Oct. 2002
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Mode Selector
Status Indicators
(LEDs)
18.09.2009
SERV1_01E.12
MRES
= Memory reset function (Module Reset)
STOP
= Stop mode, the program is not executed.
RUN
RUN-P

= Program execution, read/write access possible from PG.
SF
BATF
Group error; internal CPU fault or fault in module with diagnostics

capability.
= Battery fault; battery empty or non-existent.
DC5V
= Internal 5 VDC voltage indicator.
FRCE
= FORCE; indicates that at least one input or output is forced.

= Flashes when the CPU is starting up, then a steady light in Run
mode.
= Shows a steady light in Stop mode.
Flashes slowly for a memory reset request,
Flashes quickly when a memory reset is being carried out,
Flashes slowly when a memory reset is necessary because a
memory card has been inserted.
RUN
STOP
Memory Card
CPU 315-2DP after Oct. 2002
A slot is provided for a memory card. The memory card saves the program
contents in the event of a power outage without the need for a battery.
For CPUs after Oct. 2002, a Micro Memory Card is always necessary for
operation. It also provides the backup in the event of a power outage.
Battery Compartment For CPUs up until Oct. 2002, there is a receptacle for a lithium battery under the
cover. The battery provides backup power to save the contents of the RAM in
the event of a power outage. For CPUs after Oct. 2002, no battery is necessary.
MPI Connection
Connection for a programming device or other device with an MPI interface.
DP Interface
Interface for direct connection of distributed I/Os to the CPU.
Page 12
'
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Features
114
18.09.2009
SERV1_01E.13
The power PLC for the mid to upper performance range,
Performance-graded range of CPUs

Extensive selection of modules
Expandable design to over 300 modules

Backplane bus integrated in the modules
Can be networked with - Multipoint interface (MPI),
- PROFIBUS or
- Industrial Ethernet or
- PROFINET
Central PG/PC connection with access to all modules
No slot restrictions
Configuration and parameter setting with the help of the "Hardware
Configuration" tool
Multicomputing (up to four CPUs can be used in the central rack).
Page 13
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Signal Modules
(SM)
Training for
Digital input modules: 24VDC, 120/230VAC

Digital output modules: 24VDC, Relay
Analog input modules: Voltage, Current, Resistance, Thermocouple
Interface Modules
(IM)
A SITRAIN
v
18.09.2009
SERV1_01E.14
Analog output modules: Voltage, Current.
The IM460, IM461, IM463, IM467 interface modules provide the connection
between various racks:
UR1 (Universal Rack) with up to 18 modules
UR2 (Universal Rack) with up to 9 modules

ER1 (Expansion Rack) with up to 18 modules
ER2 (Expansion Rack) with up to 9 modules.
Function Modules
Perform "special functions":
(FM)
Positioning
Closed-loop control.
Counting
Communications
Provide the following networking facilities:
Processors (CP)
Point-to-Point connections
PROFIBUS
Industrial Ethernet
PROFINET.

Page 14
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
S7-400: CPU Design
Error LEDs
Slot for Memory
Card
Mode Selector
MPI/DP
Interface
DP Interface
External
Battery Supply
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_01E.15

tr
Il
Fault LEDs
LEDs for the CPU's statuses and faults, both internal and external
Memory Cards
With the S7-400 CPUs you can, depending on your requirements, insert RAM
or flash EPROM cards as external load memory:
RAM cards are available with a capacity of:

64KByte, 256KByte, 1MByte, 2MByte.
The CPU battery backs up the contents.
Mode Selector
Flash EPROM cards are available with a capacity of:

64KByte, 256KByte, 1MByte, 2MByte, 4MByte, 8MByte, 16MByte.
The contents are backed-up on the integrated EEPROMs.
MRES = Memory reset function (Module RESet)

STOP
= STOP mode, that is, no program execution and output disabled
("OD" mode = Output Disabled).
RUN
RUN-P = Program execution, read/write access possible from PG.

MPI / DP
Interface
MPI / DP interface (parameter-assignable in HW-Config) for
establishing the online connection to the programming device

connecting to distributed peripherals (DP)
data exchange with other stations (S7 Communication)
DP Interface
For connecting to distributed peripherals (DP, only for CPUs with 2 interfaces)
EXT-BATT
Additional external battery socket for a 5 VDC to 15 VDC source to back up the
RAM when the power supply is being replaced.

Page 15
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
SIMATIC Embedded Automation - Overview

Modular Controller
Open + Standard PC
Highest ruggedness
Highest ruggedness
111 Modularity
Modularity
Scalable
Scalable
Commissioning through
a Commissioning through
"Automators"
"Automators"
H / F functionality
10 year replacement
parts availability
Long-term availability
Data-secure
IPC
S7-mEC RTX
SIMATIC S7
SIMATIC Soft-PLC and HMI

options
Standard PC operating system
and interfaces
Openness (HW + SW)
State-of-the-art PC technolog
Rugged (embedded)
Commissioning requires
PC know-how
SIMATIC Soft-PLC and HMI

options
Standard PC operating system
and interfaces
Openness (HW + SW)
Stat-of-the-art PC technology
The Best of Both Worlds
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
PC-based Control
18.09.2009
SERV1_01E.16
rai'i
r
Automation T
an
d lnlfsotrial
Solutions
SIMATIC Embedded Automation is the implementation of various automation

tasks (PLC programming, visualization, data processing, HMI services) on one
common PC and software platform.
Today, three fundamental directions can be derived from this:
Modular Controllers: field-proven S7-300 and S7-400 controllers with their

different versions and performance characteristics
Embedded Controllers such as SIMATIC S7-mEC and SIMATIC Microbox

427B
SIMATIC Panel PCs with Win AC MP and Industrial PCs
For this purpose, Siemens offers the System PC based Automation as a block out
of the area of "SIMATIC Totally Integrated Automation".
Configuration, programming and parameter-assignment is handled by the familiar
engineering tool STEP 7 as of Version V5.4 SP4. The WinCC flexible software
package makes the HMI configuration possible.
The existing WinAC RTX 2005 software is being replaced by the 2008 version.
The most significant expansion is the PROFINET functionality with PN 10 and
CBA (Component Based Automation). Included in this, among other things, is the
high performance operation of PROFINET 10 as well as the open communication
via "Open User Communication".
Page 16
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Device Spectrum of SIMATIC Embedded Automation
.........
SIMATIC Microbox 427B- RTX

SIMATIC Microbox 427B- HMI/RTX
SIMATIC Panel PC 477B- HMI
SIMATIC Panel PC 477B- HMI/RTX
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Device Spectrum
SIMATIC Panel MP 177/277/377 +

WinAC MP
SIMATIC S7-mEC
SIMATIC WinAC 2008 RTX
18.09.2009
SERV1_01E.17
The slide shows an overview of the most important device components that are
available for SIMATIC Embedded Automation.

Page 17
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
An Application Example for PC-based Automation
WinCC flexible
Thin Client
PG/PC
Data server
HMI
Windows
Ethernet
interface
System / Cell network

169.254...
111
11 3rd party
device
laasamanss-sw j .=
111111tall sammurnequivirn
,
1111U1
OUC
WINAC RTX
PROFINET
interface
SI
192.168...
Main application case for PC-based

Automation:
PLC
Field device Drive
HMI
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
PROFINET 10 local "behind" CPU to avoid

dependancy on system configuration
(independent assignment of IP addresses).
18.09.2009
SERV1_01E.18
hr
Application Example The application example above shows a possible structure for the use of a
SIMATIC Microbox 427-B in an automation solution. The connection of local PN
10 slaves takes place behind the CPU to avoid dependencies on the system
configuration. PROFINET 10 RT services can be used in parallel with CBA
functions on the same line. Third party devices can be addressed via the open T
communication (Open user communication) (T-send and T-receive).
WinAC RTX 2008
SIMATIC WinAC RTX 2008 makes use of a PROFINET 10 Controller Interface for
operating distributed PROFINET peripherals. Thereby, the RT and IRT operating
modes are supported. Moreover, two different interface types can be operated
with WinAC RTX 2008:
the Standard Ethernet (LAN-Interface) of the SIMATIC PC
the CP1616/1604, integrated PROFINET interface of the S7-mEC and the

SIMATIC PC
The interface integration in WinAC RTX 2008 and in the familiar STEP 7
configuration takes place similar to the PROFIBUS interfaces as submodules that
are used today. They behave like the integrated PN interface of the SIMATIC S7CPUs. Basically, the following types of data transmission are available (Standard
Ethernet LAN operating mode):
Realtime Core
PROFINET 10 RT with up to 128 PROFINET 10 devices
PROFINET Component Based Automation (CBA)
Open User Communication (T-communication)
S7 communication and routing
WinAC RTX 2008 simplifies the installation of the Ardence RTX realtime core.
Effective immediately, this is completely integrated in the setup of WinAC RTX
and no longer has to be installed separately.
Page 18
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
SIMATIC Microbox 427-B RTX "Embedded PC"
System Fault
RUN/STOP
Imo"=1712s1
Qatei
cPU
tijIfe
SIEMENS 1
PS
ON
BATF
CPU
IT!
INTF
EXTF
BUSE-I
BUSF2
BUSF3
BUSF4
'Ili FR CE
I RUN
STOP
O
IRUN Oi
STOP
M RE S
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Microbox 427B...
18.09.2009
SERV1_01E.19
_211
'
It
T
and Industrial Solutions
The SIMATIC Microbox 427B-HMI/RTX is an "embedded solution" for combined

controller and operator control and visualization tasks. The ready-to-go Microbox
provides the WinAC RTX, WinCC flexible RT and Windows XPe software preinstalled. Special properties with regards to retentive storing of SIMATIC WinAC
RTX user data exist.
Configuration and programming is done as usual with STEP 7. Industrial Ethernet
and PROFIBUS interfaces are available for download activities and data
communication. Furthermore, USB interfaces, connection possibilities for flat
screens (DVINGA), as well as a serial RS232 interface and up to three PC/104Plus cards are available.
SIMATIC WinAC RTX makes the use of an "Open Development Kit" for
implementing application-specific functions in the PLC program possible.
Page 19
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
SIMATIC S7- mEC (Modular Embedded Controller)
0.11.are.
,"
Remote Desktop
Protocol (RDP) for
access to all S7-mEC
programs
USB connection
for mouse etc.
Thin
Client
EM PCI-104
EM PC
2x USB
1x IE/PN
1x serial
1x DVI-I
lx serial
1x CF slot
SIMATIC S7
EC31 RTX
Connection of S7
standard peripherals
Up to 3 PCI cards
Date:
File:
STEP 7 for
parameterization +
diagnosis (RTX)
18.09.2009
SERV1_01E.20

=_ Automation and Industrial Solutions
Embedded Controller The new high-performance SIMATIC S7-mEC "modular embedded controller"
completes the product portfolio in the area of the SIMATIC Controller. The
benefits of a Standard S7 Controller are combined with those of a PC-based
solution.
Different automation solution tasks can be implemented on one hardware p:atform
with the S7-mEC. The hardware basis consists of current PC technology with an
Intel Core Duo 1.2 GHz processor, a 2GB Flash Disk and 1 GB main memory.
SIMATIC WinAC RTX 2008 is used as the application program, Windows XPe
functions as the operating system. Remote services, such as, remote monitoring
via TCP/IP services are available. The S7-mEC also has a Multimedia Card Slot
(MMC).
The design without fan and hard drive is well-suited for the industrial environment.
Three Industrial Ethernet ports and up to two additional USB interfaces enable the
problem-free integration in existing automation scenarios.
The S7-mEC "modular embedded controller" is installed and configured like an
S7-300 PLC.
SIMATIC STEP 7 V5.4 SP4 with additional hardware patch is used as the
engineering tool (RTX version on the S7-mEC necessary).
WinCC flexible can be used as an additional option for operator control and
monitoring. The new SIMATIC Thin Client and other Windows XPe applications
can also be used.
Page 20
ST-SERV1
1
SIEMENS
PG/PC Requirements for Installing STEP 7

Operating Systems:
Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional

Microsoft Windows XP Professional
Microsoft Windows Vista
Memory on the
Hard Drive:
Depending on the installation, between 400 MB and 800 MB
Mouse:
Yes
Interfaces:
CP5611 (PCI) or
CP5512 (PCMCIA) or
PC adapter (USB)
Industrial Ethernet Interface (NIC)
Programming interface for Memory Card (optional)
/
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Requirements
18.09.2009
SERV1_010.21

SIMATIC Programming devices (PG) provide the optimum basis for using the
STEP 7 software.
You can, however, also use a PC that fulfills the above-listed requirements. So
that you can make the necessary online connection between the automation
system (PLC) and the PC, the PC must be equipped with one of the interfaces
listed in the slide above.
If user programs are to be loaded on memory cards outside of the CPU, the PC
must also be equipped with the appropriate programming interface.
Page 21
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Installing the STEP 7 Basic Package

About
01
6,
Double-click on icon
SIMATIC
Manager
IcOUre
MM., L Wank[
51,7 Converting 55 Files
SIMATIC Manager
[c) STEP 7 S7/M7/C7
verswi
V5.4 SF%
Revisi n Level:
K5.4.4.0
PI LAD, STL, FBD - Programming 57 Blocks

Memory Card Parameter Assignment
Communication
Activate
through
Start menu
tt Office Applications
Utilities
Information
Business Appkations
Programs
Documents
'
Setting the PG-PC Interface
ProSave
a STARTER
MI TI 405-S7 Converting TI Files
f STEP 7
TI 5135-57 Converting TI Files
WinCC flexible 2008

WinCC flexible Runtime 2008
Settings
111 Drive Monitor

Search
S7-PLCSIM Simulating Modules
License Mona
OPC-XML
State Graphs
on figuring ocess Diagnostics
Documentation
SIMATIC
rks
signment
Help and Support
SIMATIC Manager
ProTsol Pro CS
0
r
Run...
Log Off se3997...
3Shut Down...
d Start
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Installation
18.09.2009
SERV1_01E.22

%T
1. Activate "Setup.exe" on the Installation CD or use the automatic Setup routine

activation
2. Choose options
3. Choose language(s)
4. Insert authorization disk when prompted.
5. Re-boot when prompted
Software Protection
The STEP 7 software is copy-protected and can only be used on one

programming device at a time.
When you have installed the software, you cannot start using it until you have
transferred the authorization to the hard disk drive from the authorization disk.
Notes
Be sure to read the notes in the README.TXT file on the authorization disk. If
you do not observe these instructions, you risk losing your authorization.
For emergency operation, the STEP 7 basic package can also be used without
authorization. As well, there is also a 14 day limited authorization available in
addition to the unlimited (in time) authorization.
Hot fixes
STEP7 software updates can be downloaded from the Internet.
Result
The main tool in STEP 7 is the SIMATIC Manager. There are two ways in which
to activate it:
1. through the Task bar 4 Start - SIMATIC SIMATIC Manager or through
2. the icon "SIMATIC Manager" on the Windows Desktop.
SITRAIN
Training for
Page 22
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
STEP 7 Tools
NCM 57
CFC - Interconnect blocks
Configure SIMATIC Workspace
5+7 Converting 55 Files

LAD, STL, FBD - Programming 57 Blocks
Memory Card Parameter Assignment
Qp NetPro - Configuring Networks

PID Control Parameter Assignment
57 SCL - Programming 57 Blocks
57-GRAPH - Programming Sequential Control Systems
57-PDIAG - Configuring Process Diagnostics
57-PLCSIM Simulating Modules
Setting the PG-PC Interface

57-HiGraph - Programming State Graphs
STARTER
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_01E.23

41
'
SIMATIC Manager
The SIMATIC Manager manages the STEP 7 projects. It is the main program and
also appears on the WINDOWS desktop.
Notes
"STEP 7 - Readme" provides detailed information about the version, installation

procedure, etc.
LAD, STL, FBD
Tool for writing STEP 7 user programs in the "Ladder Diagram", "Statement List"
or "Function Block Diagram" programming languages.
Memory Card
Parameter
Assignment.
You can save your user programs on EPROM cards by either using the
programming device or an external prommer.
Different drivers are required, depending on the application.
Configuring
Networks
Network configuration with the "NetPro" tool which belongs to the STEP 7 basic
package.
Setting the PG-PC

Interface
This tool is used for setting the local node address, the transmission speed
and the highest node address in the MPI network.
PID Control
Parameter
Assignment
The basic STEP 7 software package also includes blocks for solving PID
(closed-loop) control problems. You choose "PID Control Parameter Assignment"
to start the program for assigning parameters to the closed-loop control blocks.
Converting S5 Files
STEP5 programs can be converted into the corresponding STEP 7 programs with
the help of the S5/S7 converter.
Configure SIMATIC
Workspace
This option provides facilities for configuring multi-user systems.
Converting TI Files
SIMATIC TI programs can be converted into the corresponding STEP 7 program

with the help of the TI/S7 converter.
Page 23
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
STEP 7 Software Packages (Examples)

Which PLC?
SIMATIC S7-200
SIMATIC S7-300
Options
Necessary
STEP 7
Micro/WIN
STEP 7 Lite
Tele Service
S7- PLCSIM
;11
SIMATIC S7-300
STEP 7
SIMATIC 57-400
S7- GRAPH
S7- SCL
S7- HiGraph
Fuzzy Control
Standard PID
Control
Modular PID
Control
DOCPRO
TeleService
S7- PDIAG
S7- PLCSIM
PRODAVE
MPI
S7- SCL
S7- PLCSIM
S7- GRAPH
11111
STEP 7 Professional
STEP 7
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
STEP 7
MP
A SITRAIN Training for
111P.
U.
18.09.2009
SERV1_01E.24
STEP 7 is the basic package for configuring SIMATIC S7-300 or S7-400 systems.
With STEP 7 you can:
configure hardware and assign parameters to it;
configure communication;
program;
test and debug;
document and archive;
carry out diagnosis.
STEP 7 Lite
STEP 7 Lite can be used to program the SIMATIC S7-300 (also the compact
CPUs). Programs that were created with STEP 7 Lite can also be exported to
STEP 7.
It is not possible to carry out a PROFIBUS (DP) or ETHERNET configuration!
ET200S or ET200X configuration (standalone) is possible.
PLCSIM and Teleservice can be used as option packages.
STEP 7 Micro
STEP 7 Micro is suitable exclusively for configuring the S7-200.
License
With the exception of STEP Micro/Win, a license is required for each package.
STEP 7 Professional STEP 7 Professional is a Software Package that contains all IEC languages:
STEP 7 Basic, S7-SCL, S7-GRAPH and the simulation package S7-PLCSIM.
STEP 7 Professional is available as an upgrade package (Powerpack) for STEP7.
Prerequisite for acquiring the powerpack is a valid STEP 7 license.

Page 24
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
If You Want to Know More about the Topic "TIA"
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Note
18.09.2009
SERV1_01E.25

r
The following pages contain either further information or are for reference to
complete a topic.
For more indepth study we offer advanced courses and self-learning mediums.
Page 25
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
SIEMENS
More Information
Download
C Acrobat t to..-pler
/ "ILICI_Baugnypendatempdf]
tone. 50.
f2abi learbeken Dgkment &wise
mikbaltscR5ck.iTo
511.119115
57.300 ano to17 309
Programmable Controller.:
Ma k* Somatc.mams
Lese.e.A
,_aff_j_Lj
r
I ; 17I ei 64 Gig j4
Siemens Katalog CA 01 10/2002 D
Ealaks learbeilen 2uc4reri Ausieehililen JiAres lesezeichen Internet 3
Set rArmS
&stomata, & UV.:
......
.n g
-.
51F1.41FRIG
I (OAT
EF-0 2 Zerk4b4K4UpPen- Neu. Neu CPU 315: J bbereicht I 6nmndungsbereiCh AAP. I Eunkrrord 'ochry Oaten I Bosteildalen i ZikeNinBeuelicleien
R-0 3 s
Interaktivet Ketalog Siemens AID
Er-04
Produkte
A 11 Antriebstechnik
D5
211 Automatisierungssysteme
El- 0 6
S 0 Industie-Autometnerungssys
Ei-0
ZenlFelbdugruppe 1 - Neu- N u CPU 315-2 DP
s D Steuerungen
8
s O H/F-Technik
FDA
A O SIMATIC 505
Die CPU 315-2 DP verfugi
E-Da
O SIMATIC 05
Mikroprozeseor.
AD C
SIMATIC 57
A
DD
der Prozessor erreicht eine Bearbeitungszeit von ca 100 ns je einaranweisung und 4 us le
O 07-200
E13--0 E
57-300/S7-300F/5
128 KByte Arbedsspeicher (entspncht Owe 43 KAnweisungen):
DF
Li EMI-6111,N
Der umfangreiche Arbeitsspeicher fOr ablaufrelevante Programmteile bietetAnwenderprog
DG
Zentralbaugrupi
E
Cards (may 8 MByte) als Ladespetcner fur Programm ermoglichen zusatiich die Projektat
Kommentaren) in der CPU und kOnnen zur Datenarchivierung und Rezepturverwaltung yew
E CPU 312C
Di
1E CPU 313C
Flexible Ausbaubarkeit;
E CPU 313C-2_
max. 32 Baugruppen (Izeiliger Aufbau)
El CPU 313C-2
Mehrpunkffehige Schnittstelle
E CPU 3140-2
Die integrierle Schnittstelle MPI kann max_ 16 Verbindungen gleichzeitig zu 07-3001400 ode
E CPU 314C-2
Von den Verbindungen ist jeweils eine kir PG und eine (Or OP fest reserwert. Mit der MPI ist
Neu . CPU 3
Datenkommunikation" eine einfache Vernetzung mit max. 16 CPUs aufzubauen
Neu CPU 3
PROFIBUS DP-Schnittstelle
=ME
Die CPU 315-2 DP mit PROFIBUS DP-MastertSlave-Schnittstelle ermeglicht einen dezentri
p CPU 313
Geschwindigkeit und einfacher Handhabung. Die dezentrale Periphene wird aus Anwende
CPU 314
(gieiche Projeldierung, Adressierung und Programmierung).
E CPU 315
Es wird die PROFIBUS DP V1-Norm vollstandig unterstutzt. Dies ermbglichtverbesserte Di
El CPU 315-21
V1-Normslaves.
I
E CPU 316-21
Passwortschutz,
E CPU 318-21
Ein Passwortkonzept das Anwenderprogramm vor unberechtigtem Zugriff
2 CPU 312 1Ft
Diagnose-Puffer;
DI CPU 3141Ff
Die letzten 100 Fehler- und Unterbrechungsereignisse werden zu Diagnosezwecken in ein
E CPU 314 CIL
E CPU 315E
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Wartungsfrete Datensicherung;
1 8.09.2009
SERV1_01E.26

Ur
Information
You will find more information on the SIMATIC systems in the items below.
Manual
The manuals give detailed information on the hardware and software. In addition
to the paper version, you can also use the electronic manuals. They are, in part,
included in the installation or STEP 7.
You can download
Internet.
the
most recent SIMATIC manuals free of charge from the
A collection of electronic SIMATIC manuals (HW, SW, Engineering, HMI, NET,

PG) can be ordered under the order number 6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE0.
The ST 70 catalog
Catalog
contains all SIMATIC components with their performance and
order data.
Electronic Catalog
Siemens Partner
SITRAIN
In addition to the paper version, the (CA01) catalog is also available as a CD. This
information is also available on the Internet (www.siemens.de/Simatic).
Of course, your Siemens partner
Training for
is also available for further information.
Page 26
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Programming Sequence Control Systems with S7- GRAPH

S7-GRAPH: The tool for
programming sequence cascades
o
Compatible with DIN EN 6.1131-3
S1
Designed for the requirements of

production engineering
o Graphic division of the process
into steps and transitions
o Steps contain actions
o Transitions check the conditions
for switching to the next step
T1
S2
ij The following phases of

automation can be
optimized with S7-GRAPH:
o
o
o
o
o
S4
T3
Maintenance, Diagnostics
S7-GRAPH
T5
T2
Programming
Debugging
Commissioning
Date:
File:
Siemens AG 2008. AU rights reserved.
S6
S5
Planning, Configuring
SIMATIC S7
T4
2/1 SITRAIN Training for
18.09.2009
SERV1_01E.27
ittr
With the S7-GRAPH programming language, you can clearly and quickly
configure and program sequential sequences that you wish to control with an S7
PLC system.
The process is thus split into single steps with their own function scope. The
sequence is graphically displayed and can be documented with picture and text.
The actions to be performed and the transitions, which control the conditions for
switching to the next step, are determined in the individual steps. Their definitions,
interlocking or monitoring are determined by a subset of the
STEP 7 programming language LAD (ladder diagram).
S7-GRAPH for S7-300/400 is compatible with the sequence language established
in the DIN EN 61131-3 standard.
Functionality
The following functions are offered:
Test Functions
User Interface
Several sequencers in the same S7-GRAPH function block
Free number assignment of the steps and transitions
Simultaneous branches and alternative branches
Jumps (also to other sequence cascades)
Starting/Stopping of sequence cascades as well as activating/holding of

steps.
Display of active steps or faulty steps
Status display and Modify Variable
Switching between the operating modes: manual, automatic and jogging

mode
Overview, Single Page and Single-step display
Graphic separation of locking controls and monitoring conditions.
Page 27
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
The State Diagram Method S7- HiGraph

Position
Cam-operated Index out
switch
S7-HiGraph: The tool for

programming using
State Diagrams
111771=1
o Division of the machine into

functional units
o Creating state diagrams
for every function unit
Motor
o States contain actions

o State diagrams communicate
using messages
Index in
Index
Motor
The following phases of

automation can be
optimized with S7-HiGraph:
Counterbearing
lock/release
Counterbearing
yt,
Coordinator
o Planning, Configuring
o Programming and Debugging
o Commissioning
o Maintenance, Diagnostics
o Supports reusability
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_01E.28

Overview
S7-Higraph allows the asynchronous processes to be described using state

diagrams. The machine or system to be automated is looked upon as a
combination of independent elements, the function units.
Function Units
The function units are the smallest mechanical units of a machine or system.
As a rule, a function unit is made up of mechanical and electrical basic
elements. In programming, a state diagram is assigned to every function unit.
In it, the functional, that is, the mechanical and electrical properties of the
function unit are mapped.
State Diagram
The state diagram describes the dynamic behavior of a function unit. It

describes the states that a function unit can have, as well as the state
transitions. State diagrams can be used more than once. State diagrams that
were created once for a specific function unit, can be reused in other program
locations.
Diagram Groups
and Instances
By combining parallel running state diagrams, you can describe the complete
functionality of a machine or system.
Advantages
This "object-oriented" method of S7-HiGraph is well suited for:
the machine and system manufacturer (mechanical engineering)
the automation specialist (electrical engineering) as common means of

description
the commissioning engineer and the maintenance specialist
Page 28
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Programming in the High Level Language S7- SCL

FUNCTION BLOCK Integrator
VAR INPUT
: BOOL; // Reset output value
!nit
// Input value
x
: REAL;
Ta
: TIME;
// Sampling interval in ms
: TIME;
// Integration time in ms
Ti
// Output value upper limit
olim
: REAL;
ulim
: REAL;
// Output value lower limit
END_VAR
o S7-SCL: High level language for

creating PLC programs
o Compatible with DIN EN 6.1131-3
(ST=Structured Text))
o Certified according to "PLC open"
Base Level
o Contains all the typical elements of
a high level language, such as
operands, terms, control statements
o PLC specifics are integrated,
such as I/O access, timers,
counters...)
VAR_OUTPUT
y : REAL:. 0.0;
END_VAR
BEGIN
IF TIME_TO_DINT(Ti) = 0 THEN
// Division by ?
OK := FALSE;
y := 0.0;
RETURN;
END_IF;
IF Init THEN
y:= 0.0;
ELSE
y := y+TIME_TO_DINT(Ta)*x/TIME_TO_DINT(Ti);
IF y > olim THEN y := olim; END_IF;
IF y < ulim THEN y := ulim; END_IF;
END_IF;
END_FUNCTION_BLOCK
Advantages:
o Well structured, easy to understand
program
o For those knowledgeable in high
level languages
o For complex algorithms
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Overview
// Initialize output value with 0
18.09.2009
SERV1_01E29
ittr

S7-SCL (Structured Control Language) is a PASCAL-similar high level text

language for S7 - 300/400 and C7 and simplifies the programming in control
technology for mathematical algorithms, data management and organization
tasks.
S7-SCL has the PLC open Base Level certificate and is in accordance with the
DIN EN 61131-3 (Structured Text) standard.
With S7-SCL, you can formulate time-saving and economical solutions for
automation tasks.
Functionality
SCL offers the functional scope of a high level language such as:
loops
alternatives
branch distributors, etc.
combined with control-specific functions such as:
bit accesses to the I/O, bit memories, timers, counters etc.
access to the symbol table
STEP7 block accesses
Advantages of SCL
simple to learn programming language especially for beginners
easy to read (understandable) programs are generated.
simpler programming of complex algorithms and processing of complex data

structures
integral debugger for symbolic debugging of the source code (single-step,

breakpoints, etc.)
system integration in S7 languages such as STL and LAD.

Page 29
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
CFC - Tool for Graphic Interconnection of S7 Blocks

CFC (Continuous Function Chart):
Tool for graphic creation
of PLC programs
o Blocks are placed on
function charts
and interconnected
o Interconnection is
possible:
- between I/O fields
- also to blocks in
other charts
o Sources and destinations
are managed in the
margins
rato,f7
CRMII
CIA!
,T7T-P
SK.Z.L.
lb
Eta: CFC - [PC57Demo_extlSIMATIC 400-Slo

gi Ben bate. gritipan &WPM jai
ACP1.14111 OF' I.AS V,F
!nem fere fee*
---1.411412c1
Etta! 11
Oevat
011.1
CO C7001111
1,1 RIC
SO /74
SC CU BB LI
CO CIN
CIO CO
RV SC
ria
SIMATIC S7
CC 017 SO
.11.001141 PO
OM ON BO
TIC.. CC
OM,* CO
CUM
o Program creation for

technologists
o quick creation, testing
and commissioning times
CCM
0-1110 S ErT
S Lt. SO
.1.0.11 I
ST 171
Date:
File:
Fa.
CPO. CO
Advantages
Overview
lo
18.09.2009
SERV1_01E.30
014
indgufsot
arra
di nI n
r
Automation T
rial Solutions
With the engineering tool CFC (Continuous Function Chart), you can create
automation tasks by drawing a technology plan - similar to a Function Block
Diagram in PLC programming.
In this graphic programming method, blocks are positioned in a type of drawing
sheet and are graphically interconnected with one another. You can quickly and
easily convert technological aspects into complete executable automation
programs with CFC.
Scope
Note
The following is supplied with CFC:
CFC Editor
Code Generator
Debugger
Standard block libraries
The CFC product, as an option package, is smoothly integrated in the STEP 7

architecture with a unified Look & Feel and with common data management. CFC
is easy to use, easy to learn and provides consistent data management.
The CFC tool plays an important role in the configuration of the PCS 7 process
control system. Prerequisite is a previously installed SCL option package.
Page 30
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Process Diagnosis with S7- PDIAG

Process diagnosis: Detection of
faults occurring outside the PLC
o Sensor/actuator defective, movement faulty,
S7- PDIAG: Tool for configuring

the fault definition in STL, LAD, FBD
o Integrated in the development environment
u
sea .***
ass "
MAU
a Ve
o Simple formulation of fault monitoring and

message texts (during and after the
program session)
o Fault detection and criteria analysis are
conducted automatically
o Comprehensive information for the operator
on:
type of fault
location of fault
Q1.0
I 1.0
cause of fault
C)
Reduction of down-time
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Process Diagnosis
18.09.2009
SERV1_01E.31
%;.

Diagnosis is important in the operating phase of a plant or machine. Diagnosis is

usually initiated when a fault leads to standstill or malfunction of the plant or
machine.
Programmable logic controllers are widely used in many areas. Field experience
has proven that over 98% of faults occur in the peripherals (such as magnet
valves and end switches). The distribution of fault occurrences makes it
meaningful for the diagnosis to focus on process faults, since missing messages
or faulty functions lead to down-times and the resulting costs.
Process diagnosis diagnoses exactly these external components (such as
sensors and actuators) or sequences in the process of a plant or machine.
S7-PDIAG
The S7-PDIAG software package enables a uniform configuration of the process

diagnosis for the SIMATIC S7-300/400 controllers in the LAD, FBD and STL
programming languages.
You can already define signal monitoring routines including first-up signal
acquisition and criteria analysis and input the associated message texts while or
after creating the user program in the LAD, FBD or STL programming languages.
PDIAG automatically generates monitoring blocks which you must call in your
user program.
At every call, the fault conditions are checked and in case of an error, the relevant
process values are acquired and sent to the display device for the criteria
analysis.
For the configuration of the operator panel, S7-PDIAG stores the process
diagnosis data in a shared database. This data can then be accessed by the OP
configuration software WinCC flexible with the option package ProAgent and be
made available for display on the operator panel.
Page 31
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Testing User Programs with S7- PLCSIM

S7-PLCSIM: Simulation software
for offline testing of PLC programs
S7-PLCSIM - SimViewl
MCI Ell
Fie Edit View Insert ELC Elecute Tools Window Help
Aim
61
uCPU 300/400 ell

SF
sop P RUN-P
DC r RUN
RUN
STOP r STOP MRES I
o Functional program test

on a simulated CPU
with display/modify
I/O
o Testing of user blocks in
Pres Fl to get Help.
LAD, FBD, STL, S7-SCL,
in -in IIJ
11
[ EE
IPIB Q
'Bits
zi
76 54 3210
rrr r rrrr
PI8 0
=2
S7-GRAPH, S7-HiGraph, CFC

S7-PDIAG, WinCC
0
Advantages
o Faults can be detected early and eliminated
o Many tests are already possible in the office
without the final hardware
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
S7 - PLCSIM
18.09.2009
SERV1_01E.32

The SIMATIC S7-PLCSIM engineering tool (option package) emulates a complete

S7-CPU including addresses and I/O on a PG/PC.
S7-PLCSIM thus enables you to test a program offline on the PG/PC. All STEP 7
programming languages (STL, LAD, FBD, S7-Graph, S7-HiGraph, S7-SCL and
CFC) can be used.
S7-PLCSIM allows you to check the functionality of user programs on the PC/PG,
regardless of whether the final hardware is available or not.
Functionality
S7-PLCSIM offers the following functions for running a program on a simulated

PLC:
An icon in the SIMATIC Manager 's toolbar switches the Simulation on or off.
If the simulation is turned on, every new connection is automatically made to
the simulated PLC.
If the simulation is turned off, then every new connection is made to the
"
real" PLC.
Advantages
You can create view objects that allow you to access memory areas, accumulators and tabs of the simulated CPU. You can modify and display all the
data in these view objects.
You can change the CPU 's operating mode (STOP, RUN and RUN-P) just
as with a "real" CPU. The simulation also provides a "Pause" function that
allows you to halt the program execution without affecting the state of the
program.
With S7-PLCSIM, you can detect faults early in the development phase and
eliminate them. The quality of the user programs is greatly improved and the
commissioning costs are lowered.
Page 32
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Runtime Software for Closed-loop Control Engineering Tasks
Configuration
tool
Basic SW
or
option
package
PID Controller
No
Basic SW
Basic SW PID Control
Yes
Basic SW
Standard PID Control
Yes
Option
Modular PID Control
Yes
Option
Fuzzy Control
Yes
Option
Neuro Systems
Yes
Option
Closed-loop control m.
Yes
Overview
S7-200
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
S7-300
18.09.2009
SERV1_01E.33
C7

1
Closed-loop
In a closed-loop control system process variables are controlled in such a way
Control Engineering that they reach their new preset values as quickly as possible and that they
maintain these in spite of the effect of disturbances.
Basic Software
PID Control
The STEP 7 basic package already contains a series of function blocks for
solving simple control engineering tasks.
Standard
PID Control
This additional package contains blocks and a parameter assignment tool with
integrated control setting for standard tasks such as temperature controllers,
flow rate regulators, pressure regulators etc.
Modular
PID Control
Through the interconnection of supplied standard function blocks, you can

implement just about every closed-loop control engineering structure, even in
the upper performance range of process engineering.
The package contains 27 FBs and a commissioning tool.
Fuzzy Control
Fuzzy Systems are used when the mathematic description of a process is

difficult or even impossible, when a process behavior is not consistent, when
non-linearities occur, but, on the other hand, experience with the process
exists.
NeuroSystems
Neuronal Systems are used with those problems, whose structure and solution
are only partly known. NeuroSystems can be used in all automation levels,
from the individual closed-loop controller to the optimization of a plant.
Page 33
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
SIMATIC NET
18.09.2009
SERV1_01E.34
111
4T

SIMATIC NET is the name of an entire family of networks.

Industrial Ethernet according to IEEE 802.3 - the international standard for
the networking of areas and cells
PROFIBUS according to EN 50170 - the international standard for the field

area and the cell network with a limited number of nodes
AS-Interface - for communication with sensors and actuators.
Industrial Ethernet
The Industrial Ethernet network is a cell level network according to the international standard IEEE 802.3 (Ethernet) and is designed for industrial use.
Extensive open network solutions are possible. A high transmission rate is
guaranteed with various transmission media. Industrial Ethernet is an industry
standard, world-wide tested and accepted.
PROFINET
PROFINET as the standard for communication applications in the field level

enables the interfacing of distributed field devices through Industrial Ethernet with
the TCP/IP protocol.
PROFIBUS
PROFIBUS is the bus system for cell networks with a limited number of nodes. It
is based on the European standard EN 50170, Volume 2, PROFIBUS. Since the
requirements according to EN 50170 are fulfilled, PROFIBUS guarantees
openness for the connection of components from other manufacturers that
conform to standards. The PROFIBUS accessing procedure functions according
to the "Token Passing with subordinate Master-Slave" procedure. As a result, a
distinction is made between active and passive network participants.
AS - Interface
The AS-Interface is a networking system for binary sensors and actuators in the
field area. With AS-Interface, binary actuators and sensors become capable of
communication, for which a direct field bus connection was not technically
possible up until now or was not economical.
Page 34
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Operator Control and Process Monitoring with SIMATIC HMI

Process visualization
system
system
SIMATIC WinCC
SIMATIC WinCC flexible
SIMATIC Panels, PGs, PCs
SIMATIC PG, PC
oft
10
-41E00101616W,
,
,....: l E.,.
--- .
F;':tql: .,
1 mat
ing...aim s'
wiliomidAZ -Er&
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Overview
18.09.2009
SERV1_01E.35
41
For the SIMATIC S7, there is a field-proven HMI system for user-friendly process
control and monitoring available, the SIMATIC HMI. It ranges from the simple text
display to the process visualization system.
SIMATIC S7 and SIMATIC HMI are completely harmonized and integrated. This
simplifies the use of the human-machine interface system SIMATIC HMI
considerably.
SIMATIC S7 has already integrated HMI services. The HMI system

requests process data from the SIMATIC S7. Data transmission between
SIMATIC S7 and SIMATIC HMI is carried out by the two operating systems
and does not have to be taken into account in the user program.
SIMATIC HMI systems can be connected directly to PPI (S7-200) and
MPI or PROFIBUS (S7-300 and S7-400). Operation using PROFIBUS makes
process control and monitoring even over greater distances possible.
Numerous features from the uniform database and symbols up to the same
user-friendly Windows-oriented user interfaces simplify the use of HMI
systems.

Page 35
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Process Visualization and Operator Control with WinCC
/ Programming
Interfaces
/ Alarm Logging
(Message System)
/ Standard
Interfaces
Tag Logging
/ (Archiving)
/ Report Designer
(Report System)
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
/ PLC
Communication
18.09.2009
SERV1_01E.36
WinCC
SIMATIC WinCC (Windows Control Center) is the open process visualization

system from Siemens. It can be integrated problem free in a new or already
existing PLC system.
Function Modules
The heart of SIMATIC WinCC is an industry and technology independent basic

system with all the important functions for operator control and monitoring, such
as:
Basis of WinCC
Pixel graphic display
Measured value acquisition (archiving functions, data compression,

minimum and maximum values etc.)
Message display, archiving and reporting
Process communication to different PLC systems
Standard interlaces, for example, Microsoft programs
Documentation of machine and process sequences with individual reports.
WinCC is based on the 32-bit standard operating systems Windows 2000/XP

from Mircrosoft. This platform gives WinCC the following functionality:
Use of the Windows operating equipment (such as printer and driver)
Data exchange with other Windows applications via DDE, ODBC, SQL,
OLE, ActiveX and OPC.
API programming interlace
use of hardware available in the market
Page 36
ST-SERV1
1
SIEMENS
Process Automation with SIMATIC PCS 7

Engineering System
WA
Process terminal 1
Process terminal 2
WI
!Oi
l
Process terminal 3
_Pli
Terminal bus
ICWinCC OS-Server
Pi W
inCC OS
-----r
7=:1
17_- ..._
_ -:* .
System bus
S7-400as
central unit
41 4
ET 200M
~r
41
Field devices
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_01E.37
Introduction
SIMATIC PCS 7 represents the new control system generation in SIEMENS. It is

the consistent, further development and summary of experiences with systems
that are based on TELEPERM M, SIMATIC S7 and SIMATIC S5. As a result, it is
tailored to the process control system tasks in all industries.
Engineering
System
The Engineering System can be designed as its own station in the system. It
can however also be loaded as a software package in the OS components at the
same time.
The Engineering System has the following components:
STEP 7 with the SIMATIC Manager, the central database, and with HW
Config for configuring hardware and networks. It also contains the servers,
that facilitate consistent configuration between PLC and OS.
SCL (Structured Control Language) as PASCAL-similar higher level

programming language for block generation
CFC (Continuous Function Chart) for graphic configuration of the basic

automation functions
SFC (Sequential Function Chart) for graphic configuration of production

sequences
Expansion of the SIMATIC Manager with "Technological Hierarchy
WinCC (Windows Control Center) for OS configuration
DOCPRO for documenting configuration data

Import/Export wizard for bi-directional data exchange with other CAE
systems
These components are supplemented by libraries that provide pre-defined blocks

for PLC and OS.

Page 37
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
DRIVES Technology
Consistent drives spectrum for all applications

From standard drives with 100 W
up to large drives with 50 MW
Motion and vector control
Technology-specific closed-loop
controllers
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Overview
18.09.2009
SERV1_01E.38

You have the following drives spectrum:
Low voltage motors are the first High Performance AC for machine and
systems - the solution for the future: maintenance free, dynamic and
powerful.
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES frequency converters. They control the speed

of AC motors extremely exact. This series was designed for world-wide
use. It is suitable for all supply voltages from 230 to 690 volt and is certified
world-wide.
MICROMASTER and MICRO/MIDIMASTER Vector standard converters are

frequency converters in the 120 watt to 75 kW performance range. Because
of their compact form, they can be installed in the smallest space. The
sensorless vector control allows it to be used in the medium performance
range even for demanding applications.
COMBIMASTER are compact units consisting of three-phase low voltage
motors and frequency converters.
MICROMASTER Integrated are frequency converters (IP 65) that are applied
directly to three-phase low voltage motors of different manufacturers.
MICRO/MIDIMASTER Eco are frequency converters specially designed for
the requirements of the heating, ventilation and air conditioning industry.
SIMOREG converter equipment are fully digital compact units for threephase operation and are used for armature and field supply of variable speed
DC drives. The range of rated direct current of the devices is from 15 to
2000 A and can be increased by parallel connection of SIMOREG devices.
The most familiar applications include hoisting gear, ski lifts, elevators,
cranes, and other reversing drives.
Page 38
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
The SINAMICS Family

Frequency Converter for Standard Applications
SINAMICS G150
SINAMICS G120
SINAMICS G110
(single drive)
(single drive)
(single drive)
Frequency Converter for Motion-Contol Applications
SINAMICS S120
SINAMICS S120
SINAMICS S120
Cabinet Module
Chassis
Block size
(single drive)
Book size
(modular)
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_01E.39

Standard
Applications
Drives with limited to medium demands on the control dynamics and

functionality. Energy feedback into the network is not required as a rule
(such as, pumps, fans, compressors, conveyor technology, door drives,
mixers, kneaders, mills).
Motion Control
Applications
Drives with high demands on the control dynamics and functionality.

Energy feedback into the network is possible (for example, single drives
such as elevators, extruders, conveyor technology, multimotor systems
with modular design such as paper machines, rolling mill lines, plastic film
machines, synthetic fiber systems, crane systems, packaging machines,
printing machines, handling (robots), machine tools)
Benefits
The new drives family offers a handling as uniform as possible of planning,

commissioning and parameter assignment.
This is made possible through:
Other Versions
SIZER Configuration and Calculation Software

STARTER Commissioning Software
Uniform parameter structure
Uniform hardware design
In addition to the display above of the most important family members,

there is:
- SINAMICS G120D for decentralized configuration outside of the cabinet
- Frequency converters in the design of the SIMATIC ET200S and
ET200pro
- SINAMICS G130, the G150 without cabinet for the individual installation
- SINAMICS S150, the feedback-capable version of the G150
- SINAMICS medium voltage drives (> 1000V) for large power ratings.
Page 39
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_02E.1
ihr

Page
Contents
...... 2
Training Area Setup with S7 - 300
...... 3
Configuration of the S7 - 300 Training Unit
The Simulator
...... 4
The Conveyor Model ...................................................................................................................... 5
6
Complete Symbol List
If You Want to Know More .............................................................................................................. 8
...... 9
Training Area Setup with S7- 400
Configuration of the S7-400 Training Unit ....................................................................................... 10
Page 1
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
S7 - 300 Training Area
18.09.2009
SERV102E.2

The training area consists of the following components:

An S7-300 programmable logic controller with the CPU 315-2 DP
Digital input and output modules, analog module
Simulator with digital and analog sections
Conveyor model
ET 200S distributed peripheral
MM420 Micromaster with PROFIBUS module
TP170B Touchpanel
Programming device or PC
Page 2
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Configuration of the S7 - 300 Training Unit
Module
-->
Slot No.
-->
PS
CPU
DI 32
DO 32
D18/D08
Al 2
304
I/O Address -->
A
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Configuration
Slot 5:
Slot 6:
Slot 7:

The programmable controller is configured with the following modules:

Slot 1:
Slot 2:
Slot 4:
Addresses
18.09.2009
SERV1_02E.3
Power Supply 24V/5A

CPU 315-2 DP
Digital input 32x24V
Inputs from the simulator

and thumbwheel buttons
Digital output 32x24V/0.5A Outputs from the simulator
and digital display
Conveyor model
Digital input and output
module 8X24V/ 8x24V 0.5A
Analog section from the simulator
Analog input 2 Al
You can set the starting addresses of the modules by parameter assignment
(freely).
Page 3
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
The Simulator
Potentiometers for
setting the
analog values
"
PIW_All " (PIW 304)
BCD Digital Display

QW_DigDisp" (QW 6)
"
.0
1
.2
.3
4
.5
.6
.7
.1
.3
.5
.6
.7
DI
DO
ND
ND
ND
ND
ND
.0
.1
.2
.3
No
ND
.5
.6
.7
)9
.0
'
ND
19
ND
\,
Ng
\D
2
.3
A
.6
.7
11111111
/ 1
.
7
1
I /
/
I I
s
s.
AIMMIIIMIEL
:7
-15V...*15V
All
AI2 0.01A02
-15V...+15V
Ill
All
= mi im
o o
0 8 1 5
mt
OV
All
Imi = NE
Al2
Al2
o o
A01
A02
LEDs Thumbwheel Buttons

Switches
/ Momentary Contact Switches (QW 4) "IW_Thumbw" (IW 2)
(IW 0)
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Design
Addressing

18.09.2009
SERV1_02E.4
Two cables connect the simulator to the S7-300 or S7-400 training unit. The
simulator is divided into the following three sections:
Binary section with 16 switches / momentary contact switches and 16 LEDs
Digital section with 4 thumbwheel buttons and a digital display. The

thumbwheel and digital (BCD) display use BCD values,
Analog section with two potentiometers for specifying or simulating analog

input signals and a voltmeter that selectable per switch displays the
voltage output set on the potentiometers or from the two output channels of
the analog output module (as far as it exists).
You use the following addresses to address the inputs and outputs in your user
program:
Sensor / Actuator (D132, D032)
Switch / Mom.Con
IW 0
LEDs
QW 4
Thumb. buttons
IW 2
Digital display
QW 6
Analog channels
PIW 304/306
Page 4
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
The Conveyor Model

Ell
"BAY1" "BAY2" "BAY3" "LB"

(I 8.0)
(I 8.7)
(I 8.6)
(I 8.5)
"K_Conv_RIGHT" (Q 8.5)
"K_Conv_LEFT" (Q 8.6)
.Z.
"Horn"
......... (Q 8.7)
I I
1t
I
1
I
"T Bay2" I "T_Bay3" I "T_Bay-LB"
/' "TBay1"
l
(I 8.4)
i
(I 8.3)
;
(I 8.2) :
(I 8.1)
"L_Bay-LB"
"L_Bay3"
"L_Bay2"
"L_Bay1"
(Q 8.4)
(Q 8.3)
(Q 8.2)
(Q 8.1)
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Design
18.09.2009
SERV1_02E.5

W. Automation and Industrial Solutions
The slide above shows the conveyor model with its sensors and actuators as
well as the assigned I/O addresses.

Page 5
ST-SERV1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
Symbol
C_Conv_Fault
C_Parts
DB_Instance_F620_Fault2
DB_Instance_F620_Fault3
DB_Parts
FB_FaultEvaluation
FC_Signal
FC_Mode
FC_ConvMotor
FC_Fault
FC_Count
FC_Count Add
FC_FaultEvaluation
FC_MM420
T_System_ON
T_System_OFF
T_Jog_RIGHT
T_Jog_LEFT
S_M/A_ModeSelect
T_M/A_Accept
T_Ackn_Fault
S_Fault1
S_Fault2
S_Fault3
LB
T_Bay1
T_Bay2
T_Bay3
T_Bay-LB
BAY1
BAY2
BAY3
IW_Thumbw
IVV_State_MM420
IVV_Act_MM420
M_Flash_2Hz
M_Flash_1Hz
M_Aux_System_ON
M_Aux_Man_ON
M_Aux_Auto_ON
M_Aux_C17
M_Aux_LB
M_Jog_RIGHT
M_Auto_RIGHT
M_Conv_Fault
M_Faultl
M_Aux_Fault1
M_Fault2
M_Aux_Fault2
M_Aux_Auto
M Aux_Count
M System_ON_HMI
M_System_OFF_HMI
M_Conv Jog_RIGHT_HMI
SITRAIN
Training for
Address /
C
17
C
18
DB
2
DB
3
DB 19
FB 20
FC 14
FC 15
FC 16
FC 17
FC 18
FC 19
FC 20
FC 42
I
0.0
I
0.1
I
0.2
I
0.3
I
0.4
I
0.5
I
1.0
I
1.1
I
1.2
I
1.3
I
8.0
I
8.1
I
8.2
I
8.3
I
8.4
I
8.5
I
8.6
I
8.7
WV
2
WV 42
NV 44
M 10.3
M 10.5
M 15.1
M 15.2
M 15.3
M 15.7
M 16.0
M 16.2
M 16.4
M 17.0
M 17.1
M 17.2
M 17.3
M 17.4
M 18.0
M 19.0
M
30.0
30.1
M
30.2
M
Data type
COUNTER
COUNTER
FB 20
FB 20
DB 19
FB 20
FC 14
FC 15
FC 16
FC 17
FC 18
FC 19
FC 20
FC 42
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
WORD
WORD
INT
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
Comment
Counter Conveyor faults
Counter transported parts
Instance DB for FB20, Evaluation of Fault 2
Instance DB for F620, Evaluation of Fault 3
DB with parts data
FB for evaluating faults
FC Indicator lights + Horn
FC Set operating modes
FC Control of conveyor motor
FC Fault evaluation
FC Count parts
FC Count parts using addition
FC for evaluating faults
FC Control MM420
Momentary contact System ON
Momentary contact System OFF (NC contact)
Jog conveyor RIGHT, momentary contact
Jog conveyor LEFT, momentary contact
Switch - Operating Mode Preselect: '0'=MAN, I '=AUTO
Momentary contact, confirm operating mode
Momentary contact Fault acknowledgement
Simulate Fault 1, 0=OFF/1 =ON
Light barrier
Momentary contact Bay 1
Momentary contact Light barrier bay
Proximity sensor Bay 1
BCD thumbwheel
State word of MM420
Actual speed of MM420
Memory bit - flashing frequency 2 Hz
Memory bit - flashing frequency 1Hz
Edge auxiliary memory bit System ON
Edge auxiliary memory bit Manual mode ON
Edge auxiliary memory bit Auto mode ON
Edge auxiliary memory bit Counter-Conveyor faults
Edge auxiliary memory bit Light barrier
Memory bit Jog conveyor RIGHT
Memory bit Conveyor AUTO RIGHT
Memory bit Conveyor fault
Memory bit for storing Fault 1
Edge auxiliary memory bit Fault 1
Auxiliary memory bit Edge AUTO on
Memory bit System ON (HMI)
Memory bit System OFF (HMI)
Memory bit Jog Conveyor RIGHT (HMI)
Page 6
ST-SERV1
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
Symbol
M_Conv_Jog_LEFT_HMI
11/1_M/A_ModeSelect_HMI
IA M/A Accept_HMI
hil Ackn_Fault HMI
M_Bays_occup_HMI
kil Conv_Fault_HMI
114 MM420_0n_HMI
M MM420_Jog_RIGHT HhAl
M MM420_Jog_LEFT HMI
M SlaveFailure
MB SlaveAddress
MW ACT
MW SETP
OB Cycle
OB_SlaveFailure
OB VVarmRestart
L SYSTEM
L_MAN
L_AUTO
L Restart man
L Restart aut
L Cony Fault
L_Fault1
L_Fault2
L_Fault3
L Bay1
L_Bay2
L_Bay3
L_Bay-LB
K_Conv_RIGHT
K_Conv_LEFT
Horn
QW_DigDisp
QW Control MM420
QW Setp_MM420
OD_Conv_Monitoring
VAT 1/0-Conveyor
VAT_Numberformats

Address /
30.3
M
M
30.4
M
30.5
M
31 .0
M
33.0
M
33.1
M
40.0
M
40.2
M
40.3
M
86.0
MB 87
MW 20
MW 22
OB
1
OB 86
OB 100
Q
4.1
Q
4.2
Q
4.3
Q
4.5
Q
4.6
Q
5.0
Q
5.1
Q
5.2
Q
5.3
Q
8.1
Q
8.2
Q
8.3
Q
8.4
Q
8.5
Q
8.6
Q
8.7
QW
6
QW 42
QW 44
T
17
VAT 1
VAT 2
Data type
' BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BYTE
INT
INT
OB
1
OB 86
OB 100
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
WORD
WORD
INT
TIMER
Comment
Memory bit Jog Conveyor LEFT (HMI)
Memory bit Operating Mode Preselect: '0'=MANUAL, '1'...
Memory bit, confirm operating mode (HMI)
Memory bit, acknowledge conveyor fault (HMI)
all Bays 1 to 3 occupied
Switch On Memory bit MM420 (HMI)
Memory bit MM420 Jog RIGHT (HMI)
Memory bit MM420 Jog LEFT (HMI)
Memory bit DP Slave has failed
DP address of failed slave
Memory word, ACTUAL quantity of transported parts
Memory word, SETPOINT quantity of parts to be transp.
OB for cyclic program
Error OB for slave failure
Warm restart OB
Indicator light System ON
Indicator light MAN mode
Indicator light Automatic mode
Indicator light for manual warm restart
Indicator light for automatic warm restart
Indicator light Conveyor fault
Indicator light Fault 1
Indicator light Bay 1
Indicator light Light barrier bay
Run conveyor RIGHT
Run conveyor LEFT
Horn
BCD digital display
Control word for MM420
Setpoint speed for MM420
Timer, Conveyor monitoring in Auto mode
Page 7
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Note
18.09.2009
SERV1_02E.8
RIP Automation and Industrial Solutions
complete a topic.
Page 8
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Contents of the
Training Area
18.09.2009
SERV1_02E.9

Mr Automation and Industrial Solutions
The training area consists of the following components:

An S7-400 programmable logic controller with a CPU 412 or CPU 413-2 DP
Digital input and output modules, analog module
Simulator with digital and analog section
Conveyor model
ET 200S distributed peripheral
MM420 Micromaster with PROFIBUS module
TP170B Touchpanel
Programming device or PC

Page 9
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Configuration of the S7-400 Training Unit
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_02E.10
S iTRAlN Traini
Automation and lnTufsotinal Solutions
Design
You can see the design of the S7-400 training unit in the slide above.
Configuration
The UR 1 rack is configured with the following modules:

Slot 1:
Slot 2:
Slot 3:
Slot 4:
Slot 5:
Slot 6:
Slot 7:
Slot 8:
Slot 9:
Slot 10:
Slot 11:
Slot 12:
Slot 13:
Slot 14:
Slot 15:
Slot 16:
Slot 17:
Slot 18:
Addressing
Power Supply 24V and 5V/20A

CPU 412 or other
vacant (when the CPU only has a single width)
vacant
vacant
(from simulator)
(from conveyor model)
Digital output 32x24V 0.5A
(to simulator)
Digital output 32x24V 0.5A
(to conveyor model)
Analog input 8x13 Bit
(from potentiometer on simulator)
vacant
vacant
vacant
vacant
vacant
vacant
As long as no configuration or parameter settings have been made, the system

works with default addresses.
Page 10
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Installation / Maintenance of the

SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_03E.1

Page
Contents
Objectives ........................................................................................................................................ 2
Components for Configuring an S7-300
...... 3
Mounting Positions for an S7-300 Configuration
...... 4
Expansion Capabilities for an S7-300
...... 5
Installation Rules
...... 6
...... 7
Installation Aids
8
Installation Checklist
9
Installing the Rail (Part 1)
.... 10
Checklist for Electrical Configuration .............................................................................................. 11
Wiring the Front Connector ............................................................................................................. 12
13
Preparing for Operation
Changing the Backup Battery in the S7-300 ................................................................................... 14
Exchanging Signal Modules in the S7-300 ......................................................................................... 15
Changing the Fuse in Digital Output Modules of the S7-300 .......................................................... 16
Using the Electronic Manuals
17
Exercise 1: Using the S7-300 Manuals
18
Exercise 2: Wiring the Signal Modules
19
Installation/Maintenance of the S7-400 Programmable Logic Controller ......................................... 20ff
Page 1
ST-SERV1
Installation and Maintenance of a PLC
SIEMENS
Objectives
Upon completion of this chapter the participant will ...
be familiar with the basic components for configuring a SIMATIC
S7-300/400
understand the function of these basic components
know the installation and expansion possibilities of an S7-300/400
know the installation aids for a PLC
be able to use the electronic S7 manuals
be able to wire digital input and output modules
be able to change a backup battery
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_03E.2
Page 2

ST-SERV1
SIEMENS

Component
Function
Rail
... is the rack for an S7-300
Power Supply
(PS)
... converts the supply voltage (120/230 V) to 24 VDC operation

voltage to supply the S7-300
Central Processing Unit

(CPU)
... executes the user program

accessories: memory module, backup battery
Interface Modules
(IM)
... connect the bus between the racks (tiers)
Signal Modules (SM)

(Digital/Analog)
... adapt various process levels to the S7-300.

accessories: bus connector, front connector
make functions available, such as for positioning,

... closed-loop control
Communication
Processors (CP)
... for communications between programmable logic controllers.

accessories: cable, software, interface modules
SIMATIC S7
Date
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_03E.3

IC
Rail
You snap the power supply, CPU, IM, and up to eight signal modules onto the rail.
Power Supply
The power supply is available in 2A, 5A, and 10A output current at 24V. The
output voltage is isolated, short-circuit proof and stable at no load. An LED lights
up for error-free operation. The LED flashes when there is an output voltage
overload.
You use a selection switch to change the primary voltage between 120V and 230V.
Central Processing
The CPU has the following elements on its front side:

Status and error LEDs,
Operating mode selector, removable key with four switch settings,
Connection for 24V supply voltage,
Multipoint interface, MPI, for the programming device or connecting to
an additional programmable logic controller,
Battery compartment, (not on Compact_CPUs and CPUs after October, 2002)
Compartment for a memory module (not on the CPU 31X IFM).
Unit (CPU)
Interface Modules
Interface modules make it possible to have a multi-tier configuration.
Signal Modules
These modules are selected according to their voltage range or output voltage. A
bus connector is included with each module, which together make up the
backplane bus. The process signals are connected to a plug-on front connector.
Interconnecting
Cables
You need a PG/PC cable to connect a programming device directly.

PROFIBUS cables and cable connectors are also needed to network several
programmable logic controllers.
CP
A communication processor for the PROFIBUS, Industrial Ethernet, and other bus
systems.
Page 3
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Mounting Positions for an S7-300 Configuration
1.01:133
1111111111111111111
1111111111111111111
1111111111111111111
1111111111111111111
1111111111111111111
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.092009
SERV1_03E.4
V Automation and Industrial Solutions
Mounting Position
The slide above shows the possible horizontal or vertical mounting positions.
Temperature
Depending on the mounting position, you can have the following ambient
temperatures for operating the programmable logic controller:
0-60C for a horizontal configuration

0-40C for a vertical configuration.

Page 4
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Expansion Capabilities of an S7-300
SIMATIC S7
Date.
Ale:

18.09.2009
SERV1_03E.5
Maximum Expansion The slide above shows the maximum expansion for an S7-300/CPU314/315.
The total expansion permits up to 32 modules, with up to eight modules per rack
(tier). There are no slot rules for signal modules, function modules, and
communications processors. That is, they can be used on any slot.
Interface
Module (IM)
Interface modules (IM 360/361) are used to loop the bus between the racks.
The IMS interface represents the sender, and the IMR interface represents the
receiver. The interface modules must be used in their specified slots.
If needed, an additional power supply can be provided in the expansion rack.
There is the hard-wired IM 365 interface module as an economical variation for
the two-tier configuration. (No additional power supply is needed; no CP can be
connected).
Local Segment
Certain function modules, such as the FM NC, can have their own I/O assigned
to them. This provides an FM module with its own I/O area, which can be
accessed very quickly. This I/O area is referred to as a local segment.
One local segment can be configured per rack. During running operation, the
CPU can no longer access this I/O.
Slot Number
Slots 1 to 3
Slot 1: PS
Slot 2: CPU
Slot 3: IM
Slots 4 to 11
SM, FM, CP
Distance
The following cable lengths are available between the tiers:

Two-tier configuration with IM 365: maximum 1m
Multi-tier configuration with IM 360/361: maximum 10m
(= permanent assignment):
(power supply), if present
(central processing unit), if present
(interface module), if present
(free assignment):
can be plugged in any slot
Page 5
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Installation Rules
For a horizontal configuration, the CPU and power supply must be

arranged on the left. For a vertical configuration, the CPU and power
supply must be arranged at the bottom
The following minimum clearances must be maintained:
o 20 mm to the right and left of the rack
o 40 mm above and below for a single-tier configuration and at least
80 mm between two racks
The interface module always occupies the space next to the CPU
There may be a maximum of eight I/O modules (signal modules,
function modules, communication processors) inserted in a rack
A multi-tier configuration is possible for the CPU 314/315/316/317/318
and 319
Please ensure that there is a low resistance connection, such as
through contact washers, between the rail and the substructure.
C)
.1
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Rules
18.09.2009
SERV1_03E.6

The most important rules for the mechanical configuration are listed in the slide
above.
(Refer to the "SIMATIC S7-300 Programmable Controller, Hardware and

Installation" manual).
Page 6
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV103E.7

Manuals
For installation, you need the following manuals:

"S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation"
"S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications"
"S7-300 Automation System, CPU Specifications: CPU 31XC and CPU 31X"
These manuals are also available electronically.
Parts List
This list specifies the modules of the PLC and where they are configured. The
system designer must create this list.
Checklist
Displays the procedure for installation. A suggestion for the sequence is

presented on the next page.
Page 7
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Are all the components available ? (see parts list)

Install the rail !
Install the power supply !
Snap a bus connector onto the CPU and install the module !
Snap a bus connector onto each of the I/O modules and install
the modules !
Plug on the front connectors and insert the labeling strips and
the slot number !
Wire the modules (power supply, CPU and I/O modules)
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Checklist
18.09.2009
SERV1_03E.8

The checklist provides only the sequence for the individual activities. The
following pages and the manuals contain the exact procedure.
Page 8
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Use M6 screws to screw the rail to the substructure!
Connect the protective ground conductor to the

rail (protective ground screw) .
Note: Minimum cross section of the cable = 10mm2.
Approx. AWG 7.5.
Protective Ground Connection
57.2mml
9
466 mm
500 mm
800 mm
482 mm
530 mm
830 mm
A
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Mounting Holes
41 A
SulT
Nn Training
ni g
toR
mA
atilo
in f or
ndustrial Solutions
18.09.2009
SERV1_03E.9
The measurement specifications for the mounting holes are indicated in the
following table.
L1(mm)
32.5
32.5
32.5
Rail Length (mm)

482.6mm
530 mm
830 mm
Lt
L2(mm)
57.2
57.2
57.2
L3(mm)
466
500
800
-CO
L2
L3
Screws
You can select from the following screw types to secure the rail:
M6 machine screw according to ISO 1207/ISO 1580 (DIN 84/DIN 85)

M6 hexagon head cap screw according to ISO 4017 (DIN 4017).
The screw length depends on the substructure.

You also need 6.4mm washers according to ISO 7092 (DIN 433)

Page 9
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Bus Connector
18.09.2009
SERV1_03E.10

A bus connector is included with every module. You snap the bus connector
onto the module before you install it.
Note: Begin with the CPU. No bus connector is snapped onto the last module.
Modules
Hook the modules on the top of the rail in succession. Module sequence:
Power supply
CPU
Modules.
You then swing down the modules and secure them with the hold-down screw.
Front Connector
A front connector is then plugged onto the signal modules to connect the
process signals. A mechanical coding between the module and front connector
is provided to avoid interchanging the front connectors at a later time.
Slot Number
Labeling strips for the slot number are included with the CPU. You can use
these strips to label the module's slot location. The slot number is needed later
to configure and assign parameters to the module.
Page 10
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Checklist for Electrical Configuration
1. Are analog signals or bus signals

used?
2. Do cables with > 60V exist?
3 Are inductances switched by additional

3.
contacts in the output circuit or
independently of the programmable
logic controller?
4. Will cables be laid outside of buildings?
A
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_03E.11
Point 1
Shielded cables must be used for analog signals or bus signals (PROFIBUS).
Point 2
When cables are laid with signals > 60 V, you must lay the cables in separate
bundles or cable ducts. For signals >400V, you must lay the cables outside of
cabinets with a minimum clearance of 10cm.
Point 3
You must connect inductances to an overvoltage protective device.

You connect D.C.-controlled coils with diodes or Zener diodes. You connect
A.C.-controlled coils with varistors or RC elements.
Point 4
Special lightning protective measures are required here, such as laying cables
in metal conduits grounded on both sides.

Page 11
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Wiring the Front Connector

,..
INV
Open the front door of the signal modules !

o Bring the front connector into wiring position !
Thread the strain reliever in the front connector !
o Strip the insulation from the wires (6 mm length) !
o Connect the wires !

a Tighten the strain relief for the cable loom !
a Position the front connector in the operating position !
o Close the front door !
Fill out the labeling strip and insert it in the front door !

a Attach the slot number to the front door !
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_03E.12

Cables
Use flexible cables with a cross section of 0.25 to 1.5 mm2.

Core end sleeves are not required. If you want to use them, then use only ones
without an insulating collar according to DIN 46228 Form A.
Wiring Position
Press the reset button on the top side of the module and drag the front
connector to the front until it latches. The front connector has no connection to
the module in this position. Wiring is also made easier, because you can more
readily access the terminals.
Connection
Assignment
Refer to the section about signal modules in the instruction manual.

As a rule, M is connected to terminal 20, and L+ is connected to terminal 2 or 1.
Optical Isolation
The digital input modules and output modules are optically isolated. Either eight
or 16 inputs or outputs have a common ground or return (M connection).
Cable Length
A cable length of up to 600 m is permitted with unshielded cables (exception:

analog modules). The maximum cable length is 1000 m for shielded cables.
Laying Cables
To implement a correct EMC configuration, use the notes in the section on

configuring the electrical structure for an S7-300 in the instruction manual.
Separate bundles or cable ducts are required when signal cables and heavy
current cables (>60 V) are laid together.
Tool
You will require a screwdriver with a 3.5 mm blade width.
Page 12
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Insert the key in the mode selector on the CPU (for

CPUs until Oct. 2002)!
Install the backup battery (for CPUs until Oct. 2002)!
o
If the user program is not installed in a non-volatile

memory module
If larger memory areas must remain retentive
during a power failure
For CPUs until Oct. 2002 insert the memory module

if required !
o
o
So that the user program and the data are retained during
Power OFF and without a backup battery
To have a larger "load memory" available.
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.092009
SERV1_03E.13
Keyswitch
The keyswitch is used to select the operating mode (STOP, RUN, and memory
reset). This keyswitch also provides protection for the user program. If the
switch is removed in the RUN position, it is possible to read out the user
program, but it is not possible to make changes.
Backup Battery
Open the front door of the CPU.

Insert the battery connector, with the notch on the left side, into the receptacle in
the battery compartment.
Push the backup battery into the battery compartment.
Close the front door of the CPU.
Memory Module
Before you insert the memory module, you must switch the CPU to the STOP
state, or you must switch off the supply voltage.
CPU Memory Reset
A CPU memory reset must be done:

during the initial startup
before a new and complete user program is downloaded
if the CPU requests a memory reset (the STOP LED flashes).
Using the keyswitch to perform a memory reset (points 1 to 4)
1.
Turn the power supply on.
2. Turn the keyswitch to the STOP position.

3. Turn the keyswitch to the MRES (Memory Reset) position and hold this
position until the STOP LED flashes twice slowly (about 3 seconds).
4. Turn the keyswitch back to STOP and then within one second turn it back to
MRES. The STOP LED flashes rapidly to indicate that the memory reset is
being done.
Note:
You can also use a PG/PC to perform a memory reset.
Page 13
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Changing the Backup Battery in the S7-300
Battery only exists in CPUs that were delivered until Oct. 2002
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:

18.09.2009
SERV1_03E.14
Procedure for the

S7-300TM
1. Open the front door of the CPU

2. Use a screwdriver to pull the backup battery out of the battery compartment
3. Insert the battery connector, with the notch on the left side, into the
receptacle and push the battery into the battery compartment
4. Close the front door of the CPU.
Change Frequency
You should change the battery after one year.
Notes
Only CPU's that were delivered until Oct. 2002 have a backup battery.
Change the backup battery during POWER ON only, otherwise the data in the
user memory will be lost.
Page 14
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Exchanging Signal Modules in the S7-300
u Switch the CPU to Stop !

u Switch the load voltage off !
O Open the front door !
O Release the front connector and take it out !
u Loosen the hold-down screw on the module !

u Swing the module up and off the rack !
o Remove the upper portion of the front connector coding key on
the new modules !
0 Insert the new module and screw it down tightly !
O Connect the front connector and bring it into operating

position!
Li Close the front door !
u Switch the load voltage on again !
o Perform a complete restart on the CPU !
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Warning
18.09.2009
SERV1_03E.15
11SITRAIN Training for
You are not to exchange modules while there is data traffic via the MPI. If the
CPU is not in the STOP mode, there could still be data traffic on the
communication bus (MPI). This situation would lead to a system fault. If you are
not certain, pull out the connector to the CPU's MPI interface.
Tool
You will require a screwdriver with a 3.5 mm blade width.
Page 15
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Changing the Fuse in Digital Output Modules of the S7-300
,.n..k
0 Switch the CPU to Stop !

0 Switch the load voltage off !
o Remove the front connector !

o Loosen the hold-down screw on the module !
o Swing the module out !
D Screw the fuse support out of the module !
0 Change the fuse !
CI Screw the fuse support down tightly again !

0 Install the module !
0 Insert the front connector !
o Switch the load voltage on again !
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File
Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved .
Which Modules
Automation and lndustnal Solutions
The following digital output modules have fuses:
Fuses
111 SITRAIN Trammg for
18.09.2009
SERV1_03E.16
SM 322, 16 x AC120V
SM 322, 8 x AC 120/230V
You can use the following fuses of the 8A/250V type:
Wickmann
Schurter
Littlefuse
19 194-8A
SP001.013
217.008

SITRAIN
Training for
Page 16
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Using the Electronic Manuals
FIR ilm
ffj Acrobat Reader - [S7,300_1H8x_e.pdf]. .
.._
.ilu
p 2ci
ri fie Edit Qocurnent View Window Help

'6
a 51A oli -, MI II I H 1! + + 1101l00%
."
D Back to home
1
.5
1] Se j
I1
0.- Bookmark ..
a5
- 1 D NI Is EI 1 7:
.i
1 1-' -
D Title
Find What:
EMI
El
D 1 Preface
D 2 Guide to the S7-330 documentati
D3 Installation Order
D 4 S7-300 modules
5 Configuring
7,k'
f+-[216 Installation
- ,E 0 7 Wiring
r Match Case
r Find Backwards
5
---
.2_1
Manual Collection
Cancel
IllI
I Ignore Asian Character Width
Fl
Config uring
Summary of the Content
Bast Principles of Planning
Component dimensions ..
Arranging modules on a single rack
Arranging modules on mukiple racks
5.6
Selection and installation of cabinets.
Example: Selecting a cabinet.
5.7
Elm tical assembly, protective rileOW= Mid gl.ding.
5.5
Grounding concept and overall structure.
5.8.1
Installing an S7-300 web grounded reference potential
5.8.2
histalling an S7-300 with ungrounded reference potential
5.8.3
(not CPU 312 IFM or CPU 314)....
bolded or non-lsolated modules?
5.8.4
5.8.5
Grounding.
5.8.6
Overview. Grounding
5.9
Selecting the load powersupply unit .
5.10
Planning subnets
,
, . .
1
1
e H 8,5 x 11 in 0 : 1=1 IN
5.1
52
5.3
5.4
5.5
i.' -C1 Index
El. Manuals
Find A gain
flattery
1"" Match Whole Word Only
.=--D 8 Addressing
l-E-.0 9 Commissionin g
,--D 10 Maintenance
,--D 11 Testing functions, Dia gnostics a
+= --012 Appendix
D13 Glossary
1.
II
3 of 256
Date:
File:
SIMATIC S7
Siemens AG 2008. An rights reserved.
CI
Find
18.09.2009
SERV1_03E.17
. 5-

When you install the STEP 7 software, you can also install the electronic
manuals for STEP 7.
You will need the Acrobat Reader software to read the manuals. It can also be
found on the STEP 7 CD.
The menu options Simatic - Documentation - English take you to a list of
existing manuals.
SIMATIC manuals (Automation Systems, SW, HMI, Networks) can be
ordered as a CD collection.
All
Download
You can download the most recent electronic SIMATIC manuals free of charge
from the Internet. Visit the Product Support Homepage
(www.siemens.de/Simatic).
Search
To quickly find information, use either the detailed table of contents. You can
directly open the pages marked in green with a mouse click.
Or, alternatively, you can use the Search function to search for a term, such as,
"Battery". As a result, all locations where the term can be found are displayed.
Again, you can jump directly to the locations that are marked in green.
Page 17
ST-SERV1
Chapter 3 Exercisel: Using the S7-300 Manuals

1. How many racks with how many modules each can be installed in the
S7-300?
max. ............. racks with ............. modules each
2. The PS 307 power supply module, 6ES7 307-1EA00-0AA0 (5A output) is
designed for an input voltage of .................. VAC or ......................VAC
3. An S7-300 and its various modules rated at 24 VDC have a voltage
Tolerance Range of .................... VDC to ................... VDC
4. How many digital inputs and outputs can the CPU 314 address and how
large is the process-image input table (PII) and the process-image output
table (PIQ)?
Process-image input table: ........... bytes = .............. digital inputs
Process-image output table: .......... bytes = .............. digital outputs
5. At which voltage levels does the digital input module SM321; D132/24V
deliver
signal state '0' . ............... V to ........... V
signal state 1 '. ......... V to ........... V
6. What is the maximum output current that the digital output module SM322;
D032; DC24V/0.5A delivers at
signal state '0' . ............... mA (residual current)
signal state '1' ......... A
7. What is the maximum operating frequency of this output module ?
for resistive load:
......Hz
for inductive load:
...... Hz
8. Is the output module short-circuit proof?
Page 18
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Exercise 2: Wiring the Signal Modules
M.C.Sw 2
M.C.Sw 1
Power supply
LED
L-
L+
1720
13
16
DI/
DO
323
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Task
18.09.2009
SERV1_03E.19
The following sensors and actuators are to be connected to the digital input and
output module 6ES7 323-1BEIxx-OAA0 at Slot 6 :
momentary-contact switch 1 at input I 8.0
LED at output Q 8.0
momentary-contact switch 2 at input I 8.5
What to Do
In the picture complete the necessary wiring. Also consider the power supply of
the sensors, actuators and the module.
Note
Use the manual for the terminal assignment or use the wiring diagram on the
inside of the digital module's front door.
Page 19
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Installation / Maintenance of the S7-400

SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_038.20
g SITRAIN Training for

la
Contents
Page
Components for Configuring an S7-400 ............................................................................................

Racks and Connection Possibilities
Installation Rules
Installing Racks
Installing Modules
Wiring the Power Supply
Wiring the Front Connector ..............................................................................................................
Preparing for Operation .....................................................................................................................
Changing the Backup Battery ..........................................................................................................
Exchanging Signal Modules in the S7-400 .......................................................................................
Page 20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS

Component
Function
Rack
for receiving and establishing an electrical

connection to the modules
Power Supply
(PS)
converts the supply voltage to 5 VDC and 24 VDC

to supply the modules
Central Processing Unit

(CPU)
executes the user program

accessories: Memory Card
Signal Modules (SM)

(Digital/Analog)
adapt various process signals to the S7-400

accessories: front connector
Interface Modules
(IM)
connect the racks with one another

accessories: connector cables, terminators
make functions available, such as for positioning and

closed-loop control
Communication
Processors (CP)
for communications between programmable logic controllers

accessories: cable, software, interface modules
SIMATIC S7
Date:
18.09.2009
SERV1_03E.21

6
46
,,
Introduction
You need the components specified in the slide above to configure an S7-400.
Accessories
The specified accessories must be ordered separately. Refer to the ST 70

catalog.

Page 21
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Racks and Connection Possibilities

Usable as
Type of Rack
UR1 / UR2
(Universal Rack)
Central
rack
i Expansion
: rack
1
P Bus
Yes
Yes
K Bus
CR2
(Central Rack)
P Bus, Segment 1
P Bus, Segment 2
Yes
No
K Bus
ER1 / ER2
(Expansion Rack)
P Bus
Yes
No
/1
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_03E.22
VIZ

UR1/UR2
Racks that can be used as central and as expansion racks. The UR1 rack has
18 slots and the UR2 has 9 slots for S7-400 modules.
CR2/CR3
Rack used as a central rack. The I/O bus (Peripheral bus) is divided into two
segments with 10 and 8 slots. The communication bus is continuous.
The CR3 rack with only four slots is designed for distributed automation
solutions.
ER1/ER2
Racks used as expansion racks. ER1 has 18 slots and ER2 has 9 slots. The I/O
bus has the following restrictions:
Connecting CR/ER
no interrupt processing
no 24V supply for the modules
no backup of the modules.
You need interface modules (IM) to connect expansion racks (ER) to the central
rack (CR). You can insert one or more send IMs in the central rack. The send IM
has 2 interfaces. You can connect 4 expansion racks to each interface.
The IM modules make a distinction between local and remote ranges.
Local range: Distance up to 3m with the 460-0/461-0 interfaces.
The 5V is not transmitted with these interfaces, however the K bus is.
Distance up to 1.5m with the 460-1/461-1 interfaces.
The 5V is transmitted with these interfaces, however the K bus is not.
Remote range: Maximum distance of 100m with the 460-3/461-3 interfaces.
Page 22
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Installation Rules
o You must maintain the following minimum clearances:

o 20 mm to the right and left of the rack
o 40 mm above and 22 mm below the rack
o
110 mm between two racks
0 The power supply must be inserted on the far left (slot 1) and
the receive IM must be inserted on the far right

D Please ensure that there is a low-resistance connection
between the rack and substructure, such as through contact
washers
LI Connect the rack to building ground with at least 10 mm2 cable
o Remove the slot covers before you install the modules
/
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Rules
18.09.2009
SERV1_03E.23
7'SITRAIN
lit:
Training for
The most important rules for installing an S7-400 are given in the slide above.
(Refer to the "SIMATIC S7-400 and M7-400 Programmable Controller,
Hardware and Installation" manual).

Page 23
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
ANY
Nis,
Are all components available ? (see parts list)

Install the rack !
Install the power supply !
Remove the slot covers and install the modules !
Connect the front connectors and insert the
labeling strips!
Wire the modules (power supply and I/O modules) !
SIMATIC S7
Date
File:
Checklist
SITRAIN
18.09.2009
SERV1_03E.24
4' SITRAIN
Training for
The checklist provides only the sequence for the individual activities. The
following pages and the manuals contain the exact procedure.
Training for
Page 24
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Installing Racks
Screw the rack to the substructure (M6 machine

screws) !
Connect the rack to building ground. A stud bolt is

provided on the lower left for this purpose. The
minimum cross section of the cable is 10 mm2 !
Install additional racks with a minimum clearance of
110 mm !
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_038.25

Introduction
The racks are designed for installation on walls and installation in frames and
cabinets.
Mounting
The rack has four cutouts on the side for mounting. The cutouts are suitable for
19 inch frames.
You can use the following screws:
M6 Machine screw according to ISO 1207/ISO 1580 (DIN 84/85)

M6 Hexagon head cap screw according to ISO 4017 (DIN 4017)
You also need 6.4 mm washers according to ISO 7092 (DIN 433).
Page 25
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Installing Modules
MID
Remove the slot covers.

Grasp the cover at the indicated locations and pull the
cover forward to remove it !
Hang on the first module and swing it down !
Screw the module tight on the top and the bottom.

Triple-width modules and the power supply each have
two screws on the top and on the bottom !
Install the other modules as before !
A
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
18.09.2009
SERV1_03E.26

Layout
The power supply must be inserted on the far left (slot 1). The receive interface
module (receive IM), if used, must be inserted in the extreme right slot of the
rack it's in.
Tool
You need a screw driver with a 3.5 mm (1/4") blade width.
Page 26
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Wiring the Power Supply

01.
Open the power supply cover !
Adjust the voltage selector switch to the correct supply voltage I

Use a screwdriver as a lever to loosen the power plug !
Pull out the power plug !
Shorten the hot and neutral wires (not the ground) by 10 mm !

Strip the insulation to a length of 7 mm !
Open the power plug (screw in the cover) and the strain relief
device !
Connect the wires and tighten the strain relief device !
Close the power plug cover !
Push the power plug to a dead stop in the guide notch on the
power supply !
SIMATIC S7
Date:
Cables
18.09.2009
SERV1_03E.27

You can use the following cables:

rigid: 0.75 to 2.5 mm2
flexible: 0.75 to 2.5 mm2
core end sleeve: 0.75 to 2.5 mm2 without an insulating collar according to
DIN 46228, Form A
Tool
You need a screwdriver with a 3.5 mm (1/4") blade width.

SITRAIN
Training for
Page 27
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Wiring the Front Connector
Use a lever motion on the lower part of the front connector

cover to loosen it. Open the cover and pull it up to remove it !
Strip the insulation from the wires !
Connect the wires !

Install the strain relief device on the lower side of the front
connector !
Fill out the labeling strip and insert it in the front connector !
Place the cover on the front connector !

Latch the front connector onto the module's coding key !
Swing the front connector up !
Screw the front connector tightly in place !
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Front Connector
18.09.2009
SERV1_03E.28
There are three different types of front connector:

crimp connection
screw-type terminal
spring connection
You can insert the front connector only if the module is installed and screwed
down tightly.
Note
The front connectors have a jumper that is needed by some modules. Do not
remove this jumper.
Cables
You can use the following cables:
Tool
flexible: 0.75 to 1.5 mm2 for a crimp connection

0.75 to 2.5 mm2 for screw-type or spring connection
You need a screwdriver with a 3.5 mm (1/4") blade width.

Page 28
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
O Insert the key in the mode selector switch!

O Insert the backup battery (or batteries) !
o Adjust the BATT INDIC switch for monitoring the
battery on the power supply !
0 Insert the memory card in the CPU .
O Connect the racks using the correct connector

cables !
D Set the rack number (1 to 21) on the coding key of

every receive IM !
O Connect a terminator to the last receive IM of every
coupling phase !
o Perform a CPU memory reset !
D Connect the programming device !
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_03E.29
SITRAIN
gip Automation and Industrial Solutions

Training for
Keyswitch
The keyswitch is used to select the operating mode (STOP, RUN, and Memory
Reset).
This keyswitch also provides protection for the user program. If the keyswitch is
removed in the RUN position, it is possible to read out the user program, but it is
not possible to make changes.
Backup Battery
Depending on the power supply, you can install one or two backup batteries to
buffer the user program and the retentive bit memories, timers, counters and
data blocks. You can also connect an external battery to the EXT.-BATT.
receptacle on the CPU.
Memory Module
Before you insert the memory module, the CPU must be switched to STOP.
There are two types of memory cards:
CPU Memory Reset
RAM cards for extending the internal load memory

Flash Cards for storing the user program in a power failure-proof way
A CPU memory reset must be done:
during the initial startup

before a new and complete user program is downloaded
upon CPU request of a memory reset (the STOP LED flashes).
Using the keyswitch to perform a memory reset (points 1 to 4)

1. Turn the power supply on.
2. Turn the keyswitch to the STOP position.
3. Turn the keyswitch to the MRES (Memory Reset) position and hold this
position until the STOP LED flashes twice slowly (about 3 seconds).
4. Turn the keyswitch back to STOP and then within one second turn it to
MRES until the STOP LED flashes rapidly. You can also use a PG/PC to
perform a memory reset.
Page 29
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Changing the Backup Battery in the S7-400
Open the power supply cover !

CI Use the ribbon loop to pull the battery (batteries) out of the battery
compartment !
J Insert the new battery and pay attention to the polarity !
Set the BATTINDIC switch for battery monitoring:

) BAT position for a single-width power supply
) 1BAT position for a double or triple-width PS and one battery
2BAT position for a double or triple-width PS and two batteries
Use the FMR acknowledgement pushbutton to reset the fault

indicator !
Close the cover to the power supply !
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved
18.09.2009
SERV1_03E.30
SrRAlN T rain
Iar
Autom ation a nd In
l
strial Solutions
Change Frequency
You should change the battery after one year.
Note
Change the backup battery during POWER ON only or with a connected

external supply. Otherwise, the data in the user memory will be lost.
ICI

Page 30
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Exchanging Signal Modules in the S7-400
J Switch the CPU to STOP or make sure that the user program permits
modules to be exchanged in the RUN state !
0 Loosen the hold-down screws of the front connector and remove the
front connector !
_.i Loosen the hold-down screws on the module and swing the module out
0 Hang in the new module of the same type and swing it down !
0 Use both screws to screw the module down tightly !
3 Remove the front part of the coding key from the module !
0 Connect the wired front connector and tighten it !
i Switch the CPU to RUN . (if it was switched to STOP)
110 /
SIMATIC S7
Date'
File:
Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved
18.09.2009
SERV1_03E.31

4,1


Page 31
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
The SIMATIC Manager

SIMATIC Manager - [My_Project DAS7_Courses\My_Proje]
Fie Eck Insert PLC View Options Window Help
'1= 1; g?
O Fr; My_Project
in 67_300 Station
ei
re' fas
I E. 11 CPU 315-2 DP
S7_300_Sle
Ch6 Analog
CO Sources
iA Blocks
MICROMASTER_42C
TP170B_Color
WinCC flexible RT
IEFQ Ch07 Error
Sources
Blocks
rth
< No Filter >
Si '
TP170B_Colot
Ch07_Er1OF
PROFIBUS[1)
ICP5611(PROFIBLIS)
Press Fl to get Help.
SIMATIC S7
WIN)
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_04E.1
le'

Page
Contents
Objectives
From Process to Project
STEP 7 Project Structure

Interesting Facts about Multiprojects
Creating an S7 Project
Inserting an S7 Program
Standard Library
............................
STEP 7 Help System

....................
Context-Sensitive Help in STEP 7
3
5
8
10
11
Setting the PG/PC Interface ....

Project: OFFLINE / ONLINE View
12
"Accessible Nodes": ONLINE View (project-independent)
13
Erasing a Memory Card (Memory or MMC Card)

Exercise 1: Setting the PG Interface to MPI
........ 14
Exercise 2: Performing a CPU Memory Reset and a Warm Restart

Exercise 3: Retrieving a Project and Saving It as "My_Project"
........ 16
If You Want to Know More

SIMATIC Manager Customizing Options
........ 18

........ 15
17
19
Page 1
ST-SERV1
The SIMATIC Manager
SIEMENS
Objectives
understand the project structure in the SIMATIC Manager
understand the function "accessible nodes"
be familiar with the offline / online view in the SIMATIC Manager
be familiar with the STEP7 Standard Libraries
be familiar with the STEP7 help system
be able to create and manage a project with the SIMATIC Manager
be able to set the PG's interface
be able to erase an MMC
be able to perform an S7 CPU memory reset
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_04E.2
Page 2
gor

ST-SERV1
The SIMATIC Manager
SIEMENS
From Process to Project

Project Management
SIMATIC Manager
<
Hardware
Communication
FB21
OB1
11.0 I1 1
H
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_04E.3
Q4.0
)
Software 4
%...T

Process
When you take a closer look at a process you want to automate, you will find
that it is made up of a multitude of smaller sections and sub-processes, which
are all interlinked and dependent on one another.
The first, most important task is to break down the automation process as a
whole into separate sub-tasks.
Hardware and
Software
Each sub-task defines certain hardware and software requirements which the
the automation system must fulfill:
Hardware:
- Number and type of inputs and outputs
- Number and type of modules
- Number of racks
- Capacity and type of CPU
- HMI systems
- Communication structures
Software:
Program structure
Data management for the automation process
Configuration data and parameter assignment data
- Communication data
Program and project documentation
Project
In SIMATIC S7 all the hardware and software requirements of an automation

process are managed within a project.
A project includes the necessary hardware (+ configuration), networking
(+ configuration), all the programs, and the entire data management for an
automation solution.

Page 3
ST-SERV1
The SIMATIC Manager
SIEMENS
STEP 7 Project Structure

SIMA I IC Manager
[ My
Project DAS 7 ProjektelMein_Pro ]
Fie Edit Insert PLC New Options Window Help
D
HI
1r
- x
FiE
III ! 0
< No Filter >
17%Eir
Z.IY, la*
Fr
SIMATIC 300(1)
CPU 315-2 DP
SIMATIC
Touchpenel Chap14_Faults
MF1(1)
PR0FIBUS(1)
300(1)
[11 ChapOttfigital_Op
al Sources
{ Blocks
SIMATIC Manager [My Pro ject -- D:157-Pro jekteWein Pro ]
,T i
MICRONIASTER
1993 Edit Insert PLC New Options W dow He
Touchpanel
E d Chap14_Faults
Rai pH
ft I < No Fits >

Sweet
My_ Project
,
la Blocks
SIMATIC 30011)
4E+ ID. cf
H III CPU 315-2 DP
System data
OB1
FC14
FC15
rr Chap09_cicitl_Op
al Sources
Drii:I PINIX
rF
FC16
Cd Enla
j MICROMASTER_420
Touchpanel
FC17
FC18
FC19
VAT_Numbe_
:, a Chap14_Faults
Sources
Blocks
A
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_04E.4

Mr'
,
Project Structure
Data is stored in a project in the form of objects. The objects in a project are
arranged in a tree structure (project hierarchy). The tree structure displayed in
the project window is similar to that in the Windows Explorer. Only the icons for
the objects are different.
Project Hierarchy
1st. Level:
The first level contains the project icon. Each project represents a
database where all the relevant project data are stored.
2nd. Level: Stations (such as the S7-300 station) are where information
about the hardware configuration and parameter assignment
data of modules is stored.
Stations are the starting point for configuring the hardware.
S7 Program folders are the starting point for creating (writing)
programs. All the software for a parameter-assignable
module from the S7 range is stored in an S7 Program
folder. This folder contains further folders for the program
blocks and sources.
Subnets (MPI, PROFIBUS, Industrial Ethernet) are part of an
overall network.
3rd. and subsequent levels: Depends on the object type of the next-higher
level.
Page 4
ST-SERV1
The SIMATIC Manager
SIEMENS
Interesting Facts about Multiprojects

,LEAAI
IcSIMATIC Manager - [PROI_SOL -- \ Sl_Courses PRO3_Loe \PRE13 Joe]

File Edit Insert KC View Options Widow He
sa
lbelltIlra-liii74:rErainli < No Filter >

IE 6g
PRO1 SOL
E
Ethernet
GE , I_
E
SIMATIC 300-LEFT
E
E III CPU 315-2 DP_MPI 4
S7-Communication
1:1
al Sources
i2 Blocks
SIMATIC 300_RIGHT
E 9 Message_L
Message_R
S7-Sokitions
E SFC_Correnunicatim
SIMATIC 300-LEFT
EE
SIMATIC 300_RIGHT
E
MeldeRezept_L
E
Melde_Rezept_R
.7-1
-G
JslxJ
T5
It?
111
SIMATIC SIMATIC Message_L Message_R MPI(1)
300_LEFT 300_RIGHT
Press Fl b3 get Help.
1035611(PROFIBUS)
A
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_04E.5
ji SITRAIN
Training for
Multiproject
A multiproject folder is a folder for all projects and libraries of an automation

solution that contains one or more STEP 7 projects and, optionally, also
libraries. The projects within the multiproject can contain objects with crossproject interrelations (such as cross-project S7 connections).
Benefits
When projects are a component of a multiproject, their scope can be smaller

and easier to follow.
With the help of the multiproject you can, for example, create a project for every
operator for distributed editing and divide the stations according to their
operator between the projects.
Cross-project functions make sure that you can almost handle a multiproject
like one single project.
Examples of cross-project functions
Cross-project functions in STEP 7 (basic package):
Save As (save multiproject with all projects in another location)
Archiving (multiproject with all projects)
Adjustment of cross-project networking (such as, bringing together subnets)
Updating the view (all projects of a multiproject)

Page 5
ST-SERV1
The SIMATIC Manager
SIEMENS
Creating an S7 Project
File PLC View Options Window Help
Ctrl+N
New Project' Wizard...
Open...
User projects I Libraries Multiproiects
Ctr1+0
57 Memory Card
Memory Card File
Ethernet
121:157_Courses \PR 0 3_Loe \Ethernet
GD-Communication DAS7_Courses5PRO3_Loe GD-Kommu
Et) Lueftunglnitialserung D:157_Couises1LueftunglnitialisierungsT est
D:157_Kurse SERVl_L
57-Solutions
D: \97_Courses \PR 03_Loe1S7-Loesu
SERV1_A
D: S7_Couises \SERVLA
ENcrovi c
\c7 1-',.....-.ACCP1/1 I
Delete...
Reorganize...
Manage...
amy_pro,ect
a
Archive...
Retrieve.,.
r Add to current multiproject
Page Setup...
1 PRO1_50L (Multiproject) DA57_Courses \PRO3_Loe \PRO3_Loe
2 SER92_B (Project) -- DA57_Courses SIERV2_B
3 SERV/2_5 (Project) -- DA57_Courses \SERY2_1.
Exit
.17..
Type:
1My_Project
Alt+F4
I %Oct
rF
. ....... **
r
5jareSPADcalin
t1DAS7_Courses
Browse..
OK
care'
Creates a new project or a new library.
SIMATIC S7
Date.
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_048 6
Library
qt.
Heo

SIMATIC Manager
The SIMATIC Manager is normally started by double-clicking on the "SIMATIC

Manager" icon which appears on the Windows desktop after the STEP 7 Basic
Package has been installed.
Creating a Project
Select the menu options File 9 New or the icon in the toolbar to open the
"New" dialog box for creating a new project or a new library.
Enter the project name in the "Name" box and click the "OK" button to confirm.
Notes
1. The "Storage location (path)" displays the path that was preset in the
SIMATIC Manager under Options -> Customize.
2. You can also use the "New Project" Wizard to help you create a new
project. Select File 9 New project and follow prompts.
SITRAIN
Training for
Page 6
ST-SERV1
The SIMATIC Manager
SIEMENS
Inserting an S7 Program
..141z.1
Fie Edt rjreat PLC View Options Window Help
D fa;
Raba,
Subnet
I [i
21,
Ill I
a II<NoFilta>
ail
ra MI I it?
I 57 PT
2 M7 Program
S7 Software
3 Program
57 Sock
4 Drive
I'17 Software
5 51NAMIC5
Symbol Table
Text Library
External Source,..
WinCC flexible PT
WVICC Object
Parameter
External parameters...
Z17My_Projer I - Di 57_Courses My_Proje
.pew)
2 Global labeling held
..1412..1
c
Inserts 57 Program at the cursor position.
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Inserting a Program
18.09.2009
SERV1_04E 7
.619.
-.T.
Training for
S TRAIN
1
Select the Insert - Program - S7 Program menu to insert a new program into
the current project.
When you insert an object, the system automatically gives it a relevant name,
such as "S7 Program(1)". You can then change this name if you like.
Note
You use the method described above to create a hardware-independent

program.
Programs assigned to particular hardware are described in the "Hardware
Configuration" chapter.

Page 7
ST-SERV1
The SIMATIC Manager
SIEMENS
Standard Library
User projects
Libraries I Sawn projects I Multiprojects I
Name
SIC4
es PDIAGUB
CAPrograrn Fies1Siemens1StepTS71/
es PROF1NET System-Lbary CAProgram FienSiemenatep71S7ft
tik Redundant 10 (VI j
CAPromarn Files1SiernenatepTS7k
es Redundant 10 CGP
CAProgram Fies1Siemens1StepTS71/
tek SIMATIC_NET CP
CAPrcgram Fie:VS iemens1StepTS7R
4
611823MMIIMERIZEI
,...
we stdlibs (V2)
CAProgram Files1Siemens1Step7 \ S71117
S7 Memory Card
Memory Card Fie
Delete...
Reorganize...
ArcNve...
Retrieve...
Page Setup.,.
2-1
1 My_Project (Project) - DA57_Courses/MyProje

2 PROI_SOL (Mull:Project) - DAS7_CousesIP1103_LoekPRO3_Loe
3 SERV28 (Project) - DA57_Coursest.SERV23
4 SERV2_5 (Project) - D1,57Couses 5ERV2J.
Ext
Selected
At+F4
Use Projects:
Lbaries:
Sample Projects:
Multiprojects:
OK
,Standard Library -- C:'" Program Files' ,.Siernens Step7 571ibs stdlib30
Opens a project to be selected or a t
7.WIMI1111101
Browse...
Cancel l
Help
11:11.2s1
Comm cation Blocks

d IEC Function Blocks
d Organization Blocks
Id Miscellaneous Blocks
PID Coned Blocks a S5-S7 Convertng Block:
AD System Function Blocks
TI-S7 Convertng Block:
-' zv
A
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_04E.8

Introduction
Libraries are used to store reusable blocks. The blocks can be copied into a
library from existing projects or they can be created directly in the library
independent of projects.
Standard
Library
A Standard Library is installed when you install STEP 7. You can access this
standard library from the SIMATIC Manager (File 4 Open 4 Libraries) or from
the Block Editor ( Overviews 4 Libraries). The library contains the following S7
programs :
Communication Blocks:
Functions (FC) for communication between the CPU and the distributed I/O
via communication processors.
Organization Blocks: Organization Blocks (OBs).
S5-S7 Converting Blocks:
Blocks that emulate STEP 5 standard function blocks and that are necessary
for converting STEP 5 programs.
TI-S7 Converting Blocks:
Generally usable standard functions such as analog value scaling.
IEC Function Blocks:
Blocks for IEC functions (IEC: International Electrotechnical Commission), such
as for processing time and date information, for string processing and for
selecting maximum and minimum.
PID Control Blocks: Function blocks (FBs) for PID closed-loop controls.
System Function Blocks:
System Functions (SFCs) and System Function Blocks (SFBs).
Miscellaneous Blocks:
FCs and FBs for switching between daylight savings time and standard time
(summer and winter times).
Note
Additional libraries are added when optional software is installed.
Page 8
ST-SERV1
The SIMATIC Manager
SIEMENS
STEP 7 Help System

.1212.1
c
Manager
He PLC View Options
window I Help
DUM?1,1,101 Contents
11
Introduction
Getting Started
Press Hot-key Fl
Using He
About
Project Object
Provides various waysto ea
The project represents the entirety of all the data and programs in an automation solution, and is
located at the top of an object hierarchy .
Position in the Project View
Proiect Object
Station Object
Project
Station
Programmable Module Obied

S7147 Program Object
Progr. Module
Source File Folder Object

Block Folder Object
.1.1;11 S7 Program
.;J Source F il es
Blocks
Example
A
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_04E.9
ingufsor
radi nin
tri
.
n
Automation T
Obtaining Help
There are various ways of obtaining help:

Contents menu to activate the general help.
1. You use the Help
2. You use the Fl hot-key or the icon in the toolbar to start the contextsensitive help.
Tabs
"Hot words"
al Solutions
"Contents": Displays a list of help topics under general headings.

Allows you to access the help information by displaying a list
"Index":
of available terms in alphabetical order.
Enables you to look for certain words or expressions in the
"Search":
help topics.
Certain words are highlighted in green and are underlined with a broken line in
the help texts (called "Hot words"). A mouse click on these "Hot words" leads to
a further help text with detailed information.

Page 9
ST-SERV1
The SIMATIC Manager
SIEMENS
Context Sensitive Help in STEP 7

r,,,MA I IF manager - [St andard t diraity -- 1: ",Program Files >, Siernens Step] \
.J.01LI
c
..1212g
stdlib90]
Pie Eh Wert PLC New Optia-ss Virdow Help
ll ou;11?1,1J6
uanisaia Luray
Coarrxxxcaoon Blocks
ivi ,J IEC Function Blocks
rI Misceleneous Blocks
Organcation Blocks
IA PID Control Blocks
S5-S 7 Converting Blocks

System Function Blocks
a Blocks
al TI 07 Converting Blocks
Fire >
111
==11=2!!!!=11111111i11
SFC2
p SFC3
p SFC4
2 SFCS
SFC6
S0 SFC7
p SFC9
7 SFC10
p SFC11
p SFC12
p SFC13
p SEC14
S:/ S FC1 5
t;i SFC17
STL
OIL
SET_RTM
CT RL_R TM
System fu
System Iwiction
Press Hot-key Fl
1.0
Fie Edit Bookmark Options Help

LWent. I
Ind"
E"
Sc
Reading the Time with SFC 1 "READ_CLK"
'
I Help on STEP 7[
Glossary
Description
With SFC 1 'READ_CLK" (read system clock), you read the current date or current time of the system clock of the
CPU
kignmAtil
Ennakiti011
RET_VAL OUTPUT
1NT
1, 0, M. D. L
7 an error occurs during the execution of the

function, the return value contains an error
code
CDT
DT
D,L
The current date and current time are output

at
the CDT output.
PararnelN Declaration
1110111111111=1111111111117Amml
OUTPUT
Error Information
See Chapter Evaluatina Errors with the Output Parameter RET VAL
See also:
Etrarnole of an SFC 0 (SET Cl..14.1/ SFC 1 (READ CLK1- task
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_04E.10

0111 Automation and Industrial Solutions
Context-Sensitive
Help ...
With the context-sensitive help, you can find information directly connected to
the selected object. As the slide shows, the object can be a system function or
it can be an STL instruction in a block, for example.
... Activating
You can activate the context-sensitive help from any tool by selecting the
relevant object and then pressing the Fl function key.
Use the "Help on STEP 7" button to jump from the context-sensitive help to the
general help.
Note
You can find additional information on STEP 7 in the electronic manuals.

Choose the following menu options to open the electronic manuals:
Start - Simatic - Documentation
Page 10
ST-SERV1
The SIMATIC Manager
SIEMENS
Setting the PG/PC Interface

STEP 7
Access Point
of the Application:
S7ONLINE
Access Path 1
Access Pont of **Application
IS7ONLINE (STEP
71 -> CP5611(MPI)
(Standard for STEP 7)

Interface Parameter Assignment Used:
Properties
ICP5611(MPI)
Diagnostic
cP5si t impo
CP5611(PPI)
CP5611PROFIBUS DP Slave)
Copy._
Zj CP56111PROFIB U S I <Active>
._
2sJ
Properties - CP5611(MPI)
Parameter assign
communications
MPI network)
- Interlaces -Add/Remove.
CP5611
Interface Parameter
Assignment Used:
CP5611 (MPI)
OK
MPI
- Station Parameters
PG /PC is the only master on the bus
Address:
10
Timeout.
II
Network Parameters
CPU
Transmission Rate:
1187.5 Kbps
Highest Station Address:
1 31
OK
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File'
18.09.2009
SERV1_04E.11
Default
Cancel I
Help

General
You use the "Set PG/PC Interface" tool to define the connection between an
application such as STEP 7 and a module such as CP 5611. The tool is
activated with Start - Settings 9 Control Panel .
Access Point
Other examples of access points are:
CP_H1_1 for SIMATIC NET (Ethernet)
CP_L2_1 for SIMATIC NET (PROFIBUS)
DPSONLINE for ProTool/Pro DP-Slave
Micro/Win for the S7-200 software
MPI (WinCC) for the WinCC Software
Interface Parameter
Assignment Used
Here, enter the module used, such as, CP5611 and the interface used, such
as, MPI. If you connect the PG to the PROFIBUS, use the setting CP5611
(PROFIBUS). To save a switch-over of the PG/PC interface, you can also use
the setting CP5611 (Auto). The bus parameters are then automatically
determined. With this setting, however, the connection takes longer.
Properties
In this tab, you adapt the parameters of the interface. For "Address", enter the
MPI address of the PG. This must be unique in the network.
To make communication possible, the "Transmission Rate" and "Highest Node
Address" parameters must be the same for all nodes (stations).
The "PG/PC is the only master on the bus" setting is only activated if only
slaves are connected to the PG.
Diagnostics
With this, you can check whether a connection can be made.
SITRAIN
Training for
Page 11
ST-SERV1
The SIMATIC Manager
SIEMENS
Project: OFFLINE / ONLINE View
JJJ
File Edit Insert PLC View g3tions Window Help
D: \ Courses \MyProject
MyPropect
S7_300_Station
E
II CPU 315-2 DP
S7program
j:j Sources
Systemdaten
-=J
'
0061
Plod
1.1 '9 I I/ gl 1 riAi
II<No Filter >
l'..:MyProject
FC1
.......
FC14
MICROMASTER_420
Touchpanel
FC17
FC18
FC15
Project
OFFLINE
0-
.. 7E16 .....
........
FC19
Q .....
". .s.
[CT
VAT I/O-Co... VAT_Numbe..

ICP5611(PROFIBUS)
VSIMATIC Manager - MyProject
File Edit Insert PLC itelW gAtions Window Help

..
Project
ONLINE
..
774 myProlect ...

S7,30Intation
...rill CPU 315-2 DP
j E1 1:j S7program
a 0.
Systemdaten
MICROMASTER_420
5 g Touchpanel
061
0- 0FC17
FC18
Press F1 beet Help.
CF
FC1
FC14
L1,11101% F
0-
0-
FC15
FC16
CF
FC19
'Filtered ja5611(PRCCEIUS)
A
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_04E.12

Offline View
In the project window of the SIMATIC Manager, the offline view displays the
project structure stored on the hard disk of the programming device.
The "S7 Program folder contains the "Sources" and "Blocks" objects.
The "Blocks" folder contains the system data created with the HWConfig
tool and the blocks created with the LAD/STL/FBD Editor.
Online View
The online view shows the offline project structure in the left window and in the
right window it shows the blocks stored online in the selected CPU.
As a result, the "S7 Program" seen in the online view only contains the "Blocks"
folder which contains the following objects:
System data (SDB)
User blocks (OB, FC, FB)
System blocks (SFC, SFB).
The title bar in the online window is highlighted in color.
Changing Views
Changing between offline and online view takes place:

through the View - Offline or View - Online menu items
or
with the corresponding icon in the toolbar:
- Online
- Offline
Note
You can arrange the "ONLINE" and "OFFLINE" views next to each other (as in
the slide) or under each other with Window - Arrange - vertical
(horizontal)

Page 12
ST-SERV1
The SIMATIC Manager
SIEMENS
"Accessible Nodes": ONLINE View (project-independent)
r--1 1-711X
Insert PLC View Options Window He
e File Ed/
.....
4
ea - , .11 as
in Accleisible Nodes
= (73 PROFIBUS - 2
aPROFIBUS - 4 (passive)
iiSystem data
0 FB2
0. FB31
gFC50
0. DB30
0 DB40
gSFBO
a. SFB4
gSFB53
0. SFCO
a. SFC4
0. SFC11
0. SFC15
0. SFC20
a. SFC24
0. SFC31
- 151 X
rth M=1
I < No Fier>
0 0131
0 FB3
0 F899
gFC105
gDB31
0 DB99
0.SFEI1
0 SFB5
0. SFB54
0 SFC1
0 SFC5
0. SFC12
0. SFC17
0. SFC21
0. SFC28
gSFC32
0 0835
gFB4
0 FC31
a. DB10
0. DB32
0 08112
0. SFB2
10 SFB32
gSFB75
0 SFC2
0 SFCS
0. SFC13
a. SFC18
0. SFC22
0. SFC29
0. SFC33
J'Ytt
ar
0FB1
0. FB 30
0 FC42
0. DB20
g01333
a. DB123
0. SFB3
0. SFB52
0.SF1381
0 SFC3
0. SFC7
0. SFC14
0. SFC19
0 SFC23
0. SFC30
0. SFC34
A
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_04E.13

gr
Area of Use
This type of connection provides you with quick access, such as for service
purposes. You can access all accessible programmable modules (CPUs, FMs,
CPs) in the network. You choose this method when you don't have any project
data about the target systems on your PG.
What to Do
You can activate the "Accessible Nodes" window with the menu options PLC 9
Display Accessible Nodes. In the "Accessible Nodes" object, all accessible
programmable blocks in the network are displayed with their address.
Note
Nodes (stations) that are not programmable with STEP 7 can also be displayed
(such as programming devices or operator panels). On the CPU to which the
PG is connected, the addition (directly) is displayed. In the slide, the CPU with
the MPI address =2.
SITRAIN
Training for
Page 13
ST-SERV1
The SIMATIC Manager
SIEMENS
Erasing a Memory Card (Memory or MMC Card)

Memory card is inserted in the CPU:
FIe Egt..Insert
D QUIT 111ft
PLC
View
Ea
Window
He
X lib
Accessible Nodes
Etiji
r PROFIBUS = 2
to Blocks
PROFIBUS = 4 (passive)
. z
Options
System data
FB1
rat FB 4
FB99
FC50
DB20
081
la FB2
fa FB30
ta FC31
FC105
DB30
rt II
o
< No
OB35
FB3
CZt FB31
la+ FC42
0811
DB3
"-.
.................
..-
right
-.
mouse button
Memory card is inserted in the PG:
livert PLC View Options Window
M,)it,w6hf
i Lit 57 rn8frori) card

,
.."...
r+ System data
Ca. FB1
0. FB4
co. FB99
Fc5o
DB.?
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Reason
Open Object
ctri+Alt+o
Cut
Copy
Ctrl+X
Ctrl+C
Delete
Del
Compare Blocks...
1
lr.J11-_1
" 01'1
SIMATIC Manager [S7 memory card]

J File Edit
Fitter >
No Piker
s
# 081
0 FB2
sp FB30
a. FC31
a. FC105
DB30
18.09.2009
SERV1_04E.14
# 0835
a FB3
0. FB31
ta. FC42
tg. D B1 0
SI. IB 1
SITRAIN
gr
Training for
During a CPU memory reset, only the RAM work memory of the CPU is reset,
not the memory of the possibly inserted memory or MMC card. That means
that the user program stored on the inserted memory card is retained.
Erasing the memory card can oe done in the following ways:

Memory Card is
Inserted in the CPU
The memory card can be erased online directly on the CPU using the function
"Accessible Nodes":
SIMATIC Manager -4 PLC 9 Display Accessible Nodes

then select all blocks .9 Delete
Memory Card
IT]
The memory card can be erased using a programming device with a suitable
interface. For this, the memory card must be inserted in the module slot and a
new window has to be opened that displays the contents of the memory card.
SIMATIC Manager 9 File 9 S7 Memory Card 9 Delete...
Note
The data format of SIMATIC MMCs does not correspond to the data format that
is used by MS Windows. Accordingly, SIMATIC MMCs can not be read, written
or erased with the Windows Explorer!
Caution
If SIMATIC MMCs are formatted in MS Windows, then they can no longer be

used in a SIMATIC S7!
SITRAIN
Training for
Page 14
ST-SERV1
The SIMATIC Manager
SIEMENS

SIMATIC Manager
Options
Access Path I
Access Poitt of the Application
I S7ONLINE
(STEP 7)
CP5611(MPI I
(Standard tot STEP 7)

Interface Patameter Magmata Used:
Properties..
CP5611(MPI)
11112=1
CP5611IPPI)
CP5611(PROFIBUS - DP Slave] _J
"itgl CP5611 (PR Fl BUS) <Active)
41
Diagnostics.
Copy..
JJ
MPI
Station Parameters
Parameter assignment of your

communications processor CP5611 for an
MPI network]
PG/PC is the only master on the bus

Address:
[Interfaces
Add/Remove:
_-_J
[ Timeout
Select._
Network Parameters
Cancel
OK
He
Transmission Rate:
1187. 5 Kbps
1 31
OK
SIMATIC S7
Date:
Files
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserves.
18.09.2009
SERV1_04E.15
Default
Cancel
Help
g=
Task
The PG's interface is to be switched to MPI so that an online connection to the

CPU can be established.
What to Do
1. Activate the "Set PG/PC Interface" function

SIMATIC Manager Options 9 Set PG/PC Interface
2. In the Properties dialog, change the properties so that they appear as those
shown in the slide

Page 15
ST-SERV1
The SIMATIC Manager
SIEMENS

Until Oct 2002
RUN-P
RUN
1. Set the mode selector switch to STOP
STOP V!
MRES
RUN-P
RUN
STOP CID
2. Hold (Press) the mode selector switch in the MRES

position until the STOP LED has flashed twice slowly.
Release the mode selector switch so that it returns to
the STOP position.
MRES
,within 1 sec
RUN-P
RUN
STOP
MRES
3. Turn (press) the mode selector switch to the MRES posi-tion once more until the STOP LED begins to flash quickly
the STOP position.
RUN
STOP
MRES
RUN-P
RUN
STOP CI)
MRES
RUN
STOP
4. Set the mode selector switch to the RUN-P (RUN)

position. (A warm restart is carried out in the transition
from STOP to RUN/RUN-P)
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_04E.16
MRES

Task
You are to perform a CPU memory reset and check whether the memory reset
was successful.
What to Do
1. If a CPU with MMC is used at your training area, the MMC must first be
explicitly erased.
For example, SIMATIC Manager - Accessible Nodes - in the Blocks
folder select all blocks 4 Delete
2. Carry out the memory reset according to the steps in the slide above
(manually and from the PG).
3. Check if the memory reset was successful. It was successful if only system
blocks (SDBs, SFCs, SFBs) are left in the CPU
SIMATIC Manager 4 Accessible Nodes - Double-click on MPI=2
- Click on Blocks
Notes
To make sure that no "old" blocks are left in the CPU, a memory reset of the
CPU should be performed. The following steps are carried out during a
memory reset:
All user data is deleted (Exception: MPI parameter assignments and the
contents of the diagnostic buffer are retained).
Hardware test and initialization
If an Eprom memory card or a Micro Memory Card (MMC) is installed, the

CPU copies all data on the cards that is relevant for execution back into the
internal RAM after the memory reset.
If no memory card or Micro Memory Card is installed, the preset MPI

address on the CPU is retained. If, however, a memory card is installed, the
MPI address stored on it is loaded.
Page 16
ST-SERV1
The SIMATIC Manager
SIEMENS
Exercise 3: Retrieving a Project and Saving It as "My_Project"

oc====tr:..121211
Fie PLC View Options Window NM)
Ctr1-1-N
New Project' Wttard...
57 Yancey Card
Memory Card Mb
Li Servl_b.zp
Page Setup...
1 My_Project (Project) DAS'

2 Accessible Nodes
3 51ZPVI _5 (Project) DA57_

Let
Gets object Nom the arcNve.
Dateiname:
Dateityp:
Desktop
Arbeitsplat2
Sinalic Shell
My Documents
E
Gemeinseene Dokunente
E
314-Diskette (Al
E
E Cell SYSTEM (C:)
ariali DATA (1):)
Heirnarbeit
ER
Archive
E. Image_D1
E9
S7_Kurse
DVD-RW.Laufwerk (R:)
Netzweikunoebuna
IS ervl _a. zip

PKZip 4.0-Archive ('. zip)
Abbrecher
OK
Cancel
Retrieve (3020:58)
The retrieved data have been stored in the project
directory D:1S7_Courses \ SE RV1_A:.
Do not display this message again.
OK
SIMATIC S7
Date:
18.09.2009
File:
SERV1_04E.17
lltr
Task
You are to retrieve a project and save it under the name "My_Project".
What to Do
1. Start the SIMATIC Manager

2. Delete should they exist the old projects "My_Project", "SERV1_A" and
"SERV1_B"
File 9 Delete... 4 User Projects 9 select the projects from the list 4
confirm
3. Retrieve the project "SERV1_A.zip"
File 9 Retrieve... 4 Suchen in [Look In]: <Drive>:IS7 CoursesiSelect an
archive and choose "SERV' _A.ZIP" from the list 4 acknowledge with "OK"
4. Save the project under the name "My_Project"
File 4 Save As... 4 User projects 4 enter "My Project" as the file name 4
as the Storage Path choose <Drive>:1S7 Courses 4 confirm
Page 17
ST-SERV1
The SIMATIC Manager
SIEMENS
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Note
SITRAIN
18.09.2009
SERV1_04E.18

gr
complete a topic.
Training for
Page 18
ST-SERV1
The SIMATIC Manager
SIEMENS
SIMATIC Manager Customizing Options

Fie PLC View I Options Window Help
ustorritze
g?
arl+Alt+E
Simulate Modules
Set PG/PC Interface...
Customize
Columns
Language
Genetal
national Language
Message numbers
Date and Time of Day
I
13=11111=111=11116F
Columns
Mnemonics
Example 1
German
(1" Eng4h
General
Language
Archiving
Message numbers
I
I
Date and Time of Day
View
- Storage location lot projectsimultiproiects
U El .0
Browse...
! ID: SLcourses
A 11 C
Storage location lot jibraies
ID:197_courses
E
Browse...
Qpen new object automatically
I Archive automatically on opening project or library
save window arrangement and contents at end of session

l Offhne window
I Online window
Deactivated system messages:

Ca
OK
Cancel
OK
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
"Language" Tab
"General" Tab
18.09.2009
SERV1_04E.19
I Help

Re Automation and Industrial Solutions
National Language: You can select the language you want to use for the
SIMATIC Manager, menus, dialog boxes, help, etc. (Only the languages that have
been installed appear in the list.)
Mnemonics: You can select the mnemonics you want to use for programming the
S7 blocks
Basic settings for editing projects and libraries:

Storage location for prolects/multiproiects is where you specify the directory in
which you want to store your user projects.
Storage location for libraries is where you specify the directory in which you want to
store your user libraries.
Further options for inserting objects, opening projects and for window arrangement
will be dealt with later.
Deactivated system messages

By pressing the button "Activate" you can reactivate all system messages that were
switched-off in a window when the option "Always display this message...." was
chosen.
"Date and
Time of Day" Tab
Here you specify how you want to represent the date and time, for example, in the
Diagnostic Buffer.
"View" Tab
This is where you specify how project objects are to be displayed on the screen.
"Columns" Tab
This is where you specify which columns are to be displayed when the Detail view is
switched-on (see "Help").
"Message numbers"
Tab
This is where you specify the type of message number assignment.
"Archiving" Tab
Here you specify the default program that is to be used to archive and retrieve files, as
well as the associated directories.
Page 19
ST-SERV1
The SIMATIC Manager
SIEMENS
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_05E.1

Page
Contents
Objectives
...................................................................................................................................... 2
...... 3
Hardware Configuration and Parameter Assignment
4
Inserting a Station
...... 5
Starting the Hardware Configuration Editor
...... 6
Generating a Hardware Setpoint Configuration
7
Addressing S7-300 Modules
...... 8
DI/DO Addressing in Multi-Tier Configurations
....... 9
Module Address Overview
10
Variable Addressing
11
Edit Symbols, Monitor/Modify Variables
12
CPU Properties: Cycle/Clock Memory
CPU Properties: General (amongst others MPI Address) ............................................................... 13
14
Saving Station Names in the CPU
Saving the Setpoint Configuration and Downloading it in Modules ................................................. 15
Uploading the Actual Configuration to the PG ................................................................................ 16
17
Exercise 1: Adapting the Setpoint Configuration
Exercise 2: Assigning Parameters to the CPU Clock Memory and Testing It
18
If You Want to Know More ............................................................................................................. 19
CPU Properties
20
CPU Properties: Startup
21
CPU Properties: Retentive Memory ............................................................................................... 22
CPU Properties: Protection
23
CPU Properties: Diagnostics/Clock
............................................................................................... 24
CPU Properties: Communication
25
Further Processing of Hardware Stations in the CA01 Electronic Catalog ..................................... 26
Exporting a Hardware Station ........................................................................................................ 27
CA01: Selection Assistant for SIMATIC ......................................................................................... 28
Parts List and Description
29
Page 1
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Objectives
be able to create a setpoint configuration and assign parameters to it
be able to read out an actual configuration and assign parameters to it
be familiar with the addressing of S7-300 input and output modules
be able to adapt a given hardware configuration to an existing
hardware
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_05E.2
Page 2

ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Hardware Configuration and Parameter Assignment

Configuration
Assignment of racks, cards, blocks and

distributed I/O in the station window of the
Hardware Configuration tool.
You can select the components from a
hardware catalog.
Parameter assignment
Specifying the behavior of parameter

assignable modules such as startup behavior,
retentive areas, etc.
Setpoint configuration
Actual configuration
SIMATIC S7
Actual configuration and parameter assignment

of existing hardware.
Date:
File:
HW Configuration
Planned hardware configuration and

parameter assignment using the Hardware
configuration tool.
18.09.2009
SERV1_05E.3

The modules are supplied from the factory with preset parameters. If these
default settings are OK, a hardware configuration is not necessary.
A configuration is necessary:
if you want to modify preset parameters or addresses of a module (such as
to enable the hardware interrupt of a module)
if you want to configure communication connections
with stations that have distributed peripherals (PROFIBUS-DP)
with S7-400 stations that have several CPUs (multicomputing) or
expansion racks
with fault-tolerant programmable logic controllers (option package).
Setpoint
Configuration
When you configure a system, a setpoint configuration is created. It contains a

hardware station with the planned modules and the associated parameters. The
PLC system is assembled according to the setpoint configuration. During
commissioning, the setpoint configuration is downloaded to the CPU.
Actual Configuration In an assembled system, the actual existing configuration and parameter
assignment of the modules can be uploaded from the CPU. This creates a new
HW station in the project.
A configuration upload is necessary, for example, if the project structure does
not exist locally at the PG. After the actual configuration is read out, you can set
parameters and add part numbers.
Notes
With the S7-400, the CPU can be assigned parameters in such a way, that when
there are differences between the setpoint configuration and the actual
configuration, the CPU startup is interrupted.
To call the HW Config tool, there must be a hardware station in the SIMATIC
Manager.

Page 3
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Inserting a Station
=_Llalx]
VSIMATIC Manager - My_Prtgett
He Edit
Ion
Insert PLC
Options
ldow Help
<No Fit. >
I SOMATIC 400 Station
Subriet
Program
SOMATIC 300 Station
ml,liesemlysemik?
3 SOMATIC H Ration
4 SIMATIC PC Raton
57 Block
M7 Software
Symbol Table
Text Library
Este:mai Source...
5 SOMATIC HMI Staten

6 Other station
7 SOMATIC 55
8 PG/PC
9 SOMATIC OP
A SIMATIC 200 Staten
WinCC flexible PT
Pena Oblea
Zr, y _Pro pect
13. Cl_Course4 My_Proje
My Program
YMP1(1)
MPI
a Global labeling held
Global labeling field

57 Program
Hy-P.17=
Inserts SOMATIC 300 Ration at the cuss postan.
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_05E A
gir

Insert Station
You insert a new station in the current project by selecting the menu options
Insert 4 Station 4 SIMATIC 300 Station or SIMATIC 400 Station.
You can then change the name that is automatically given to this station "SIMATIC 300 (1)" - to one of your choice.
SITRAIN
Training for
Page 4
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Starting the Hardware Configuration Editor

...11:112cJ
m17/ 1 41
1112n1
Ilif!:
My_Ropret
rir
SIMATIC301:(1)
My Rogam
ttw [ unfit, ISPIAT IC 305(1)(Configuration)-- Ply_Project]
ei Station EAt tread PLC
u 91i &
View OP8.76 Wnamv nab

M1d
MMII
Alba
Taber
w Stabs Bar
LINA.
Auto AMMO
PS
41
ntI AjI
Doris:
2:1
!Standard
PROFIBUS DP
PROFIBUS-PA
PROF1NET 10
11
SIMATIC 300
f
:la C7
FEI .0 CP-300
Ba.-12:1 CPU-300
03-al FM-300
Ett.C3 Gateway
IM-300
$C3 M7-EXTENSION
1 B3-0 PS-300
RACK-300
mei
I *I SIMATIC 300(1)
we Pl toga Help.
End
'Z:tly_Proiert ID:iSlCourses .1y_Prrge
p-1=1 S14-300
SIMATIC 400
SIMATIC HMI Station
SIMATIC PC Based Contrd 300/400

SIMATIC PC Station
O
51 -11
6ES7 3901 7770416A0

vaiable m various lengths
IA
Displays catalog lon(off).
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_05E.5

ger Automation and Industrial Solutions
Hardware Config.
This tool helps you configure, assign parameters to and diagnose the hardware.
Starting HW Config
To start the Hardware Configuration tool:
"Configuring"
Select a hardware station in the SIMATIC Manager and choose the

Edit 4 Open Object menu options or by
Double-clicking on the Hardware icon.
This is a window in the "Hardware Configuration" application you use for

inserting components from the "Hardware Catalog" window.
The title bar of this window contains the name of the project and the station
name.
Hardware Catalog
To open the catalog:
Select the View 4 Catalog menu options or by
Clicking on the icon in the toolbar.
If "Standard" is selected as the catalog profile, all racks, modules and interface
modules are available in the "Hardware Catalog" window.
You can create your own catalog profiles containing frequently used elements
by selecting the menu Options 4 Edit Catalog Profiles.
You can add PROFIBUS slaves that do not exist in the catalog later on. To add
slaves, you use GSE files that are provided by the manufacturer of the slave
device. The GSE file contains a complete description of the device according to
PROFIBUS / PROFINET conventions.
To include the slave in the hardware catalog, use the Options 4 Install New
GSE Files menu and then Options 4 Update Catalog.
Page 5
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Generating a Hardware Setpoint Configuration

Zr;...HW Conlin - [SIMATIC 300( I ) (Configuration) fly_Project]
JJJ
Mt Ration Edt Insert PLC %ow Worts Winnow Help
t1 ES likelliberillil01 5131110
End
Proas:
1
(0) UR
41.1 J
Slot
1
2
,12
3
r
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Module
PS 3075A
CPU 315-2 DP
DP
Order number
6E57 3074E400-0AM
6E57 315-2AF03-0A80
D132iDC24V
6E07 321-113L00-0AA0
Finevare
V1.1
MPI a.. I add... O... Cont..

2
Urri
..
0 3
I tandad
SM 321 0116a4C120V
SM 321 0116a4C1213/
SM 321 0116,0C24V
SM 321 01164)C24V
SM 321 0116pDC24V
SM 321 0116NDC2W
SM 321 13116a0C24V
SM 321 0116NDC24V
SM 321 01164)C24V
SM 321 011 6NDC241/. In
SM 321 0116eDC24V, In
SM 321 011 6,0C2iN, In
SM 321 Dll EoDC48-1 25
SM 321 D116KNAMUR
SM 321 13116eUC21/484-SM 321 0132x4C120V
SM 321 DI3243C24V
SM 321 0132,0[24V
SM 321 DI4KNAMUR,E:
SM 321 DI6i,AC1213/230
j
3:
6E67 321.1BL00-06A0
DOA input module 013224V.
invPing 32; also avoid:kr as SIPLUS
module with order number EAG1
Press F1 to get Help.
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_05E.6
'11%

Generating a
Setpoint
Configuration
This means specifying how the modules are to be arranged in the rack. This
configuration, specified by you, is referred to as the setpoint configuration.
Rack
For example, you open a SIMATIC 300 station in the Hardware Catalog.
Opening the "RACK-300" folder shows the icon for a DIN rail. You can insert this
in the "Hardware Configuration" window by double-clicking on it (or using drag &
drop).
Two rack component lists then appear in the two-part window: a plain list in the
top part and a detailed view with order numbers, MPI addresses and I/O
addresses in the bottom part.
Power Supply
If a load current power supply is required double click or use drag & drop to
insert the appropriate "PS-300" module from the catalog in slot no.1 in the list.
CPU
You select the CPU from the "CPU-300" folder, for example, and insert it in slot
no. 2.
Slot No. 3
Slot no. 3 is reserved as the logical address for an interface module (for multitier configurations). If this position is to be reserved in the actual configuration
for the later installation of an IM, you must insert a dummy module DM370
(DUMMY).
Modules
From slot no. 4 onwards, you can "insert" a choice of up to 8 signal modules
(SM), communications processors (CP) or function modules (FM) from the
"Hardware Catalog" using drag & drop or with a double-click. The slots on which
the selected module can be inserted are automatically highlighted in green.
Page 6
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Addressing S7 - 300 Modules

1
Module:
PS
CPU
DI 32
IB 0
Q 4.0
I 2.0
I 0.0
191
MI
Slot No.:
DO 32 DI8/D08 Al 2
Q6.0
ED
QB 4
IB 2
QB 6
IB 8
111
Byte and
I 0.7
I 2.7
bit addresses:
I 1.0
1 3.0
IB 1
11.7
SIMATIC S7
101
1113
Q6.7
1 8.7
07.0
Q8.0
101
QB 5
IB 3
05.7
0 I 3.7
Date:
File:
Q4.7
Q5.0
18.09.2009
SERV1_05E.7
101
0
QB 7
07.7
1.73
QB 8
Q8.7

Slots
With the S7-300, the slots are logical not physical slots since the rack or the DIN
rail does not have any slots or interfaces. Still, the slots are numbered and each
logical slot has a default address assigned to it which is automatically used
when the system is not parameterized.
Slot 1
This is reserved for the power supply module. With the S7-300, a power supply
module is not necessarily required.
The S7-300 can also be operated with 24V from another power source.
Slot 2
This is the slot for the CPU.
Slot 3
This is solely reserved for an interface module (IM) for multi-tier configurations
using expansion racks. If no IM module is installed, the logical slot remains free
even though physically there is no space.
If the slot is also to be reserved physically (such as, for installing an IM module
at a later date), you can insert a DM370 dummy module.
Slots 4-11
These are the slots for I/O modules, communications processors (CP) or
function modules (FM).
Bit and Byte

Addresses
On slots 4 to 11, each module is assigned a so-called "module address"

that is always the same as the address of the first input or output byte of the
module. The addresses of the other I/O bytes then follow consecutively.
When you use default addresses, you lose 2 address bytes per slot when 16channel DI/DO modules are used!

Page 7
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
DI/DA Addressing in Multi-Tier Configurations

PS
Rack
3
IM
(Receive)
96.0
to
99.7
100.0
to
103.7
104.0
to
107.7
108.0
to
111.7
112.0
to
115.7
116.0
to
119.7
120.0
to
123.7
124.0
to
127.7
64.0
to
67.7
68.0
to
70.7
72.0
to
75.7
76.0
to
79.7
80.0
to
83.7
84.0
to
87.7
88.0
to
91.7
92.0
to
95.7
56.0
to
59.7
60.0
to
63.7
?
o
6
IM
(Receive)
PS
Rack
2
f
PS
c)
IM
Rack
1
32.0
to
35.7
(Receive)
36.0
to
39.7
40.0
to
43.7
44.0
to
47.7
48.0
to
51.7
52.0
to
55.7
4.0
to
7.7
8.0
to
11.7
12.0
to
15.7
16.0
to
19.7
20.0
to
23.7
?
PS
CPU
Rack
cj 0
Slot 1
IM
(Send)
0.0
to
3.7
4
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Multi-Tier
Configurations
18.09.2009
SERV1_05E.8
24.0
to
27.7
28.0
to
31.7
10
11

The individual slots also have default addresses in a multi-tier configuration.

Examples:
Q7.7 is the last bit of a 32-channel DO module plugged into slot 5 of rack 0.
IB105 is the second byte of a DI module in slot 6 of rack 3.
QW60 is the first two bytes of a DO module in slot 11 of rack 1.
ID80 is all four bytes of a 32-channel DI module in slot 8 in rack 2.
Page 8
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Module Address Overview

EiHW Config - [SOMATIC 300(1) (Configuration) -- My Project]
Station Edit Insert PLC view Options Window He
D car.. ik ea
II
Catalog
11"
Ir
Ir
"Address Overview"
Met
PS 307 SA
CPU 315-2 DP .4 Isobar
II DP
Ir
Ctrl+K
4, Status Bar
0
F5
F4
Pdate
D032x0C24V/0 5A kit Arrange

018/D08,424V/0 54
41202811
Addresses from
111111111111=
~J 101 UR
Slot
1
Order nu Filter
Mackie
6E57 307
66 57 31
PS 307 54
CPU 315-2 DP
Inputs
Type I Add horn I
DP
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
6E S7321
6E57 322
6E57 323
6E57 331
D132KDC24V
D032xDC24V/0.54
018/D08,424V/0.54
A.12x128it
P Outputs
I'
0
0
Available addr assign
Yes
Rack/
slot
0/2
1023
r Address gaps
Adds to I Module
8 DIEI/00esr24V/0.54
307 Al2n1281
1023 DP
7 D032,0624V/0 54
8 1218/008x24V/0 54
8
304
1023
4
8
to
Address area horn:
PIP I
DPI
RJ
PN I
061 PI
0
0
081 PI
081 PI
IF
7
2
5
6
Help
Dose
Shows the address overview of the current static
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File
Address Overview
18.09.2009
SERV1_05E.9

gr.
The I/O addresses can be displayed via the menu option View Address
Overview ...
Abbreviations
Rack number
Slot number of the relevant module
DP
Relevant only when Distributed Peripherals (I/O) are used
IF
Interface module ID when programming the M7 system (in C++).
PIP Process Image Part

Page 9
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Variable Addressing
I -
r HW Conlin - (SIMATIC 300(1) (Configuration)
A Station Edit Insert PLC View Options Wir
gtt e I l
(0) UR
Properties - D132xDC249 - (RO/S4)
r Ps 307 5A
IF CPU 315-2 DP
II
r
r
General Addresses
DP
Inputs -
2x
DI32xDC24V
D 032xD C24V/0.5A
Start:
End:
Process image
15
10E1 PI LI
r System Default
OK
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Cancel 1 Help
18.09.2009
SERV1_05E.10

Addressing
The modules are assigned fixed slot-dependent addresses with the S7-300
(CPUs without DP interface) and S7-400 (without hardware configuration).
Variable
With the S7-300 (CPUs with integrated DP interface) and with the S7-400,
you can assign parameters to the starting addresses of the modules.
Addressing
When you double-click a digital or an analog module, the parameter assignment

screen is opened. After you choose the "Addresses" tab, you can cancel
"System selection". You can now define the starting address in the "Start" box. If
the address is already used, an error message is triggered.
Part process images can be defined only in the S7-400. That way, specific
inputs and outputs (such as time-critical signals) can be combined into one
group. A system function triggers the updating of a part process image in the
user program.
Note
If the system data is not stored on a memory card, all module parameters and
therefore also the modules' assigned addresses are lost after a CPU memory
reset. Without the memory card this means that the original slot-dependent
addresses of the S7-300 and the default addresses of the S7-400 become valid
once more.
Page 10
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Edit Symbols, Monitor/Modify Variables

EI!FIW Confg - [SIMATIC 300(1) (Configuration) -- My_Pro
Station Edit Insert PLC view Options WInclow Heb
! clot 1-
t; a
51 6
lb r
6611E00
'Er." (13IUR
COI+C
COPY
ll
I+
Paste
Replace Object...
Ad Master System
PS 307 54
Disconnect Master System
CPU 315-2 DP
2
X2
3
Insert PROFINET 10 System
DP
Disconnect PROFINET 10 System

PROFINET IO Domain Management...
D13243C24V
rD
24'1;0 Ev-,
r D18/D08 24V/0 5A
ROFINET 10 Topology...
l
x right
Isochrone Mode
Al2.1213
Specify Module...
Delete
Del
Go To
e
elpj
.
(0) UR
Monitor
Order numbs
Slot Vickie
1
PS 307 5A
CPU 315-2 DP
6E57 307-1E
6ES7 315-2A
00
PP
Edt Symbols
Object Properties...
Ak+Return
l
OpenObject With...
Ctrl+tAlt+0
3
Grine via assigned CPU services
Address
2
3
4
I Symbol
L_vveight_invidid
L_SYSTEM
L_MAN
L AUTO
mitum.
0
0
4.1
42
43
I Date type Content

BOOL
Indicator 141- weiptt trveltl
Indicator 1511 System ON
BOOL
Muter ligit MAN mode
BOX
BOOL
IndiCela 1511 Automatic mode
Path
,
in1, 0 4.0 1__Weight_invele

0 41 'L SYSTEM'
41 0 4.2 -L_MAN"
0 43 1. 11.1i0'
0 14
in
n 4 Om* man.
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Siemens AG 2008. All lights reserved.
Symbols
IMy_Prolect SIMATIC 300(11\CPU 315-2 DP
,d Address) Symbol
18.09.2009
SERV1_05E.11
I Dispel Status velue I Modify Wel

LI true
11:. false
BOOt. (J ean
. _
BOOL
BOOL
8001 ri; false

BOOL tk lease
true
14,11 git 1....
win

You can directly access the symbol table from the "Hardware Configuration"
tool. This allows you to assign symbolic names to the inputs and outputs during
hardware configuration or at a later date when you can make supplements or
changes.
You open the symbol table with a right mouse click on the module. Select Edit
Symbols in the follow-up box. A section of the symbol table with the relevant
addresses is then opened.
Monitor/Modify
Variables
You can monitor or modify the addresses of the configured modules directly
from the Hardware Configuration tool. The signals of the input modules can be
"checked" and the signals of the output modules can be "controlled" using the
Monitor/Modify (Variables) function.
Product Support
Directly from the Internet, you can fetch information on modules or components
from the Product Support pages. As well, it is also possible to update HW Config
by incorporating individual components such as new CPUs or new DP devices
into the current STEP 7 version.
Requirements:
The PG/PC has an Internet connection, a browser for displaying Internet pages,
and the function is enabled in the Hardware Configuration Settings along with
the specification of the Internet address.
Note
"Symbolic Addressing" and the editing of symbol tables is dealt with in depth in
the "Symbols" chapter.

Page 11
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
CPU Properties: Cycle/Clock Memory

_Lai>:j
la:HW Config - [51MAI It 300(1) (Configuration) -- My_Projecti

Ration Edit Insert PLC View Options Window Help
D cai; .- o tiu I ED I I
1
F PS 307 54
CPU 315.2 DP
F DP
2
3
4
5
6
7
e I I Ifk I IED
"
4
Double-click
mi
3
4
5
UR
Module
PS 307 SA
CPU 315-2 DP
DP
Order number
6657 3137-1EA00-04A0
6E67 315-2AF03-0AB 0
150
Scan cycle load heel cannier

-aeon rtl
1 20
Size of the process image
0885 - cal Lp at I/0 access actor
I No 0885 call up
-Dock Memory
6E67 321.1BL00-0
6E57 322-181_006E57 323-1BH 00-134.40
US7 1313T am .riestn
Clock Memory Bit 7 1 6 1 5 1 4
Cancel
3 1 2 1 1 1 0
Help
Frequency (Hz) 10.5 10.621 1 11.251 2 1 2.5 1 5 1 10

Period (s)
1 2 11.6 1 1 1 0.8 10.5 1 0.4 1 0.2 1 0.1
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Cycle
Cycle
F Clock memory
0132,d)C24V
D032sEiC24V/0 54
018/D08s24V/0 54
Al2s1 288
10
11
I Diegnoslics/C3ock I Rotection I Communication I

Cycle/Clock Memory
I Retentive Memory
1
Interrupts
I
Minimum scan cycle time Ems)
Slot
1
2
Stare*
Soon cycle roxitocing tinie Ina
41
41111ijpi
F Update 061 process image cyclically
01324)C24 /
1)032xDC24V/0.54
DIEVD0844V/0.54
Al2s1213i
Time-of-Clay Interrupts I Cynic Interrupts

General
1 5j, _xj
18.09.2009
SERV1_05E.12
lift

"Scan Cycle Monitoring Time (ms):"

If this time is exceeded, the CPU goes into the STOP mode.
Possible causes why this time is exceeded: communications
processes, accumulation of interrupt events, errors in the CPU
program.
If you have programmed an error OB 80, the scan cycle time is
doubled. After that, the CPU also goes into the STOP mode.
"Scan Cycle Load from Communication (%):"
Communication (such as data transmission to another CPU through
MPI, or test functions that were triggered by PG/PC) is restricted to
the specified percentage of the current scan cycle time.
Restricting the cycle load can slow down communication between the
CPU and PG.
Without additional asynchronous events, the OB 1 cycle time is prolonged by a
factor which can be calculated according to the following formula:
Cycle time (real) = cycle time x 100 / (100 - "cycle load (%)")
Clock Memory
Clock memories are bit memories that change their binary value periodically
(pulse-to-pause ratio 1:1). Each bit in the clock memory byte is assigned a
particular period/frequency.
Example of a flashing light with a flashing frequency of 2Hz:
Q8 .7
111 . 3
Page 12
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
CPU Properties: General (amongst others MPI Address)
Tine-of-Day Interrupts I Cyclic Interrupts I Diagnostics/Clock I Protection I Communication

General
I Startup I Cycle/Clock Memory I Retentive Memory I Interrupts I
CPU 315-2 DP
Short Description:
164 KB work memory; 0.3 ms/1000 instructions; MPt. DP comection (DP

Imaster or DP slave); multi-tier configure Properties - MPI intefface CPU 315-2 OP (ROM) ;
Receive capabity for lateral communic
routing, firmware V1.1
General Parameters I
6E57 315-24F0313680 / V1.1
Address:
12
-7-1
315-2 DPI
Highest address. 31
Order No / firmware
ICPU
Name.
7 Interface
Type
Transmission rate. 187.5 Kbps
MPI
Address:
Networked:
Yes
Subnet
Properties...
not networked -131011

11.111.11MEIMET
New...
E
Properties
Comment
Delete
OK
Cancel I Help
OK
/1
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_05E.13

"General" Tab
The "General" tab page provides information about the type of module, its
location and, in the case of programmable modules, the MPI address.
MPI Address
If you want to network several PLCs using the MPI interface, you must assign a
different MPI address to each CPU.
Click the "Properties..." button to open the "Properties - MPI Interface" dialog
window, which contains the "General" and "Parameters" tabs.

Page 13
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Saving Station Names in the CPU
I Display object properties automatic* whie inserting
P Enable exchange of modules and racks

P Confirm deletion of objects
- Display of configuration tables
Display Size:
!Standard
Auto Menge
Packing density of the slaves
ItiiednAm
R Save object names in the PLC
[D a My_Project
My_Station
rff Save window arrangement on exit

7
1.
.
Update hardware diagnostics cyclic*
Update Cycle
p sr S7-Program
1:11
r Deactivated
Via Internet
Default
Internet addass for product support information
Ihttp://wowsiemens.com/autornabon/stepThwconfig1
OK
Date:
File:
Area of Use
- Product support information
al Sources
tU Blocks:*
My_MM420
My_TP170B
SIMATIC S7
10
18.09.2009
SERV1_05E.14
Cancel I Help
rd SITRAIN Training for
wi
When the checkbox is activated (check marked), the identifier of modules, DP

slaves, racks and stations are also included in the system data and are loaded into
the modules together with the system data. You enter the identifier in the
"General" tab of the objects.
This has the benefit that when you download the station !nto the PG (without
having the configuration information for the station), the object names are
contained in the station configuration.
Handling
Activate the "Hardware Config" tool and select the Options -> Settings menu
options.
Note
This function makes the loaded or diagnosed stations more transparent, however
also increases the load memory requirements!
SITRAIN
Training for
Page 14
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Saving the Setpoint Configuration and Downloading it in Modules
JJ jc
HW Config - [SIMATIC 300(1) (Configuration) -- My_Project]

el Station Edit Insert PLC View Mons Window Help
Ctd+N
C
C81+0
Open ONLINE
nose
j2s1
Save
Ctr1+5
Consistency Check
Cher 1.
C131+Alt+IC
Ctrl+Alt+F
Compatibility
004+P
Print Preview...
Page Setup...
Fanwee
1 My Project\SIMATIC 300(1)
2 LusftungInitialsierung57_300 Ration
3 My_Project1,S7_300 Statim
4 SE.1182_,RS7 31309tabon
MPI a.. I add... Q... Commit

2
0...3
Alt+F4
Exit
7 11 Al2x1213it
8
Download
8
8
304...307
SES 7 331.M601-n48o
(only when CPU is

in STOP mode)
..
Saves and creates al system data in the current station.
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_050.15
nv
Training for
` S TRAIN
I
ISI Automation and Industrial
Solutions
Save
You select the Station Save menu to save the current configuration in the
current project (without generating system data blocks).
Save and Compile
When you select the Station - Save and Compile menu or click the icon in the
toolbar, the configuration and parameter assignment data are also saved in
system data blocks.
Consistency Check
You select the Station 4 Consistency Check menu to check whether it is

possible to generate configuration data from the entries made.
Download in Module You select the PLC 4 Download menu or click the icon in the toolbar to
download the selected configuration to the PLC. The PLC must be in "STOP"
mode!
System Data
The system data blocks (SDBs) are generated and modified when you configure
the hardware and compile the hardware configuration. SDBs contain
configuration data and module parameters. When a system data block is
downloaded, it is stored in the CPU's work memory.
This makes it easier to replace modules, because the parameter assignment
data is downloaded to the new module from the system data blocks on startup.
The PLC must be in "STOP" mode!
In the programming device, the system data blocks are saved under: Project \
Station \ CPU \ S7_program \ Blocks \ System_data.
You double-click the System data briefcase icon to see the list of system data
blocks.
SITRAIN
Training for
Page 15
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Uploading the Actual Configuration to the PG

I II Manager /My Protect D:. /_Lourses My_Proie]
aj PM Olt Insert IPZ Wow Osten, Widow He
1o
I rr IP 1
El ( J My_Plogen
SOteCee
Blocks
AccmRchts
vL
Download
Configure...
Ctr
CH-4-E
Which module do you want to reach?
Compile and Download Objects...

Upload to PG
Rack
Copy RAM to ROM...

Download User Program to Memory Ca,
Slot
Save to Memory Card..,

Retrievefrom Memory Card-.
Target Station:
Manage M7 System...
Local
Can be reached by means of gateway
Drive
Display Accent* Nodes
Change Module IdentficatIonCPU Messages...
Display Force Values
Montor/Modify Variables
Diagrestic/Seeke
Enter connection to target station:

MPI address I Module type I Station name I Module name I Mark designation
2
CPU 315-...
Accessible Nodes
INIM=1:21E1111
PROMO
Edlt Diernet
Assign PG/PC
Camel PG/PC Asogriment
Update Firmware
pleats the pedalo System...

Save Service Data...
Up date
1.1
uploads the current station cafroureen to the creadan system (conflpealesn and wow,
Cancel
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Introduction
18.09.2009
SERV1_05E.16
I Help I

A configuration is necessary only in the following cases:

if you want to modify the basic module settings
for stations with distributed I/O
for S7-400 with several CPUs or with expansion racks
You can read out the actual configuration from the CPU and look at the set
parameters in an existing system.
Actual Configuration During startup, the CPU generates an actual configuration. That is, the CPU
saves the arrangement of the modules and allocates the addresses in
accordance with a fixed algorithm. If no parameters have been assigned, the
default parameters defined at the factory are used.
The system stores this actual configuration in system data blocks.
Uploading to PG/PC
There are two ways of uploading the actual configuration to the PG/PC:
1. In the SIMATIC Manager:
select the PLC 4 Upload Station to PG... menu.
2. In the HW Config tool:
select the PLC 4 Upload menu or click the icon.
Storage on PG/PC
The actual configuration read from the hardware is inserted as a new station in
the selected project on the PG/PC.
Note
When you read out the actual configuration, the order numbers of the modules
cannot be completely identified. For this reason, you should check the
configuration. If required, insert the exact module type of the existing modules.
To do so, choose the module, and then select the Options -> Specify Module
menu.
Page 16
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Exercise 1: Adapting the Setpoint Configuration

a:HW Config - [SIMATIC 300(1) (Configuration) -- My_Project]
Station Edt Insert PLC View Options Window He
0 2-, st.i dif I 1 Ral 1111 * el I IIL73 I

1339811111111111111111111111
1
2
X2
9.111
PS 307 54
CPU 315-2 DP
DP
4
5
6
7
R
fird
frolic
D1323d)C24V
D032rDC24V/0.54
D18/D08x24V/0.5A
Al2x129it
E
E
E
SIMATIC 400
p-- SIMATIC HMI Station
E 1111SIMATIC PC Based Control 300/400
E
SIMATIC PC Station
71
4.141 (0) UR
sia
1
2
..1/4.."
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
i Module
PS 30754
B CPU 315-2 DP
DP
D132)0C24V
D032sDC24V/0.54
D18/D0EN24V/0.54
Al2x12130
I S tandem!
PR OF1BUS DP
PROFIBUS-PA
PROFINET 10
Order number
6ES7 3074 EA00-06A0
6ES7 315-2AF03-0ABO
Rimers
M...
I ...
Q...
Comment
..
V1.1
/au
13ES 7 321-1BLOO-OAA0
6ES7 322-113L00416A0
6ES7 3231 BH00-06A0
6ES7 331.710301-N30
0...3
8
4...7
8
SIMATIC S7-300147-300 and C7 modules
central rack)
ml
Press Ft to get Help.
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_05E.17

Task
Since different training units and CPUs are used for the courses, the CPU
available has to be integrated into the setpoint configuration.
What to Do
1. Open the given HW Station with the HW-Config tool

SIMATIC Manager (Offline view) -> select the HW-Station "S7 300 Station"
9 double-click on the "Hardware" object
2. Click on the icon (see left) to have the Hardware Catalog appear.
3. In the Hardware Catalog, select the CPU used in the training unit and bring it
to Slot 2 using drag and drop.
5. Acknowledge the message "Do you want to exchange the component with
the order number .......... for the component with the order number ..........
4. Also check all other modules.
6. Save and compile the configuration with the icon.

7. Download the modified hardware configuration into the CPU.
8. Exit the HW-Config tool.
SITRAIN
Training for
Page 17
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Exercise 2: Assigning Parameters to the CPU Clock Memory and Testing It

,
=1Q.121
a:HW Conlin - [SIMATIC 300(1) (Configuration) -- My_Project]

gation Edit Insert EEC View Qptions Window Help
51 I
D
t: a
II
tll
01111IIMIN=11111
ms*
PS 307 50
r- CPU 315-2 DP
DP
4
5
6
7
5
1
X
...11
II DI32xDC24V
II D032xDC24V/0.54
II D18./D08ex24V/0.5A
II Al2x1213it
Timepl.Day Interrupts I Cyclic Interrupts 1 Diagnostics/Clock I Protection I Communication I

Cycle/Clock Memory
I Retentive Memory I
General
I Startup
Interrupts
Cycle
Update OBI process image cyclically
Scan cycle monitoring time [ms1:

Minimum scan cycle
50
Scan cycle bedlam communication [511
Fr
Size of the process image
11_1
11 2d
E (0) UR
0885 call up at I/O access error:
Order number
S7 307-1EA00-0AA0
6E S 7 315-2AF03-0ABO
Slot f Module
6ES 7 321-1 BL00-0440
5
6
7
8
9
10
D:
D18.
Al2,
Arrangement of
EL
tar - 49
tl
DI-1611
r Clock Memory
1.7 Clock memory
Memory Byte:
4 Address
Symbol
10
1;
tables
Table Edit Insert PLC
I No 0B85 call up
,_1171.
12Si
Variable View Options Window Help
Iffiblel -I-I 11 F;J_I kl_?1 cY_F

fe
I Modify value'
Displa Status value
Cancel
I Help
01111111111At.;.
My_Project SIMATIC 300(1)
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Task
18.09.2009
SERV1_05E.18
iv

Assign parameters to the CPU in such a way that the clock memory byte is
available on memory byte MB 10.
Then check the success of your parameter assignment with the "Monitor/Modify
Variable" function.
What to Do:
1. Start the HW-Config tool

SIMATIC Manager (Offline view) -> select the HW-Station "S7 300 Station"
- double-click on the "Hardware" object
2. Parameterize the MB10 memory byte as the CPU clock memory byte
HW Config - double-click on CPU 9 Cycle / Clock Memory
3. Save and compile the modified configuration
Station 4 Save and Compile
4. Download the modified configuration into the CPU
PLC 4 Download
5. Exit the HW Config tool
6. Use the function "Monitor/Modify Variable" to monitor the MB10 memory byte
in the "binary" display format to be able to see the individual bits with the
flashing frequencies
In the SIMATIC Manager, select the CPU of the HW Station 4 PLC 4
Monitor/Modify Variable 4 enter MB 10 in the Variable Table address field
4 using a right mouse-click, set the display format to "binary" 4 activate the
function using the Glasses icon
Page 18
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Note
18.09.2009
SERV1_05E.19
lir
complete a topic.
Page 19
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
CPU Properties
EL:11W Config - [SIMATIC 300(1) (Configuration) My_Project]
011 Station Edit Insert PLC View Options Wildow Help
JCicirt-e
CIE101111111111=r 1
1 PS 307 5A
2
Xl
3
4
5
6
7
N,
2x
1- CPU 31:2bi.
I- DP
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Time-of-Day Interrupts
Cyclic Interrupts I Diagnostics/Clock I Protection I Communication
General
I Startup I
Cycle/Clock Memory
I
Retentive Memory
I Interrupts
I
Short Description:
CPU 315-2 DP
64 KB work memory; 0.3 ms/1000 instructions; MP1+ DP connection (D pz-J
master or DP slave); multi-tier configuration up to 32 modules, Send and
Receive capability for lateral communication, constant bus cycle time,
routing, firmware V1.1
Order No./ firmware
6ES7 315-2AF03-64130 / V1.1
Name:
ICPU 315-2 DP
r Interface
412141
.
1 (0) UR
.
X?
_xj
DI32xDC24V
D032x0C24V/0.5A
DI8/D0EQ4V/0 54
412x1280
;1
Slot
1
2
I
Properties - CPU 315-2 DP - (R0/S2)
Type:
MPI
Module
PS 30754
CPU 315-2 DP
DP
Order number
6E57 3071 EA004440
Address:
6ES7 315-2AF03-OADO
Networked:
Yes
DI32xDC24V
D032xDC24V/0.54
I
DI8/D08x24V/0.54
.412x1284
6ES7 321-1BLOO.OAAO
6E57 322-113L00-0AA0
6ES7 323-113H00-04A0
6ES7 331-7K801-0030
Comment:
Cancel
OK
I Help
/41
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_05E.20

Assigning
Parameters
You assign parameters to the modules to adapt them to the requirements of

the process.
What to do
1. Select a module in the station window.

2. Double-click the selected module to open the "Properties" dialog window.
3. This dialog window contains ten tabs in which you can assign parameters
for the various CPU characteristics (see next pages).
Page 20
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
CPU Properties: Startup

Properties - CPU 315-2 DP - (R0/52)
Time-of-Day Interrupts
Cyclic Interrupts 1 Diagnostics/Clock 1 Protection 1 Communication
Startup
General
Cycle/Clock Memory
1
Retentive Memory
1
Interrupts
1
Startup if preset configuration does not match actual configuration
Reset outputs at hot restart
Disable hot restart by operator (for example, from PG)

or communication job (for example, from MPI stations).
Startup after Power On
H ot restart
a Warm restart
r Cold restart
Monitoring Time for

"Finished' message from modules [100 ms]
1650
Transfer of parameters to modules [100 ms]
1100
Hot restart [100 ms):
OK
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Startup
Characteristics
Cancel
18.09.2009
SERV1_05E.21
I Help

Automation and industrial Solutions
The S7-300 and S7-400 CPUs have different startup characteristics.

Only with CPUs with integrated DP interface (and S7-400) can you use the
"Startup if preset configuration does not match actual configuration" checkbox to
decide whether the CPU should start up if the setpoint configuration is not the
same as the actual configuration (number and type of modules installed).
The other S7300 CPUs go into RUN when the setpoint configuration is not the
same as the actual configuration.
Warm Restart
The S7-300 only recognizes the "Warm restart" startup. Newer S7-CPUs also
recognize "Cold restart". All non-retentive addresses (PII, PIQ, non-retentive bit
memories, timers, counters) are reset (overwritten by 0) and the cyclic program
execution starts at the beginning.
Cold Restart
Cold restart behaves the same as Warm restart, except that ALL - even the
retentive memory areas - are reset.
Hot Restart
All - even the non-retentive - memory areas retain their contents and program
execution restarts where it stopped.
Monitoring Times
"Finished" message from modules (x100ms):

Maximum time for all modules to issue a Finished message after power
ON. If the modules do not send a Finished message to the CPU within this
time, the actual configuration is not equal to the setpoint configuration.
Transfer of parameters to modules (x100ms):

Maximum time for "distributing" the parameters to the parameterassignable modules (timing begins after "Finished message from modules").
If, after the monitoring time has run out, all modules have not been assigned
parameters, then the actual configuration is not equal to the setpoint
configuration.
Page 21
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
CPU Properties: Retentive Memory

Time-of-Day Interrupts I Cyclic Interrupts I Diagnostics/Clock 1 Protection

Retentive Memory
Cycle/Clock Memory
I
General
I Startup
Communication
Interrupts
Retentivity
16
Number of memory bytes starting with MBO:

Number of S7 timers starting with TO:
Number of S7 counters starting with CO:
Areas
DB No.
Byte Address
Number of Bytes
Retentive Area 1:
[C7
Retentive Area 2:
Retentive Area 3:
Relevant only for CPUs

until Oct. 2002 that
have no backup
battery
[7
rc7--
Retentive Area 4:
ib---
Retentive Area 5:
R etentive Area 6:
Retentive Area 7:
I7
Retentive Memory
ra--Cancel
OK
SIMATIC S7
Io
FT
Retentive Area 8:
Date:
File:
Siemens AG 2008. An rights reserved.
lU
18.09.2009
SERV1_05E.22
lik;
Help

The "Retentive Memory" tab page is used for specifying the memory areas to be
retained after a power failure or during the transition from STOP to RUN.
A "warm restart" is performed in both cases on the S7-300.
Warm Restart with

Backup Battery
On warm restart, tne blocks stored in the battery-backed RAM (OB, FC, FB,
DB) as well as the bit memories, timers and counters defined as retentive
are retained. Only the non-retentive bit memories, timers and counters are reset.
Warm Restart
without
Backup Battery
If the RAM is not battery-backed, the information in it is lost. Only the bit
memories, timers and counters defined as retentive and the retentive data
block areas are saved in the non-volatile RAM area.
After a warm restart (without battery backup), the program must be downloaded
again:
from the memory card (if inserted) or
from the PG/PC (if no memory card exists).
Note
SITRAIN
For CPUs delivered after Oct. 2002, a backup battery is no longer necessary.
All retentive data is saved on the MMC card in case of a power failure.
Training for
Page 22
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
CPU Properties: Protection
General
Startup
Cycle/Clock Memory
Time-of-Day Interrupts I Cyclic Interrupts

Protection level
Interrupts
Protection I Communication
Process mode
I Removable with password
Retentive Memory
Mode
6.1: Keyswitch setting
Diagnostics/Clock
Permissible cycle increase via

test functions:
2: Write-protection
3: Write-/read protection
( Test mode
Password:
Enter again:
OK
SIMATIC S7
__:_l
Car ocel
Date:
File:
Siemens AG 2008_ All rights reserved.
18.09.2009
SERV1_05E.23
Help
211 SITRAIN
Training for
Default Setting
Default setting (protection level 1; no password assigned):

The keyswitch position on the CPU determines the protection level:
Keyswitch in RUN-P or STOP position: no restrictions
Keyswitch in RUN position: read-only access possible!
Password
If a protection level was assigned with a password (only valid until a memory
reset), a "person who knows the password" has reading and writing access.
"The person who doesn't know the password" has the following restrictions:
protection level 1: corresponds to the default setting
protection level 2: read-only access possible, irregardless of the
keyswitch setting
protection level 3: neither reading nor writing access possible,
regardless of the keyswitch setting.
Characteristics of a Password-Protected Module in Operation

Example: if you want to execute the "Modify Variable" function, you must enter
the password for a module that has been assigned the protection level 2
parameter.
Access Rights
Mode
SITRAIN
You can also enter the password for a protected module in the SIMATIC
Manager:
1. Select the protected module or its S7 program
2. Enter the password when you select the PLC Access Rights menu.
The access rights, after a password has been entered, is only valid until
the last S7 application is completed.
The cycle load for test functions depends on which of the following modes you
select.
In Process Mode, test functions such as "Monitor" or "Monitor/Modify Variable"
are restricted so that the allowable scan cycle time that has been set can not be
exceeded. Testing with breakpoints and single-step (program execution) cannot
be performed.
In Test Mode, all test functions through the PG/PC can be used without
restrictions, even if the scan cycle time is greatly increased.
Training for
Page 23
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
CPU Properties: Diagnostics/Clock

General I Startup I Cycle/Clock Memory I Retentive Memory I Interrupts

Diagnostics/Clock I Protection I Communication I
Time-of-Day Interrupts ICyclic Interrupts
System Diagnostics
r Extended functions
17
Report caused STOP
r Acknowledgment-triggered reporting of SFB33-35

Clock
Synchterization
Time Interval
Synchronization Type
In the PLC:
INone
INone
2, j
On MPI:
INone
1
.
1
INone
1-1
On MFI:
I l one
LI
INone
II
Correction factor:
OK
ID
ms
Cancel
Help
A
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
System Diagnostics
18.09.2009
SERV1_05E.24

If the "Report cause of STOP" checkbox is deactivated (not checked), no

message is sent to the PG/PC or OP when the CPU goes into Stop mode ("CPU
Messages").
The cause of the stop is still entered in the diagnostic buffer.
Clock
With networked stations, it is possible to synchronize clocks. Thus, for example,

a WinCC flexible station can synchronize all remote S7 stations to its own time
of day in a selectable time interval.
It is, however, also possible to automatically reset the clock by a specific
correction value in stand-alone devices.
Correction Factor
The correction factor compensates for a loss or gain in the clock time within a
24 hour period.
Positive or negative millisecond values can be specified.
Example:
If the clock is 3 seconds fast after 24 hours, this inaccuracy can be corrected
with the "-3000ms" factor.
Note
The "Interrupts", "Time-Of-Day Interrupts" and "Cyclic Interrupt" tabs are

discussed in the "Organization Blocks" chapter.
Page 24
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
CPU Properties: Communication

General
Startup
Cycle/Clock Memory
Retentive Memory
Time-of-Day Interrupts I Cyclic Interrupts I Diagnostics/Clock I Protection
I
Interrupts
I
Communication
Connection Resources Reserved for

PG Communication:
OP Communication:
S7 Basic Communication:
S7 Communication:
Maximum number of connection resources:
12
OK
SIMATIC S7
Communication
Cancel
Date:
File:
(already configured)
18.09.2009
SERV1_05E.25
I Help
17-

Every communication connection occupies a connection resource on the S7CPU. Depending on the technical specifications, a specific number of possible
connection resources are available to every S7 - CPU which are occupied by
various communication services (PG/OP communication, S7 communication or
S7 standard communication).
When communication services log on, the connection resources are occupied in
the sequence of the log on.
So that the occupation of these resources is not dependent only on the
sequence of the log on of the various communication services, you can also
reserve communication resources for the following services:
PG communication
OP communication
S7 standard communication
At least one connection resource each is reserved for the PG/PC and OP
communication. Smaller values are not possible.
Other communication services, such as S7 Communication with PUT/GET
functions, cannot occupy these connection resources even if the services make
their connection first.
Instead, still available connection resources are occupied that were not
specifically reserved for a service.
Page 25
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Further Processing of Hardware Stations

in the CA01 Electronic Catalog
Export function
Import function
[Hardware
S7 Hardware
CA01
Electronic Catalog
Station
Order lists
E-mail dispatch
Further processing
with text editors
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_05E.26
,1 SITRAIN Training for
41
Importing and Exporting a Configuration
Introduction
As of STEP 7 V5, it is possible to handle station configurations not only together

with the entire project (such as, save or open), but also to resave them
independent of the project in a text file (ASCII file).
Applications
can be distributed through electronic media (such as e-mail)

configuration of order data in the electronic catalog CA01 (Export)
generation of hardware configuration data from the CA01 (Import)
can be read into future STEP 7 versions

the Export file can be printed out with text processor systems or can be
further processed for documentation purposes
Page 26
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Exporting a Hardware Station

aa7HW Config - [S7_300_Station (Configuration) SERVI_S[
Station Edit Insert PLC View Options Windo
Ctrl+N
Ctrl+O
Open ONLINE
Help
op iv?
111111111111111111111111
ii
Close
Save
Save and Compile
5
6
78
9
1--
Ctr1+5
PROF'S USl1 ) DP master system [I )
T
tams
Properties...
Import...
Export...
Consistency Check
Ctrl+Alt44(
Ctrl+Alt+F
Check OP. Coop t.b
Ctrl+P
Export Fie:
Print Preview...
Page Setup...
Browse
D: \ S7_Courses S7_300_Station.cfg
I SERVI_SS7_300_Stetion
2 My_ProjectSIMATIC 300(1)
Options
3 LueftunglnitialsierungL57_300_Station
r Export default values
4 My_ProjectLS7_300_Station
Exit
Alt+F4
10
11
I Export symbols
I7 Export subnets
Format
(7 Readable
r Compact
12
Exports an extstng station.
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File
Exporting
Cancel
Save
18.09.2009
SERV1_05E.27
Help

gir
Open a station configuration or save the just edited station configuration (Menu
option Station 9 Save).
With the station configuration open, select the menu option Station 9 Export.
In the dialog box that then appears, enter the path and the name of the Export
File, the format and other options.
Acknowledge the settings with "Save".
Page 27
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
CA01: Selection Assistant for SIMATIC
ASST
Offline Mall
SILIUMERIK 8 SIMODRIVE
Fid
aroTirne PCS7
nrk
apHonfigurator
tAhn-SPSOST ART
Extended search
Tree search
SNIATIC
ABC Industual Automation Systems - PLC
Interactive Catalog Siemens Automation and Driv
Lt....? Drive Technology

SIMATIC cord' oilers
11,1[2i Automation Systems
From the corrnact mini controller including the high-pe
gr SIMATIC Industrial Automation Systems
meet every demarn and every requirement, whatever
I 1 Ela.,,k[i! PLC
I I EI:Ky Distributed I/0s
SIMATIC selection assistant - Project Manager
Programming Devices
II I
[a}-f SIMATIC Industrial soh, File Edt Paste View Settings ?
Micro Automation Sets
Pa-14) Comment based Autor
INts1
T IA-Programmer 1
SIMATIC selection assistant - Project

[ File Edit
Paste
Import ...
View
Settings
File Name:
C:1abc
let
Archiv_11_2003.cs
Archiv_4_2004. cry
ARCHNI_BM_MELI
ARCHIV_KURVENi
ARCHIV_SM_MELI
ARCHIV_System0. c
chwinto.bd
shier& ET.te
IM000047.JPG
K7 Antrieb PC FW
[A12411E1
Folder:
Properties
Selection assistant
STEP 7
bc
~' a
_j I 0 S_U
koordinator
54
te:r .ritation cra
Project
test_20_05_2003 02:1
c PANTZON
Project Na:
Ecited front
Deatect
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Selection Assistant
Michael Jantzon
11 ,
18.09.2009
SERV1_05E.28
Changed:

With the SIMATIC selection assistant, you can make the necessary preparations
for importing a STEP7 hardware configuration file (<Name>.cfg).
Specifying a project name and defining project properties
Selecting the appropriate configuration file
Using the import function

Page 28
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Parts List and Description
,JoI2_cf
SIMATIC selection assistant - Project Manager
Fte Eck Paste View Settings ?
_m11;7
4111
Einks4,4_u2 gifil
TA-Programmer 1
Properties
ISM
Order number
6ES7307-1EA00-06A0
6ES7321-18L00-04A0
6ES7322-1BL00-O8A0
SES 7390-1AE804.1AA0
6ES 7392-14100-130.13
Pads list
A
Descript
System
Designation
List price
Quantity
Total price
Load power supply PS 307; AC 120/23N, DC
1 upon request upon request
Digital input SM 321, isolated, 32 DI, DC 24V
Digital output 32D0, DC 24V, 0.5A; isolated
480 ram rag (*ogle mod width 40 mm)
1 uron request upon request
Front connector, 40-pole, with screw contact
Total price:
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Parts List
18.09.2009
SERV1_05E.29
upon request

Illtr
Using the CA01 Catalog CD and the various register tabs, you can get
information about module component lists, pricing etc.
Page 29
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Symbolic Addressing
W:Symbol Editor - [S7 Program(2) (Symbols) -- My_Project \SIMATIC 3000Y\
yrnbol Table Edit Insert Mew Options Window Help
far, IA
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
1 &
1 4 ith 1ft I ..--) c-, I lAi Symbols
Status I Symbol /
L_Weight_hvalid
1 L_SYSTEM
1 L_MAN
L_AUTO
L_Restart man
L_Resteart_aut
L_Conv_Faut
L_Faull1
L_Faut2
L_Faut3
L_S4_1411
L_S5_3,-LB
L_S6_Final_Check
L_Bsy1
L_Bay2
L_Bay3
L_Bay-LB
K_Conv_RIGHT
H_Conv_LEFT
Horn
QB_Simulator-LED
QW_DigDisp
Cl1N_Control 141420
QW_Setp_141420
DEI_Instance_FB20_F...
DB_Instance_FB20_F...
DB_FB11_RurningLight
DB_F1317_Fault
Address
Q
4.0
0
4.1
Q
42
0
43
0
4S
0
4.6
0
5.0
0
5.1
Q
52
0
53
0
5.4
0
5.5
0
5.6
0
8.1
0
82
0
83
0
8.4
I Dab:trim
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
13001.
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
13001
BOOL
BOOL
0
8.6
0
8.7
OB 5
GAM 6
GAM 42
8001
BOOL
BYTE
WORD
WORD
WORD
FB 20
FB 20
FI3 11
FB 17
0 es
ON 44
DB
0f3
DB
DB
2
3
11
17
eax
SIMATIC S7
r:']
.....s..9 1 k?
I Comment
Indicator light - weigN invalid
Indicator fight MAN mode
bcficator light Automatic mode
Indicator light for manual wean rested
Indicator fight for automatic warm rested
Imitator fight Conveyor fault
Indicator igN Fault 2
Indicator Nil Fault 3
Indicate. fight Wing at Bay 3
Indicator light Transport Bay 3 -> Light barrier bay
Indcator fight Fnal check at LB bay
Indeater fight Bay 1
Indcator light Bay 2
Indicator tit Light barrier bay
Run conveyer RIGHT
Run conveyor LEFT
Horn
lower Simulator LEDs
BCD cigltal display
Control word for 144420
Setpoint speed for 144420
Instance DB for F1320, Evaluation of Fault 2
Instance DB for F1320, Evaluation of Fat 3
Instance DB for FBIl_RtrningLight
Instance DB for F1317 Faut evahation
Press F1 to get Help
1----
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_06E.1
I I
1,
.1
4
lir

Contents
Page
...........................................................................................................
Objectives
2
Absolute and Symbolic Addressing
3
Symbolic Addressing
4
The Symbol Table
5
Edit: Find and Replace
6
View: Filter
7
View: Sort
8
......... 9
Editing Symbols in the LAD/STL/FBD Editor
Symbol Information in the LAD/STL/FBD Editor
....... 10
Symbol Selection in LAD/FBD
....... 11
Symbol Table: Export
....... 12
13
Symbol Table: Import
....... 14
Exercise 1: Creating a Symbol Table for the Conveyor Model
Page 1
ST-SERV1
Symbolic Addressing
SIEMENS
Objectives
know the difference between absolute and symbolic addressing
know the difference between local and global symbols
know the difference betweeen leading symbols and leading
absolute addresses
be able to edit a global symbol table
be able to use the Block Editor to edit global symbols
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_06E.2
Page 2
ll
gi
ST-SERV1
Symbolic Addressing
SIEMENS
Absolute and Symbolic Addressing

Absolute Representation
Symbolic Representation
10.0
"SYSTEM_ON"
Q8.0
A
"LED ON"
10.4
"M_FORW"
Q20.5
Call
"MOTOR_FOR"
FC18
Call
"COUNT"
Symbol
Address
Data Type
Comment
MOTOR_FOR
Q20.5
BOOL
Motor moves forward
COUNT
FC18
FC18
Count bottles
SYSTEM_ON
10.0
BOOL
Switch system on
SYSTEM_ON
Q8.0
BOOL
Indicator: System is "On"
M_FORW
10.4
BOOL
Pushbutton: Motor forward
(max. 24 characters)
SIMATIC S7
(max. 80 characters)
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_06E.3
tiT
.61

Absolute
Addressing
In absolute addressing, you specify the address (such as input I 1.0) directly. In
this case you don't need a symbol table, but the program is harder to read.
Symbolic
Addressing
In symbolic addressing, you use symbols (such as MOTOR_ON) instead of the

absolute addresses.
You store the symbols for inputs, outputs, timers, counters, bit memories and
blocks in the symbol table.
Page 3
ST-SERV1
Symbolic Addressing
SIEMENS
Symbolic Addressing
Where are symbols used?
Where are they stored?
Global Data:
- Inputs
- Outputs
- Bit mem., timers, counters
- Peripheral I/O
Symbol Table
Symbol Editor
Local Block Data:

- Block parameters
- local / temporary data
Declaration part of the

block
Program Editor
Jump Labels
Code section of the

block
Program Editor
Block Names:
- OB
- FB
- FC
- DB
- VAT
- UDT
Symbol Table
Symbol Editor
DB Components
Declaration part of the DB
Program Editor
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
With what are they created?
18.09.2009
SERV1_06EA
4r

Global Symbols
Global symbols are declared in the symbol table and can be used in all blocks
of a program.
The name in the symbol table must be unique, that is, a symbolic name must
appear only once in the table.
Local Symbols
Local symbols are declared in the declaration part of a block. They can be used
only within that block.
The same symbolic name can be used again in the declaration part of another
block.
Notes
The LAD/STL/FBD Editor always displays symbols declared in the global

symbol table in quotation marks. Local address symbols (local variables and
parameters) are always displayed with a # (hash or pound mark) in front of
them.
You don't have to include the quotation marks or the hash mark when you enter
symbolic addresses. The program editor automatically adds these for you.
Abbreviations
OB
Organization blocks (administration blocks)
FC
Functions (are used for program structuring)
FB
DB
Function blocks (instantiation)

Data blocks (store process data in the S7)
VAT Variable tables (monitoring instrument for process variables)
UDT User-defined data types (data type defined by the user)
Page 4
ST-SERV1
Symbolic Addressing
SIEMENS
The Symbol Table

MyProtect -- D: \Courses \MyProject
MyPioject
0111 S7_300_Station
_DJ
1
12
Sources
Blocks
yi
CPU 315-2 DP
S7ptogram
E
al Sources
Blocks
E i MICROMASTER_420
2 Touchpanel
E
II
,.1.g125.1
-a,Symbol Editor - (57program (Symbols) MyProject 57_300 Station\
2_cl
Symbol Table Edit Insert View motions Window
irakia a
y,
Statu Swift(
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
OB WartnRestart
L_SYSTEM
L MAN
L_AUTO
L_Restart_man
L_Restart_aut
L_Conv_Faut
X
L_Faut2
L_Fault3
= L_Eavl
61
L_Bay2
= L_Bayl
62
63
L_Bay-LB
84
K Cony RIGHT
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
I WI
Symbols
Address '
013 100
Q
4.1
0
4.2
0
4.3
0
4.5
0
4.6
0
5.0
0
5.1
0
52
0
5.3
0
8.1
0
82
0
6.3
0
8.4
0 8.5
18.09.2009
SERV1_06E.5
Data type
013 100
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL.
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
eoo1
Comment
Warm restart OB
Indicator tight System ON
hclicetor ION MAN mode
Include( nigh/ Automatic nada
Indicator tight for mental warm restart
Indicator NM for aulanath wean restart
Indicator WI Faut 2
Indicator Ugh Fault 3
Indicator NM Bay 1
Indicator NM Bay 3
Indicator ight Light barrier bay
Run conveyor RIGHT
--
gee

Opening the
Symbol Table
Every "S7 program" has its own symbol table. You can open a symbol table
from the SIMATIC Manager, among other ways, with a double-click on the
"Symbols" icon.
You can also open the symbol table from the LAD/STL/FBD Editor using the
Options - Symbol Table menu option.
Table Structure
In the symbol table, a line is created for every variable. You then enter the
symbol name, the address, the data type and a comment for the variable in the
columns. A blank line is automatically added at the end of the table for defining
a new symbol.
"Status" Column
Invalid symbol definitions are marked as follows in this column:

= The symbol name or address is identical to another entry in the symbol
table.
X The symbol is incomplete (the symbol name and/or the address is missing).
Note
As soon as a symbol table has been created, the declared symbols are also
available in all other tools (such as LAD/STL/FBD Editor, HW-Config, and
Monitor/Modify Variables etc.).
Page 5
ST-SERV1
Symbolic Addressing
SIEMENS
Edit: Find and Replace

Symbol Editor - [57 Program(2) (Symbols) -- My_Project\SIMATIC 300(1)\CPU 315-2 DP]
He
a Symbol Table IEdit Insert View Options Window

CtrI+27
Ctri-i-Y
Undo
r cell
Status
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
Cut
Copy
Pa5te
Ctrl+X
Ctrl+C
Delete
Del
Select
Undo Selection
We type
001
001
001
OOL
001
001
OOL
Comment
Momertary contact System ON
Momentary collect System OFF (NC collect)
Jog conveyor LEFT, momertary collect
Swtch - Operating Mode Preselect '0.
Momertery contact, confirm operating mode
0 Display quality, 1 - Display weight
Momentary collect to acknowledge warm restart display
41AMJAL,
IP
Go To Row...
Add Defauk Symbols
kener ate ',DE;
Special Object Properties
_otty.D
T_Bay-LB
BAY1
BAY2
BAY3
IN
PNThcanbw
PA(
AN_State_MM420
Ctr1+%Al
Ctrl-FE
Oa_
OOL
OOL
001
8.4
8S
8.6
8.7
2
42
COL
LiOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOX
BOOL
WORD
WORD
r Suchberei:h
r Von Cursorposition
thwarts
SIMATIC S7
Von Cursorposition
aufwarts
Guard
r Markiltung
Opbonen
ma Widcards suchen
r GroB/Kleinschrerbung beachtan
Suchen I
Date:
File:
2.1 Reduziert I
r Nu genes Wort suchen
Looks for text or replaces text in the arrant symbol table.
Ersetzen dick
1A4.
Suchen neck
IA8.
18.09.2009
SERV1_06E.6
Erseten
I Ale ersetzen 1
Schis8en 1
Hie
_.111 SITRAIN Training for
Find and Replace
A number of options are available for finding and replacing text in the current
window:
Find what:
Enter the text you are looking for.
Replace with:
Enter the replacement text.
From cursor down:
Searches downwards to the last line in the symbol table.
From cursor up:
Searches upwards to the first line in the symbol table.
Match case:
Only searches for the specified text with identical use of uppercase and
lowercase letters.
Find whole words only:
Searches for the specified text as a separate word, not as part of a longer
word.
All:
Searches through the whole symbol table, starting from the cursor position.
Selection:
Searches only the selected symbol lines.
Note
When looking for addresses, you must insert a wildcard after the address
identifier (? for one character, * for several characters), otherwise the address
cannot be found.
For find and replace:
for example, replace all outputs that have address 8. with address 4.:
Example:
Find what: Replace with:

Q 8.
Q 4.
Page 6
ST-SERV1
Symbolic Addressing
SIEMENS
View: Filter
11711 J
'Symbol Editor - [57 Program(2) (Symbols) -- My_Prolort SIMAT C 300(1) \ CPU 315-2 DPP
Sleet I Hew Options Meow He
Et, Symbol rode Eck
jranaleslxike
Stem
119
120
1 21
122
123
124
Zoom In
CITH-Nurn-r
Zoom Out
CP1+Num-
Zoom Factor...
I Del
111111111111111111111fiffar-
Ce foe Maw
Ccrumns 11, 0, M, C, CC 071+K
restart 013
-Pali far
Tooear
or-Pcri for
5C to 8w
or Iptt - we
upd.t.
or Pare Sysl
PS
or Isrt MAP
L_AUTO
0
43
BOOL
Incbcdce lett Auk
L_Reatakman
0
4.5
Indicator ept to r
1300L
L_Realart_aut
0
46
1930L
becalm 1)1 to e
L_Corn_Fati
0
5.0
DOM
tectica VI Cm
L_Fautl
0
5.1
BOO.
Indloalor Ipla Fad
L _Fault2
0
52
BOX
Indicator Ibb Fad
L_Fau1.3
0
5.3
SCOL
Indicator NMI Feel
L S466
0
5.4
00C4.
Irdicator iptt Is
L_S5_3-Ple
0
SS
13COL
Ineacetor fpM Trar
L_S6fInal_Cheick
DOM
5.5
Indicator qt Fria
L_Bayl
0
6004
Indicator aget Bay
.
Symbol Editor - [57 Prograrn(2) (Symbols) My_Project S1MATIC
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
SYmb01
OB_Cycle
OES_Cycky
081_110_FLT1
OB SlareFei
013 WarrnRe
p%' An
MNAl2
LWargrtirn
L_SYSTEM
L_MAN
Insert
Symbol Table Edit
rai:
61
Status
Vow
Et) f'
Symbol
Window Help
I r Flared yew
1 Mesas
I
8.0
81
I
82
0
8.3
II
8.4
I
8.5
1
86
I
8.7
LB
Fiters the 3
Options
TSayl
T_Bay2
T_Bey-LB
BAY1
BAY2
BAY3
I OM* Woe
I BOOL
5)00(.
BOOL
8001
BOOL
0001.
DOOL
8001
2:1
-Fier List
Na:
Filter name:
lAll Symbols
(Selection in the Symbol Table

with Alt+0, ..,Alt+9)
Dela, cs
New filter
Display Symbol with Property...
Name.
Address:
1 18
Data Type:
Comment .
.2j
'
_LI
.:_1
.:d
Monitoring:
I'
Op. Ctrl. + Monitoring:
I'
Message:
_II
z_l
I'
I'
Communication:
Control at contact:
_II
FE
Display Symbol with Status...

I Valid
lInvalid
(non-unique, incomplete)
I Cannon
WI Pm
Fifer
Cancel
Help
momectarreirmeroprourrierm-Proxbray wary Bay 1

Proyirdy mace Bay 2
Probriy sinew lbw 3
Mamba of symbols: 61172
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
View: Filter
hlorneria
18.09.2009
SERV1_06E.7
SITRAIN
Training for
Only the symbols which meet the active filter criteria ("symbol properties") are
displayed in the current window.
You can apply several criteria at once. The following filter criteria can be linked
with one another:
Name, Address, Data Type, Comment, Operator Control & Monitoring,
Communication, Message.
Permissible wildcards are ? for one character and * for several characters.
Examples
Name: M*
Only the names that begin with "M" and that contain any number of
additional characters are displayed in the symbol table.
Name: SENSOR_?
Only the names that begin with "SENSOR_" and that contain one other
character are displayed in the symbol table.
Address: 1*.*
Only the inputs are displayed.
SITRAIN
Valid, Invalid
The symbols must be unique, that is, a symbol or an address must exist
only once in the symbol table. If a symbol or an address appears more than
once, the lines in which it appears are displayed in "Bold". If your symbol
table is long, and you want to find such ambiguous symbols or addresses
more quickly, you can display only these lines of the symbol table by
Filter and the attribute "Invalid".
selecting the menu option View
Training for
Page 7
ST-SERV1
Symbolic Addressing
SIEMENS
View: Sort
v
a5ymbol
Editor - [57 Program(2) (Symbols) -- My_Project \SIN1ATIL 300(1) \ CPU 315-2 DP]
.1.2J25.1
a Symbol Tat* Edit Insertr h

rool Options Wridow Help
car, 61 !
37
IX
gla 3 la zocf"^
ZOOM Out
Zoom Factor...
Status I Symbol
FC_MM420
38
.FC_Sequenc
39
40
FC_Cornrnark
I FC_Scale
T_System_O Columns R, 0, 14, C, CC Ctrl+K
42
43
44
T_System_O
T _Jou RION'
T_Jog_LEFT
45
S_WA_Mode upd,t,
46
47
48
49
T_M/A_Acc
S_VVeight/Quantity
50
emery contact Syste

emery contact Syste
'F (NC contact)
VI collect
conveyor R101-17;r:
y coiled
-conveyor LEFT,
v. 1.Mbar
Status Bar
I
I
LB
I
I
I
T_Bay1
T_Elay2
T_Bey3
T_Bay-LB
BAY1
0.6 13001BOOL
0.7
1.0
BOOL
1.1 BOOL
1.2
BOOL
13
BOOL
8D BOOL
8.1 BOOL
8.2 BOOL
8.3 BOOL
8.4 BOOT
BOOL
8.5
I
8.8 BOOL
BAY2
I 8.7
BOOL
BAYS
60
Sorts the display according to specific criteria.
SIMATIC S7
Display quell
Momentary contact
Column:
Simulate Fault 3, Os
Light earner
Momentary contact
Momentary contact
Momentary coded
Address Ascending
Address 4..c.Pndina
Address Descending
Data Type Ascending
Data Type Descending
Comment Asc
Momentary coiled
Simulate Foul 1, 0.
Simulate Fault 2,
OK
Help
Cancel

Proximity sensor Bey 1
Proximity sensor Bev 3
Date:
File:
ch - Operathg
Sort
ary collect
FS
T_Ackn_WarrnRestarl
T_Ackn Fault
S_Faut1
S_FauL2
SFaul3
Sort
merit
ontrol MM420
.equencer for production fne
41
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
wl
Ctrl+Num+
Ctrl+Nurn-
18.09.2009
SERV1_06E.8
r--r---1
The entries in the symbol table can be displayed in alphabetical order. You use
the View - Sort menu option to specify the column to be used as the point of
reference for sorting in the current window.
There is an alternative way to sort:
1. Click the column heading "Symbol, Address, Data type or Comment" for
sorting in ascending order in this column. Answer "Yes" when prompted.
2. Click the column heading once more for sorting in descending order in this
column. Answer "Yes" when prompted.
Page 8
ST-SERV1
Symbolic Addressing
SIEMENS
Editing Symbols in the LAD/STL/FBD Editor
...L412.Jc
JJJ
j
LAD/STL/FEID - [FICI My_Project SIMATIC 300(1) CPU 315-2 DP]
CI.
File Edit Insert PLC Debug
4,-1=-11
FC1
View Options Window Help
I IeIfdL-LI E ICI F 9.1 I LLI Firt
-IFI*1-011141-4-fl
JJi
System
g...1 New network
System ON/OFF
T_Syst es_ in=

Cut
ON
SR
Copy
Ctri+X
Paste
CIAO
Delete
Del
II
r_Systak_
On
VI
E yr Bit logic
E
Comparator
Si Converter
E
Counter
DB cal
E
E
Jumps
111 mInteger function
Floating-point fct.
E
E
Move
fiA Prooram control
E -a
Ctrl+C
Insert Network
Ctrl+R
Insert Empty Box
Silt+F9
Cir1+3
Insert Symbol
Go To
Edit Symbols...
Alt+Return
Special Object Prq
ties
It Program e...
TI1141 4 11 1
6: Magna:bar
Address
Shows properti
Add to Sytobott
I Symbol
L SYSTEM
Cal struc...
7: Compaiis
Dees type I Cabbed

BOOL
INclocelor light System ON
Sorting
Delete Symbol
1 Ditpley Columns R, 0. M, C, CC
The symbols an welted eali, DE a 'Apply'
A
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Edit Symbols
18.09.2009
SERV1_06E.9
l v.
ik

With the menu option Edit 9 Symbols..., or a right mouse-click on the address
followed by the menu option Edit Symbols..., you can also assign symbolic
names to absolute addresses at a later point in time. These assigned names
are automatically entered into the symbol table.
If you assign a name that is already in the symbol table, it will be displayed in a
different color. Duplicate names cannot be used in the symbol table.
SITRAIN
Training for
Page 9
ST-SERV1
Symbolic Addressing
SIEMENS
Symbol Information in the LAD/STL/FBD Editor

AD STL ,FEID [Fri -- My_Project .5114/1511 300(1 )\CPU 315-2 DP]
12.1a1
Cl Fie Eat Insert PLC Debug new Options Widow Hew,
klitALM . 11111
.
DIr312-11:111
LI22.1 Eft
'di
AD . STI IAD - [Ell -- My_Project.5114ATIC MOW
T_System_
ON.
I I
:'
ON/OFF
1,ATSTIM
,14.1251
c. Ian
Dia...I:Ho Lie xiikiel
LLI
L.1
2 -11-1*1-01E11.1-r1 3-1 LI
?
7C1
SA
------
CP11315-2Fin'
(a Fie 644 Insert PLC Debug View Options Window Help
System
mem System
ciAji ra.
System
=13E: System ON/OFF
71S
ystem_
OFF.
I0.0
Momentary
contact
System ON
10.1 iT System OFF / Momentary contact System OFF (NC contact)]
"T_Systes_
ON"
Symbol imbesmstiam:
T_System_ON
T_System_OFF
L_SYSTEM
-- Momentary contact Sy
Momentary contact Sy
-- Indicator light Syst
10.0
10.1
04.1
04.1
Indicator
light
System ON
.
L_SYSTIM.
SR
00.1
Momentary
contact
System
OFF INC
contact)
TSystaa_
OFF'
1 - --
1
11
14
DIM WHEW
2 Into
a Croesreimences
Addlets 14o
0 loffIne
1/1
NI
11
1313 1111iLIM
Info
Commelemnom
Arktess via
rx
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Addressing
18.09.2009
SERV106E.10

In the LAD/STL/FBD Editor you can choose to display the addresses in one of
the following two ways when you select the View - Display with - Symbolic
Representation menu option:
Symbolic Addressing or
Absolute Addressing.
You can display the symbolic and absolute address assignments used in the
network along with their comments by selecting the View 9 Display with 9
Symbol Information menu option.
The assignments are found under the network in LAD/FBD and in STL they are
found in the statement line.
Symbol Information
In the LAD/STL/FBD Editor settings you can select whether the symbol
information for the addresses is to be displayed directly at the address (see
right picture) or at the lower edge of the network (see left picture).
Note
If you position the mouse pointer on an address, a "Tooltip" appears with the
symbol information for this address.
Page 10
ST-SERV1
Symbolic Addressing
SIEMENS
Symbol Selection in LAD/FBD

AD 571
1 "FE
-- 5E1011
573(105[allon',CPt) 315-2 Din,-\ FC14]
0 He Edit Insert PLC Debug Yew Options
I2;11HWsJAliasj rial Lk*
r:
1
0014 Title,
=gm Indicator light 8.ty 1

1C Cons_
UMW
1_41710 .
"BAT1`
VtVI
L_AUTO .
"UTZ"
13.5Y2.
M tanv
Fault
L_Bay-12 .
Vi
1.11.
L_Bayl.
VI
Fault'
L_Bay-LB .
Cony
RICKY .
lash_218 .
N_Ans_Leh
BOOL
N_Aux_Nan_ON
BOOL
Network 2: Indicator ligt
Njur_Systam_011 BOOL
M_Bayl_occup
BOOL
.
R_Cono_
N_Bey2_ocony
POOL
.1_1070. RIM"
1_Bay3_occup
BOOL
I
VIN_Bays_occup_1242 BOOL
111_Cono_Yoult
BOOL
.8171
N_Cono_Yoult_INCE BOOL
N_Cono_Jog_11... BOOL
POOL
IIN_Edge_Aux
POOL
.1_1=0
RIGS('
kiault1
BOOL
H
IIN_Youle2
3001
f----I
BOOL
Network B: Title:
Initiallgtete BOOL
11_3og_LIIT
3001
Cono_
lain_Jeg_BICHT
BOOL
sremro
16114_11/1_Accpt_BNI BOOL
Nissing or incorrect. Bit
itM_N/A_ModeSel... BOOL
r1
Mery cc inconectki eddies,
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Aux. mg
Edge e.
Edge at
Mowry
Memory
Memory
m11 Bory
Memory
Neaory
mono,.
Memory
Ausi11]
Memory
peso,
Memory
4
21
101.1
16.3
16.2
30.5
30.4
Memory
Memory
Mowry
Mowry
timnoryyj
eess <5.2
vi_ e
mourn WILCII/
Introduction
14.0
16.2
15.1
14.1
14.2
14.3
33.0
17.0
33.1
30.3
30.2
101.0
17.1
17.3
10.5
18.09.2009
SERV1_06E.11
npai.
Pee 1

To simply writing a symbolic program , you can use the View 4 Display with 4
Symbol Selection menu option to show a selection of symbols.
When you label the address and you enter the first letter of a symbol name, a
section of the symbol table pops up that starts with this letter.
All valid addresses for this block are displayed. These are all global variables
(even those declared in data blocks), local variables (temporary and static) and
the parameters of the affected block.
In the first column of the symbol selection you can either display the symbol or
the absolute address. To make the choice, select the Options 4 Settings 4
View tab menu options in the LAD / FBD / STL Editor and define how you
would like to sort the selection list.
Page 11
ST-SERV1
Symbolic Addressing
SIEMENS
Symbol Table: Export

reel Symbol Editor -1[57 Program(2) (Symbols) My Project \ SIMATIC 3130(1) 1, CPU 315-2 DP]
Symbol Table Edit Insert View Options Window Help
Open...
Close
Ctrl+O
Ctrl+F-4
30
Ctrl-f5
Properties...
33
Import...
34
3
5 111311
mt..,
36
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
`ETo I le I
inert
2ontrol of conveyor motor
"aut evaluttion
2ourt parts
Where
:curt parts using ad;
do you want to store the table?
OEMIIIIIIOIIIIM
11111
..=t,c
arhp
Store
-.centre
Print Preview...
Segue
Page Setup...
"ontrc
1 fly_Project%5IMATIC 300(1)CPU 315-2 DPI...115ymbols
for an
nonfat
2 My_Profect \ 57_300_5tation1CPU 315-2 DPI. ../Symbols
nentar
3 SERV2_557_300_Station 1, CPU 315-2 DP1... \Symbole
cony.
4 SERV1 557 300_5tation I CPU 315-2 DPV.A.Symbole
come
Alt+F4
Exit
tch - e
I
BOOL
, Momentar
0.5
I T_MfA_Accept
I
0 ri Distal:
S_VVeighbQuartily
0.6
1E1001
BOOL
1.4otnentar
T_Ackn WeemRestart I
0.7
I
1.0 BOOL Momenter
T_Aclen_Faut
-1
Speichen 1 0 S7 Courses
JJ
I iI
,, LueftunglnitialisierLeigsTest i DSERV2_L
My_Proje
PRO3_Loe
SERV1_A
SERVI_L
SER92_13
Speichern
Dateinarne: FiTbol_Table
DateitYP:
Copies the selected symbol table or parts of it to a file (of a different format).
(System Data Format
l SDFI
Abbrechen
In which format do you want to store

the table?
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
General
18.09.2009
SERV1_06E.12
'JP
The Symbol Table - Export menu option enables you to store symbol tables in
different file formats so that you can work on them with other programs. You
can select the following file formats:
ASCII Format (*.ASC)

-
Notepad
Word
Data Interchange Format (*.DIF)

-
EXCEL
System Data Format (*.SDF)

- ACCESS
Assignment List (*.SEQ)

- STEP 5 assignment list
Page 12
ST-SERV1
Symbolic Addressing
SIEMENS
Symbol Table: Import

Symbol Editor - [S7 Program(2) (Symbols) My_Protert \ S1MATIC 300(1) \ CPU 315-2 DP]
kail Symbol Table
Edit
Insert
View
Options
Window
Help
open...
Close
Ctr1+0
ave
Ctr1+5
Ctrll-F4
32
33
34
Properties...
35
Export...
36
37
38
39
Print...
Print Preview...
Import...
'
..112.1A
E's-ri I WI
inert
ontrol of conveyor motor
,
ault evaluation
:curt parts
Count parts ustig addbon
or evaluating faults
:ontrol BCD digital display
111.(1
P age Setup...
a Li rfik
Suchen in: I i0 SLCoutses
40
1 Pity_Proyect151MATIC 300(1ACYLI 315-2 D
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
2 My Project 57_300_5tation \ CPU 315-2 DI

3 5ERV2_5/57_300_5tationCPU 315-2 DPI.
4 SERVI_SA57_300_Station \ CPU 315-2 DPI.
LuthunglnitialisierunosTest
SERV2_L
My_Proje
SymbolTable.sd
Select
PRO3_Loe
directory path
SERVl_A
Exit
T14/A_Accept
S VVeight /Quant y
T_Ackn_VvarmRestart
IT Ackn Fault
Inserts a copy of a saved fie (of a different format
SERV1_L
SERV2El
D alert-lame:
D atertyp:
Symbol_T able
I System
sdf
D ata Format r.SDF)
Enter file name

Abbrechen I
Select file format

SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_06E.13
A
gr

General
The Symbol Table 9 Import menu option enables you to import symbol tables
that were created with other user programs.
What to Do
1. Activate the Symbol Table 9 Import menu option.

2. Select the file format in the "Import" dialog window.
You will find the same formats as for Export.
3. Select the directory path in the "Look in:" list box.
4. Enter the file name in the "File Name:" box
5. Click the "Open" button.
File Types
You can import the following file formats:

ASCII Format (*.ASC)
- Notepad
- Word
Data Interchange Format (*.DIF)
- EXCEL
System Data Format (*.SDF)
- ACCESS
Assignment List (*.SEQ)
- STEP 5 assignment list
Page 13
ST-SERV1
Symbolic Addressing
SIEMENS
Exercise 1: Creating a Symbol Table for the Conveyor Model

"K_Conv_R1GHT" (Q 8.5)
"K Cony LEFT" (Q 8.6)
"BAY1"
(I 8.5)
"BAY2"
(1 8.6)
"BAY3"
(1 8.7)
"LB"
(1 8.0)
67"
ul
: .... "Horn"
.... (Q 8.7)
I
I I
!
I
I
"T_Bay-LB"
"T Bay2" 1 "T Bay3"
'
"
Bay1"
/ T
(1 8.4)
8.3)
8.2)
:
(I 8.1)
'
i
I
".L_Bay-LB"
"1j Bay3"
"L Bay2"
"L_Bay1"
(Q 8.4)
(Q
2)
8.
(Q 8.1)
(Q 8.3)
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_06E.14
A
Task
Include the symbols for the inputs and outputs of the conveyor model as seen
in the slide into the existing symbol table.
What to Do
1. In the SIMATIC Manager, select the S7 program called "My_Program"

2. Start the Symbol Editor by double-clicking on the symbol table
3. Complete the symbol table with the addresses shown in the slide.
4. Save your symbol table
Page 14
ST-SERV1
Symbolic Addressing
SIEMENS
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_07E.1
Contents

Z"' Automation and Industrial Solutions
41
Page
Objectives
2
Commissioning Checklist
3
LEDs on the S7-300 Power Supply
4
...........................................................................................................
LEDs on the S7-300 CPU
5
LEDs on Digital Modules
6
7
...........................................................................................................
8
Performing a Memory Reset and Warm Restart
.......9
Calling the "Monitor/Modify Variable" Tool
.....10
Monitoring and Modifying Variables .............................................................................................. 11
Saving the Variable Table
............................................................................................................ 12
Exercise 1: Testing the Conveyor Model's Sensor (Input) Wiring
13
Exercise 2: Testing the Conveyor Model's Actuator (Output) Wiring
14
Page 1
ST-SERV1
HW Commissioning
SIEMENS
Objectives
know the meanings of the LEDs on the S7 modules
be able to perform a CPU memory reset
with the "Monitor/Modify Variables" tool...
...be able to create and save a variable table
...be able to check the wiring of the sensors
... be able to check the wiring of the actuators
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_07E.2
Page 2

ST-SERV1
HW Commissioning
SIEMENS
Commissioning Checklist
Perform a CPU memory reset.

Carry out a CPU warm restart.
Check the LEDs on the modules.
Start the SIMATIC Manager.

Download the hardware configuration
Check inputs using the Monitor/Modify Variable tool.

Check outputs using the Monitor/Modify Variable tool.
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Checklist
18.09.2009
SERV1_078.3

The checklist shows the individual preparatory steps for commissioning the
hardware. If you do not want to use the default setting, it may be necessary to
assign parameters to the modules before you check the inputs and outputs.
The individual steps are described in more detail on the following pages.
Page 3
ST-SERV1
HW Commissioning
SIEMENS

LED "DC24V"
State
Reaction of the Power Supply
Continuous On 24 V available
24 V available
Output circuit is overloaded:

Voltage dip,
voltage recovery when
overload no longer exists
up to 130% (dynamic)
Flashing
up to 130% (static)
voltage depression,
reduces the service life
up to 130% (static)
On
Short circuit in output circuit
Voltage interruption, automatic

recovery when short circuit
eliminated
Off
Overvoltage or undervoltage on the

primary side
(permissible range: 187V to 264 VAC)
Overvoltage can cause destruction.

With undervoltage, automatic
interruption.
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
LED
18.09.2009
SERV1_07E.4
qt-
SITRAIN
Training for
The power supply has a diagnostic LED "DC24V" on the front side of the
module. Use this LED to determine the state of the power supply.

Page 4
ST-SERV1
HW Commissioning
SIEMENS
CRJ315-2 DP _a.
Sr ? SF D:PUP-2
SATS
u
DC5v
SF
da,
,SAMENs
%Sv
+1 FRcE
!FluN
/stop
4 FRcE
'{RIND
STO..
MR Es
S
'S -30 0
Pn
2
ia
00,4.
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Status Displays
( LEDs )
SF
BATF
DC 5V
FRCE
RUN
STOP
SF DP
BUSF
18.09.2009
SERV1_07E.5
GUSa

(01
System Fault: group error, programming error or fault from a

diagnostics-capable module
Battery fault: battery is empty or is not present
5V supply voltage present.
Lights up when a forcing is active.
Flashes when the CPU starts up and
is steady on in the RUN mode.
Is steady on in the STOP mode,
Flashes slowly when a memory reset is requested and
flashes quickly when a memory reset is carried out.
System Fault DP: group error in the Distributed Peripherals
is steady on when there is a fault in the distributed peripherals
(BF) = Bus fault, is steady on when there is an interrupted cable, for
example.
Flashes when there is a station failure, for example
Page 5
ST-SERV1
HW Commissioning
SIEMENS
LEDs on Digital Modules

S7-300
S7-400
Status LEDs for every individual channel
Signal state
at the terminals
(for digital inputs)
Internal state,
before the optocoupler
(for digital outputs)
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Status LEDs
18.09.2009
SERV1_07E.6

There are LEDs for diagnostics purposes for every input and output channel on
the module. These LEDs can be helpful in locating program errors.
The LEDs indicate:
the process state for digital inputs
the process state for S7-300 digital outputs
the internal state before the optocoupler for S7-400 digital outputs.

Page 6
ST-SERV1
HW Commissioning
SIEMENS

"INTF" -> internal fault
"BAF"
-> battery fault
"BATT1F"-> Battery 1 empty or missing
"BATT2F"-> Battery 2 empty or missing
"DC 5V" -> 5 V OK
"DC 24V"-> 24 V OK
"FMR" Acknowl. switch (Fault Message Reset)
On/Off switch
(Standby)
Battery compartment
Selection switch for battery monitoring I

"BATT INDIC"
"VOLTAGE" selector
U.
r-
>
3-pin power connection
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_07E.7
Power Supply
The power supply (PS) supplies the internal 5V voltage for the modules.
Automatic adjustment is made for line frequencies from 48 to 64 Hz.
LED "INTF"
Lights up in the event of internal faults, such as

Short circuit or overload at 5V/24V
Standby switch on "0" and impermissible external supply
Battery fault
LED "BAF"
Battery fault. Lights up if the battery voltage on the backplane bus is too low.
Example: No batteries present or battery failure and there is no external power
supply available.
LED "BATT1F/
BATT2F"
Lights up in the case of battery reversal, if no battery is present, or the battery

is half discharged. The BATT.INDIC switch for battery monitoring is set to the
1BATT position (for one battery), the 2BATT position (for 2 batteries) or OFF
(no battery monitoring).
LED "DC 5V/DC 24V" Is lit when the 5V/24V DC output voltage is within the tolerance limits and
flashes to indicate voltage recovery after a short circuit or overload.
"FMR" Ackn.Switch
Acknowledgement switch for acknowledging and resetting a fault message

when the fault has been eliminated.
ON/OFF Switch
(Standby)
Switches the output voltage (5/24 VDC) to OV and switches off the LEDs by
interrupting the control current circuit. (The power supply is then in standby
mode because the primary line voltage cannot be switched off.)
Page 7
ST-SERV1
HW Commissioning
SIEMENS
INTF 71
CPU with one interface

SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved
CPU with two interfaces

18.09.2009
SERV1_07E.8
SITRAIN
f or
Fault LEDs
CPUs have fault LEDs that provide first information about an occurred error or
that give the CPU status:
LED "INTF"
Indicates an internal fault (error in the user program ).
LED "EXTF"
Indicates an external fault (fault in an I/O module).
LED "BUS1F"
Indicates a bus fault of the MPI/DP interface.
LED "BUS2F"
Indicates a bus fault of the DP interface.
LED "FRCE"
Indicates that inputs/outputs are forced.

Page 8
ST-SERV1
HW Commissioning
SIEMENS
Performing a Memory Reset and a Warm Restart

RUN-P
RUN
RUN
STOP
MRES*
STOP st!'
MRES
RUN-P
RUN
STOP CV
MRES

the STOP position.
RUN-P
RUN
STOP CI)
MRES
RUN
STOP
MRES
within 1 sec
25.Turn (Press) the mode selector switch to the MRES position once more until the STOP LED begins to flash quickly.
the STOP position.
;. RUN
;
.STOP
MRES
RUN-P
RUN
STOP _11.,)
RUN

position ! (A warm restart is carried out in the transition
STOP
MRES
,
MRES/III
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File
Memory Reset
Warm Restart
18.09.2009
SERV1_07E.9
SITRAIN
Or
Training for
When a memory reset is performed on an S7 CPU, the following happens:
all CPU user data as well as the entire load and work memory are cleared
the CPU interrupts all connections to other communications partners
the CPU parameters and all modules are set to default values
in the case that a memory card is used, the CPU copies the relevant portion
of the stored program needed for execution into the internal RAM
During a warm restart, the process images and the non-retentive data are
deleted. Then the cyclic program execution begins by reading in the process
image input tables (PII).
Page 9
ST-SERV1
HW Commissioning
SIEMENS
Calling the "Monitor/Modify Variable" Tool

VSIMATIC Manager - [SERV I _S IM57_Courses".SER V I _L]
a Fie
D
Edit Insert j PLC View Options
la- 11? at
SERV1 S
El II S7:300_Sta
CPU 31!
El
Ch1:
window
Access Rights
I AD 5T1 I BD if C lb
Download
arkt.
Configure...
Ctrl+K
g TP17013 Col
Et,3 Ch08_8
26J
JJJ
on,lotor" - - stavi_s.si_soo_stationNcets
DIct12-11:11 &
a.16el !clr!I I Es46bhCemealenteCo141eursdCP11
D'""*.d
Up'osd to PG
Upload Station to PG...
MICROI.
O Pee Ed, 1,24.L I PLC Debug New Options wad. Heb
g innertane
a re
Copy RAM to ROM..,

Download User Program to Memory Card
DepleParceNkos
Q. our
Save to Memory Card...
7016 7101o:
Kap09_binar
Retrieve from Memory Card...
Kep10_dcite
Manage P17 System...
Kap12,Rew
Efl
El a Kap13_MM4 Drive
IE
Display Accessble Nodes

Change Module Identification..,
M.E
CPU Messages...
Disignosbc/Setting
. 2: Jog Conveyor LIFT
181
-ji IIAIJIMIN 1: Ewa A 2 1rdo
etenT
( )I
Ciodo
A 4:Meats We
A a Madly A & !Novae

c
.4.12J2-i
IS Table Ede Wert PLC
PROFIBUS
Edit Ethernet Node...
Variable
Cancel PG/PC Assignment
DIGAUI
X
Address' Symbol
83 I_Eleyr
0 84 -1_ _Eley-Ur
Update Firmware
0 8 5 "K _Cony jittOefr
Update the Operating System...
0 8 6 "h_Conv_LEFT
Assign PG /PC
0 87
"Horn'.
New Options Werlow Help
2_1
( KiJ
1 21T-2:1_ Isk411
I Display towel [ Status velool Modify velu'

fain
B001.
II Ids*
13001.
BOOL
lase
.
13001.
leise
false
1300L
Displays selected variable values for monitaing and canging.
5ER81_5157_300_5tabon
SIMATIC S7
Date
File
Gibs
18.09.2009
SERV1_07E.10
I=
<5.2

Area of Use
The "Monitor/Modify Variables" test function can be started from the SIMATIC
Manager or from the LAD/STL/FBD Editor and is used to monitor and/or modify
variables in any format you choose.
Design of the
Variable Table
The variables you choose are entered in a VAriable Table (VAT). With the
exception of block-local, temporary variables, you can monitor (view) and/or
modify (control and change) all variables or addresses.
You can select the columns of the variable table to be displayed in the View
menu. The columns have the following meanings:
Address: absolute address of the variable.
Symbol: symbolic name of the variable
Symbol comment: comment on the variable displayed
Display format: a data format you can choose per mouse click (such as
binary or decimal), in which the contents of the variable is displayed
Status value: value of the variable in the selected status format
Modify value: value to be assigned to the variable
Inputting into the

Variable Table
Entries for the variable table can be absolute or symbolic (provided the symbol
exists). The comments displayed in the column "Symbol comment" are from
the symbol table. The comments appear automatically and cannot be changed
here.
Note
To check the input and output wiring (regardless of the user program), you can
also call the Monitor/Modify Variables tool (VAT) directly from the HWConfig
tool (see the HWConfig chapter).

Page 10
ST-SERV1
HW Commissioning
SIEMENS
Monitoring and Modifying Variables

td,. Table Edit Insert PLC
Variable
View
Difg-1611 Al X 13t2ilial
Address' Symbol
PM 2 , "11At_Thurnbw"
1
2
3
4
QiN
6 "GAPJ_DigDisp"
8.0
5
6
7
8.1
8.2
"TBay1"
"T_Bay2"
8.3
84
"T_Bayr
M416$001:83
V41880003:
BOOL
BOOL
false
false
false
BOOL
false
BOOL
BOOL
false
false
8.1 1__Bayl"
BOOL
false
8.2 "L_Bay2"
8.3 -L_Bay3"
BOOL
BOOL
false
false
BOOL
false
false
false
false
8.5
10
11
12
8.6
87
"BAY?
"BAY?
13
HEX
false
al67.2d 6'14411 411.1

I Modify value'
HEX
BOOL
BOOL
"T_Bay-Ur
1BAY1"
117. 1
I Display format I Status value
BOOL
14
Q
Q
15
16
17
Q
Q
6.4 ."L_Bay-LB"
8.5 "K_Conv_R1GHT"
18
8.6 :K_Conv_LEFT-
BOOL
5001.
19
8.7 "Horn"
BOOL
20
MINIM
.11212_cl
.12.1x1
Options Window He
false
SERV I _5/57_300_5tation
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Monitor
18.09.2009
SERV1_075.11
lAbs < 5 . 2
(16
You can monitor variables in two ways:

The (monitor) status values are updated once when you select the
Variable 4 Update Monitor Values menu option or click the icon (Update
Monitor Values).
The (monitor) status values are updated every cycle when you select the
Variable - Monitor menu option or click the icon (Monitor Variables).
Modify
Led
Procedure for modifying variables:

1.
With the left mouse button, click the line in the "Modify Value" column for
the variable that you want to modify.
2. Enter the value in the correct form for the data type selected.
3a. To activate the modify values once, select the Variable 4 Activate Modify
Values menu option or click the icon (Activate Modify Variables) (or item
3b).
3b. To activate the modify values every cycle, select the Variable - Modify
menu option or click the icon (Modify Variables).
4.
Modify Value Valid

4170 I
Use the "Monitor" function to confirm that the modify value has been
entered in the variable you selected.
You can make the "Modify value" entered in a table invalid by selecting that
value and clicking on the icon. The now "invalid" value is displayed like a
comment. You can make the modify value "valid" again when you click on the
icon again. Only valid modify values can be activated.

Page 11
ST-SERV1
HW Commissioning
SIEMENS
Saving the Variable Table

1: 1_
a Table Eck Insert PLC Variable
4
,.112 j
P s Window Help
Yew
Cbse
Ctrl+N
Ctr1+0
Ctrl+F4
Save
Cb1+5
New
Ctr1-P
1 rey_PTOJeC1157_300_51abon1CPU
2 SOIV1JUS7_300_5tationkCPU 31
3 SERV1_5 57_300_5tatiarKPLI 31!
2
3
la
aa
la
la
la
EaB
O
O
O
O
O
2J
<
Save As
Pup Setup...
Entry point:
'Project
View:
Name:
81 1_Bayl 82 :L_Bay2"
8.3 1._Bay3'
84 1._13ey-LB"
8.5 1(_ConvIk101-fr
8 6 :KCcrw_LEFT
8 7 1-lom.
BC
BC
BC
BC
My_Project
tE,
tic
BC
6- Office
LI I Component view
Blames path
2:I IDAS7_Courses \My_PToie
Browse-
I liTtt
My_Prolect
SIMATIC 300(1)
CPU 315-2 DP
E
E a S7 Prcgarn(51
a Blocks
E sr My_Program
SERVI_S157_300_51ation
Object name:
1 I/O Conveyor
Object type:
OK
H* I
Cancel
.3
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Saving the
Variable Table
1.1
18.09.2009
SERV1_07E.12
% SITRAIN Training for

You can use Table 4 Save or Table 4 Save as... to save a variable table.
You can give the variable table any name you choose. The name is inserted as
the symbolic name in the symbol table.
You can reuse saved variable tables for monitoring and modifying, making it
unnecessary to re-enter the variables.
Page 12
ST-SERV1
HW Commissioning
SIEMENS
Exercise 1: Testing the Conveyor Model's Sensor (Input) Wiring

Corifig [S7_300statIon (configuration) -- SHItY1_5]
0(0) DR
2
3
CPU 315-2
If
DP
If
DI324/C24V
D0324)C24V.,
DIS/D08x24V.
AI2 2ei
If
ir
Online via assigned CPU services
: maload Module identification...

",/load Module Iderticiration to PG...
MO". Worm."'
ISERV1_S
Path:
Faulty Modules
Ctrla-1)
Update Firmware...
411'il (01 UR
Slot
Madrie
D132,d)C24V
I ad
10
6E57 3211 BL0O-06A0
D032sDC24V7154
6ES7 322,18L00-06A0
Al2a12Sit
6ES7 331.71(901-04S0
8
9
10
POOL
8 1 "T_Bay1"
POOL
8 2 "T_Elay2"
POOL
8.3 "T_Bay3"
POOL
304
"T_Bay-LB" _ .
Status value Modify value
POOL
8.5 "BAY1"
POOL
8.6 "BAY 2"
POOL
8 7 "BAY3"
POOL
BIN
8.0
81
8 2 "L_Bay2"
"L_Elay1"
POOL
POOL
;an,
19
)C Row Not Effective

Run conditionally
11
Display format
8.0 i.e
84
5ave DevIce Nara_ to Mem,/ Card...
Ethan*
S7_300_5tation\CPU 315-2 DP
Addr ess Symbol
Update Force Symbol with F5
Run immediately
1.7. Monitor
614 Status Value
r Enable Periph. Outputs
141 Modify Value
Modify
E)i
Display
1EM
Trigger...
<>
afantors and modf ies the nputs/outputs of a module or process anew.
SIMATIC S7
Help
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_07E.1 3
.
I
Automation and industrial Solutions
Task
In this exercise you are to check the wiring of the conveyor model's sensors to
the digital input modules directly from "HW Config". You will check the wiring of
the actuators in the next exercise.
What to Do
1. Open the SIMATIC Station with HW-Config

SIMATIC Manager 9 select the SIMATIC Station 9 double-click on the
"Hardware" object
2. Monitor the inputs of the DI/DO module (I/O address 8) to which the
conveyor model is connected
Select the DI/DO module 9 PLC 9 Monitor/Modify 9 activate (check) the
Monitor function under Run conditionally
3. To check the input wiring, press the sensors on the conveyor model one
after the other and observe whether the associated input states are
displayed on the screen
Wiring Error?
SITRAIN
If you discovered an error in your wiring test, please let the instructor know.
Training for
Page 13
ST-SERV1
HW Commissioning
SIEMENS
Exercise 2: Testing the Conveyor Model's Actuator (Output) Wiring

filiVITERUMITINTWIIIMMIPPIMMETTIM
OE Station Edit Insert PLC weer Options %Widow Help
_lolx11
7174W
i!",
Ctr1+1.
Online via assigned CPU services
=I (01 UR
Download Module Identification...

CPU 375-21 Upload Module Iderbfication to PG..,
2
X2 it DP
Faulty Modules...
3
Module Information...
Di32,0c26V
5
If D032x1)C24V, Operating
Path.
ISERV1_5 \ 57_300_Station CPU 3152 DP

Address Symbol
Display format
Status value Modify
BOOL
false
I 8 6 "BAY2"
POOL
false
I 8.7 "PAY3"
POOL
false
0 8.0
BOOL
false
Update Firmware...
POOL
false
01211 (0) UR
Gave Device Name to Memory Card...
_
......._
8.1 "L_Bay1"
_
....._...
8.2 "L_Bay?
BOOL
true
Slot I Module
Ethernet
8.3 1_8ay3"
POOL
false
8.4 "L Bey-LB"
POOL
false
CPU 315-2 D
X DR
PROF
8.5 "K_Conv_RIGHT. BOOL
false
8.6 1(__Conv LEFT" POOL
false
6
7
II 1)18/1)084424V.
It Al2s12134
GleariRer.et..
Get Time of Day...
Mill=11111
78
1/132id)C24V
8032x8C24V/0 5A
led.
'
erPce Dora
6ES7 32148L0:140E
6ES7 322-1BLOOOAA0
6E57 331 -71030113ABO
4
304 30
X Row Not Effective

-- Run conditionally
9
10
BIN
0 8.7 "Horn
0_.3
1EHI
A1241 213it
8 5 'BAV1
OF
1..7
Monitor
Modify
VOWS
true
260
Update Force Symbol with F5
Atm immedately
6i4 Status Value
41 Modify Value
Enable Periph. Outputs
I r 1/0 Display
f Trigger...
Help
Close
Monitors and =dies the inoutsfoutputs of e modde or process Image
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_07E.14
_21 SITRAIN Training for
Mr
Task
Now check the wiring of the conveyor model's actuators to the digital output
modules.
What to Do
1. Open the SIMATIC Station with HW Config

SIMATIC Manager - select the SIMATIC Station - double-click on the
"Hardware" object
2. Modify the outputs of the DI/DO module (I/O address 8) to which the
conveyor model is connected
Select the DI/DO module - PLC 4 Monitor/Modify 4 in the "Modify value"
column, specify Status 1 for the respective output 4 activate (check) the
Modify function under Run conditionally 4 observe whether the
corresponding actuator of the conveyor model is modified
3. Exit the Monitor/Modify test function and HW-Config
Wiring Error?
If you discovered an error in your wiring test, please let the instructor know.

Page 14
ST-SERV1
HW Commissioning
SIEMENS
Block Architecture and the LAD / STL / FBD Editor
LADS
..AD Sri RID -IFCI6 My_onaest_sh3sh8\teststabon\CM1315,20P]
0 Fie Eck Insert MX Debug aess Crams Window Flap
..r12251
..12JLI,
i Eji
InIcilt-Ilal A xikielLLiluij
2-_,I, , I il pimii,A*144-1-01-3_.1,1--1.1.1
,ca tents Of. EnVronnentlInterfme
OB 1
._11.1.--
.-_. 0 Interface
1-1. no
TC16
Bet o
: jog conveyor right

10.2
FC
assenbly line
F-1 I
FB
08.5
10.3
f )----I
1/1
Symbol infosmation:
T_Jog_R1GHT
10.2
I' Jog LEFT
10.3
CRT
08.5
.2_11
Press Tito cat Kip.
-- Pushbutton (PB) jog conveyor
-- Pushbutton (PB) jog conveyor

-- Contactor for Conveyor Bolt
O len*
WT 1
aat E.4
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_08E.1
Page
Contents
Objectives
Types of Program Blocks
Program Structuring Possibilities
Process Images
Cyclic Program Execution
Inserting an S7 Block
The LAD / FBD / STL Editor
The STEP 7 Programming Languages
Selecting the Programming Language
Programming in LAD and FBD
Programming in STL
Saving a Block
Calling a Block in OB1
Downloading Blocks into the PLC
Simple Program Debugging
Modifying Blocks
Exercise 1: Jogging the Conveyor Motor (FC 16)
Exercise 2: Calling FC 16 in OB 1
Editor Customization: "General" Tab
Editor Customization: "View" Tab
Editor Customization: "STL" Tab
Editor Customization: "LAD/FBD" Tab
Editor Customization: "Block" Tab
Editor Customization: "Sources/Source Text" Tab
SITRAIN
rainin for
en
d lnc strial Solutions
Automation T
.......... 2
.......... 3
4
.......... 5
6
7
.......... 8
.......... 9
10
........ 11
........ 12
13
14
........ 15
........16
17
........ 18
19
........ 20
21
....... 22
....... 23
........24
....... 25
....... 26
Page 1
ST-SERV1
Editing Blocks
SIEMENS
Objectives
know the different types of S7 blocks
understand the principle of "structured programming"
know the meaning of the process images (PII, PIQ)
be able to explain the principle of cyclic program execution
know and be able to select the LAD, FBD and STL programming
languages
be able to edit, save and download a block with the LAD/STUFBD
Editor
be able to carry out a simple program debugging with the "Monitor
Block" test function
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_08E.2
Page 2
Ir.

ST-SERV1
Editing Blocks
SIEMENS
Types of Program Blocks

Operating System
DB
Cycle
Time
Process
DB
TL
OB
FC
FB
SFC
FB
FC
SFB
Organization
Blocks
Error
Legend:
OB = Organization Block
FB = Function Block
FC = Function
SFB = System Function Block
SFC = System Function
DB = Data Block
SIMATIC S7
Maximum nesting depth:

S7-300: 8
S7-400: 24
FB
Date:
File:
(for each priority class,

2 to 4 additional levels for Error OBs)
FB with
Instance DB
18.09.2009
SERV1_08E.3

Blocks
The programmable logic controller provides various types of blocks in which

the user program and the related data can be stored. Depending on the
requirements of the process, the program can be structured in different blocks.
Organization
Block
OB
Organization blocks (OBs) form the interface between the operating system
and the user program. The entire program can be stored in OB1 that is
cyclically called by the operating system (linear program) or the program can
be divided and stored in several blocks (structured program).
Function
FC, SFC
A function (FC) contains a partial functionality of the program. It is possible to

program functions so that they can be assigned parameters. As a result,
functions are also suited for programming recurring, complex partial
functionalities such as calculations.
System functions (SFC) are parameter-assignable functions integrated in the
CPU's operating system. Both their number and their functionality are fixed.
More information can be found in the Online Help.
Function Block
FB, SFB
Basically, function blocks offer the same possibilities as functions. In addition,

function blocks have their own memory area in the form of instance data
blocks. As a result, function blocks are suited for programming frequently
recurring, complex functionalities such as closed-loop control tasks.
System function blocks (SFB) are parameter-assignable functions integrated in
the CPU's operating system. Both their number and their functionality are fixed.
More information can be found in the Online Help.
Data Blocks
DB
Data blocks (DB) are data areas of the user program in which user data are
managed in a structured manner.
Permissible
Operations
You can use the entire operation set in all blocks (FB, FC and OB).
Page 3
ST-SERV1
Editing Blocks
SIEMENS
Program Structuring Possibilities
Linear Program
Program Partitioned into Areas
Structured Program
---- Recipe A
OB 1
OB 1
---- Recipe B
---- Mixer
-----
OB 1
--
Pump
Outlet
-- Outlet
All instructions are

found in one block
(usually in Organization
Block OB 1)
The instructions for the individual

functions are found in individual
blocks. OB 1 calls the individual
blocks one after the other.
Reusable functions are loaded into

individual blocks. OB 1 (or other
blocks) call these blocks and pass on
the pertinent data.
/
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_08EA

Linear Program
The entire program is found in one continuous program block.

This model resembles a hard-wired relay control, that was replaced by a
programmable logic controller. The CPU processes the individual instructions
one after the other.
Partitioned
Program
The program is divided into blocks, whereby every block only contains the
program for solving a partial task. Further partitioning through networks is
possible within a block. You can generate network templates for networks of
the same type.
The OB 1 organization block contains instructions that call the other blocks in a
defined sequence.
Structured
Program
A structured program is divided into blocks. The code in OB1 is kept to a

minimum with calls to other blocks containing code. The blocks are parameter
assignable. These blocks can be written to pass parameters so they can be
used universally.
When a parameter assignable block is called, the programming editor lists the
local variable names of the blocks. Parameter values are assigned in the
calling block and passed to the function or function block.
Example:
A "pump block" contains instructions for the control of a pump.
The program blocks, which are responsible for the control of special pumps,
call the "pump block" and give it information about which pump is to be
controlled with which parameters.
When the "pump block" has completed the execution of its instructions, the
program returns to the calling block (such as OB 1), which continues
processing the calling block's instructions.
Page 4
ST-SERV1
Editing Blocks
SIEMENS
Process Images
S1
K1
I 2.0
Q 4.3
PIQ
PII
Byte 0
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 0
Byte 1
Byte 2
A I 6.4
Q 4.3
CPU Memory Area
CPU Memory Area
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_08E.5
%IP

Introduction
For the storage of all digital input and output states, the CPU has reserved
memory areas: the process-image input table (PII) and the process-image
output table (PIQ). During program execution, the CPU accesses these
memory areas exclusively. It does not access the digital input and output
modules directly.
PII
The Process-Image Input table is the memory area in which the states of all
digital inputs are stored. The image is read in from the digital input modules at
the beginning of the cycle.
PIQ
The Process-Image Output table is the memory area in which the states of all
digital outputs are stored. The image is output to the digital output modules at
the end of the cycle.
Outputs can be assigned as well as queried in the program.
User Program
If inputs are queried in the user program (for example, A I 2.0), then the state of
this input that is stored in the PII is queried from the PII. This state cannot
change within a cycle since the PII is only updated or read in at the beginning of
a cycle. This guarantees that when there are multiple queries of the input in one
cycle, the same result is always delivered.
Double Assignment
If an output is assigned a state in several locations in the program, then only the
state that was assigned last is transferred to the particular output module (see
slide):
1.
Output Q 4.3 is assigned the state of the input signal I 2.0
2.
In the same cycle, output Q 4.3 is assigned the state of the input signal
I 6.4. The result of this last assignment is transferred to the output
module.
As a rule, these types of double assignments are programming errors.

Page 5
ST-SERV1
Editing Blocks
SIEMENS
Cyclic Program Execution

Startup program: Call and execution of OB 100
(once, after Power ON, for example)
Transfer PIQ to the digital output modules
digital
input
module
Start of the cycle monitoring time
Reading the input states from the digital input modules

and saving the states in the process image (PII)
IOU
Call and execution of OB1

(possible interruption by call of other OBs
for events such as time-of-day interrupt,
hardware interrupts etc. )
Writing the process-image output table

(PIQ) in the digital output modules
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_08E.6
digital
output
module
00I
laZ

Starting
When switching on or when switching from STOP 4 RUN, the CPU carries out
a warm restart (with OB100). During a warm restart, the operating system
deletes the non-retentive bit memories, timers and counters, deletes the
interrupt stacks and block stacks, resets all stored hardware interrupts and
diagnostic interrupts and starts the scan cycle monitoring time.
Scan Cycle
The cyclical operation of the CPU consists of three main sections, as shown in
the slide above:
The CPU checks the status of the input signals and updates the processimage input table.
It executes the user program with the respective instructions.
It writes the values from the process-image output table into the output
modules.
Page 6
ST-SERV1
Editing Blocks
SIEMENS
Inserting an S7 Block
SIMATIC Manager - My_Project
yorax,
2I
II
General Part 1 I General - Part
57 Software
I Organization Block
147 Software
Symbol Table
Text Library
External Source..,
4 Data Block
'5 Data Type
6 Variable Table
i_Lourses My_Proje
My_Prosect
SIMATIC 300(1)
CPU 315-2 DP
E
S7 Program(5)
E
cr21 Sasser
II
Symbol Comment:
ST L
Project path:
Parameter
External parameters...
Symbolic Name:
Created in Language:
WinCC flexible RT
WinCC Object
tr:My_Project -
Name:
2 Functionio
Et nm
ck
E' ,,-,
wom
Cats I Attributes I
System data
g FC16
g FC42
Storage location
of project:
ID:\S7_Courses My_Proje
Date created:
10/12/2006 02:25:42 PM
Last modified:
10/12/2006 02:25:42 PM
Code
Interface
10/12/2006 02:25:42 PM
Comment:
illEEG
Cancel
OK
Help
Inserts Function at the cursor position.
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Siemens AG 2008. At rights reserved.
Inserting a Block
18.09.2009
SERV1_08E.7

With the appropriate "Blocks" folder highlighted, from a specific "S7 Program",
select the Insert 4 S7 Block menu option to display a list of block types:
Organization blocks (OB) are called by the operating system.

These blocks form the interface between operating system and user
program.
Functions (FC) and function blocks (FB) contain the actual user program.
They enable a complex program to be divided into small, easy-to-follow
units.
Data blocks contain user data.
After choosing the type of block you want, the "Properties" dialog box opens in
which you have to specify, among other things, the block number and the
programming language (LAD, STL or FBD).
When you have made your settings and confirmed them by clicking the "OK"
button, the new block is inserted in the current program.
Page 7
ST-SERV1
Editing Blocks
SIEMENS
The LAD / STL / FBD Editor

y1i1 AD ,11 I AD [FL 1L -
r _r Le.ymet or"
,,
D12;12-1611 ell x1Balel . 1_11

r ELI
" F
Declaration Table
.1Q.125.1
- SERV 1 _S S7_300_5tatsm CPIS 315-2 OFM,AFC1b)
O. He ELIR Inset PLC Doisixi View Options Window Hails
*.161RI'll MI Id -IFI*1-01011-.1-*1 -1 le?j

3
Contents Of: .2nvironment1Interfase.

Keen
1.11TZ
CP OUT
'E giratface
2:1' OUT
U. II_OTIT
0 rx_our
1- MP
iii TRW
da. RETURN
E Q RISME
Pc16 : Conveyor Control
mortvo: Jog Conveyor

*1_15AX.
Code Section
"X_ Cony
Jog_RICIFi_
HMI'
i t
RIGHT
M Coto
Jog_LIYil
HMI"
VI
"X_Jog_
RIM"
( )-I
Jog.1272
XXI' I i
'X Cony
art" ----I
El
A Network 2: Jog Conveyor UST
"IOW"
I
Jog_RIC16_
XXI'
Vi
El
I Address
Detail Window
MI
,
Mods
PDL_MAN
FC_ComWslos
M_ConsjogjEFIFC_ConyMotor
MCons_Ax01G- , FC_Oxrettitor
R M lop RIGHT
:FC_Comelotor
Typ Locabsn
,
R
114
1
/A
ft
kW
/AM
I VA
R
R
Ifh!
/A
; WO
INW
I LosaPte
Laotian
/0
AW
2
2
2
/A
/A
/An
i 113111113111111=NWIIM===IIM111121===WEMW1111130=W
1 --- el kifine
fAbs <5.2 No I
Press Fl to got Help.
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_08E.8
1 --;:

Starting the Editor
The easiest way to start the LAD / STL / FBD Editor is by double-clicking on an
S7 block in the SIMATIC Manager. The Editor has the following components:
Declaration Table
The declaration table belongs to the block. This table is used for declaring
variables and parameters for the block.
The declaration table is discussed in detail in the "Functions and Function
Blocks" chapter.
Code Section
The code section contains the program itself, divided into separate networks if
required.
A syntax check is made during instruction input (in STL) and in labeling
program elements or operation symbols.
The detail window provides the following functions and information:
lists the syntax errors found in the course of a context
1: Error:
check or a compilation procedure
gives additional information such as "expected data
2: Info:
type of an address"
a list of addresses used in the network and where they
3: Cross references:
are used in the entire program
enables you to monitor the addresses used in the
4: Address info:
network
enables you to modify the addresses used in the
5: Modify:
network
display of existing data for process diagnostics (only if
6: Diagnostics:
configured)
Navigation with the function "Compare blocks"
7: Comparison:
Detail Window
Page 8
ST-SERV1
Editing Blocks
SIEMENS
The STEP 7 Programming Languages

Function Block Diagram
FC16 : Conveyor Control
matom:
Jog Conveyor RIGHT
a
io.
Q8. 5
TO . 3
Ladder Diagram
FC16 Conveyor Control
?
.tetsicork 1: Jog Conveyor RIGHT
TO 2
1
7
08.5
TO . 3
VI
Statement List
Network 4: Jog
A
AN
Conveyor RIGHT
0.2
0.3
8.5
I
I
SIMATIC S7
Z,
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_08E.9
Er
Introduction
There are several programming languages in STEP 7 that can be used

depending on preference and knowledge. By adhering to specific rules, the
program can be created in Statement List and later converted into another
programming language.
LAD
Ladder Diagram is very similar to a circuit diagram. Symbols such as contacts

and coils are used. This programming language often appeals to those who
have a drafting or electrical background.
STL
The Statement List consists of STEP 7 instructions. You can program fairly
freely with STL. This programming language is preferred by programmers who
are already familiar with other programming languages.
FBD
The Function Block Diagram uses "boxes" for the individual functions. The
character in the box indicates the function (such as & 4 AND Logic Operation).
This programming language has the advantage that even a "non-programmer"
can work with it.
Other Languages
In addition to the STEP 7 Basic Package languages, there is a series of

engineering tools for the most varied of applications, such as:
-
GRAPH 7: Configuration of sequence control systems

HiGraph:
Configuration using the State Diagram Method
SCL:
PASCAL-like text-oriented high level language for writing

algorithms
CFC:
Continuous Function Chart for graphic interconnection of S7

blocks
Page 9
ST-SERV1
Editing Blocks
SIEMENS
Selecting the Programming Language

LAD/57111BD - [FC16 "FC_ConvMotor" SERV1_5 57_30O_Station \GU 315-21:11
,jij
o
,LcA
File Edit Insert PLC Debug l

yoew
Options Window Help
ark-K
4_9J
:Lverviews
ais
adidd !cm it g _rj PLC Register
O
E g Inter face
a IN
a OUT
a IN_OUT
Data View
View
Declaration View
I
0
0.2
0.3
8.5
Network 2: Jog Conveyor L

A
Q
4.2
AN N 30.2
A
N
30.3
8.6
0
4
"\ Ctri-F1
s..
JJ
rface .
Ctrl+3
Network 1: Jog Conveyor 3

A
AN
LAD
Ctr1+4
Ctr1+5
Display with
Zoom In
Zoom Ott
Zoom Factor...
U Libraries
Column Width...
Display Columns.- FI I
F5
Changes to the STL programming language in the current block.
0 loffhne
Date:
File:
A Multiple instances
Ctrk-Nurn+
Toolbar
Breakpoint Bar
. Status Bar
Update
SIMATIC S7
.71
New network
FB blocks
FC blocks
E
l.ed1 SFB blocks
SFC blocks
lAbs < 5.2
18.09.2009
SERV1_08E.10
Inse 1;
.%;

View
You choose the View menu to switch from one STEP 7 programming language
to another:
LAD (Ladder Diagram)
FBD (Function Block Diagram)
STL (Statement List).
Program Language
You can switch the programming language as you wish when you create as
well as later on.
LAD/FBD => STL
You can always convert program sections that have been written in the
graphical programming languages (LAD/FBD) into STL. You should, however,
be aware that the result of this conversion is not always the most efficient
solution in Statement List.
STL => LAD/FBD
It is not always possible to convert program sections written in STL into LAD or
FBD. The sections of the program that cannot be converted are left in STL.
Note:
No sections of the program are lost on conversion.
Page 10
ST-SERV1
Editing Blocks
SIEMENS
Programming in LAD and FBD

4LAD/STL/FBD - [F[15 "FC_Mode" SERV1_5 57_300_52ation CPLI 315-2 DP FC15]
CF we Edit Insert PLC Debug View Options Window Help
! , 1 !I
xliblel
D412'llal J
`J: 11-1-14-1-01111,1-21H
Contents Of: Environment \ Interface'
B-
Name
U- IN
Cl OUT
Interface
U- IN
U. OUT
IN_OUT
0- TEMP
B 0. PI TURN
Overviews
nr_orrr
411- TIED
4:1. ASSUAN
New
EE 173
DC'S
Title:
L_SYSTICE
E_Aus
System_ON
SR
(N) s
Network 2
41
C SR
-(9 --(N)[) --(10). -0 --(SAVE)
C NEG
J os
r ] Comparator
5530.0
1115.1
04.1
/130.1
Eanual Node
Insert
Or
Overwrite
Mode
Bit logic
mJ ILID11113110121131WEM
a Oc
if Program elements I VE Call structure
SIMATIC S7
Date:
Re'
Elements
I--
C RS
E_System_
OFF_ANI"
Symbol lalormatlom:
M_System_ON_HMI
M_Aux_Systex_ON
1_SYSTIM
H_SystA_OFF_HEI
-II
--INOTI--(9 --( )
-() --(#)---(R)
-(9 --(5)
System ON/OFF
E_System_
ON_HISI
network
Eit loos
18 09 2009
SERV1_08E 11
!Insert I 41-1
...
leAutomation
.
Frequently used LAD and FBD elements appear as icons in the toolbar. You
click them with the mouse to insert them at the selected position in the
program.
Toolbar icons in LAD:
Toolbar icons in FBD:
Tg=5-Pcl-f
AIA-W-0151L+1-11H
Overviews
By clicking the "Overviews" symbol, a new window is opened with the following
contents:
Program Elements:
Shows all program elements and operation symbols.
(The contents of this window depends on the programming language LAD/STL/FBD selected)
Call Structure:
Shows the program structure and/or the block nesting, which block is called
from where.
Networks
When you click the "New Network" icon in the toolbar, a new network is added
after the current network. You can also right mouse click and choose "insert
network".
If you want to insert a new network before Network 1, you must select the block
name before you click the "New Network" icon.
iu-of
s...1
Empty Box
You can use the Empty Box to insert LAD or FBD elements more quickly. You
can insert elements directly without having to select them from the Program
Elements browser. After you have selected the position in the network where
you want to insert an element, click the "Empty Box" icon in the toolbar.
When you enter the first letters of an element name, a list appears (beginning
with these letters), and you can make a selection.
Insert or Overwrite
Mode
You use the "Ins" key to toggle between the "Cp" (overwrite) and "Insert"
editor modes. The current mode is displayed in the status bar.

Page 11
ST-SERV1
Editing Blocks
SIEMENS
Programming in STL
LAD/STL/F8D - [FC1 -- My_Project\SIMATIC 3110(1)\ CPU 315-21)P)
'
Insert PLC Debug View Options Window Help
E:11 1L'Ilal Ai x *et _21:11 LIN rt= L-.J ! I !I071E g_2:J if.1*1-01511.1-2.1h1 El I
Corments Of: ' laviremmeatA Inter fac
g IN
C1-1:11
1*;;
our
Cl. nr_orr
U.
TEMP
4ZA- SENA
ii
-e-a2g
ALA
0 Fie Ede
, it Inb
LIEI
Mae
m
face
Cl. OUT
New network
jal Fl blocks
Iil iiii FC blocks
SFS blocks
SFC blocks
Multiple instances
+ fll Libraries
U OUT
73
lill4;1. RETURN
W fat RETURN
PC1 : System
nattr:System 01/017
8.0
SAAN II0 0.0
8.0
ANOP 00 0.1
Lil
Ptc9am elements
311
111313 DOI 11111111:11/WIEW
4
Press Ft to get Help.
a cross-teleran=
rt Address Sic..
1----
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
t'
loffirlo
18.09.2009
SERV1_08E.12
6: Diagnostizs
<5.2
.F. Cal structure
7: Compatison
INw 1 Ln 6
Oq
g SITRAIN Training for
1r
Statements
The user needs to know the statements for writing a program in STL. You can
obtain information about the syntax and functionality from the online help:
Help 9 Help on STL.
The following information is available:
"Statement List Instructions", a description of all the statements that
exist in this programming language
141
"Working with Statement List", a description of
Statement List View and General Syntax
Entering and Viewing Constant Data
Types of Blocks
1E1 Switch Contacts and Signal States
Overviews
When you are using the STL Editor, the "Overviews" window contains only the
libraries and the list of already existing blocks which can be called from the
current block.
Networks
Networks are inserted in the same way as in the LAD/FBD Editor (see previous
page).
Insert or Overwrite
Mode
You use the "Ins" key to toggle between the "Cp" (overwrite) and "Insert"
editor modes. The current mode is displayed in the status bar.
SITRAIN
Training for
Page 12
ST-SERV1
Editing Blocks
SIEMENS
Saving a Block
Fie Edit cent PLC Debug View Options Widow Help
- [FE I -- My_Projert \ SIMATIC 300(0 \ CPU 315-2 DPI
LAD STL
Dlis-12-Fal gJ ,x I
Consents OE, .invironnems\Inserteee.

la IN
Cl- IN
42. LOOT
E 43. MVPS
. Inter f ace
Q. OUT
42. OUT
U. IN_OUT
1E-IMP
Q.
System
1eetesork 1 . System OR/ OPP
08.0
ICI. 0
SR
al
Counter
E riir_eA DBcal
E l Jumps
Ea
j
pi]Integer tint-bon
S 2 Floatrig-poont fd.
Program control
EECW ShitiRotate
Status Ists
ESal(j'rimers
a word
FE blocks
E f'.
RETURN
Lti
FC1 -
I.JEI
Al network
E III BitComparator
lux
Name
I.
ade.1251
]*I*1-0 L141t1h1 PA
lell -I c-I t%Iiil F %lee' KIllaTft
________
Converter
IEGd
_w_l
logic
ril
I-5
F/0.1
V1----R
41
2? 11111 hogTam elemen
L
hE Call
ructure
It
Deal IlliMM
Press F1 to get Hdp.
SIMATIC S7
LA]
Note
Cross-relerences
Date:
File:
Saving a Block
2 Iris
4: Addeo rdo.
1-- -5 !offline
5c IA
lAbS < 5.2
18.09.2009
SERV1_08E.13
&
Diagnostics
INw I In 6
111 7
"
7 Comparison
II^Sert CI.7 I

When you have finished editing a block, you can save it on the hard disk of the
programming device:
By selecting the File 9 Save menu option or
By clicking the "Save" icon in the toolbar.
If more than one block is opened with the Editor, only the block that is visible in
the active window is saved with the action "Save" .

Page 13
ST-SERV1
Editing Blocks
SIEMENS
Calling a Block in OB1

JXJ
5LAD/511,4813 -1031 My_Project \SIMATIC 3011(1)11:PU 315-2 DP)
G Fie Eck Insert PIC Debug View Options Window Help
e NT !Li
DIra;12-101 J iLtiti JJ _Adi
031
,8J2c1
Imp
Cyclic Program Operation
=ItCell EC1 in LAD
Move
Program control
till Shift/Rotate
E 'A Status dts
Timers
El
E at Word logic
FI3 blocks
Eta FC blocks
M
,,
1 CI
IN ENO
Network 2 : Cell IC1 so OIL

CALL EC
1=1. FC14
Q FC15
ci FC16
FC17
FC18
FC19
FC42
1j.
SFR hinel.c
Progeam elements
= Cal structize
BLOCKPC
null
1: Enc.
2 Info
3 Cross-references
4: Addles:
Date:
File:
SITRAIN
5: Moe* A fi Diagnostics
Iofflhe
SIMATIC S7
Cyclic
Execution
nfa
18.09.2009
SERV1_08E.14
T. Contemn
iAbs < 5.2 Nw 1
41
47
To integrate a newly created block in the cyclic program execution of the

CPU, the block must be called in OB1.
The simplest way of inserting the block call in the graphic programming
languages LAD and FBD is through the browser (see picture above). In the
STL programming language, the instruction for calling a block is CALL.
Training for
Page 14
ST-SERV1
Editing Blocks
SIEMENS
Downloading Blocks into the PLC
Z=211=111.11111=1111111
File pit Insert PLC
ID
View Qptions window Help
.7_1 70 114
1-:"...17611S311 < No Ref >
i;Ig?ffl
MyProject
,J11
:1
D:\Courses\MyProject
MyProject
ad S7_300 Station
E IN CPU-315-2 DP
S7program
Sources
Blocks
E jMICROMASTER_420
Touchpanel
FC16
OF FC17
FC19
FC42
0 DB19
VAT_I/0 -Conveyor
VAT_Number_form.
Created in
OB_Cycie
FC_S ignal
FC Mode
FC ConyMotor
FED
FBD
FED
FED
FC_Fault
LAD
FC_Count_Add
FC_MM420
DB_Parts
VAT I/0-Conveyor
VAT_Number_formats
FBD
FBD
DB
1----Ia,5611(pRoFieus)
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Downloading
0 b ect name
Systemdaten
0 081
FC14
411. FC15
18.09.2009
SERV1_088.15

With the LAD/STL/FBD Editor, you can create or modify individual blocks and
download them directly into the CPU. Downloading several or all S7 bocks is
possible with the SIMATIC Manager.
If the configuration or parameter assignment data of a hardware station was
changed with the "HW Config" tool, the "system data" that was changed as a
result can be downloaded into the CPU directly from HW Config or you can
also do it later with the SIMATIC Manager:
1. Choose which blocks are to be downloaded:
all blocks:
select the "Blocks" object
Note: with this action, the "system data" is also downloaded into the
CPU!
several blocks: hold down the CTRL key and select the individual
blocks
one block:
select the desired block
2. Downloading blocks into the CPU:
by clicking on the icon shown to the left
or
by selecting the PLC -1 Download menu option.
Page 15
ST-SERV1
Editing Blocks
SIEMENS
Simple Program Debugging

2LAD ,STL , TBD - [PC I Mly_Project SIMATIC 300(I) 1. CPU 315-2 DP]
Lzil2E1
JJJ
ta Fie Edit Insert PLC Debug View Options Window Help
x1Railel
El
l IT:I Ll
edill III 2.1611
FC1 System
etvosk
System ON/OF!
.11:11LIc
La Re Edit Veer PLC Debug New OptliffS Mese Hee

-
DIG;I:Ilij I AHL I Vele' ..71r. I DI1161 ,t 31
08. 0
SR
1.jj
_d -11-1*1-01iff11.1-113-11L?1i
ICI Sysces
mem: Syn.,* 081/077

08 .0
10.0
X
/0.1
_J
W111:7/
Inlo
Fde/Sock saved.
1:113[11 MUM"
2 'do
Derawlerwees
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
4: Afton We
8U..
VON<52k+.1
PressFltoptlielp.
18.09.2009
SERV1_08E.16

Requirements
Before you can activate the monitoring mode, you must open the block you
want to monitor either offline or online with the LAD / STL / FBD Editor.
Note: In order to test a block in the offline mode, the block must first be
downloaded into the PLC.
Activation /
Deactivation
There are two ways of activating/deactivating the "Monitor" test function:
:_d
Click the "glasses" icon

Select the Debug 9 Monitor menu option.
View
The program status is displayed in different ways depending on the

programming language selected (LAD / STL / FBD).
Note
When the monitoring function is activated, you cannot change the programming
language in which the block is viewed (LAD / STL / FBD).
Page 16
ST-SERV1
Editing Blocks
SIEMENS
Modifying Blocks
Open block
offline I online
Datei BearbeitEn
Save (always offline)
Elnfiigen Zlelsystem
Hifie
Extras Fenster
61:
Test Ansicht
.0
alg
(
..._,..11121
Download (always online)
9-
FC1
2=3:10: Titel:
1.8.0
SR
10..I 0
S
80.1
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_08E.17
Block Corrections
Normally, block corrections are made in the following sequence:
Open Block
With the LAD/STL/FBD Editor, blocks can be opened offline (from the PG's
project data storage) or online (directly from the CPU). Normally it is not
necessary to open a block online.
Modify Block
Regardless of whether the block has been opened online or offline, the
changes that are made are first of all only stored in the programming device's
work memory. With that, the changes that are made are neither backed up
offline in the project data storage nor online in the CPU! If the PG is switched
off, all the changes that have been made are lost.
Save Block
By using the "Save" icon, the block is always saved offline, that is, in the PG's
project data storage regardless of whether the block was previously opened
online or offline!
Download Block
By using the "Download" icon, the block is always saved online and/or
downloaded into the controller - regardless of whether the block was previously
opened online or offline!
SITRAIN
Training for
Page 17
ST-SERV1
Editing Blocks
SIEMENS
Exercise 1: Jogging the Conveyor Motor (FC 16)

, ADr ST L FBI) - III I b 0
I L_Convflotor" My_Project ,SIMA TIC 300(1) \ CPU 315-2 DPV2,61/161

Fle Ed Insert PLC Debug Ylew Options Window, Kelp
1:1 412-.11ell Al x it
la
.-, -
11
1 v4all
..m.11:
...1112.1
(
IT
= 2.16 1 ! 111t5IN Li 11.1*1-01511-.1-1-Fil Ell
,
..:1251
P216 : Jog Conveyor

etspork
: Jog conveyor RIGHT
r:1
aa
T_Jog_
RIGHT .
I
T _Jog_
LIFT .
H Cony_
ajoa-t
VI
Al
-- Jog conveyor RIGHT, amsentary contact

-- Jog conveyor LIFT, momentarycontact
-- Run conveyor RIGHT
9 RS
9 SR
.0 -(N)<) -(P)-0 -(SAVE)

9 reG
9 P05
El W Comparator
El al Converter
E ill Counter
E it De al
81 f
limps
betimeek 2 : Jog conveyor LIFT
"T
IZg.7
d_Ceow._
LIFT.
"11:71-
01
1 I
Ev
Szoliel laterewties:
T_Jog_RIGHT
T_Jog_LIFT
H_Conv_LIFT
/0.2
10.3
08.6
-- Jog conveyor RIGHT, aomentary contact

-- Jog conveyor LIFT, momentary contact
-- Run conveyor LIFT
_tu
.1 14 4 a a
2 Into
a cm:mum=
4: Address ado.
Ill:ck boded.
1---0
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
1:1 - IIP Program elamant:
5: 1.
'offline
18.09.2009
SERV1_08E.18
IIII0
C 1C
1' Error
I (-
<, --OR)
-0 -(5)
amma.
10.2
20.3
08.5
II -M-11 -NOR. -0
<) -(4.}
-
I )---I
2wleawidien:
T_Jog_RIGHT
T_Jog_LIFT
H_Conv_RIGHT
New network
111111
F.. Cal samara
rtiparieco
lAbs <5.2
Ow 1
Jrised
Ag

gr
Task
Using the simulator "pushbutton" I 0.2, you should be able to jog the conveyor
motor to the RIGHT (Q 8.5). Using the simulator "pushbutton" I 0.3, you should be
able to jog the conveyor motor to the LEFT (Q 8.6). If both "pushbuttons" are
pressed simultaneously, then the conveyor motor may not start in either direction
(Lock-out!).
What to Do
1. In the SIMATIC Manager, insert a new FC16 block.

Block folder - right mouse click - insert new object - Function 9 in the
dialog set the programming language to LAD
2. Start the LAD / STL / FBD Editor by double-clicking on FC 16.
3. In the " Overviews" open the Program Elements browser
4. Edit Network 1 of the FC16 (see slide)
using drag & drop, copy the required logic symbol from the Program
Elements browser to the desired location in the network's code section.
label the addresses at the logic symbol.
Give the networks titles
5. Then insert a new, second network and program this in a similar manner as
described in Point 4
6. Save the block offline
7. Download the block into the CPU
a
Programming
Language
Also observe your block in the different programming languages. To do so select

LAD / STL / FBD Editor - View 4 choose either LAD, STL, or FBD.
Page 18
ST-SERV1
Editing Blocks
SIEMENS
Exercise 2: Calling FC 16 in OB 1
,[012_
<I
1
LAD/STLABD - [0131 "OB_Cycle" -- My_Project \ SIMATIC 300(1)),CPU 31S-2 DP ,Wen
0 He Eck
Insert
plcal2-1 611
PLC
Debug
View
Options
Window Fklp
_c AI
ir F %lee' ! I !I ratilt t_i -11-1-14-1-orli-1-thl2.1

Al ,t102 1e1 --)1 -IsliLd
,
Axl
OBI
ET-. .- Shift/Rotate
E tA Status bts
E .1:1 Timers
Word logic
E ..,
112 FB blocks
E ;I FC aocics
0 FC1
Q FC14 FC_Signal
la FC15 FC_Mocle
ta FC17 FC
Id
Cyclic Program Operation
'*tmork 4:
Control of conveyor
FC
CossolbsZac
la
symbol information:
120,
-- FC
FC16
Control of conveyor motor
Fault
U FC18 FC Count
UFC19 FC_Count_Add
0 FC42 FC_M14420
is SFB blocks
la SFC docks
14.itiple instances
E IS Lbraries
lel Program elements
hE. Cal stiuctrie I
,71,111141j1j1.1,1\ l: Eno,
2: Info
3: Cios leferences
4: Address info.
5: Marty
1----0 loffrme
Press Fl to get Heip.
6: D.57..b.
tAbs < 5.2
7: Cornmeal
l
1-----1
A
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_08E.1 9
lit; Automation and Industrial Solutions
Task
In OB 1 program the call of the FC 16 so that this block is executed cyclically.
What to Do
1.
Open the OB 1 block with the LAD / STL / FBD Editor
2. In the "View" menu, choose the LAD programming language and select the
code section of Network 1
3. In the " Overviews", open the Program Elements browser and in
Blocks folder
it
the FC
4. Program the call of the FC 16 by copying the block symbol into the network
using drag & drop.
5. Save OB1 offline and download

6.
icd
7.
Test the FC 16 function, that

jogged
is,
it
into the CPU
whether or not the conveyor motor can be
FC 16 block with the LAD / STL / FBD Editor and activate the
block" test function to follow the signal sequences during the
Open the
"
Monitor
program execution

Page 19
ST-SERV1
Editing Blocks
SIEMENS
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Note
18.09.2009
SERV1_08E.20

gr,
complete a topic.
Page 20
ST-SERV1
Editing Blocks
SIEMENS
Editor Customization: "General" Tab

2S1
OLAD/STL/FBD - [FCI My_Project SIMATIC 3111X1)\ CPU 315-2 DP]

Fie Edit Insert PLC Debug new 1- ( ptions Window Help
-1611 4 Y, h1e1
DICA3"It
FCI : System
1Setmork
.
System Off/OFF
T_ Ttem_
I 1---
.
.
General I View I STL I LAD/FBD I Block I Sources I Source Text I
Compare On-/Offine Partners

Reference Data
Symbol Tel*
Font
I !
88.0
Font Size:
Saha..
IV
Further options
SR
S
Font
'Cower New
I i r Report cross-accesses as error

,
"T_S1 1,
OFF"
l
l ,
ip,
Symbol information:
Momentnr
T Zystem_uN
T_System_OFF
Moment al
F Save window arrangement on exit

Set network title automatically
Program status
r Control at Contact
r Automatic Program S tatus Change on Blocks
w Terminate ONLINE connection after program status
Tree Lag:
(0.60) seconds
Mnemonics (Change SIMATIC Manager Options>Customizek Ergish
41
AlliliulthliEtror
2: Info 3:Cross-references
Changes various individual settings of this application.
SIMATIC S7
OK
Date:
18.09.2009
SERV1_08E.21
Abbrechen I
th,"
Hale

Font
Here you select using "Select" the font and the size of the text to be used for
programming blocks.
Control at Contact
Inputs and bit memories that were given the attribute CC (Control at Contact) in
the symbol table, can be controlled directly from the Program Editor using
buttons (on the contact).
Report Cross
References as Error
Here you can specify that global accesses to instance data blocks, that were
entered as such in the symbol table, be reported as errors.
Save Window
The contents and the arrangement of possibly still open windows are saved
Arrangement on Exit when you exit. The next time you start, they are reestablished.
Set Network Title
Automatically
Here you can specify that the symbol comment of the first output, bit memory,
timer or counter address that is assigned a state in a network ("=", "S" and "R"),
be automatically used as network title.

Page 21
ST-SERV1
Editing Blocks
SIEMENS
Editor Customization: "View" Tab

1 ,1 Nel I
CLAD/STL/FBD - [FC1 My_Project SIMATIC 300(1) \ CPU 315-2 DP]
2S1
G. Pis Edit Insert PLC Debug View I Options Window Help
12
*-1= 1611
General View I STL I LAD/FBD Block I Sources

Compare On-/Offline Partners
Reference Data
Symbol Table
Ctr1+111
: System
'
Satmork
4:
System ON/011,
T_Syst.ea_
ON'
08.0
SR
17 Symbolic representation
17 Symbol information
With text color:
Select...
Automatic symbol selection (for LAD /HD)
Isyrnbd
Sorting of selection list by:
F0
yst. am_
77'
14.1
17 Block/network comments
1 Address identification
17 Permanently forced addresses (FORCE)
17 Process diagnostic addresses (PDIAG)
Sfflibel islormation:
T_System_ON
T_System_OFF
I0.0
I0.1
-- Momentary
-- Momentary
With background coior.
'Created in Language
Sant..
Data Blocks:
2:1
I Declaration View
I Type and number
Program element overview

Project
TI MaIMILII11111101111M1231/
3 Cross-references
4 Ad
Select..
11.11
Not faisafe addresses:

-View for Block Types
Logic Blocks:
41
I Source Text
- View after Block Open
I Type and number
Libraries:
Changes various nividual settings of tNs application.

OK
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
View after
Block Open
18.09.2009
SERV1_08E.22
Cancel
H.*
iSITRAIN Training for
gr
After opening with the Editor, you can display blocks as follows:
with symbolic or absolute addressing
with or without symbol information
with or without symbol selection (only in LAD and FBD)
with or without block and network comments
with or without address identification for forced addresses and/or

addresses that are used for process diagnostics
View for Block Types:

...Logic Blocks
From the selection box you can choose the programming language of the
blocks - "STL", "LAD", "FBD" or Created in Language.
...Data Blocks
You can display data blocks in the following views:
declaration view or
data view
Program Elements - Here you can specify how logic blocks are to be sorted in the "Overviews"
Overview browser - according to type and number or according to family name (entry in a
block's Properties dialog).
Page 22
ST-SERV1
Editing Blocks
SIEMENS
Editor Customization: "STL" Tab

Customize
General I View STL I IAD/FBD I Block I Sources I Source Text
Display of the Status Fields
17 Status Bit
Result of Logic Operation
Defauk Status
r Address Register
r DB Register
r DB Register 2
r Indirect
r Status Word
I Address Register 2
r Accumulator 2
r Activate New Breakpoints Irnmediatekr
Default
Abbrechen I
OK
Hie
4
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Status Fields
" SITRAIN Training for
MI,
When you monitor the status of a block in STL, only the status fields you
activate in this dialog box will be displayed.
The following options are available:
18.09.2009
SERV1_08E.23
11
The status bit is displayed.

Status Bit:
Result of Logic Operation: The result of logic operation (RLO) is
displayed.
A timer word, counter word or the contents of
Default Status:
Accumulator 1 are displayed - depending on
the operation used.
The address registers are used with indirect
Address Registers:
addressing.
The contents of Accumulator 2 are displayed.
The contents of the relevant data block
register are displayed.
Indirect:
This display is possible only with memoryindirect addressing.
Status Word:
The status word is displayed.
Default:
The "Default" button selects the standard
system setting for the Status field.
The status bit, RLO and standard status are
displayed.
Activate New Breakpoints Immediately:
This option is relevant only for the
"Breakpoint" test function.
Accumulator 2:
DB Registers:
Page 23
ST-SERV1
Editing Blocks
SIEMENS
Editor Customization: "LAD/FBD" Tab

General I View I STL
LAD/FBD
Block I Sources I Source Text I
Layout
Address Field Width
!DIN A4 Portrait
11
(10 .26)
r Element
Representation:
I3-dimensional
Line/Color
Reference:
'Status fulfilled
Line Weight
Narrow
(;* Medium
Wide
Select..
[Color:
17 Type Check of Addresses
I Display symbol information at address
OK
SIMATIC S7
Abbrechen I
Date:
File:
Layout
18.09.2009
SERV1_08E.24
Hilfe
glZ

Here you select the print format:

DIN A4 Portrait or Landscape
maximum size.
Address Field Width You can set the limit for the maximum number of characters in an address
name to a number between 10 and 26. With symbolic representation, a line
break takes place according to the Address Field Width.
In LAD and FBD the number of representable operation symbols on the screen
or in the printout also changes with the Address Field Width.
Element
The program elements can be displayed in different ways:

2-dimensional (without shadow)
3-dimensional (with shadow)
Line/Color
You use this box to choose how you want the following to be displayed
Selected Element (color)
Contacts (line)
Status Fulfilled (color and line)
Status Not Fulfilled (color and line).
Type Check
When you edit a block, the type of address entered in bit logic instructions is
always checked. You can deactivate the Type Check of Addresses: for
comparisons, mathematical operations etc. ( for experienced users only! ).
Symbol Information
at Address
If you activate this function, the symbol information is not overlaid at the lower
edge of the networks, rather is overlaid directly at the address.
Page 24
ST-SERV1
Editing Blocks
SIEMENS
Editor Customization: "Block" Tab

Generate Reference Data
General I View I STL I LAD/FBD
Block
Sources I Source Text I
Should the reference data be
With the Creation of a Block
f;;. updated?
F Create reference data
Create Logic Blocks

Language:
STL
LAD
regenerated?
FBD
Function blocks with multiple instance capability

Yes
Cancel I
Help
Default
Abbrechen I
OK
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Create Reference
Data
Hille
18.09.2009
SERV1_08E.25

When you modify blocks and save them, the reference data is automatically
updated if the "Create Reference Data" option in the "Block" tab is checked.
If this option is not checked, the reference data is not updated at first. But the
next time you open: Options Reference Data 9 Display, you must decide
whether you want to update the reference data and for which blocks.
Note: The topic "Reference Data" is discussed in detail in the
"Troubleshooting" chapter.
Create Logic Blocks Here you specify which programming language (LAD / STL / FBD) is to be
automatically suggested when you insert a new block.

Page 25
ST-SERV1
Editing Blocks
SIEMENS
Editor Customization: "Sources/Source Text" Tab

Customize
Customize
General I View I STL I LAD/FBD I Block
Sources
Souce Text I
General) View I STL I LAD /FBD I Block I Sources Source Ted
- With Compiling a Source
-Format
Tab width:
17 Display warnings
Charade
r Display line number
I- Errors before warnings

Fr-/ Overwrite existing blocks
FI Indent automatically
IV Create blocks only lot error-free completion
r Key words in capital letters
With Saving a Block
-Color and Style
P Source text display with the Wowing color and style assignment
r Generate source automaticaly

Derive name from:
Text type:
I Normal text
Font Style:
r Bold
D.:olute Idenrifier of the block
!:
L'I.en'ilier of r.he block
Address-es:
r Italic
Color:
Preview
Generate sources for blocks that already exist
with the settings indicated above):
Execute... I
Select...
t.st
Print
r With line numbers

Black and white
Defaue
OK
Abbrechen I
SIMATIC S7
He
Date:
File:
Standard font
OK
18.09.2009
SERV1_08E.26
Abbrechen I
Hille

Sources
It is possible to enter a program or parts of a program as an STL source (ASCII

sources). The source file can contain the code for one, several, or all blocks.
The STL source can then be compiled into executable S7 blocks.
Creating a program using a source has the following advantages:
You can create and edit your source with any ASCII editor and then import it
into STEP 7. The source can then be compiled into individual, executable
S7 blocks with STEP 7.
You can program several blocks in a source, whereby you can use the
advantages of the ASCII editors (such as find and replace one operation in
all blocks).
You can save sources even with syntax errors. This is not possible when
creating logic blocks with the incremental LAD/STL/FBD Editor because of
the integrated syntax check. As a result, blocks can be programmed with
symbolic addresses before a symbol table has even been created. This is
an advantage when the wiring of the PLC has not yet been determined, for
example.
The source is created in the syntax of the "Statement List (STL)" programming
language. The structuring within the sources as well as within the blocks
themselves (declaration table, networks etc.) takes place using keywords.
Compiling Sources
In the "Sources" tab, you can select with which options executable S7 blocks
are to be generated from an STL or ASCII source. The individual options are
explained completely in the STEP 7 Online Help.
Source Text
Here you select options of how the text is to be displayed in the source files.
The individual options are explained completely in the STEP 7 Online Help.
Page 26
ST-SERV1
Editing Blocks
SIEMENS
Binary Operations
Uij Bit logic
>=1
,
s
..
XOR
-0
,_1[1_12c]
Ze Help on Function Block Diagi-alti.flv,

File Ed
Bookmark Opttons He
index
Cantatas
1..e4s on ITER 7
Rock
Isittery
E*''
SR : Set_Reset Flip Flop
Symbol
address
SR
-- -
[A
111-
--[R]
-[5]
RS
elm
--[N]--
erieleStel.
address
MAIM
BOOL
MtdMIlLAttel
I, O. M. D. L
BOOL
I, O. M. D. L. T, C
BOOL
I,
BOOL
I, O, M, D, L
Qasniotiar
The address specifies Which bltwlll be
set or reset
Set Instruction enabled
M. D, L, T, C
Reset instruction enabled

Signal state of saddreSS
Description
The Set Reset Flip Flop instruction executes Set (S) or Reset (R) instructions only when the
RLO is 1 An RLO of 0 has no effect on these instructions, the address specified in the
instruction remains unchanged.
Set Reset Flip Flop is set when the signal state at input S is 1 and the signal state at input
R 1.0 If input S is 0 and input R is 1, the flip flop is reset. If the RLO at both inputs is 1 the flip
flop is reset.
The Set Reset Flip Flop instruction is affected by the Master Control Relay (MCR) For more
detailed information ahout how the MCR functions , refer to MCR snloff.
--[SAVE]
Status Word
NEG
El- FOS
SIMATIC S7
4..(4
writes
Date:
File:
89 DR 5.117 FLU SO
X
18.09.2009
SERV1_09E.1
SITRAIN
Training for
Page
Contents
Objectives
.......... 2
Binary Logic Operations: AND, OR
..........3
Binary Logic Operations: Exclusive OR (XOR)
..........4
Sensors and Symbols
.......... 5
First Check, Signal State, Result of Check and Result of Logic Operation
Exercise 1: Sensors and Symbols
.......... 7
Assignment, Setting, Resetting
.......... 8
Setting and Resetting a Flip Flop
.......... 9
Midline Output Coil
10
Instructions that Affect the RLO
........ 11
Example 2: Programming the Operating Mode Section (FC 15)
...... 12
Exercise 2: "FCMode" (FC 15), Solution Hints
....... 13
Exercise 3: Conveyor in AUTO Mode (Expanding FC 16)
.......14
Exercise 3: "FC_ConvMotor" (FC 16), Solution Hints
.......15
RLO Edge Detection
........ 16
Signal Edge Detection
........ 17
Exercise 4: Integrating the Edge Detection in FC 16
.......18
Exercise 5: Putting Indicator Lights + Horn (FC 14) into Operation
.......19
........ 20
Additional Exercise 6: Optimizing the Operating Mode Section (FC 15)
......21
Unconditional Jump (Regardless of the RLO)
....... 22
Conditional Jump (Dependent on RLO)
........23
SITRAIN
Training for
Page 1
ST-SERV1
Binary Operations
SIEMENS
Objectives
understand the difference between 'real' connected NC contacts
and NO contacts, and programmed symbols
be able to explain the terms Result of Logic Operation (RLO),
Status (STAT) and First Check
be able to program basic binary logic operations
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_09E.2
Page 2
ird SITRAIN Training for

W
ST-SERV1
Binary Operations
SIEMENS
Binary Logic Operations: AND, OR

LAD
I 0.0
STL
FBD
I 0.1
Q 8.0
I 0.0
I 0.1
Q 8.1
I 0.2
Q 8.2
)
I 0.2
>=1
1 0.3
I 0.3
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_09E.3
Q 8.2
A 10.0
1 0.1
A
Q 8.0
Q 8.1
0 10.2
O I 0.3
= Q 8.2

Logic Tables
AND
1 0.0
1 0.1
Q 8.0
OR
I 0.2
I 0.3
Q 8.2
SITRAIN
Training for
Page 3
ST-SERV1
Binary Operations
SIEMENS
Binary Logic Operations: Exclusive OR (XOR)
LAD
I 0.4
10.4
FBD
I 0.5
Q 8.0
)
10.5
I 0.4
XOR
I 0.5
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_09E.4
Q 8.0
A
AN
0
AN
A
1 0.4
1 0.5
X
X
1 0.4
1 0.5
Q8.0
1 0.4
1 0.5
Q8.0

Logic Table
XOR
Rule
I 0.4
I 0.5
Q 8.0
With an EXCLUSIVE OR logic operation, the signal state is "1", if the

signal state of one of the two given addresses is "1".
With XOR elements for checking more than two addresses, the result of
logic operation is:
"1" if an uneven number
of checked addresses deliver the result of check "1"
"0" if an even number
of checked addresses deliver the result of check "1"
Page 4
ST-SERV1
Binary Operations
SIEMENS
Sensors and Symbols

Interpretation in the PLC Program
Process
NO
contact
Voltage
present
at input?
The sensor
is ...
The
sensor
is a ...
Signal
state
at
input
activated
not
activated
NC
contact
activated
no
L
(
Symbol /
Instruction
Result of
check
Symbol /
Instruction
LAD:
Yes"
LAD:
Result of
check
Check
for signal state "0"
"No"
0
0
H I
"NO contact--.4 "NC contact'
yes
Check
for signal state "1"
FBD:
"No"
0
FBD:
I:
,
"Yes"
1
l&
no
"Yes"
1
"No"
0
.11.141.11
not
activated
yes
STL:
A I x.y
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Process
18.09.2009
SERV1_09E.5
"Yes"
1
STL:
AN I x.y
"No"
0

The use of normally open or normally closed contacts for the sensors in a
controlled process depends on the safety regulations for that process.
Normally closed contacts are always used for limit switches and safety
switches, so that dangerous conditions do not arise if a wire break occurs in the
sensor circuit.
Normally closed contacts are also used for switching off machinery for the
same reason.
Symbols
In LAD, a symbol with the name "NO contact" is used for checking for signal
state "1" and a symbol with the name "NC contact" to check for signal state "0".
It makes no difference whether the process signal "1" is supplied by an
activated NO contact or a non-activated NC contact.
Example
If an NC contact in the machine is not activated, the signal in the process

image table will be "1". You use the NO contact symbol in LAD to check for a
signal state of "1".
General:
The "NC contact" symbol delivers the result of check "1" when the checked
address state or status is "0".
Page 5
ST-SERV1
Binary Operations
SIEMENS
First Check, Signal State, Result of Check and Result of Logic Operation
M 3.4
I10
AN I 1.1
A M 4.0
First Check
Result of Logic
Operation
Result of Check
Signal State
Example 3
First Check
Result of Logic
Operation
Result of Check
Signal State
Example 2
First Check
Result of Logic
Operation
Result of Check
Signal State
Example 1
= Q 8.0
=
Q 8.1
I 2.0
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_09E.6
qr

Signal State
A logic operation is made up of a series of instructions to check the states of

signals (inputs (I), outputs (Q), bit memories (M), timers (T), counters (C) or
data bits (D) ) and instructions to set Q,M,T,C or D.
Result of Check
When the program is executed, the result of check is obtained. If the check
condition is fulfilled, the result of check is "1". If the check condition is not
fulfilled, the result of check is "0".
First Check
The first check that follows an RLO limiting operation (such as S, R, CU, = ...)
or the first check in a logic string is called a First Check (FC) since the result of
this check - regardless of the last RLO - is accepted as the new RLO.
Result of Logic
Operation
When the next check instructions are executed, the result of logic operation is
gated with the result of check and a new RLO is obtained.
When the last check instruction in a logic operation has been executed, the
RLO remains the same. A number of instructions using the same RLO can
follow.
Note
The result of the first check is stored without being subjected to a logic
operation. Therefore, it makes no difference whether you program the first
check with an AND or an OR instruction in STL. To convert your program to
one of the other programming languages, you should, however, always
program using the correct instruction.
Page 6
ST-SERV1
Binary Operations
SIEMENS
Exercise 1: Sensors and Symbols

Task: In all three examples, the light should be on when S1 is activated and S2 is not activated!
Hardware
r_>
I
I
11 S1
I= \ S2
I
11.1
11.0
Programmable controller
Q 4.0
DU
itiLight
Software
III
LAD >
>
DU
FBD
1 1.0 I 1.1
HI--1
11.0 -
&
11.1 -
[I[I1.31
*
Q 4.0
( )
14 S2
1=\ S1
I
I
11.0
11.1
Q 4.0
1
H
Q4.0
11.1
Q 4.0
)Light
Q 4.0
( )
Q 4.0
I 1.0
..I.1.1
..... Q 4.0
18.09.2009
SERV1_09E.7
11.0
11.1
Q4.0
- ---
I1
( )
HI
11.0 -
&
I 1.1 -
Date:
File:
11.0 -
11.0
..1
..... .1.1
..... Q 4.0
SIMATIC S7
11.1
I= S2
11.0
Light
1.0
I= S1
&
Q4.0
I 1.1 1 1.0
..I.1.1
..... Q 4.0
1
11
Exercise
Complete the programs above to obtain the following functionality: When switch
S1 is activated and switch S2 is not activated, the light should be ON in all
three cases.
Note !
The terms "NO contact" and "NC contact" have different meanings depending
on whether they are used in the process hardware context or as symbols in the
software.

Page 7
ST-SERV1
Binary Operations
SIEMENS
Assignment, Setting, Resetting

LAD
110
I 1.0
Assignment
FBD
I 1.1
I 1.0
II
I 1.1
I 1.2
11.3
081
I 1.2
Reset
Q 8.1
(R)
I 1.5
SIMATIC S7
11.5
Date:
File:
I 1.4
18.09.2009
SERV1_09E.8
A 11.2
A I 1.3
S Q 8.1
Q 8.1
S
I 1.3
11.4
A I 1.0
A I 1.1
= Q 8.0
Q 8.0
>=1
O I 1.4
O 11.5
R Q 8.1
Q 8.1
I R
4,Zr

Assignment
An assignment passes the RLO on to the specified address (Q, M, D). When
the RLO changes, the signal state of that address also changes.
Set
If RLO= "1", the specified address is set to signal state "1" and remains set until
another instruction resets the address.
Reset
If RLO= "1", the specified address is reset to signal state "0" and remains in this
state until another instruction sets the address again.
Page 8
ST-SERV1
Binary Operations
SIEMENS
Setting and Resetting a Flip Flop
FBD
LAD
M 5.7
11.2
Dominant
Reset
SR
M 5.7
Q 9.3
)
11.2
Dominant
Set
11.3
11.3
11.3
R
I I
M 5.7
Q 9.3
)
11.3
11.2
11.2
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Flip Flop
Q9.3
A 1 1.3
R M 5.7
A 1 1.2
S M 5.7
A M 5.7
= Q 9.3
M 5.7
RS
Q9.3
A 11.2
S M 5.7
A 1 1.3
R M 5.7
A M 5.7
= Q 9.3
SR
18.09.2009
SERV1_09E.9
- S
RS

A flip flop has a Set input and a Reset input. The memory bit is set or reset,
depending on which input has an RLO=1.
If there is an RLO=1 at both inputs at the same time, the priority must be
determined.
Priority
In LAD and FBD there are different symbols for Dominant Set and Dominant
Reset memory functions. In STL, the instruction that was programmed last has
priority.
Note
With a warm restart of the CPU, all outputs are reset. That is, they are
overwritten with the state '0'.
If the M 5.7 in the example above has been declared retentive, it's state will be
retained even after a warm restart of the CPU. If the memory bit was set before
the warm restart, it's state remains state '1' even after the warm restart and the
output Q 5.7 would be immediately activated once again.

Page 9
ST-SERV1
Binary Operations
SIEMENS
Midline Output Coil
LAD
11.0
11.1
M 20.7
12.0
1 2.1
1---(#)--I I
Q 4.0
II
( )--1
FBD
11.0
M 20.7
11.1
120
Q 4.0
12.1
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Midline Output Coil
18.09.2009
SERV1_09E.10

The midline output coil exists only in the LAD and FBD graphic languages. It is
an intermediate assignment element with assignment function that assigns the
current RLO at a specified address (M20.7 in the slide). The midline output coil
provides this same address in the same network for subsequent gating.
In the STL language, this is equivalent to
= M 20.7
A M 20.7
In the LAD language, when connected in series with other elements, the
"midline output coil" instruction is inserted in the same way as a contact.
Page 10
ST-SERV1
Binary Operations
SIEMENS
Instructions that Affect the RLO

FBD
LAD
A I 0.0
!IF NOT
I0.0
Q 8.0
10.1
A I 0.1
NOT
= Q 8.0
NOT
Examples:
STAT 0 Bit memory
CLR
= M 0.0
not available
not available
STAT 1 Bit memory,/

not available
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
SET
= M 0.1
not available
18.09.2009
SERV1_09E.11

qlr
NOT
The NOT instruction inverts the RLO.
CLR
The CLEAR instruction sets the RLO to "0" without pre-conditions (available
only in STL).
SET
The SET instruction sets the RLO to "1" without pre-conditions (available only
in STL).
Note
The CLR and SET instructions limit the result of logic operation, that is, the next
programmed scan becomes a first check.
First Check
The first processed check operation after a conditional operation is called a first
check. It has a particular meaning since the CPU takes over the result of check
directly as a result of logic operation (RLO). The "old" RLO is thus lost. The first
check always represents the beginning of a logic operation. The operation
(AND, OR, XOR) that comes with the first check is of no importance.
Page 11
ST-SERV1
Binary Operations
SIEMENS
Exercise 2: Programming the Operating Mode Section (FC 15)
DI
DO
1 0.0
T_System_ON
1 0.1
T_System_OFF L_SYSTEP
Q 4.1
1 0.2
T_Jog_RIGHT
L MAN
Q 4.2
I 0.3
T_Jog_LEFT
L AUTO
Q 4.3
U
U
U
V
1 0.4
1 0.5
-15V...+15V
Ail A01
All
cs
All
I=1
0 8 1 5
0
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Task
CI
CI
-15V...+15V
A02
0 0
0 0
All
Al2
0 0
18.09.2009
SERV1_09E.12
gir
Al2
A01
A02
0 0

For the distribution conveyor, you are to program an operating mode section in
FC 15 and interlock the MANUAL mode (Q4.2) in FC 16 as an additional
condition for jogging the conveyor motor.
Function of the operating mode section in FC 15:
The system (LED Q4.1) is turned "on" using the simulator momentary
contact I 0.0. It is turned "off' using the simulator momentary contact I 0.1
(NC contact).
You can preselect "MANUAL" mode (LED Q 4.2) or "AUTO" mode

(LED Q 4.3) through switch I 0.4 as follows:
- I 0.4 switched off (= "0"):
"MANUAL" mode preselected,
- I 0.4 switched on (= '1 "):
"AUTO" mode preselected.
The operating mode that you presele-ct through switch I 0.4 is confirmed or
switched on through momentary contact I 0.5
The operating modes are switched off when you change the preselection of
the operating mode (I 0.4) or when the system is switched off (Q 4.1 = "0").
Integrating the MANUAL mode (Q 4.2):
What to Do
The "Jog Conveyor Motor" programmed in FC 16 is now only to be possible

when the "MANUAL" mode is switched on. Program the relevant lock-out in
FC 16.
1. Insert the new FC 15 block and program the required function

2. Program the lock-out in FC 16.
3. Download all blocks into the CPU and test your program
Solution Hints
You will find solution hints on the following page !
Page 12
ST-SERV1
Binary Operations
SIEMENS
Exercise 2: "FC Mode" (FC 15), Solution Hints

Indicator Light System ON
Network 1:
Q 4.1
SR
ON-Condition
OFF-Condition
Network 2:
Indicator Light MAN Mode
Q 4.2
SR
ON-Conditions
Q ____
OFF-Conditions
Network 3:
Indicator Light AUTO Mode
Q 4.3
SR
ON-Conditions
Q ____
OFF-Conditions
4
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_09E.13

qr
Whole Function
of the FC 15
In FC 15, the operating modes and the indicator lights: System ON, MANUAL
mode and AUTO mode are to be programmed with the functions described in
the task.
Partial Functions
of the FC 15
The whole function of FC 15 can be divided into the following partial functions,
as shown in the slide above. These partial functions can be programmed in
separate networks:
Network 1
indicator light for System ON
Network 2 indicator light for MANUAL mode
Partial Functions
of the Networks
Network 3 indicator light for AUTO mode
Every network can then be logically divided into two sections which can be
programmed independent of one another:
ON conditions (Set condition)
OFF conditions (Reset condition)

Example:
Programming
The conditions for the ON state of the MANUAL mode:

System switched on ( Q 4.1 = '1 ') AND MANUAL mode preselected
("ModeSelect" switch I 0.4 = '0') AND "Accept" switch pressed (M.C.Switch
I 0.5 = '1 ')
The conditions for the OFF state of the MANUAL mode:

System switched off ( Q 4.1 = '0') OR AUTO mode preselected
("ModeSelect" switch I 0.4 = '1')
By structuring the whole functionality of the FC 15 into partial functions

(networks and network sections) you have created function units that can
relatively easily be turned into a program. The simplest way to implement the
necessary functions is with memory functions, since the switching on and
switching off of the system and the operating modes takes place with
momentary contact switches.
Page 13
ST-SERV1
Binary Operations
SIEMENS
Exercise 3: Conveyor in AUTO Mode (Expanding FC 16)

Cony Start
Transport Phase
Cony. Stop
Prox.Sens.Bay 1
I 8.5
Mom.Cont.Bay 1
I 8.1
Prox.Sens.Bay 2
I 8.6
Mom.Cont.Bay 2
I 8.2
Light Barrier
I 8.0
Run Conveyor
RIGHT
Q8.5
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Function
18.09.2009
SERV1_09E.14
Mr

In AUTO mode, parts are to be transported from Bay 1 or Bay 2 to the "Final
Check" (light barrier).
Run Conveyor RIGHT starts when
Bay 1 proximity sensor is occupied AND NOT Bay 2 proximity sensor is

occupied
AND
Bay 1 momentary contact is pressed
OR
Bay 2 proximity sensor is occupied AND NOT Bay 1 proximity sensor is

occupied
AND
Bay 2 momentary contact is pressed
Run Conveyor RIGHT is stopped when
the part has reached the Final Check (the light barrier)
OR
What to Do
AUTO mode is switched off
1. Expand FC 16 with the desired function.

2. Make sure that the conveyor stops immediately when the automatic mode is
switched off (Q 4.3= "0").
3. Test to see whether the function "Jog left" or "Jog right" still works in the
manual mode (M/A_Man).
Solution Hints
You will find solution hints on the following page !

Page 14
ST-SERV1
Binary Operations
SIEMENS
Exercise 3: "FC ConvMotor" (FC 16), Solution Hints

Network x
Jog RIGHT in MANUAL mode

Conditions for JOGGING
RIGHT
in MANUAL mode
Network v
M 16.2
Run Conveyor RIGHT in AUTO mode

M 16.4
Conditions for
Run Conveyor RIGHT
in AUTO mode
Network z
Memory bit for

Jog RIGHT
In MANUAL mode
S
R
Memory bit for

Run Conveyor RIGHT
in AUTO mode
Control Run Conveyor RIGHT

M 16.2
>=1
Q 8.5
Run Conveyor RIGHT
M 16.4 --SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Problem
18.09.2009
SERV1_09E.15
V.

The Run Conveyor RIGHT (0 8.5) must be controlled under two conditions:
In the MANUAL mode while jogging RIGHT (in the slide - Network x)
OR
in the AUTO mode under the conditions described in the task (in the slide Network y)
If the result of logic operations in both network x and y were assigned the
output Run Conveyor RIGHT (Q8.5), an error in the form of a double
assignment would occur. The jogging RIGHT of the motor in manual mode
(Network x) would no longer function, since the state assigned to the output
would be overwritten in Network y.
Solution
The problem can be solved by programming a memory bit for each condition or
by first assigning the results of the logic operations to a memory bit in both
networks x and y. These are then used in Network z to control the conveyor
motor.
Page 15
ST-SERV1
Binary Operations
SIEMENS
RLO Edge Detection

LAD
FBD
11.0 I 1.1
M1.0
M8.0
H H
(p)
11.0 I 1.1
M1.1
M8.1
H I
(N)
()
SIMATIC S7
I 1.0
I 1.1
11.0
I 1.1
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_098.16
M1.0
M8.0
A 1 1.0
A I 1.1
FP M1.0
M8.0
M8.1
A
I 1.0
A
I 1.1
FN M1.1
M8.1
P
M1.1
N
' SITRAIN Training for

Mr
,
RLO Edge Detection An "RLO edge" detection is when the result of a logic operation changes from
"0" to "1" or from "1" to "0".
Positive Edge
(Positive RLO Edge Detection) detects a signal change in the address from "0"
to "1", and displays it as RLO = "1" after the instruction (such as at M 8.0) for
one cycle.
To enable the system to detect the edge change, the RLO must be saved in an
FP bit memory (such as M 1.0), or a data bit.
Negative Edge
(Negative RLO Edge Detection) detects a signal change in the address from
"1" to "0" and displays it as RLO = "1" after the instruction (such as at M 8.1) for
one cycle.
To enable the system to detect the edge change, the RLO must be saved in an
FN bit memory (such as M 1.1), or a data bit.
Page 16
ST-SERV1
Binary Operations
SIEMENS
Signal Edge Detection

FBD
LAD
1 1.1
M8.0
POS
MB1T
1 1.1
M8.1
NEG
M_B1T
SIMATIC S7
1 1.1
POS
M1.0 M_B1T
1 1.1
NEG
M1.1- M_B1T
Date:
File:
1 1.0
M8.0
11.0
18.09.2009
SERV1_09E.17
M8.1
A
A
A
FP
1 1.0
(
1 1.1
M1.0
A
A
A
FN
M8.0
1 1.0
(
1 1.1
M1.1
M8.1
l SITRAIN Training for
ge
Signal Edge
A "signal edge" is when a signal changes its state.
Example
Input 11.0 acts as a static enable. Input 1 1.1 is to be monitored dynamically

and every signal change is to be detected.
Positive Edge
When the signal state at 11.1 changes from "0" to "1", the "POS" check
instruction results in signal state "1" at output Q for one cycle, provided input
11.0 also has signal state "1" (as in the example above).
To enable the system to detect the edge change, the signal state of I 1.1 must
also be saved in an M_BIT (bit memory or data bit) (such as M 1.0).
Negative Edge
When the signal state at 1 1.1 changes from "1" to "0", the "NEG" check
instruction results in signal state "1" at output Q for one cycle, provided input
1 1.0 has signal state "1" (as in the example above).
To enable the system to detect the edge change, the signal state of I 1.1 must
also be saved in an M_BIT (bit memory or data bit) (such as M 1.1).
Page 17
ST-SERV1
Binary Operations
SIEMENS
Exercise 4: Integrating the Edge Detection in FC 16
Cony. Start
Transport Phase
Cony. Stop
Part at
Light barrier
Start condition
in AUTO mode
Light Barrier
(I 8.0)
F)
Run Conveyor
RIGHT
(Q8.5)
A
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
FC 16 Up Till Now
18.09.2009
SERV1_09E.18
Mr1

In MANUAL mode (Q 4.2 = "1"), you can jog the conveyor motor direction to
the RIGHT and LEFT using the simulator momentary contacts I 0.2 and I 0.3.
In AUTO mode (Q 4.3 = "1"), the Run Conveyor RIGHT is switched on when a
part is laid on the conveyor exactly in front of a proximity sensor of Bay 1 or
Bay 2, (EXOR -logic operation) and the occupied Bay's momentary contact is
pressed.
The conveyor motor is stopped when the part has reached the Final Check
(the light barrier) OR the AUTO mode is switched off.
Task
The function of the FC 16 to control the conveyor motor in AUTO mode is to

remain fundamentally unchanged. However, the conveyor motor is to be
stopped as soon as the part has passed through the light barrier (4 edge
detection necessary, see slide).
What to Do:
1. Program the necessary changes in FC 16, by interlocking the result of the

edge detection as the reset condition for M 16.4 (bit memory for Run
conveyor RIGHT in AUTO mode) instead of the light barrier signal itself
(I 8.0 ).
For the necessary edge detection of the light barrier signal use the bit
memory M 16.0 as an edge memory bit.
2. Save the modified FC 16 block and download it into the CPU.
3. Check whether your program fulfills the desired function.
Page 18
ST-SERV1
Binary Operations

SIEMENS
Exercise 5: Putting Indicator Lights + Horn (FC 14) into Operation
"BAY1"
in MANUAL mode:
2Hz pulsed honking
while conveyor jogging
"BAY2"
"Horn"
(Q 8.7)
"L_Bay
2"
(Q 8.2)
"L_Bay1"
(Q 8.1)
in AUTO mode:
Constant light at both bays when a new part can be placed (both bays empty)
1Hz flashing light at the bay where the part is placed and the conveyor has not yet been started
- 2Hz flashing light at both bays during conveyor movement
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Function
18.09.2009
SERV1_09E.19
_11 SITRAIN Training tor
gr
The indicator lights at Bay 1 and Bay 2 as well as the horn are to be controlled
as follows:
When AUTO mode (Q4.3) is switched on, the indicator lights show ...
constant light when a new part can be placed on the conveyor

(conveyor motor is standing and both proximity sensors are free)
1Hz flashing light at the bay where the associated proximity sensor detects
a part, and only so long as the conveyor has not yet been started
2Hz flashing light as long as the conveyor motor is moving
The horn sounds with a 2Hz pulsed tone as long as the conveyor motor is
jogged to the right or to the left in MANUAL mode.
What to Do
1. Copy the block "FC_Signal" (FC 14) from the project "SERV1_B" in the S7
program "Chap9_binary_Op" into your S7 program called "My Program"
2. Put the block into operation
3. Correct the block so that it fulfills the required functions.
Page 19
ST-SERV1
Binary Operations
SIEMENS
SIMATIC S7
Note
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_09E.20
g.

complete a topic.
Page 20
ST-SERV1
Binary Operations
SIEMENS
Additional Exercise 6: Optimizing the Operating Mode Section (FC 15)

OLD: without edge detection
T_System_ON
(I 0.0)
I
I
T_System_OFF
(I 0.1, NC contact)
L_SYSTEM
(Q4.1)
I
T_System_ON
0 0.0)
NEW: with edge detection

1
I
I
:....
c+1
..i.:
T_System_OFF
(I 0.1, NC contact)
I
I
I
L_SYSTEM
(Q 4.1)
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_09E.21

Rkr
FC 15 Up Till Now
The system (Q 4.1) is switched on with the simulator momentary contact I 0.0,
and switched off with the simulator momentary contact I 0.1 (NC).
If you press both contacts simultaneously, the system remains switched off or
is switched off if currently on. However, if both contacts are pressed and you let
go of the OFF contact, the system switches on again without having to first
press the ON contact once more (see slide, upper function diagram "OLD:
without edge detection").
Task (1)
Expand the functionality of FC 15 using edge detection so that the ON contact

must be pressed every time the system is switched on (see slide, lower
function diagram "NEW: with edge detection").
The criteria for switching on the system is no longer to be the pressed ON
contact or its '1' signal, but the function of pressing or the "positive edge" of
the ON contact signal.
What to Do:
1. In the set condition for "L_SYSTEM", insert an edge detection of the

momentary contact "T_System_ON". For the edge detection, use the
memory bit "M_Aux_System_ON" (M 15.1) as edge memory bit.
2. Save the modified FC 15 block and download it into the CPU.
3. Check whether your program fulfills the desired function!
Task (2)
Just as with switching on the system, accepting and/or switching on "L_MAN"

(Q 4.2) and "L_AUTO" (Q 4.3) is also to happen using "S_M/A_ModeSelect"
(I 0.4).
Every time there is a mode change, the momentary contact "T_ M/A _Accept"
(I 0.5) must be pressed once more.
Use the bit memories "M_Aux_Man_ON" (M 15.2) and "M_Aux_Auto_ON"
(M 15.3) for the required edge detections.
Page 21
ST-SERV1
Binary Operations
SIEMENS
Unconditional Jump (Regardless of the RLO)
LAD
Network 1
FBD
NEW1
( JMP )
Network 1
NEW1
JMP
Network 1
JU NEW1
Network 2
Network 2
Network 2
Network x
Network x
Network x
NEW1
M5.5
I/ I
I 4.7
M69.0
SIMATIC S7
NEW1
M5.5
M69.0
1 4.7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_09E.22
NEW1: AN M5.54
AN 14.7
= M69.0

Jump Instruction
With jump instructions, you can jump individual instructions or even whole
networks so that these are not executed.
Jumps can be made both forwards and backwards. The jump instruction and
the jump destination must both be in the same block (max. jump length =
64kbyte). The jump destination must be unique within this block, that is, it may
only exist once.
Jump instructions can be used in FBs, FCs and OBs.
Jump Label
A jump label (also called a "Label") marks the location in the block where
program execution is to continue from after a successful jump. In STL, the jump
label is located to the left of an instruction; in FBD and LAD, it is always at the
beginning of a network.
You will find the jump label symbol in LAD and FBD in the Program Elements
browser:
Program Elements 9 Jumps 9 LABEL.
The name of the jump label can consist of up to 4 characters of which the first
must be a letter (in STL the special character "_" is also permitted).
JMP / JU
An unconditional jump instruction causes a program jump to a label regardless

of the RLO.
Page 22
ST-SERV1
Binary Operations
SIEMENS
Conditional Jump (Dependent on RLO)
FBD
LAD
Jump if
RLO=0
1 0.1
I 0.0
Jump if
RLO=1
1 0.0
NEW1
JMP)
-I
I 0.2
1 0.3
1 0.1
1 0.2
NEW2
(JMPN)
SIMATIC S7
Date:
Filer
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserve:
1 0.3
18.09.2009
SERV109E.23
JMP
A 1 0.0
A 1 0.1
JC NEW1
NEW2
JMPN
A 1 0.2
A 1 0.3
JCN NEW2
NEW1
21
g SITRAIN
gr
Training for
JC
The "JC" conditional jump is only executed if the RLO is "1".

If the RLO is "0", the jump is not executed, the RLO is set to "1" and program
execution continues with the next instruction.
JCN
The "JON" conditional jump is only executed if the RLO is "0".

If the RLO is "1", the jump is not executed and program execution continues
with the next instruction.
Note
STL provides additional jump operations, which are discussed in an advanced

programming course.
SITRAIN
Training for
Page 23
ST-SERV1
Binary Operations
SIEMENS
Digital Operations
S_CUD
C S_CU
9 S_CD
--[SC]
9 --[CU)
--[co]
9 S_PULE
S_PEX... 9 SOOT
5_007S
9 S_OFFDT
Converter
C BCD_I
9 I_BCD
9 I_DI
C BCD_DI
C DI_BCD
DI_R
0 INV I
C INV_DI
C NEC. _I
0 NEG_DI
NEG_R
0 ROUND
C TRUNC
C CEIL
C FLOOR
--[SP]
--[SE]
- c --[5D]
--[SS]
C --[SF]
SIMATIC S7
Cornparato
C EQ
NE_I
*:-. 9 GT J
if LT _I
C GE _I
C LE _I
9 EQ_D
NE_D
C GT_D
C LT_D
GE_D
C LE_D
EQ_R
NE_R
C GT_R
C LT_R
C GE_R
C LE_R
9 ADD _I
9 SUB _I
9 MUL
9 DIV J
ADD_DI
SUB_DI
9 MUL_DI
C DIV_DI
9 MOD DI
Ed Bookmark Op
ReEl on STEP 71
fled,
Index
Env
5lossay
ADD_R Add Real
d
Symbol
ADD_R
EN
1N1
1N2
Floating-port frt.
C ADD_R
SUB_R
MUL_R
C DIV_R
9 ABS
SQRT
SQR
C LN
EXP
0 SIN
9 COS
0 TAN
C ASIN
ACOS
ATAN
Date:
;were,
OUT
ENO --
Palm
Maws
EN
BOOL
Neundeked
I, 0, K D, L., T. C
Desci Minh
Enable input
First number to be added
1N1
REAL
1. 0, M. D. L or
constant
1N2
REAL
1, 0,
Second number to be added
D, L or
constant
OUT
REAL
I, 0, M, D. L
Result of addition
ENO
BOOL
1, O. M. D, L
Enable output
Description
A signal state of 1 at the Enable input (EN) actuates the Add Real instruction.
This Instruction adds inputs IN1 and IN2 The result can be scanned at output OUT
tf either of the inputs or the result is not a floating-point number, the OV bit and OS
bit are set to 1 and ENO is set to O.
See also Evalualma the Bits of the Status Word voth Floating Point Instruction.
Status Word
writes
18.09.2009
SERV1_10E.1
RR
f..C.1
CU
Shi
ES
48
EIA
8L4
EL
.1
.;

Page
Contents
Objectives ....................................................................................................................................................... 2
3
Acquiring, Processing and Outputting Data
....... 4
Integer (INT, 16-Bit Integer) Data Type
....... 5
Double Integer (DINT, 32-Bit Integer) Data Type
....... 6
REAL (Floating-point Number, 32 Bit) Data Type
7
The BCD Code for Inputting and Outputting Integers
8
Loading and Transferring Data
....... 9
Data Storage in Accumulator 1
Exercise 1: Number Formats ...................................................................................................................... 10
11
S5 Counter Functions
Counters: Function Diagram ........................................................................................................................ 12
Exercise 2: Counting the Transported Parts (FC 18, C 18) ................................................................... 13
14
S5 Timer Functions
Timers: ON Delay (SD) ................................................................................................................................. 15
Exercise 3: Monitoring the Transport Functions (FC 17)
16
Conversion Operations BCD <-> Integer ................................................................................................... 17
Comparison Operations ................................................................................................................................ 18
Basic Mathematical Functions
19
Exercise 4: Counting the Transported Parts (FC 19) ............................................................................. 20
21
Additional Exercise 5: Counting the Conveyor Belt Fault Conditions (FC17) ...................................... 22
Additional Exercise 6: Timely Lock-out of the Conveyor Motor Jogging ............................................. 23
Counters: Bit Instructions ............................................................................................................................. 24
Timers: Stored ON Delay (SS)
.................................................................................................................. 25
Timers: Pulse (SP) ......................................................................................................................................... 26
Timers: Extended Pulse (SE)
27
Timers: OFF Delay (SF)
28
Time Formats for Traditional S5 Timers in STEP 7 ................................................................................. 29
Timers: Bit Instructions
30
Conversion Operations I -> DI -> REAL
31
Digital Logic Operations ............................................................................................................................... 32
Application Example: Digital Edge Detection
33
SITRAIN
Training for
Page 1
ST-SERV1
Digital Operations
10
SIEMENS
Objectives
Upon completion of the chapter the participant will
be familiar with the INT, DINT, REAL data types and the
BCD display
be able to apply the selectable display formats in the
"Monitor / Modify Variable" test function
understand the "Load" and "Transfer" instructions
be able to apply and program the S5 counter and timer
functions
understand conversion operations for number formats
be able to apply and program the comparison
operations
understand basic mathematical functions
A
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_10E.2
Page 2
SITRAIN Training tor

ST-SERV1
Digital Operations
SIEMENS
Acquiring, Processing and Outputting Data

MEM
Operating
+ monitoring
processes
248
0
1
01 81 11 5
IN IN IN MI
Thumbwheel
buttons,
Potentiometer,
7-segment
display
Operator Panel
Control
unit
such as MPI
Processing
the values
All
AO
DI/
DO
such as PROFIBUS
Field devices
Process
controller
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_10E.3
ttr

Binary/Digital
Processing
True logic control systems are recognizable in the fact that they exclusively
process binary data.
The performance of today's control computer, as well as tasks in the data
processing, quality control areas, among others, has increased the importance
of digital data processing using PLCs.
Digital process variables can be found in all areas of open-loop control - such
as in connected devices for process operating and monitoring or in the control
of field devices.
Operating and
Monitoring
The goal of process monitoring is to provide the operator with up-to-the-minute

information about the working machine or system quickly, concisely and clearly
as well as the opportunity to intervene and control and influence the process.
While in the past mostly simple, that is, "dumb" input and output devices, such
as 7-segment displays and thumbwheel buttons were used to display and enter
digital values, today "intelligent" operating and monitoring devices are
frequently connected to a PLC.
Field Devices
Today as well, field devices that acquire process data or that control the
process are supplied directly with digital variables through field bus systems.
The connection of field devices, such as drives or weighing systems, using
analog input and output modules is becoming more and more a thing of the
past.
Formats
Depending on the type of device connected, different number formats for the
coding of data are used to transmit data between device and PLC, as well as
for storing and processing data in the PLC.
Page 3
ST-SERV1
Digital Operations
10
SIEMENS
Integer (INT, 16-Bit Integer) Data Type

Value range
-32768 to +32767
Arithmetic
operations: such as + I, * I, <I, ==I
(without sign: 0 to 65535)
Display Formats:
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DEC: +.662
BIN.: 2#
0000001010010110
429
,' Sign s,
positive .............
numbers;
HEX: W#16#0 2 9 6
without
sign
+2
+24
+2
+2'
+ 662
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7
BIN.: 2# 11 1 1 1 0
DEC: 662
,/ Sign ,
negative
numbers/
SIMATIC S7
4 3 2
01010
HEX: W#16#F D6 A
without
sign
+214
+2'3
+212
+21
+210 +25
Representation as
Twos Gomplement
10 x 16 =10
6 x16'= 96
+25
+25 +23 +2'
- 662
Date:
File:
6 5
01
6 x 162 = 6
9 x 16' = 144
2 x 162
= 512
662
18.09.2009
SERV1_10E.4
13 x 163 = 3328
5 x 163 = 61440
64874

Integer Data Type

(16-bit Integer)
An Integer data type value is a whole number value, that is, a value without a
decimal point.
SIMATIC S7 stores Integer data type values with sign in 16 bit code. This
results in the value range shown in the slide above. As well, SIMATIC S7
provides arithmetic operations for processing Integer values.
Decimal
STEP7 uses the Decimal (not BCD!) display format to specify the constants of
the Integer data type with sign and without explicit format description. The use
of constant Integer values in the Binary and Hexadecimal display formats is
possible in principle, but because of the poor legibility, they are more or less
not suitable. For this reason, the syntax of STEP7 provides the specification of
Integer values only in the decimal display format.
Binary
In a digital computer system, all values are stored in a binary-coded form. Only
the digits 0 and 1 are available in the binary number system. Base 2 of this
numbers system results from the number of available digits. Accordingly, the
value of every position of a binary number results from a power of Base 2. This
is also expressed in the format specification 2#.... .
Negative values are represented as binary numbers in twos complement. In
this representation, the most significant bit (bit no. 15 for the Integer data type)
has the value - 215. Since this value is greater than the sum of all residual
values, this bit also has the sign information. That is, if this bit = 0, then the
value is positive; if the bit is = 1, then the value is negative. The conversion of a
binary number into a decimal number is made by adding the values of the
positions that have a 1 (see slide).

Page 4
ST-SERV1
Digital Operations
SIEMENS
Double Integer (DINT, 32-Bit Integer) Data Type

L# -2147483648 to L#+2147483647
Value range
Operations: such as + D, * D, <D, ==D
(without sign: 0 to 4294967295)
Display Formats:
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
BIN.: 2# 0 0 0 010 0 0 010 0 0 011 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 00 0
DEC: L# +540809
o o 011 o o 1
,' Sign s,
positive
`, numbers;
HEX: DW#16# 0 0 0 8 4 0 8 9
(without sign)
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
BIN.: 2# 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 11
DEC: L# -540809
F Roiresentation 84
HEX: DW#16# F F F 7 BF 7 7
t 11111t1A-:
(without sign)
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Double Integer
18.09.2009
SERV1_10E.5
Nr Automation and Industrial Solutions
SIMATIC S7 stores Double Integer data type values with sign as 32 bit code.
(32-Bit Integer)
This results in the value range shown in the slide above. As well, SIMATIC S7
provides arithmetic operations for processing DINT values.
Decimal
STEP7 uses a decimal number (not BCD!) to specify a constant of the Double
Integer data type with sign and the format L# for "long" (double word, 32 bit).
When a value smaller than -32768 or greater than 32767 is specified, the
format L# is automatically added. For negative numbers smaller than -32768,
the user must specify the format as L# - (for example: L# -32769). This is
imperative if the value is to be further processed arithmetically as a double
integer since you would otherwise work with false values (value + sign)!
Hexadecimal
The hexadecimal numbers system provides 16 different digits (0 to 9 and

A to F). This results in Base 16 of this numbers system. Accordingly, the value
of every position of a hexadecimal number results from a power of Base 16.
Hexadecimal numbers are specified with the format W# for the dimension
(W = word = 16 bit) or DW# (DW = double word = 32 bit) and 16# for identifying
the basic numbering system. The number of specifiable bits is variable from 1
to 8 whereby missing (unspecified) bits are filled with leading zero digits.
The digits A to F correspond to the decimal values 10 to 15. The value 15 is the
last value that can be binary-coded - without sign - with 4 bits. Out of this
correlation, the simple conversion of a binary number into a hexadecimal
number and vice versa can be obtained. In this way, four binary bits each can
easily make up one digit of a hexadecimal number.
Page 5
ST-SERV1
Digital Operations
10
SIEMENS
REAL (Floating-point Number, 32 Bit) Data Type

-3.402823.10+38 to -1.175495.10-38 , 0.0, +1.175495.10-38 to +3.402823.10+38
Value range
Operations: such as + R, * R, <R, ==R
sin, acos, In, exp, SQR
General format of a Real number = (Sign) (to (2e-127)
Example:
0.75
Sign of
Real no. e = Exponent (8 Bit)
I
I I
f = Mantissa (23 Bit)
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7
10 1
11111
6 5 4
3 2
1 0000000000000000000000
27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 2-12-22-32_4
2-23
Real no. = +1.5 * 2 126-127 = 0.75
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_10E.6
gig'
Real
The previously described INT and DINT data types are used to store whole
number values with sign. Accordingly, only operations that supply a whole
number value as the result can be performed with these data types.
In cases where analog process variables such as voltage, current, and
temperature have to be processed, it becomes necessary to use Real values
(real numbers, "decimal numbers"). In order to be able to represent such
values, binary digits have to be defined whose value is less than 1 (power of
base 2 with negative exponent).
Real Format
In order to be able to form the greatest possible value range within a defined
memory capacity (for SIMATIC S7: double word, 32 bit) (see slide), you must
be able to select the decimal point position. Early on, IEEE defined a format for
floating-point numbers. This format was laid down in IEC 61131 and was
included in STEP 7. This format makes it easy to process a variable decimal
point position.
In a binary coded floating-point number, a portion of the binary digits contain
the mantissa (23 Bit) and the rest contain the exponent (8 Bit) and the sign of
the floating-point number.
When you specify real values, you do so without specifying the format. After
you enter a constant real value (for example: 0.75), the Editor automatically
makes a conversion to scientific notation (for example: 7.5000e-001).
Application
Floating-point numbers are used for "analog value processing", among others.
A great advantage of floating-point numbers is in the number of operations
possible with such numbers. These include, in addition to the standard
operations such as: +, * , / also instructions such as sin, cos, exp, In, etc, that
are used mainly in closed-loop control algorithms.
Page 6
ST-SERV1
Digital Operations
SIEMENS
The BCD Code for Inputting and Outputting Integers

Conversion
operations:
16 Bit: - 999 to + 999

32 Bit: -9999999 to + 9999999
Value range
16 Bit:
(no arithmetic!)
NEI
I BIN.: 2# 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0
2
Sign (+)
HEX: W#16#
Sign (+)
0
II
III
32 Bit:
BTI, BTD, ITB, DTB
IIIIIIII
II
DEC: + 662
II
BIN.: 2# Oxxx 0000000000000000001010010110

HEX: DW#16#
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
DEC: + 662
18.09.2009
SERV1_10E.7

Origin
In the past, the specification and visualization of whole numbers was done
exclusively using simple, mechanical thumbwheel buttons and digital displays.
These thumbwheel buttons and digital displays were connected to the PLC's
digital input and output modules through parallel wiring.
BCD Code
Each digit of a decimal number is encoded in four bit positions (a nibble). Four
bits are used because the highest decimal digit, 9, requires at least four bit
positions in binary code.
Decimal No.
0
1
2
3
4
5
Negative Numbers
Data Formats
BCD Code
0000
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
Decimal No.
6
7
8
9
10 to 15
BCD Code
0110
0111
1000
1001
not allowed
So that negative numbers can also be specified using a BCD thumbwheel

button, STEP 7 codes the sign in the most significant bit of the most significant
digit (see slide). A sign bit = 0 indicates a positive number. A sign bit = 1
indicates a negative number.
STEP 7 recognizes 16-bit-coded (sign + 3 digits) and 32-bit-coded (sign + 7
digits) BCD numbers.
There is no data format for specifying BCD-coded values in STEP 7. You can,
however, specify the decimal number whose BCD code is to be given, as a
HEX number. The binary code of the HEX number and that of the BCD-coded
decimal number is identical.
As you can see in the slide, the DEC data format is not suitable for specifying
BCD coded numbers!
Page 7
ST-SERV1
Digital Operations
10
SIEMENS
Loading and Transferring Data
1:11111111111111111M111111110m.alusi
FC1 : loading and transferring Data
'
network
IN
network 4: in view !HD
MOVE INNS/Wall
IN OUT 30
MOW
ISO
1464111111Scsato
IN
41
PC1 loading and transferring Data
4: in view LAD
11#160CAll IN INC
INNSINNOneN
OUT NI130
I
MMENIM
MIMEMW
IrC1 : loading and transferring Data

'
network
(ACCU 1)
4: in view STL
li016SCAFI
30
NOP 0
12345678
AlB2C3D4
oats
oafs
cats
12345678
12345671
12345ST
41 I
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_10E.8
__241
Mr

MOVE (LAD/FBD)
If the EN input is active, the value at input "IN" is copied to the address
specified at output "OUT". "ENO" has the same signal state as "EN".
L and T (STL)
Load and transfer instructions are executed regardless of the RLO. Data is
exchanged through the accumulator ACCU1.
Standard / ACCU1
Accumulator 1 (ACCU1) is the main register in the CPU. The load instruction
writes the value from the source address right-justified into the (standard)
accumulator 1 and pads the remaining bits (32 bits in all) with "0"s.
The transfer instruction copies some or all of the contents of accumulator 1 to
the specified memory address without clearing the contents of accumulator 1
(see next page). All arithmetic and digital operations store their result in
accumulator 1.
ACCU2
When a load instruction is executed, the old contents of accumulator 1 are first
shifted to accumulator 2 and accumulator 1 is cleared (reset to "0") before the
new value is written into accumulator 1.
Page 8
ST-SERV1
Digital Operations
SIEMENS
Data Storage in Accumulator 1

Contents of Accumulator 1
Program
L MB 0
000 00 00
L MW 0
000 00 00
MBO
OIO
oie 0 0 0 0 0 0 01
MBO
MB1
15
MB1
MBO
0 0 0 0 0 0 01
15
23
31
L MD 0
00 00 00
23
31
Load
OIO
15
23
31
MB2
MB3
T QD 4
QD 4
II/Transfer
T QW 4
411
QW 4
T QB 4
41
QB 4
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_10E.9
IsZ
General
Accumulators are auxiliary memories in the CPU for data exchange between
various addresses as well as for comparison and mathematical operations.
The S7-300 usually has two accumulators with 32 bits each and the CPU 318-2
and the S7-400 each have four accumulators also with 32 bits each.
Load
The load instruction loads the contents of the specified byte, word or double
word into accumulator (ACCU) 1.
Transfer
When a transfer instruction is executed, the contents of ACCU 1 are retained.

Consequently, the same information can be transferred to different
destinations. If only one byte is transferred, the eight bits farthest to the right
are used (see slide).
Page 9
ST-SERV1
Digital Operations
10
SIEMENS
Exercise 1: Number Formats

IiirMEM
,.
111/111
1ate!
Tade Edt Insert PLC Variabb View Options Wmdow Help
DIcallal
_Arr
JoJXJ
jts_j2ii
6
Afil
z,Lf
_ DEC
EN 0
BIN
I 0 7 "T_AcknVVermRestart"
BOOL
I 0.0 _"T_Systern_04s#
BOOL
I 1.0 "TAcknFeur
BOOL
W 2 _"WThumbw"
HEX
WV 2 "W_Thurnbw"
BIN
W 2 "W_Thurnbw"
DEC
OVV
6 "OVV_DicrOlsp"
I-EX
OW
6 _"OVV_DigDisp"
BIN
OW
6 "GiVV_DigDisp"
DEC
WV
20 "MW_ACT"
DEC
WV
20 "MW_ACT"
HEX
V416/0084
MVV
20 9,1W ACT"
BIN
2#0000_0000_1000_0100
BIN
V
2/00000000
MD 80
DEC
L0132
MD 80
HEX
DVV/1 6/00000084
MB 20
10
132
201000_0100 4
MB 21
L#1 32
. -
ON 83 Accessed in betW40.....
-31677
MD
FLOATING_POINT
132.0
DEC
L#1124335616
84
MD 84
Date:
File:
Display Formats
132 0
SERVI _A157_300_5tatIon ...\My_Prodram
SIMATIC S7
Invalid value '
18.09.2009
SERV1_10E.10
Abs <5.2
".
"1 SITRAIN Training for
r.
Different display formats can be selected in both the "Monitor / Modify Variables" and the
"Monitor (Block)" test function to display variables or register contents.
Every variable can be monitored with several display format options. Depending on the
variable's data type, it becomes apparent that monitoring with the appropriate display
format makes more sense.
BOOL:
Display a single bit

(only possible for a variable of the BOOL data type)
BIN:
Display the individual bits of a variable

(makes sense for variables of the BYTE, WORD, DWORD data types)
HEX:
Display the contents of a variable as hexadecimal number (BCD)

(makes sense for variables of the BYTE, WORD, DWORD data types)
DEC:
Display the contents of a variable as decimal number (not BCD!) with sign
(makes sense for variables of the INT, DINT data types)
FLOATING_ Display the contents of a variable as floating-point number

POINT
(makes sense for variables of the REAL data type)
Addressing
The SIMATIC S7 memory is universally byte-oriented. Accordingly, memory word

MW 20, for example, contains the memory bytes MB 20 (high byte) and MB 21 (low byte,
see slide), the memory double-word MD 80, the memory bytes MB 80, 81, 82 and 83.
With absolute accesses to variables (such as, with L MD 80), you must make sure that
the dimension of the access (here MD...) as well as the address (always equal to the
address of the high byte, here 80) is correct. Through an inadvertent "accessing in
between", an invalid value would be loaded (such as, with L MW 83, see slide). Such
errors can be avoided with the symbolic addressing of variables (here L "MD_DINT").
What to Do
Open the given variable table "VAT_NumberFormats" and specify various values for the
output and memory words with "Monitor Variables" or set the different values on the BCD
thumbwheel button IW 2. In the process, monitor the values in the different number
formats.

Page 10
ST-SERV1
Digital Operations
SIEMENS
S5 Counter Functions
FBD
LAD
A 10.4
CU C5
A 10.5
CD C5
A 10.3
L C#5
S C5
A 10.7
R C5
L C5
T MW4
LC C5
T QW12
A C5
Q8.3
C5
S_CUD
10.4
Q 8.3
CU
CD
CV MW 4
10.5
10.3
S CV_BCD QW 12
C#5
PV
10.7
7
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_10E.11
n SITRAIN Training for
mi
,17
Counter Value
A 16-bit word is reserved for each counter in the system data memory. This
word is used for storing the counter's value (0 to 999) in binary code.
Count Up
When the RLO at the "CU" input changes from "0" to "1", the counter's current
value is incremented by 1 (upper limit = 999).
Count Down
When the RLO at the "CD" input changes from "0" to "1", the counter's current
value is decremented by 1 (lower limit = 0).
Set Counter
When the RLO at the "S" input changes from "0" to "1", the counter is set to the
value at the "PV" input.
Reset Counter
When the RLO at the Reset changes from "0" to "1", the counter's value is set
to zero. If the reset condition is fulfilled (stays "high"), the counter cannot be set
and counting in either direction is not possible.
PV
The preset value (0 to 999) is specified in BCD format at the "PV" input as:
as a constant (C#...)
a BCD format through a data interface.
CV / CV_BCD
The counter value can be loaded into the accumulator at the binary output as
an Integer value (CV) or at the decimal output as a BCD number (CV_BCD)
and then transferred from there to other addresses.
The signal state of the counter can be checked at output "Q":

Counter value n:
=0
- Q = 0
Counter value n:
1<= n <= 999 - Q = 1

Page 11
ST-SERV1
Digital Operations
10
SIEMENS
SI MATIC S7
Date:
File:
Notes
18.09.2009
SERV1_10E.12

When the counter reaches the value 999 during count up, the counter value
stays at 999 with subsequent count up signals. Likewise, when the counter
reaches the value 0, the counter value stays at 0 with subsequent count down
signals.
If an up count and a down count signal occurs at the same time, the count
remains the same.
Page 12
ST-SERV1
Digital Operations
SIEMENS
Exercise 2: Counting the Transported Parts (FC 18, C 18)
DO
DI
I 0.0
Act Quantity
T_System_ON
I 0.1
T_System_OFF L_SYSTEM
I 0.2
T_Jog_RIGHT
I 0.3
T_Jog_LEFT
I 0.4
S_M/A_ModeSelect
I 0.5
T_M/A_Accept
Q 4.1
L_MAN
Q 4.2
L_AUTO
Q 4.3
Log
U
U
"QW_DigDisp" (QW 6)
-15V...+15V
All
All
a
0
Ail A01
A02
I= CI
0 8 1 5
0 0
I=1
I=1
Al2
0 0
All
Al2
0 0
0
A01
0
0
A02
z
SIMATIC S7
Date: 18.09.2009
File:
SERV1_108.13
1 SiT R AlN T rainin for

IA
Automation and lnclstrial Solutions
Function Up Till Now In AUTO mode, parts are transported from Bay 1 or Bay 2 to the Light Barrier
Bay until they pass through the light barrier. The transportation function starts
as soon as a part is placed on Bay 1 or Bay 2 and the associated bay's
momentary contact is pressed and it ends as soon as the part has passed the
light barrier.
Task
What to Do
The parts transported in AUTO mode are to be counted as soon as they

have passed through the "LB" (I 8.0) light barrier ("LB" 0 4 1).
The number of transported parts (ACTUAL quantity) is to be recorded with

the S5 counter C 18 and displayed on the BCD digital display.
The counter is to be reset when the system is switched off (Q 4.1 = "0").
1. Program the counting of the transported parts in the block "FC_Count"

(FC18). Use the S5 counter C 18.
2. Program the call of FC 18 in OB 1.
SITRAIN
Training for
Page 13
ST-SERV1
Digital Operations
10
SIEMENS
S5 Timer Functions
Pulse Timer (SP)
Extended Pulse (SE)
T44
T44
S_PEXT
S_PULSE
BI MWO
1 0.7 S
S5T#35s
TV BC
10.5 R
BI MWO
1 0.7 S
QW12
M8.5
S5T#35s TV BC
I 0.5 R
QW12
M8.5
H=
ON Delay (SD)
T44
S_ODT
I 0.7 S
B1 MWO
S5T#35s Tv BCE
QW12
M8.5
10.5 R
Stored ON Delay (SS)
OFF Delay (SF)
T44
T44
S_ODTS
S_OFFDT
1 0.7 S
BI MWO
S5T#35s TV BC
10.5 R
1 0.7 S
QW12
M8.5
S5T#35s TV
SIMATIC S7
10.5
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_10E.14
BI MWO
BCD m8
QW512
Q
V.

General
In control engineering, the following traditional timer functions (S5 timer

functions) have long since established themselves:
Pulse Timer (S_PULSE or SP),
Extended Pulse (S_PEXT or SE),
ON Delay (S_ODT or SD),
Stored ON Delay (S_ODTS or SS),
OFF Delay (S_OFFDT or SF)
Memory
Timers have their own reserved memory area in the CPU in which each timer
function occupies one word. To find out how many timer words and thus timer
functions are available in a CPU, please check the CPU's technical data.
Time Value
The time value can be specified via a variable (such as MW50) or - as shown in
the slide - via a constant. The syntax for specifying a constant time value is
(can be entered with or without underscore):
S5T#aH_bM_cS_dMS e.g. S5T#1h_20m_10s
Minimum Time Value S5T#10ms

Maximum Time Value S5T#2h_46m_30s
Page 14
ST-SERV1
Digital Operations
SIEMENS
Timers: ON Delay (SD)
I 0.7
LAD
FBD
T4
S_ODT
S_EVERZ
I I
S5T#35s -TV
1 0.5
R
1 1
T4
Q8.5
)
B1 MWO
I 0.7 S
S5T#35s Tv
BCD QW12
BI
BCD
MWO
QW12
Q8.5
I 0.5
RLO at S
RLO at R
>Example
Time
operation
A 10.7
L S5T#35s
SD T4
A 10.5
R T4
L T4
T MWO
LC T4
T QW12
A T4
= Q8.5
1 1
0.01s <
0.1s <-1s <10s
Data type
"S5T1ME"
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
0 0
0
0
18.09.2009
SERV1_108.15
1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1
Units of time: 0 to 999 (BCD-coded)

gr
Start
The timer starts when the RLO at the Start input "S" changes from "0" to "1".
The timer starts with the time value specified at the Time Value "TV" for as long
as the signal state at input "S" =1.
Reset
When the RLO at the Reset input "R" changes from "0" to "1", the current time
value and the time base are deleted and the output "Q" is reset.
Digital Outputs
The current time value can be read as a binary number at the "BI" output and
as a BCD number at the "BCD" output.
The current time value is the initial value of "TV" minus the value for the time
that has elapsed since the timer was started.
Binary Output
The signal at the "0" output changes to "1" when the timer has expired without
error and input "S" has signal state "1".
If the signal state at the "S" input changes from "1" to "0" before the timer has
expired, the timer stops running and output "Q" has a signal state "0".
Note
In STEP 7, you can replace the traditional timer and counter functions with IEC
conforming system function blocks (SFB). The use of system function blocks
is dealt with in an advanced programming course.
Page 15
ST-SERV1
Digital Operations
10
SIEMENS
Exercise 3: Monitoring the Transport Functions (FC 17)

DI
DO
I 0.0
I 0.1
I 0.2
I 0.3
T_Jog_RIGHT
\g
T_Jog_LEFT
\gi
S_M/A_ModeSelect
I 0.4
T_System_ON
T_System_OFF
I 0.5
L_SYSTEM
Q 4.1
L_MAN
Q 4.2
L_AUTO
Q 4.3
L_Conv
Fault
Q 5.0
T_M/A_Accept
N
1 1.0
CI
T_Ackn
_Fault
Ig
CI
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Task
What to Do:
18.09.2009
SERV1_10E.1 6

.
V:
The transport functions while in AUTO mode are to be monitored. The

monitoring is to function as follows:
If the transport function takes longer than the 6 second monitoring time (if a
part does not pass through the light barrier within 6 seconds of its start
time), then there is a fault in the system and the conveyor motor is
automatically switched off (logic in FC 16).
A fault is displayed with a 2Hz flashing light (bit no. 3 of the CPU clock
memory byte MB 10) on the simulator LED "L_Conv_Fault" (Q 5.0)
A fault can be acknowledged via the simulator momentary contact

"T_Ackn_Fault" (I 1.0)
The indicator lights at Bays 1 and 2 only once more show a constant light (=
place a new part), when the fault has been acknowledged (lock-out in
FC 14)
1. Program the described monitoring function in FC 17

-
For the (timely) monitoring, use the S5 timer T 17 as ON Delay (SD)
When a fault exists, set the memory bit M 17.0 in order to be able to
further interlock it in FC 14 and FC 16
2. Program the call of FC 17 in OB 1

3. Program the required lock-outs in FC 14 and the switching off of the
conveyor motor in FC16
4. Download the modified blocks into the CPU and test the function
Page 16
ST-SERV1
Digital Operations
SIEMENS
Integer
Conversion Operations BCD

I= MI MI NI
Number
entered in BCD
> Task
Number
displayed
in BCD
0 81 5
OM
1.......,
Conversion
BCD->Integer
Conversion
BCD<-Integer
FBD
LAD
ENO
OUT
IW4 IN
OUT MW20
EN
MW20
ENO
IW4 IN
MW10
L
ITB
QW12
T
I_BCD
I_BCD
MW10
IW4
L
BTI
MW20
T
BCD_I
BCD_I
EN
<=1
User program
with Integer
math operations
EN
ENO
IN
OUT QW12
EN
MW10 IN
OUT QW12
ENO
1
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File
18.09.2009
SERV1_10E.17
1.SITRAIN Training for
.4
,1kr
Application
Since there are no arithmetic operations for the direct processing of BCDcoded values, these have to be converted into arithmetic data types (I, DI or R)
through format conversions.
Conversion
Operations
S7-300 / 400 has a series of conversion operations available here a few

examples:
BCD_I (in STL: BTI)
converts a 3-digit BCD number (+/- 999) into a 16-bit integer
I_BCD (in STL: ITB)
converts a 16-bit integer (+/- 999) ) into a 3-digit BCD number
Inputs and Outputs of the LAD/FBD Elements:

EN
The execution of the conversion operation can be determined as follows via the
EN input:
EN is not connected: the conversion is always (regardless of the RLO)
executed
Logic operation at EN is fulfilled (RLO = 1): the conversion is executed
Logic operation at EN is not fulfilled (RLO = 0): the conversion is not
executed
IN
The value delivered to IN is converted and the result is output to OUT.
ENO / OUT
ENO = 0 because RLO=0 at EN input - OUT not written

The variable delivered to OUT is not written, that is, it keeps its original value
ENO = 0 because error occurred 4 OUT contains invalid value
The variable delivered to OUT is overwritten with an invalid value
ENO = 1 (instruction was executed without error): OUT contains result
The variable delivered to OUT is overwritten with the result

Page 17
ST-SERV1
Digital Operations
10
SIEMENS
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
CMP
n SITRAIN Training for
An
18.09.2009
SERV1_10E.18
Ir
You can use comparison instructions to compare the following pairs of

numerical values:
D
R
Compare integers (on the basis of 16 bit fixed-point number)

Compare integers (on the basis of 32 bit fixed-point number)
Compare floating-point numbers (on 32 bit real number basis =
IEEE floating-point numbers).
If the result of the comparison is "true", then the RLO of the operation is "1",
otherwise it is "0".
The values at inputs IN1 and IN2 are compared for conformity with the
specified condition:
..
IN1
is equal to
<>
IN1
is not equal to
>
<
IN1
IN1
is greater than
is less than
IN2
>=
IN1
is greater than or equal to
IN2
<=
IN1
is less than or equal to
IN2.
Page 18
IN2
IN2
IN2
ST-SERV1
Digital Operations
SIEMENS
Basic Mathematical Functions

FBD
LAD
Addition
Subtraction
EN ENO
MW4 - IN1
1N2 OUT MW6
MW10
MW4
MW10
SUB _I
MD66
EN ENO MD40 -IN1

1N2 OUT MD32
MD4
EN
MD40 - 1 Ni
1N2
MD4
MD12
Date:
File:
Arithmetic
Operations
ENO
MW6
L
L
-I
T
MW8
MW12
L
L
*D
T
MD6
MD12
L
L
/R
T
MD40
MD4
18.09.2009
SERV1_10E.19
MW6
OUT
ENO
OUT
MD66
ENO
DIV_R
DIV_R
SIMATIC S7
MW4
MW10
MUL_DI
EN
MD6 - IN1
1N2
MD12
EN ENO
IN1
1N2
L
L
+I
SUB _I
MULDI
MD6
Division
EN
1N1
1N2
EN
MW8 - 1 Ni
1N2
MW12
EN ENO
MW8 - 1 Ni
MW12
1N2 OUT MW6
Multiplication
OUT MW6
ADD _I
ADD _I
OUT
MD32
ENO
MW6
MD66
MD32

gr
S7-300 / 400 has a series of arithmetic operations for the processing of

variables of the integer (I), double integer (DI) and real (R) arithmetic data
types.
Inputs and Outputs of the LAD/FBD Elements:

The execution of the operation can be determined as follows via the EN input:
EN
EN is not connected: the operation is always (regardless of the RLO)
executed
Logic operation at EN is fulfilled (RLO = 1): the operation is executed
Logic operation at EN is not fulfilled (RLO = 0): the operation is not
executed
IN1 / IN2
The arithmetic calculation is applied to the values delivered to IN1 and IN2 (in
STL, the value loaded first with the value loaded second, in general: ACCU2
with ACCU1) and the result is output to OUT.
ENO / OUT
ENO = 0 because RLO=0 at EN input 4 OUT not written

The variable delivered to OUT is not written, that is, it keeps its original value
ENO = 0 because error occurred 4 OUT contains invalid value
The variable delivered to OUT is overwritten with an invalid value
ENO = 1 (instruction was executed without error): OUT contains result
The variable delivered to OUT is overwritten with the result
SITRAIN
Training for
Page 19
ST-SERV1
Digital Operations
10
SIEMENS
Exercise 4: Counting the Transported Parts (FC 19)

DI
I 0.0
I 0.1
I 0.2
1 0.3
T_System_ON
T_System_OFF
L MAN
T_Jog_LEFT
L AUTO
S_M/A_ModeSelect
T_M/A_Accept
I 0.4
I 0.5
0 0
a
L_SYSTEM
T_Jog_RIGHT
\
SETPOINT Quantity
DO
Q 4.1
0 8 1 5
Q 4.2
0
ACTUAL Quantity
I=1
Q 4.3
"IW_Thumbw" (IW 2)
"QW_DigDisp" (QW 6)
I 1.0
T_Ackn_Fault
L_Conv_Fault
Q 5.0
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Function Up Till Now

in FC 18
New Function FC19
What to Do
ACT=SET **
"L_Bay-LB" (Q 8.4)
18.09.2009
SERV1_10E.20
Acknowledgement
"T_Bay-LB" (I 8.4)

The parts transported in AUTO mode are counted (with the S5 counter C18)
as soon as they have passed through the light barrier "LB" ("LB": 0 4 1)
The number of transported parts (ACT quantity) is displayed on the BCD

digital display.
The counter is reset when the system is switched off (Q 4.1 = "0").
The counting of the transported parts is no longer to be done with the counter C 18,
but rather by addition using MW 20.
The SETPOINT Quantity of how many parts are to be transported can be set
using the BCD thumbwheel. When the given SETPOINT Quantity is reached, it is
displayed with the message "ACT=SET' on the conveyor model LED "L_Bay-LB"
(Q 8.4).
As long as the message "ACT=SET' (Q 8.4) exists, the indicator lights at Bay 1 and
Bay 2 are dark (= no new part can be place on the conveyor - lock-out in FC 14)
and no new transport function can be started (- lock-out in FC 16).
The message "ACT=SET' can be acknowledged using the conveyor's momentary

contact "T Bay-LB" (I 8.4) by resetting the actual quantity (MW 20). Also, when the
system is switched off, the ACT Quantity (MW 20) is reset to "0".
Copy the block "FC_Count_Add" (FC 19) from the S7 program "Chap10_digital_Op"
of the project "SERV1_B" into your S7 program called "My_Program" of your project
called "My_Project"
2. In OB1, call the new FC 19 instead of the old FC 18
3. In the blocks "FC_Signal" (FC 14) and "FC_ConvMotor" (FC 16), program the
appropriate lock-outs
1.
Note When you set the SETPOINT Quantity, the CPU occasionally goes into the STOP
state because the BCD thumbwheel "bounces" when you change the numbers or it
delivers invalid BCD values.
Page 20
ST-SERV1
Digital Operations
SIEMENS
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Note
18.09.2009
SERV1_10E.21

complete a topic.
Page 21
ST-SERV1
Digital Operations
SIEMENS
Additional Exercise 5: Counting the Conveyor Belt Fault

Conditions (FC17)
Cony
Fault
M 17.0
3
Cony
2
Fault
Counter C 17 le
M/A AUTO
Q 4.3
A
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_10E.22

Function Up Till Now The transport functions in AUTO mode are monitored. If the transport function
takes longer than the 6 second monitoring time (if a part does not pass through
the light barrier within 6 seconds of its start time), then there is a conveyor belt
fault condition in the system and the conveyor motor is automatically switched
off (logic in FC 16).
Task:
The conveyor belt fault conditions in AUTO mode are to be counted. After 3
conveyor belt fault conditions have occurred, the AUTO mode is to be switched
off for safety reasons. To start a new transport function, the fault condition must
be acknowledged (as already programmed) and the AUTO mode must be
switched on once more.
What to Do:
1. In FC 17, in a new network, program the counting of the conveyor belt fault
conditions using the S5 counter C 17 as the count down counter.
-
When the "Auto" mode is switched on, the counter is set to 3 (number of
conveyor belt fault conditions until the AUTO mode is switched off)
The counter counts down 1 every time a conveyor belt fault condition
occurs (M 17.0 = "1").
2. In FC 15 (operator mode section), program the switching off (reset) of the

AUTO mode after three conveyor belt fault conditions.
The AUTO mode must switch off when the counter C 17 has counted down
from 3 to 0 or when its binary state changes from 1 4 0. In FC 15
"FC_Mode", use the bit memory M 15.7 as auxiliary bit memory to record
the negative edge of C 17.
Page 22
ST-SERV1
Digital Operations
SIEMENS
Additional Exercise 6: Timely Lock-out of the Conveyor Motor

Jogging
Lock-out
> time LEFT
Jog RIGHT
I 0.2
Cony motor
RIGHT
(Q8.5)
Lock-out
RIGHT
T 15 (SF)
Jog LEFT
I 0.3
lock-out
time RIGHT
Cony motor
LEFT
(Q8.6)
<
Lock-out
LEFT
T 16 (SF)
/
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
A
r
,
18.09.2009
SERV1_10E.23
41
The Function Jogging In MANUAL mode (Q 4.2 = '), you can jog the conveyor motor to the RIGHT
in FC 16 Up Till Now: and to the LEFT using the simulator momentary contacts I 0.2 and I 0.3.
Task:
In order to avoid too great a load change, it should only be possible to jog the
conveyor motor in the opposite direction after it has been jogged to the RIGHT
or to the LEFT after a lock-out time of 2 seconds (see slide). If, for example, the
motor has been jogged to the RIGHT, then it can only be jogged back to the
LEFT after the lock-out time of 2 seconds has expired.
What to Do:
1. In FC 16 program the S5 timers T 15 and T 16 as the lock-out timers

RIGHT and LEFT as OFF Delay (SF). Start T 15 when the jog condition
RIGHT is fulfilled and T 16 when the jog condition LEFT is fulfilled.
2. Interlock the timer states to the jog conditions. The jog condition RIGHT
may only be fulfilled when the lock-out time LEFT is no longer running
(T 16 = '0') and vice versa.
3. Save the modified FC 16 and download it in the CPU
4. Check the modified function "Jog Conveyor" on the conveyor model
Solution Hint:
By using a "branch", you can integrate the timers in the two networks Jog
Conveyor RIGHT and Jog Conveyor LEFT as follows:
Editing a branch:
"K_C ony_
1. Select the connection where

the branch is to be place
2. click on L* in the Editor toolbar
Jog condition
LEFT
....*
(Branch)
LEFT"
T 16
SF
S5T#2s- TV
Page 23
ST-SERV1
Digital Operations
10
SIEMENS
Counters: Bit Instructions

LAD
FBD
C5
SC
Network 1:
I
0.0
C5
II
SC
I 0.0
( )
C#20
C#20
A
L
S
CV
1 0.0
C#20
C5
Network 2:
C5
C5
I 0.1
(CU)
I 0.1
A 1 0.1
CU C5
CU
Network 3:
I 0.2
C5
(CD)
C5
I
10.2 I
CD
A 10.2
CD C5
A C5
= Q 4.0
Network 4:
C5
Q 4.0
)
SIMATIC S7
C5
I
Date:
File:
Bit Instructions
Q 4.0
18.09.2009
SERV1_10E.24
_11
NtT

All counter functions can also operate with simple bit instructions. The
similarities and differences between this method and the counter functions
discussed so far are as follows:
Similarities:
Setting conditions at the "SC" input
Specification of the counter value
RLO change at the "CU" input
RLO change at the "CD" input
Differences:
-
It is not possible to check the current counter value since

there are no Binary (CV) or BCD (CV_BCD) outputs.
- There is no binary output Q in the graphical representation.

Note
IEC-compliant counters can also be implemented in STEP 7. The use of

system function blocks for implementing IEC counters is dealt with in an
advanced programming course.
Page 24
ST-SERV1
Digital Operations
SIEMENS
Timers: Stored ON Delay (SS)
I 0.7
LAD
FBD
T4
S_ODTS
S
Q
T4
II
S5T#35s TV
10.5
R
I I
Q8.5
( )
BI MW0
S_ODTS
I 0.7 S
S5T#35s
BCD QW12
TV
I 0.5 R
BI
BCD
MWO
QW12
Q8.5
1 0.7
A
L S5T#35s
SS T4
A
1 0.5
R T4
L T4
T MWO
LC T4
T QW12
A T4
Q8.5
L
RLO at S
RLO at R
> Example
Timer
operation
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Start
18.09.2009
SERV1_10E.25

The stored-on-delay timer starts when the RLO at the "S" input changes from
"0" to "1". The timer runs, starting with the time value specified at input "TV",
and continues to run even if the signal at input "S" changes back to "0" during
that time.
If the signal at the start input changes from "0" to "1" again while the timer is
still timing down, the timer starts again from the beginning.
Reset
When the RLO at reset input "R" changes from "0" to "1", the current time value
and the time base are deleted and output "Q" is reset.
Binary Output
The signal state at output "0" changes to "1" when the timer has expired
without error, regardless of whether the signal state at input "S" is still "1".
Page 25
ST-SERV1
Digital Operations
10
SIEMENS
Timers: Pulse (SP)

LAD
T4
S_PULSE
I 0.7
I I
S5T#35s
I 0.5
I I
T4
S_PULSE
Q
(8.5
)
BI
TV
BI
S5T#35s TV
BCD
10.7
BCD QW12
Els
FBD
I 0.5
MWO
QW12
Q8.5
A
L
SP
A
R
L
T
LC
T
A
10.7
S5T#35s
T4
I 0.5
T4
T4
MWO
T4
QW12
T4
Q8.5
RLO at S
RLO at R
> Example
Timer
operation
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_10E.26
Start
The pulse timer starts when the RLO at the "S" input changes from "0" to "1".
Output "Q" is also set to "1".
Reset
Output "0" is reset when:

the timer has expired, or
the start "S" signal changes from "1" to "0", or
the reset input "R" has a signal state of "1".
Page 26
ST-SERV1
Digital Operations
SIEMENS
Timers: Extended Pulse (SE)

FBD
LAD
T4
S_PEXT
Q8.5
S
Q
( )
BI MW0
S5T#35s Tv
10.5
BCD QW12
R
I I
T4
S_PEXT
10.7
I 0.7 S
S5T#35s TV
I 0.5
BI
MWO
BCD QW12
Q8.5
A
L
SE
A
R
L
T
LC
T
A
1 0.7
S5T#35s
T4
I 0.5
T4
T4
MWO
T4
QW12
T4
Q8.5
RLO at S
RLO at R
> Example
Timer
operation
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Start
18.09.2009
SERV1_10E.27
21
The extended pulse timer starts when the RLO at the "S" input changes from
"0" to "1". Output "Q" is also set to "1".
The signal state at output "Q" remains at "1" even if the signal at the "S" input
changes back to "0".
If the signal at the start input changes from "0" to "1" again while the timer is
running, the timer is restarted.
Reset
Output "Q" is reset when:

the timer has expired, or
the reset input "R" has a signal state of "1".

Page 27
ST-SERV1
Digital Operations
10
SIEMENS
Timers: OFF Delay (SF)

LAD
T4
S_OFFDT
Q8.5
S
Q
I I
)
BI mwo
S5T#35s - TV
10.5
R
BCD QW12
I I
FBD
T4
I 0.7
S_OFFDT
I 0.7 S
S5T#35s TV
I 0.5 R
BI MWO
BCD QW12
Q8.5
Q
A
1 0.7
L S5T#35s
SF T4
A
1 0.5
R T4
L T4
T MWO
LC T4
T QW12
A T4
Q8.5
RLO at S
RLO at R
> Example
Timer
operation
7 I-
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Start
18.09.2009
SERV1_10E.28

The off-delay timer starts when the RLO at the "S" input changes from "1" to
"0". When the timer has expired, the signal state at output "0" changes to "0".
If the signal state at the "S" input changes from "0" to "1" while the timer is
running, the timer stops. The next time the signal state at the "S" input changes
from "1" to "0", it starts again from the beginning.
Reset
When the RLO at reset input "R" is "1", the current time value and the time
base are deleted and output "Q" is reset.
If both inputs (S and R) have signal states of "1", output "Q" is not set until the
dominant reset is deactivated.
Binary Output
Output "Q" is activated when the RLO at the "S" input changes from "0" to "1". If
input "S" is deactivated, output "Q" continues to have signal state of "1" until the
programmed time has expired.
Page 28
ST-SERV1
Digital Operations
SIEMENS
Time Formats for Traditional S5-Timers in STEP 7

S5T#35s200ms
Time specifications as constants
(Time base: 01 (100ms), Number of units of time: 352)
01
Time specifications per variable
Units of time (BCD-coded)
29
Accu 1 contents after "L T..." exec
Time base
28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 2
Residual units of time (Integer)

01
Accu 1 cont. after "LC T..." exec.
I
I
Time base
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Time Specification
3
0
2
0
Residual units of time (BCD-coded)
18.09.2009
SERV1_10E.29
IV

Time values can be fixed and are specified as time constants. The permissible
range in which the time values are found ranges from S5T#10ms to
S5T#2h46m30sOms.
Variable times can be specified using variables (such as memory words or data
words) containing the S5TIME data type. The user must make sure that the
appropriate time base and the number of units of time, as shown in the slide,
are stored in the variable in his program.
Time Base
The time base defines the interval at which the number of units of time is to be
decremented by one unit when the timer runs. Bits 12 and 13 of the variable
must contain the time base as a binary-coded number:
Time base 0 (bit 13 = 0, bit 12 = 0)
Time base 1 (bit 13 = 0, bit 12 = 1)
Time base 2 (bit 13 = 1, bit 12 = 0)
= 10 ms
= 100ms
= 1s
Time base 3 (bit 13 = 1, bit 12 = 1)
= 10s
Units of Time
The number of units of time must be specified as a BCD-coded number. When

the number of units of time are multiplied by the time base, this results in the
desired time value. The range from 1 to 999 is possible. When there is a time
specification using a constant (S5T#...), the system automatically uses the
smallest possible time base and the number of units of time.
L / B1
At output "BI" or with the instruction "L T..." , the residual time value (number
of units of time) of the timer is queried as an integer without time base.
LC / BCD
At output "BCD" or with the instruction "LC T..." , the residual time value
(number of units of time) of the timer is queried as a BCD-coded number with
the time base in Bit 12 and 13.
Page 29
ST-SERV1
Digital Operations
10
SIEMENS
Timers: Bit Instructions

LAD
FBD
Network 1:
I 0.0
T4
A 10.0
L S5T#5s
SD T4
(SD)
S5T#5s
Network 2:
T4
8.0
A T4
= Q 8.0
Network 3:
I 0.1
A I 0.1
R T4
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Bit Instructions
18.09.2009
SERV1_10E.30
1
11
.,Z

All timer functions can also be started with simple bit instructions. The
similarities and differences between this method and the timer functions
discussed so far are as follows:
Similarities:
- Start conditions at the "S" input
- Specification of the time value
- Reset conditions at the "R" input
Signal response at output "Q"
Differences for LAD and FBD:
- It is not possible to check the current time value (there are no "BI" and
"BCD" outputs).
Page 30
ST-SERV1
Digital Operations
SIEMENS
Conversion Operations 14 DI 4 REAL

Data in integer format
(16-bit integer)
11>
> Task
Conversion from
integer to
double integer
i=>
Math
program
with
real numbers
Conversion from
double integer
to real number
EP
I Dl
B
D
MW12
EN
OUT MD14
IN
ENO
LAD
4.,5
MD14
---
DI R
EN
OUT MD26
IN
ENO
DIR
11)1
EN ENO
EN ENO
OUT MD14 MD14 IN
MW12 IN
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
OUT MD26
18.09.2009
SERV1_10E.31
11 SITRAIN
qv
Training for
Application
Basically, arithmetic operations can only process values of the same data type.
Therefore, there are operations with which integer values (I or DI) can be
converted into real values (R) and vice versa.
I_DI (in STL: ITD)
converts a 16-bit integer (I) into a 32-bit double integer (DI)
DI_R (in STL: DTR)
converts a 32-bit double integer (DI) into a floating-point number (R)
Other Conversion
Operations
are discussed in one of the advanced programming courses:

Inverts an integer (I)
INV _I (INVI)
(formation of the ones complement)
Negates (sign reversal) an integer (I)
(formation of the twos complement)
TRUNC (TRUNC) Conversion R - DI: cut off after decimal positions
NEG _I (NEGI)
ROUND (RND)
Conversion R - Dl: round
CEIL (RND+)
Conversion R 4 DI: general rounding up
FLOOR (RND-)
Conversion R - DI: general rounding down
INV_DI (INVD)
Inverts a double integer (DI)

(formation of the ones complement)
NEG_DI (NEGD) Negates (sign reversal) a double integer (DI)

(formation of the twos complement)
NEG_R / NEGR
Negates (sign reversal) a floating-point number (R)
Page 31
ST-SERV1
Digital Operations
SIEMENS
Digital Logic Operations

WX0R_W
WORW
L W#16#5F2A
WAN D_W
EN
IWO
W#16#5F2A
IW 0
AW / OW / XOW
ENO-
T MW10
IN1
IN2
OUT
15
MW10
IWO =
W#16#5F2A =
AND
El
MW10 after "AW" ex.
MW10 after "OW" ex.
MW10 after "XOW"
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
WAND_W
18.09.2009
SERV1_10E.32
OR
0
1 0
1 0
1 0
XOR
0
1 0
0 1
1 0
gtr
1 0 1 0

The "AND Word" operation gates the two digital values at inputs IN1 and IN2
bit by bit in accordance with the AND truth table. The result of the AND
operation is stored at the address at output OUT.
The instruction is executed when EN = 1.
Example: Masking out the 4th decade of the thumbwheel buttons :
WOR_W
IW4=
W#16#OFFF
= 0100 0100 1100 0100

=0000 1111 1111 1111
MW30
= 0000 0100 1100 0100
The "OR Word" operation gates the two digital values at inputs IN1 and IN2 bit
by bit in accordance with the OR truth table. The result of the OR operation is
stored at the address at output OUT.
The instruction is executed when EN = 1.
Example: Setting bit 0 in MW32 :
WXOR_W
MW32
W#16#0001
=0100 0010 0110 1010

= 0000 0000 0000 0001
MW32
= 0100 0010 0110 1011
The "Exclusive OR Word" operation gates the two digital values at inputs IN1
and IN2 bit by bit in accordance with the XOR truth table. The result of the OR
operation is stored at the address at output OUT. The result of the XOR
operation is stored at the address at output OUT.
The instruction is executed when EN=1.
Example: detecting signal changes in IWO :
IWO
MW28
= 0100 0100 1100 1010

= 0110 0010 1011 1001
MW24
=0010 0110 0111 0011
Page 32
ST-SERV1
Digital Operations
SIEMENS
Application Example: Digital Edge Detection
LAD STL HID - [FC28 -- Myproject_C3S8\Cfl_digital_operek

Fie Edit Insert PLC Debug Options Window Help
J.
,jizg25.1
__Ji
nja'
D*1:1-11:11 Pi A IiiblIMI ''''Ll

''- Lkiliii 2al
I
''' I 1 I !I IrlIggl _rj *Iii-i-oriL P1----1 A
Contents Of: tnvironmentUnterface'
E 0 Interface
I _ ti*"
FC28 : Application ExesTle: Digital Edge Detection
fl
Network 1: positive edge detection (16 Bit(

L
L
%OW
L
AW
T
TW
MW
0
220
TW
MW
222
Network 2: negatiw edge detection (16 Bit(
L
L
XCW
L
AW
T
Network 3:
220
0
MW
220
MA
224
raving
L
T
211
MW
1W
1W
MW
0
220
--
E431
0 keine
Date:
SERV1_10E.33
File: 18.09.2009
SIMATIC S7
2.f.:1
iAbs <5.2 'W3 in 1

Automati
on and Industrial Solutions
General
The program example displayed in the slide implements a logic for detecting a
signal change of 16 binary digits (edge detection for 16 bit) using digital word
instructions.
Network 1
For the detection of a positive edge detection, that is, the detection of a signal
change from 0 4 1, it suffices to carry out a digital AND operation of the
change pattern (MW 220) with the new signal states (IW 0).
Network 2
If only the 1 4 changes are to be detected, a digital AND operation of the

change pattern with the old signal states is to be carried out.
Network 3
Save the old states so that the signal state change can be detected.

Page 33
ST-SERV1
Digital Operations
10
SIEMENS
Introduction to PROFIBUS DP and HMI (1)

SNAIL-. PANEL
TA
PROFIBUS DP
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_11E.1
Training for
1
"" S TRAIN
CPI
-.T.,
Page
Contents
Objectives ........................................................................................................................................ 2
...... 3
Structure of a PROFIBUS DP System
...... 4
Configuring a PROFIBUS DP Master System
5
Configuring Compact and Modular DP Slaves
...... 6
Exercise 1: Configuring the DP System (ET 200S)
...... 7
Control and Monitoring with SIMATIC HMI
...... 8
Communication between SIMATIC S7 and the HMI System
...... 9
Configuring Phase, Downloading Phase and Process Control Phase
10
WinCC flexible
11
Touchpanel: Setting the Interface for the Project Transfer
12
HW Config: Setting the Runtime Interface
13
WinCC flexible Configuration Tool
Input and Output Fields .................................................................................................................. 14
Buttons ............................................................................................................................................ 15
Defining the Connection to the Controller ....................................................................................... 16
17
Transfer Settings in WinCC flexible
18
Exercise 2: Setting the Touchpanel Interface for Transfer
Exercise 3: Switching the PG Interface to PROFIBUS DP ............................................................. 19
Exercise 4: Checking the PROFIBUS DP ........................................................................................ 20
21
Exercise 5: Checking the RT Interface of the WinCC flexible Station
Exercise 6: Checking the Connection to the Controller ................................................................... 22
Exercise 7: Transferring the WinCC flexible Project into the Touchpanel ....................................... 23
Exercise 8: Testing the WinCC flexible Project ................................................................................ 24
Exercise 9: Testing the WinCC flexible Buttons .............................................................................. 25
If You Want to Know More .............................................................................................................. 26
.......................................................................................... 27
PROFIBUS - DP Terminating Resistor
Segment Length Depending on the Baud Rate
............................................................................. 28
PROFIBUS Connector ..................................................................................................................... 29
Preparing a Fast Connect Cable
................................................................................................... 30
Installing PROFIBUS-DP Slaves Later On
31
ST-SERV1
Page 1 Introduction to HMI and PROFIBUS DP (1)
11
SIEMENS
Objectives
be familiar with the use of PROFIBUS DP
be familiar with the WinCC flexible software
be able to set the interface of the TP 170B touch panel
be able to download a project to the TP170B touch panel
be familiar with the principle of interfacing the touch panel via tags
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_11E.2
44! Automation and Industrial Solutions
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Structure of a PROFIBUS DP System

Master
S7 S7
PS
10A
S7-400
PS S7-300 S7-300
CPU
314
S7
S7-300
CP
3425 DP
PROFIBUS -DP
ET 200M
SIMATIC S7-300
P
S7
CP
3425 DP
Slaves
STAND.
DP
SLAVE
Compact Slaves
Intelligent Slave
S7 S7 ST S7
SI
Modular Slave
STAND.
DP
SLAVE
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Overview
18.09.2009
SERV1_11E.3

The units installed in the field for automating technical processes, such as
sensors, actuators, transducers and drives more and more make use of field
bus systems for exchanging information with the higher-level controller units.
PROFIBUS is an established fieldbus system which can be used by all
automation equipment, such as PLCs, PCs, Human-Machine Interfaces as well
as actuators and sensors, for exchanging data.
PROFIBUS-DP
PROFIBUS-DP is a protocol optimized for speed which was specially designed

for communication between PLCs (DP masters) and distributed I/Os (DP
slaves).
PROFIBUS-DP is a low-cost, flexible substitute for transmission of signals on
cumbersome parallel 24V and 20mA lines.
PROFIBUS-DP is based on DIN 19245 Part 1 and the user-specific extensions
in DIN 19245 Part 3. In the course of the European fieldbus standardization
process, PROFIBUS-DP was integrated into the European fieldbus standard
EN 50170.
Master Devices
PROFIBUS makes a distinction between master and slave devices. The

PROFIBUS masters are in charge of data traffic on the bus. A master can send
messages without being requested to do so, provided it is in possession of the
token that entitles it to access the bus. Masters are also referred to as active
nodes in the PROFIBUS protocol.
Slave Devices
PROFIBUS slaves are simple I/O devices, such as actuators, sensors,

transducers, etc. They do not receive the token, that is, they can only
acknowledge the receipt of messages or send messages (data) to a master on
request. Slaves are also referred to as passive nodes.

ST-SERV1
11
SIEMENS
Configuring a PROFIBUS DP Master System

Properties - PROFIBUS interface DP (R0/52.1)
Ration 0dlt I insert PLC View Options Window He
D rer 2
61 Mimi I in' lel
Insert Oblect...,
Replace object..
::
1 57_300_
Gennd Parameters
Address:
Master System
Highest address.. 126

Transmission rate 1.5 Mbps
CPU 315-2 DP
DP
Subnet:
DI3240C24V
D0321rDC24V/0.54
DIEVDO8k24V/0.5A
5
6
7
8
Al2x12Bit
Gonad Network Salligs
J (0) UR
Slot
Nana
Module
0.
Fi
M.
Comment
OK
tal
HW Eonfig - S7_300_5E/Rion
Stature Edt Insert PLC
Dc32- 11 %I&
Options Window Help
TP- i8I It
It?
IPROFIDUS_TikSERV1
57 subret
173r
00 .-0013
Project path
IMy_Prciact \PROFIDULTIILSEFIV1
Stowe location
al Ms pined
IDA57_CournisM4y_Prop
&Atm
Data croaked
Last ramified
:.157_300_SIatoon (Configuration) SERVI _L
Comment
2
Sorple OP-Master:yawn will DP-Staves f T2005 and Mms,nuoter

MI4420
CPU 315-2 DP
PROFIBUS_T1ASERV1 DP roaster :yawn
113/12/2006 0121146N
10/12/21336 0121146PM
DIINDC24V
c24V/0.54
D113/D09r24V/115A
Al2s1261
Result
OK
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_11E.4
_Z
'SITRAIN Training for
Distributed I/O
All master systems consisting of a DP master and DP slaves that are connected
using a bus cable and that communicate via the PROFIBUS-DP protocol are
designated as distributed I/Os.
DP Master
As DP master you can install:

S7-CPU with integrated DP master interface (such as CPU 414-2, etc.)
CP in connection with a CPU (such as CP 443-5, etc.)
Setting Up DP Master To configure a master system, proceed as follows:

1. Select the PROFIBUS interface X2 of your CPU and insert a master system
(Menu Insert - Master System)
2. The dialog box "Properties - PROFIBUS interface DP" is opened. In this
dialog you can define the following properties:
set up a new PROFIBUS subnet or open an existing one
set the properties of the PROFIBUS subnet (baud rate, etc.).
define the PROFIBUS address of the DP master.
3. Acknowledge the settings with "OK". The following symbol appears:
-=
1=b1. for the DP master system. This symbol is used as a
"hanger " for the DP slaves.
ST-SERV1
HW Config - [S7_300_5tation (Configuration) -- SUM
.=_11312E.I
_L]
JJJ
011 Station Eck Insert PLC View Options Window Help

,
I Cirg" 1-u
elfalillIMIIIIIII111111111111111
End
CPU
1 315
2
3
4
Bode: 'Standard
PROFIBUS_TIA SERVI DP master system DI
El {_j ET 2005P
2 c3 ET 2011
E a1 ET 200M
p-[] ET 200mo
E {23 ET 2008
ET 2005
ET 2005 Compact 16DI/16DC
E
ET 200S Compact 32DI
E
IM151-1 Basic
to
84151-1 FO Standard
E
11.1151-1
FO Standaid
E
114151-1 FO Standard
E
114151-1 HE
E
114151.1 HF
E
DI32xDC24V
D032.0C24V/0.5A
D18/008x24V/0.54
Al2:42Bit
6
7
10
11
Ifi
*1.1(0)
UR
sid 3 Rolle
1
2 II CPU 315-2 DP
.
,1/4..7 3 DP
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
D132x C24V
D032xDC24V/0.54
D18/D0&24V/0 54
Al2x1213it
41
'
111111
SES7V1.2 2
1023
6Es7
6ES7
6E57
6E57
88
.1020
ern Oa Not we VW 0. *NY.
octs. r apt alb CMS It?
DP Slave
41
88
6E57 151-1
Interface ne
electrorec n
communica
Cvl,
oonottwxiie
I
7
0.904.,113.
At.W#A.
1111
j.:
.OJPI
111150 5.100
los.
Configure rack like central hardware
1,1y sr
- WV ST
wotw sew
coowon t
led.. please.
0.16
Ri571714117030.
sr 3s(mwo
0 113
.7
'71
40 e 3
0 I
.0'1 wren*.
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
DP Slaves

likr
Modules with integrated digital/analog inputs and outputs

(compact DP slaves, such as ET200B).
Interface modules with assigned S5 or S7 modules

(modular DP slaves, such as ET200M, ET 200S).
S7-200/300 stations with modules that support the "Intelligent Slave"
function (such as CPU 215-DP, CPU 315-2).
Selecting DP Slaves
18.09.2009
SERV1_11E.5
To configure a DP slave, proceed as follows:

From the "Hardware Catalog" select the desired compact DP slave (such as
ET200B) or the interface module (such as IM151-1 Standard for ET200S) for
a modular slave.
2. Drag the symbol (such as IM151-1 Standard for ET200S) onto the symbol for
the master system: .=
.1=1.h
The dialog box "Properties PROFIBUS interface DP" is opened. Here you
can set the following properties:
properties of the PROFIBUS subnet (baud rate, etc.).
1.
the PROFIBUS address of the DP slave.
3. Acknowledge the settings with "OK". A configuration table is attached to

the symbol (icon) that represents the I/O configuration of the compact
slave or the rack of the modular slave.
4. For a modular DP slave, you now insert the desired modules from the
"Hardware Catalog" into the configuration table.
The addressing and parameter assignment of the modules is then handled
similar to the configuration of the centrally inserted modules.
ST-SERV1
11
SIEMENS
Exercise 1: Configuring the DP System (ET 200S)

,_111
:1 2cJ
Config - [S7_300_Station (Configuration) SERVO _U
WI Station Edit (Insert PLC View Options Window Help
. 2,
D lair
CPU
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
.
Insert Object...
led
Replace Object
I ID
Oe I
Find:
PROFIIJET 10 System
PROFIBUS(1) I
-
Profile:
41
.1 (4) IM151-1 Standard

110
.
Slot
1
4
5
6
7
Module
Pack Addresses
Order Number
PM-E DC24V
4D1 DC24V ST
6E S7 138-4CAOCI-CIAA0
6E57 131-413D00-0AA0
401 DC24V ST
BEST 131-413000-00AD
400 DC241//01,54 ST
6E97 132-413ND-045J)
6ES7 132-Q000-0AM
4D0 D124V/0,54 ST
I Address
0 Address
eH 23
e4 87
8.0...8.3
8.4...8.7
I Standard
iIM151 -1 FO Standard
. -1
'
1 IM151-1 HF
F 1 IM151 -1 HF
IM151-1 Standard
E TN 1M151 -1 Standard < .......1
1 +,
AI
El 0 AO
El a cP
q-ca DI
3..0 DO
1 F-R0 24V..2301/5A
200 AC24..230V/1A
200 DC24V/0,54 HF
MO DC24V/0.5A HF
200 DC24V/0,5A ST
200 DC24V/0,5A ST
D132)0 C24V
0032xDC24V/0.5A
D18/1)08a4V/0.5A
Al2x12Bit
'
,nn nriavoe wr
41
li
r
6E S7 151-1AAG2-0ABO
Interface module IM151-1 for ET 2005
electronic modules, send capability for diect
data exchange
tS
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_11E.6
'IT
Task
You are to commission the DP system for your training unit so that the conveyor
model can be controlled using the ET 200 S when you have the same
functionality, without having to modify the S7 program.
What to Do
1. Expand the existing configuration to include the distributed (remote) station

ET 200S (additional connection possibility for the conveyor model).
Notes: Insert the PROFIBUS DP master system as follows:
Select the DP interface of the CPU - Menu Insert - Master System -
OFF ON
64
32
16
8
4
2
New...
To connect the ET200S, use the mouse to drag the interface module IM151
from the module catalog to the master system (see slide)
2. On the IM 151-1's address switches, set the Slave Address to 4
(see slide left) and check the PROFIBUS cabling
Note: Changes to the slave address only take effect after Power ON/OFF!
3. Change the addresses of the mixed DI/DO module in the URO Universal
Rack to IB 88 and QB 88.
4. For the input and output addresses in the ET200 S, configure the addresses
IB 8 and QB 8.
Note: So that the 8 channels of a module are located in one byte, you have to
pack the addresses. To do so, select both modules and then click on "Pack
Addresses" (see slide)
4. Connect the conveyor model to the interface of the ET200S.
5. After "Save and Compile" download the configuration into the CPU.
6. Verify that the configuration is error-free. The error LEDs Group error (SF)
and bus error (BUSF) must be dark on the CPU.
7. Test the program you have created up until now. Everything should work as
before.

ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Control and Monitoring with SIMATIC HMI

Process
Visualization System
SIMATIC WinCC
SIMATIC Panels
or
WinCC flexible 2005
'
ProTool I Pro
ZUr. '...z.111 E.,
WinCC
SIEMENS
200. 5moms...A lighrtt men.
c.1wIndowIllssernA0actsysem astall 0.5000.0 b7755c5619315089malsall
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Overview
18.09.2009
SERV1 11E.7

RV.'
With SIMATIC HMI, there is a field-proven HMI system for user-friendly process
control and monitoring available for the SIMATIC S7. The products range from
simple text display to the process visualization system.
SIMATIC S7 and SIMATIC HMI are completely harmonized and integrated. This
greatly simplifies the use of the SIMATIC HMI control and monitoring system.
The SIMATIC S7 has already integrated HMI services. The HMI system
requests process data from the SIMATIC S7. Data transmission between
SIMATIC S7 and SIMATIC HMI is handled by the two operating systems
and does not have to be taken care of by the user.
SIMATIC HMI systems can be connected directly to PPI (S7-200) and MPI,
i.e., PROFIBUS (S7-300 and S7-400) and Industrial Ethernet, i.e.,
PROFINET. A networking via PROFIBUS or Industrial Ethernet, i.e.,
PROFINET makes the process control and monitoring possible even over
greater distances and to several controllers.
Numerous features from the uniform data base and symbols to the same
user-friendly Windows-oriented user interface make it easy to use HMI
systems.
ST-SERV1
11
SIEMENS
Communication between SIMATIC S7 and the HMI System
-dom isno._
wopro
fr4N/
MPI
PROFIBUS DP
Industrial Ethernet
SIMATIC PANEL
SIEMENS
Trahrig for
Automata" and Crives
Update
Press key "set bit"

Man
008000
Confirm
"Wens.ledge
Fault
Let go of key "reset bit"

SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_11E.8
Re screen
tr
i SITRAIN Training for
a
gl
Tag
Process tags are used to make the data exchange between SIMATIC S7 and the
HMI system. Tags are created in the configuration with WinCC flexible and are
assigned to a CPU data area for this. The HMI system cyclically reads out the
tag values and displays them in an output field, for example.
Data Areas
In the configuration of tags, the following CPU data areas - global tags - can be
used:
Data blocks (DB)
Bit memories (M)

Inputs (I) and Outputs (Q)
Peripheral input (PI) and Peripheral output (PQ)
Timers (T) and Counters (C)
HMI systems also recognize local tags without process connection. That is, these
tags are processed exclusively internally and do not require any communication
resources.
Communication
The operator panels can communicate with the PLC using the MPI or
PROFIBUS DP or Industrial Ethernet bus systems. The S7 protocol is used here.
Communication is organized through the S7 CPU and HMI system operating
systems. User programming on the S7 is therefore not necessary.
An operator panel can exchange data with several PLCs simultaneously.
Updating
Data transfer between SIMATIC S7 and the HMI system takes place cyclically.
That is, process tags are cyclically read and written depending on the configured
update times.
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Configuring Phase, Downloading Phase and Process Control Phase
Transfer
Configuring phase
(Offline)
Process control phase
PC/PG
WinCC flexible
Configuration
data
Configuration
data
Source file
<Name>.hmi
PC/OP/TP
Flash
Flash
Ethernet
MPI
DP
PLC
1111 PROJECT]..hmi
PROJECT_i_log.LDF
A
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Introduction
18.09.2009
SERV1_118.9
4,1 SITRAIN
Training for
You configure your project on a PC or programming device (PG). You then

generate the configuration under WinCC flexible and download it to the
PC/OP/TP.
If the PC/OP/TP is connected to the PLC, the PC/OP/TP displays the current
values in the tags and graphics. The three phases of working with the
configuration data are shown in the slide.
Configuring
The configuring process consists of various partial steps:

1. Defining the PLC and the type of connection (MPI, PROFIBUS DP,
Industrial Ethernet etc.)
2. Making general settings for the PC/OP/TP (defining the current
connections etc.)
3. Generating objects such as tags, screens, messages etc.
4. Downloading (transferring) the generated database to the HMI system via
MPI, PROFIBUS DP, or Industrial Ethernet
The configuration is stored in source files in your S7 project (Directory
...\HmiEs). In the compiling phase, a file of the type fwx is created which is later
transferred to the target device
Editors
<Name>.fwx
for Windows-based HMI systems
WinCC flexible includes a set of editors (tools) for configuring the different types
of objects. You create each object under a symbolic name. You must specify
this symbolic name time and again, for example, when creating, editing,
referencing or deleting the object.
ST-SERV1
11
SIEMENS
WinCC flexible
Advanced
Advanced Demo
- Complete functional scope
- Limited to a max. 30 days
Standard
Compact
*) Options
*) Options
*) Options
Micro
R PIM
SIMATIC PANEL
Micro
SIMATIC S7
SIMATIC PANEL
70 / 170
Date:
File:
SIMATIC PANEL
270 / 370
18.09.2009
SERV1_11E.10
.......
PC - based
Windows 2000
Windows XP
'IC

WinCC flexible
Engineering System
The Engineering System (ES) is the software with which you carry out all the
necessary configuring tasks in order to create an interface for controlling and monitoring
machines and systems.
Editions
The Engineering System of WinCC flexible is modularly graded into different editions.
The edition determines which operator panels of the SIMATIC HMI spectrum can be
configured.
With each higher edition, a wider range of target devices and functions is supported. The
configuration data is compatible.
Micro: Configuring the micro panels
Compact: Configuring the micro panels and panels of the 70 and 170 series
Standard: Configuring all panels (micro panels, panels of the 70/170/270 and 370
series)
Advanced: Configuring the PC-based and all other panels (micro panels, panels of the
70/170/270/370 series and PC Runtime)
Advanced Demo:Test version limited to 30 days
With the WinCC flexible Compact edition and above, you can change to a higher
Changing the
WinCC flexible Edition WinCC flexible edition with a "Powerpack".
Runtime
WinCC flexible Runtime (RT) is the software for process visualization on the operator
panel. With Runtime, you execute the project during process operation.
The various panels already come delivered with operating system and the appropriate
Rutime version. Possible, additionally required Runtime components are loaded along
with the project onto the panel.
Options
Both components can be expanded through Options (licenses).

The options depend on the target system used. An operator panel that doesn't support a
specific functionality also cannot use the associated option.

ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Touchpanel: Setting the Interface for the Project Transfer

Loader V07.01.01.00_01.34
Ccrweycr
Language
M+420
1=1
Station Parameters
Address:
Control
Panel
Pe2knal
Settrcs
1 s
Time-out:
NetworkParameters
61
Panel is the only master on bus

Start
Eft Yew
Cigira.nc.
PROFIBUS
Transfer
1.5 Mbits/s
Transmission Rate:
Ls ikftrrik
57-Trrnir., Screw&wet
Highest Station:
126
Profile:
DP
Sett,C5
Bus Parameters...
Transfer Settings
Channel I Directories 1
S7-Transfer Settings
Channel 1:
MPI
Serial:via R5232 /Zero Modern Cable
F.Enable Channel
MEI
Profibus
Remote Control
Channel 2:
I MFVProtibus
Properties...
Enable Channel F.; Remote Control
advanced
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Transfer Settings
SITRAIN
18.09.2009
SERV1_11E. 1 1
It"

The interface of the TP170B must be set up for the project transfer.
These settings are only relevant for downloading the project, not for later
communication between panel and controller during the process control phase.
The interface parameters necessary for this are defined with WinCC flexible
within the project.
Channel:
In addition to the serial transfer channel (Channel 1), a

second channel (Channel 2) can be selected for
downloading the project onto the operator panel.
Remote Control:
The loading of the WinCC flexible project can be triggered

without first having to manually exit Runtime. The panel
automatically exits Runtime and switches to the Transfer
mode.
Advanced:
Setting of transmission parameters for MPI or PROFIBUS

DP.
Training for
ST-SERV1
11
SIEMENS
I
jI
Y
HW Config: Setting the Runtime Interface

SIMATIC Manager-[My_Project-- D:\S7_Kurse\SERV1 _L]
31JJ
JJxJ
My_Projett
E
S7300_Station
E g TP170B_Color
Object name
Symbolic name
Ilk Configuration MR"
Type
&ion ntiguration
flexible RT
HW Config - [TPI70B_Color (Configuration) -- My_Projeitt
Mk
Station Edit Insert PLC View Options Wndow

k%
a gAermiligm
JJJ
Help
annisav
03 (0) HMI
General I AssignmeM I Reserve LSAPs Diegrosties I

I
Shen Description:
HMI MPI/DP
Satraute fa any PROF1BUS nodule, S7 coroebsint. DP mast.. DP

SIMATIC NET CD 7/2001 SP4
tsve. PG functions,
Order No.:
*1011(0) HMI
Index
Name:
Module
Interface
Order numb
Type
IPROFIBUS
Addis=
Netweiked Yes
Comment

rcei
Ca
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Communication
Settings
18.09.2009
SERV1_11E.12
Help

1 Automation and Industrial
,lh0
Solutions
a
For a WinCC flexible project that is integrated in STEP7, the interface

parameters (address and network) are set up with the HW Config tool as
shown in the slide. With the parameters set here, the panel will later
communicate with the controller or controllers during Runtime or during the
process control phase.
For WinCC flexible projects not integrated in STEP7, these parameters are
defined with WinCC flexible in the configuration of the "Connections" (see
following pages).
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
WinCC flexible - Configuration Tool

_,..D212s1
EnKt tAt IP. PPP FpP PAPP*. 4own, PIndo
niece
1:,0
ti n:. I 4
111 le7 II
COP:-
11=2_
SIEMENS
ieiC4
E s TP17CEL.Colot(TP 1708 mice/
E 17=3 Samna
4 Add Screen
Template
Conveys,
HM420
0 Stan
!rst Communication
Tops
Cennetrions
Sae Cycler
Aisne hlamgement
1/4 Analog Akins
Discrete Alum
E Seaga
Recipes
Teri and Graphics Ltels

Airtime Wet Admevreation
Deese Seems
S ti Language Settings
S Inroad Languages
Graphics
Propel Teets
Direonaner
Shretures
g Varian Managernent
SIMATIC PANEL]
Training tor
........ si[B1111M11111
111 11gr i,
........ Editor.SeCtion ............ff
(Work Area)
IR
............ K
..................
.""""" 11 :11 11 - 1.0 WWI! - :
It
704
fi,
70
Simple Objects
/ Line
PolylMe
Cis Polygon
Ellipse
3 Circle
Rectangle
El Text Field
Ei 10 Field
Date-Time Field
El Graphic 10Field
Symbolic 10 Field
Q Graphic. Mee
NI Button
Switch
EU I .
; Properties *
"" "" . .....
General
la Properties
nhanced Objects
.....
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Activating
_it Tim tgop

L!) 11:242107 Gerold
I Derajitien
The device TP170B_Cobi Lsdated
18.09.2009
SERV1_11E.13
Y ebrecthereto
elete it.

For projects integrated in STEP7, WinCC flexible can be started directly from
the SIMATIC Manager.
After software installation, the engineering tool starts with an initial start screen.
The most important windows are opened.
Project Window
Work Area
Properties Window
Tool Window
Task Window
The project window is the central switching position for configuration. All
components and all available configuration editors of a project are displayed in
the project window in the form of a tree structure and can be opened from
there. Each Editor has an icon assigned to it through which you can identify the
associated objects. Only elements that are supported by the selected operator
panel are displayed in the project window. In this window, you have access to
the operator panel's device settings, the language support and the version
administration.
The work area is the central configuring area in which the objects of the
operator panel are edited using the editor that has been started. Several editors
can be open at the same time.
In the Properties window, you edit the properties of selected objects (such as,
the properties of screens, screen objects, tags). The Properties window is only
available in those editors where object properties have to be set.
The Tool window contains all configurable objects that can be configured in
screens and it also enables the access to libraries.
The Task window displays all engineering system messages that are created
when generating a project, for example.

ST-SERV1
11
SIEMENS
Input and Output Fields

eroject
Ede
View Insert Format Faceplates
New
?"
English (United States)
Tahoma
6-f (cc
PRO1
El es Touchpanel(TP 1778 6"
Screens
a Add Screen
0 Template
0 Conveyor
MM420
0 Start
Communication
Tags
Connections
Cycles
Alarm Management
.
UAnalog Alarms
k',.1 Discrete Alarms
Settings
E - Recipes
it 1/4 Reports
ft rt.' Text and Graphics L
Runtime User Admin
Et
ff) V" Device Settings
ki Language Settings
Project Languages
T: Graphics
Output
gicitions Window Help
(4 1
.Uri
$.;; .
/ U
_Conveyor
SIEMENS
SIMATIC PAL,
R _
Simple Objects
A
A TextField
I Jog
left
-tatiodl:_ctatiod2 Stait:on
IO Field
Date-Time Field
Enhanced Objects
Man
,- 000000
LI
Enter ackn
General
Properties
10. Animations
7,177.191F7
7
PRO1
_
Touchpanel
Communicatior -e:t Tags
81, My Project
M_MM420_0n_HMI M 40.0
M_System_OFF_HMI M 30.1
M_System_ON_HMI M 30.0
MW_ACT
MW 20
_5ETP
MW 22
New
Mode [Outpu
mm
Tag
mmm .....
MW_ACT
mmmmmmmm
Format pattern
44
!999999
i.
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_11E.14
RC

I/O Field Mode
Tag values are displayed through output fields. The values of tags can also be
specified through input/output fields using a screen keyboard. The mode can be
set in the Properties window as shown in the slide.
Format Type
With Format Type you define in which format the value of the tag is to be
displayed.
Tag
In the field Tag you define from which WinCC flexible tag the value in the I/O
Field is to be displayed or specified.
The WinCC flexible tag is, as a rule, linked to a variable of the S7 controller.
However, it can also be an internal tag that is not linked to a variable of the S7
controller and that merely serves to store values within the HMI device.
SITRAIN
Training for
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Buttons
WinCC flexible Advanced - My_Project - Touchpanel
erem of mew
Insert Format
Faceplates Qptions Mnclow
rat .
New
English (Unked States)
ler PRO1
( (Cc
Touchpanel(TP 1776 6"

Screens
-11 Add Screen
Template
0 Conveyor
MM420
0 Start
Communication
Tags
Connections
Cycles
Alarm Management
RA Analog Alarms
EA Discrete Alarms
r Settings
Recipes
+ , Reports
r_ Text and Graphics L
+ 2 Runtime User Admin
+
Device Settings
,= 4 Language Settings
Project Languages
Fif Graphics
Tahoma
No 1 8
No
oaveyor
Simple Objects
A
Graphics View
....
e
Jog
right
Button
switch
...-
Enhanced Objects
Graphics
ack
Lau
Or Events
ak, ail
It Press ti=>SetBit
*MA&
Tag I InOutj
Activate w.
2
crio function>
- jud PRO1
Touchpanel
IS
1E1 /3. Communicatior
Tags
My_Project
7>>
>
M 17.0
M_Conv_Fault
M_Conv Jog_LEFT_HMI M 30.3
M_Conv Jog_RIGHT_HMI M 30.2
M 30.5
_MiA_Accept_HMI
MIA_Mode5elect_HMI M 30.4
New
I CI
Conv3og_RIGHT,EIMI
output
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Buttons
18.09.2009
SERV1 ji1E.15

The operator can use buttons to initiate system functions such as the selection
of a screen or the setting of a tag as shown in the slide.
Through the "Events" of a button, you define in which event which system
function is to be executed.
Variable
If the selected system function is executed with a WinCC flexible tag, this tag
must be specified.
The WinCC flexible tag is, as a rule, linked to an S7 controller variable. It could,
however, also be an internal tag that is not linked to an S7 controller variable,
but is simply used to store values within the HMI device.
SITRAIN
Training for
ST-SERV1
11
SIEMENS
Defining the Connection to the Controller

fi'VrAnCE flexible 2005 Advanced - My_Project - TP170B_Color
erniect Lclit Yew Insert Dern& Fapeplates gptions Jndow Help
:)-- New kW ig In
la ' 1 ., 1) Y:. 1 4
i iEnosh (United States)
,j11
:1 <I
_.
1
In . 1 Iii 43. H. IC.-,
J . i se ?.. 7:,..
J.
oip 0 start 0 m,-;:: .sy..........
I.PRO
TP171:8_Colagl. 1708
tt Screens
-2 Add Screen
1....1:1 Template
PEI Conveyor
1.... In MM420
, ,..-1:1 Stan
al!Communication
tle Tags
r:1 J
FIE.
II
I ,.--
Comadions 2xL
I ,*--S
--110 Cycles
1
8 NI Mem Management
VI Analog Alan=
EA Discrete Alarms
* v. Settings
Fr.: .. Recipes
Ir- Text and Graphics Li
B ti4 Rtmline User Admini
E tz Devkits Settings
Language Settings
B
Languages
O
! it Graphics
e
Project
Terns
'. r
i 01.4 Dictionaries
EP % Sbuptuies
Eli ro Version Management
II
1
7
A Objects
ci o e
.....Uun_I
ornmunication driver
:ISIMA17C 57 3001400
On
artner
Lilliy_Project15... CPU 315-2 DP
4I
I
miet"s
i J J ''-', r_.:i'l rj _1 _1_7j

-
=111.=;
zjMIMI
DP
:1
:1
n
I.1
Area pointer
TP 1708 color
.-.-.
",...
=
........
Babe)
Interface
'HMI 11.1iDmi
Network
HMI device
Type
Baud rate
Profie
0 TTY
0 R5232
0 R5422
0 R5485
Address
C) %nett
El Orly master on the bus
1500000
Access Pant
I,
Highest station acldress (RSA)
77,
CitaINE
Hurter of masters
PLC device
Address
Expansion slot
r----
Rack
0 Cyck operation
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_11E.16

,,r
Creating Connections With the configuring of the connection(s), the communication partners of the
operating panel are defined with which the Runtime exchanges data in the later
process control phase.
For WinCC flexible projects integrated in STEP7, connections to partners
(controllers) are merely created here. The addresses of the operator panel and
the S7 controller as well as the associated network (MPI, PROFIBUS, Ethernet)
have already been determined in the hardware configuration of the operator
panel and the S7 controller.
For a WinCC flexible project not integrated in STEP7, the connections must be
configured completely here (address of the operator panel and the controller,
network).

ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Transfer Settings in WinCC flexible

fif WinCC flexible 2005 Advanced - My_Project - TP1796 Caw
Project Edit View Insert Format Faceplates 2oborts Window Help
Ell
Nevi
lquSelect devices for transfer
New Project with Projec
riettings for TP17013_Color (IP 17133 color)
Close
IMPI/OP
Mode
save
Station add.= 11
Save As Version...
Change device Type...
Import Tag;...
Integrate in STEP 7 .
Copy from STEP 7...
I rr* Project Docurnenta.....

Print Selection
Ctrl+W
PROFINET CBA
.1
Z\
1708 color
Iran le,
SIMATIC PANEL
lilted
Dv
Co5pler
7,7
1-1
kansfer
Transfer kettings71
Recent Proiects
Backtransfer
Lockup...
Restore...
ems
License keys...
nsion
czit
mcsecr Languages
sf Graphics
Project Texts
i
EEI - 4 Dctionaries
Structures
Version Management
TTY
R5232
R5922
C) R5985
Slinatic
Qptions...
05 Update
sclic of
2 Only master on the b
Objects
1111
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Transfer Settings
18.09.2009
SERV1_11E.17
Training for
SITRAIN
Transfer is the transmission of the project onto the operator panel that is to
execute the project. The transfer settings necessary for this are only relevant for
the project transfer, not for the data exchange with the controller later on during
the process control phase.
Transfer Mode
For the transfer, the operator panel must be in "Transfer Mode". Depending on
the current interface parameterization, the operator panel must be switched to
the Transfer mode manually or it switches automatically.
SITRAIN
Training for
ST-SERV1
11
SIEMENS
Exercise 2: Setting the Touchpanel Interface for Transfer

Loader V07.01.01.00_01.34
Transfer
PROFIBUS
Start
Language
Conveyor
Address:
Control
Panel
111
Peoknu
Selags
0P.s-ei
moult
07-Trareftr
Set rce
t.r!J;ad
...
si eCi)
Network
CP
tAJ.64
1 s
Time-out:
Elle loner I
...
Station Parameters
Mk+120
4 .5 10
40 iiii
....,,,.... corr.
LAWTrfu. .1fq.
Panel is the only master on bus
NetworkParameters
ii
Ra:.,. - .;
tS
System -Iran sta

a
Transmission Rate:
1.5 Mbits/s
Highest Station:
126
Profile:
DP
Bus Parameters...
Transfer Settings
Channel
Directories
S7-Transfer Settings
Channel 1.
Serial:via RS232 Zero Modem Cable
MEI
MPI
,
IT
Enable Channel F.; Remote Control
Profibus
Channel 2.
tbus
F Enable Channel F Remote Control
Properties...
Advanced
1
SIMATIC S7
A
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_11E.18
17

Task
The interface of the touchpanel is to be set up as in the slide, so that the WinCC
flexible project can then be downloaded from the PG to the panel.
Before you can parameterize the interface, you must exit Runtime. For this,
there is, as a rule, a button in the Start screen for doing so. After exiting
Runtime, the "Loader" appears through which the "Control Panel" (see slide)
can be activated. The Loader also appears after every voltage recovery.
What to Do
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Notes
Exit the touch panel's Runtime

Activate the "Control Panel"
Double-click on "Transfer" to select
Make the settings as shown in the slide and accept these by pressing the
"OK' button until the "Control Panel" reappears
Double-click on the icon "OP"
Press the "Save Registry" button
Go back to the Loader by closing the Control Panel.
Via "Transfer", activate the "Transfer Mode". In this mode, the touchpanel
waits for a connection set up through the PG.
Check the PROFIBUS cabling.
Channel:
Remote Control:
Advanced:
In addition to the serial transfer channel (Channel 1), a

second channel (Channel 2) can be selected for
downloading the project onto the operator panel.
The loading of the WinCC flexible project can be triggered
without first having to manually exit Runtime. The panel
automatically exits Runtime and switches to the Transfer
mode.
Setting of transmission parameters for MPI or PROFIBUS
DP.
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Exercise 3: Switching the PG Interface to PROFIBUS DP

SIMATIC Manager
Options
Properties -CP.9611(PROFIBUO' ?"`
Set PG/PC Interface
PROFIBUS
023==ailmv
Station Parameters
r PG/PC is the only master on the bus
Access Path 1
I S7ONLINE
10
Address:
IT
Access Point of the Application:
1_1
CP5611(PROFIBUS)
(STEP 71
Check address
Tirneout.

Network Parameters
Interface Parameter Assignment Used
if4 CP5611 tiell

CP5611(PPI)
CP5611(PROFIBUS DP Slave)
CP5611(PROFIBUS) <Active>
Transmission Rate:
Properties.
ICP5611(PRO FIB U S) <Active>

J
Copy...
Standard
Universal (DP/FMS)
User-Defined
Bus Parameters...
What to Do
Master: 11
Select
Cancel
SIMATIC S7
Task
Network Configuration
r Include network configuration belsrs
Add/Remove:
He
Date:
File:
:_
'1
Profile:
Interfaces
OK
126
Diagnostics..
(User parameter assignment of your

communications processor CP5611 for
SOFTNET DP Master)
11 5 Mbps
I - --
18.09.2009
SERV1_11E.19
OK
Slaves 1
Default
Cancel I Help
IV

So that the WinCC flexible project can be downloaded from the PG onto the
touch panel, the PG's interface parameters and the transfer settings of the
touch panel must both be parameterized to PROFIBUS DP.
1.
Change the PG's interface to PROFIBUS DP. Use the parameters shown in
the slide.
Important:
For "Interface Parameter Assignment Used" DO NOT select
"PROFIBUS-DP Slave", since the PG is not used as a PROFIBUS slave.
2. Connect the online cable of the PG with a PROFIBUS DP interface.

ST-SERV1
11
SIEMENS
Exercise 4: Checking the PROFIBUS DP

SIMATIC Manager
n->Options
1
> Set PG/PC Interface
SIMATIC NET diagnostics - CP5611(PROFIBUS)
PROFIBUS/MPI Network Diagnostics
Hardware I
Status/Network Diagnostics 10K
Test
Access Path
Station address:
Bus parameters:
Baudrate:
Access Point of the Application:

I _ NLINE
(STEP 7)
--> CP5611(PROFIBUS)
Highest station address (HSA):

Minimum station delay Time (Min Tsdr):
Maximum station delay Time (Max T sal
Setup time (tsetj:

ICP5611(PROFIBUS) <Active>
1r-4 CP5611fMPlj
1'4 CP5611(PPI)
Properties...
Diagnostics...
_N
--v>
11
o irirrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr
------
looFFEEFFErrrrrrrrrrrrr
- - -nor r r r rr r Key
E Station passive
- Interfaces
Read
Add/Remove:
Select..
OK
Cancel
SIMATIC S7
Task
17 Station active
F Station active ready
Cancel
I Help
I Help
Date:
File:
Siemens AG 2008. AM rights reserved.
zi
20 I
User parameter assignment of your

communications processor CP5611 for
SOFTNET DP Master)
OK
1 te it
Bus Nodes
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
ri rrEFFEEFF1 1 1 1 1 1 Fr
4C EFFErrr- rr-- 1-1-1-1-1-Fri- Frr
60 rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr
80 FrrEFFErri- r- rEFFI-1-1-1-1-
Copy
CP5611(PROFIBLIS DP Slave] J
14 CP5611(PROFIBUS) <Active>
1500.00 Kbps
126
11 tBit
150 tBit
18.09.2009
SERV1_11E.20

Now connected to the PROFIBUS are:

the PG (address 0, active)
-
the touchpanel (address 1, active)

the S7 controller (address 2, active)
the ET200S (address 4, passive)
Using the function "SIMATIC NET Diagnostics" (see slide), check whether all
nodes are accessible via the PROFIBUS DP.
What to Do
1. Start the diagnostic function

SIMATIC Manager - Options - Set PG/PC Interface - Diagnostics...
2. Check the PROFIBUS network using the "Test" button
3. Using the "React' button, determine which nodes are accessible via the
PROFIBUS.
Note
SITRAIN
The "active" and "passive" node properties indicate whether a node can (active)
or cannot (passive) initiate communication to another node.
Training for
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Exercise 5: Checking the RT Interface of the WinCC flexible Station

ri-k* l 1? gl
ei I
Irti 161 la
J 4p
EERVII ci II< No Filter >
MyProject 0: \Courses \MyProject

MyProject
E
Object name
S7_300_Station
/I
CPU 315-2 DP
7
E sr S7progran rl' HW Con ig - Tourhpant
.12E1 Scrum Saban Edit Insert PLC View
Block:
Touchpanel
Syrnteic
rit'
$1 a I I
511 1
Typ
General
L crt
P.,..met.
Address:
General I Assignment I F
Short Description:
Highest address, 126

Transmission rale: 1.5 M bps
Subnet
not networked
Touchpanel (Configuration)
PROFIBUS 1
15M
New
Pro:tartlet
Delete
Order No:
Name:
Interface
sI
4,116 (0) HMI
Index
Module
Type:
7
1: I
Address:
Networked
Yes
OK
CarrlorM
Properties...
Comment
OK
Cancel
Help
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Task
What to Do
SITRAIN
18.09.2009
SERV1_11E.21
q.t.;

So that the panel's Runtime can communicate with the S7 station during the
process control phase, the panel's interface must be parameterized with the
HW Config tool.
Using the HW Config tool, check the parmeterization of the panel's interface. If
necessary (see slide) make the appropriate corrections.
Training for
ST-SERV1
11
SIEMENS
Exercise 6: Checking the Connection to the Controller

,d_cuLci
MyProject
S7_300_Station
:=4 Touchpanel
WinCC flexible R T
,
Screens
17 5- Communication
-ej Tags
,,s a Connections
Cycles
Flik Alarm Managemen vx
Recipes
El
Reports
Text and Graphics

Runtime User Adm
Device Settings
0ect name
Info
eoiect Edit Dew Insert Fefe,ef Peceeletes Qvtsons Endow tielp

New I& A rn
x
<Undelned>
Engfnh Weed Knedom)
6?.1x, 0 Ran I .Stonneaons
PRO
Touollaare(TP 1778 6"
J
DJ
IE-1 1 Saws
Partner
Communication
.ML.i221
4- 0.
1
.
1
-44i===9=.1111111
11
Cornectionl
Tags
.15111111C 57 300/400 ViyProjectk57... :
1CPU 315-2 DP :
1CF ,0n
4-11-111-11
1
iar
MI Cedes
Open editor
ilk Alen Menegerren
-41 Reeiees
Add Connection
Reports
at
generate
Tex and Graphics
Manama User Adm
Lind
Ctrl+Z
BEI r- Devine Settings
Language Settiigs
Cuh
Ctrl+X
at &mimes
E -Ws Vend, Mannerneni ra Spy
Ctri+C
NI device
Netot,'
Cp Fiat Copy
Paste
Replace...
Ctrl+E
Delete
Delete
Print Selection
tf
7 Output
SIMATIC S7
Highest stens address (HSA)
ALINE
e bus
Number
of matters
Cross-References
R econnect...
File:
Date:
Ctrl+W
I: o
ProNe
Ctrl+V
SERV1_11E.22
18.09.2009
IlithiT Automation and Industrial Solutions
Task
Make a connection so that the panel's Runtime communicates with your training
unit.
What to Do
1. Start WinCC flexible by opening the WinCC flexible station Touchpanel in

the SIMATIC Manager (see left slide)
2. Open the object "Connections" and check whether your S7 station is
specified as connection partner.
3. Connect the WinCC flexible tags with the controller's variables
right mouse button on "Connections" -4 Reconnect...
4. Complete the dialog that appears as follows:
FR Options for Reconnecting Symbols
Connect STEP7/SIMOTION symbols with WinCC flexible tags if
C symbol name, address and data type match

a one or more of the following conditions are true:
symbol name matches (address and data type are not relevant)
17 address and data type match (symbol name is not relevant)
l Replace tag name with symbol name
OK
SITRAIN
Training for
Cancel
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Exercise 7: Transferring the WinCC flexible Project into the Touchpanel
JJJ
"l' WinCC flexible Advanced - MyProject - Touchpanel
Project Edit Dew Insert Format Ptceplates Qptlons Endow deb

S.- New par
r -
11..g
English (United Kingdom) Ld
.................................
I& PRO
Touchpanela
Screens
11-
%'' Commune
Tags
0 "n.
it, '<Undefined>
Touchpanel [TP 1778 6 c...
Settings for Touchpanel (TP 1778 (i color PN/DP)
1"".5.11111.
ES- -%Alarm Mari:.
Recipes !!
! f
$ Reports
Text and'
E8
IT] -4 Runtime I.
.
p. Y Device Sr
Language Se
p r5 Structures
111--%Version Mane
Mode
IMPI/DP
Station address
11
Arirlrecc
r Enable back transfer

r Overwrite user administration
r Overwrite recipe data records
Transfer
APPIY
*rums sabot access trDA)
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_11E.23
Tr

Task
The given WinCC flexible project "Touchpanel" is to be downloaded into the

panel.
What to Do
1. Activate the Transfer function and make the settings as shown in the slide
2. Start the data transfer to the panel using "Transfer"

ST-SERV1
11
SIEMENS
Exercise 8: Testing the WinCC flexible Project

DI
I 0.0
I 0.1
I 0.2
I 0.3
)9
1 0.4
DO
T_System_OFF
T_Jog_LEFT
S_M/A_ModeSelectl
I 0.5
L MAN
Q 4.2
L AUTO
Q 4.3
GI
T_Ackn_Fault
1 1=1
1=1 =I 1=1 1=1
SIEMENS
L_Conv_Fault
SIMATIC S7
"QW_DigDisp" (QW 6)
SIMATC PiOJEL
Training for
Automation and Drive
Date:
File:
0815
)1D
ACTUAL Quantity
1=1
"IW_Thumbw" (IW 2)
T_M/A_Accept
Q 4.1
L_SYSTEry
T_Jog_RIGHT
SETPOINT Quantity
11
T_System_ON
18.09.2009
SERV1_11E.24
A Automation and Industrial Solutions
Task
The functioning of the WinCC flexible project "Touchpanel" is to be checked:
What to Do
Select the screen "Conveyor" and check whether the following information is
correctly displayed via the output fields:
Note
States of the proximity sensors of Bays 1 3 and the light barrier
Display of conveyor faults
Operating states (System ON, Manual and Auto modes)
ACT quantity
What doesn't yet work:

Operating the system or the conveyor (System ON/OFF, mode selection,
specifying the SETPOINT Quantity, Jogging RIGHT/LEFT, Acknowledging
conveyor faults) via the input fields is not possible at the moment since your S7
program in the controller has not yet been adapted accordingly. You will do this
in the next chapter with the function "Rewiring".
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Exercise 9: Testing the WinCC flexible Buttons
Operand' Symbol
Symbolkommentar
M 30.0 "M_Anlage_EIN_HMI" Merker Anlage EIN (TP170)
Stahtswert
take
M 30 1 "M_Anlage_.AUS_HMI" Merker Anlage AUS (TP170) IlltrUe
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Task
18.09.2009
SERV1_11E.25
1c
In the WinCC flexible project, find out with which S7 variables the buttons
"System on", "System off', "Jog left", "Jog right", "Mode select", "Enter Mode"
and "ackn fault" are connected and enter the variables in a Variable Table (see
slide).
In the "Conveyor" screen, press the buttons and with the STEP7 test function
"Monitor/Modify Variables" observe how the touchpanel sets and resets the
associated variables in the S7-CPU.
What to Do
1. On the touchpanel, select the screen "Conveyor".

2. Through the "Properties" of the buttons, determine with which S7 variables
the buttons are connected.
3. Enter all the variables that you find out in a Variable Table.
4. One after the other, press all buttons and with the STEP7 test function
"Monitor/Modify Variables" observe how the touchpanel influences the
variables.
ST-SERV1
11
SIEMENS
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Note
SITRAIN
18.09.2009
SERV1_11E.26
Xi SITRAIN
Training for
complete a topic.
Training for
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
PROFIBUS - DP Terminating Resistor
ft
of
0
.
The terminating resistor must

be switched on at the beginning
and at the end of the segment
iii
i
0
i 1 Ei
m
'
MI
I Mf
M9I
1
NI
Slave
Slave
19 Resistor On
,,,,""..1
ii..l
Slave
Slave
Master
m II
.1
:
i
Elf
e Resistor Off
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Setting the
Terminating
Resistor
18.09.2009
SERV1_11E.27
gr
Switch on the terminating resistor on the first and last nodes of a segment.
To do this, you open the cover of the bus connector and set the switch to the
ON position.
The PROFIBUS is only correctly terminated if the power supply of the node in
which the terminating resistor is inserted is actually switched on. If this is not
always the case, the PROFIBUS can also be terminated with an active RS485
terminating resistor (6ES7972-0DA00-0AA0). The terminating resistor is then
either permanently supplied with power separately from the other modules or is
supplied with voltage from the peripheral modules.
Termination of the bus system enables the nodes (for example ET 200L) to be
connected and disconnected at will, without causing malfunctions.

ST-SERV1
11
SIEMENS
Segment Length Depending on the Baud Rate
Baud Rate
9.6 to 187.5
1,000 meters
500
kBaud
400 meters
1.5
MBaud
200 meters
3 to 12
MBaud
100 meters
Master
`o
I II
'
. .
0 0
Segment Length
kBaud
Slave
IMI I IM
I
t:
li
Slave
M I I1 t
I
i
IMI I I1 i
i
I
.0
Slave
iii E 1
. . .. .
Segment Length
SIMATIC S7
Date:
Files
18.09.2009
SERV1_11E.28
SITRAIN
RIZ"
Training for
Segment Length
In the slide you can see the cable lengths of a segment without a repeater
depending on the transmission speed.
RS 485 Repeater
An RS 485 repeater boosts the data signals on the bus cables and connects
bus segments. You will require an RS 485 repeater, if:
more than 32 stations are connected to the bus,
bus segments are to be operated ungrounded on the bus or
the maximum cable length of a segment is exceeded.
If you set up the bus with RS 485 repeaters, only a maximum of 9 RS 485
repeaters may be switched in series. The maximum cable length between two
nodes is 10,000 meters at 9.6 to 187.5 kBaud.
SITRAIN
Training for
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Standard connector
with screw terminal
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_11E.29
n
An
gOr
PROFIBUS Connectorin the slide you can see two different versions of the PROFIBUS connectors.
The incoming cable is connected to the terminals Al and Bl.
If a connection to a further PROFIBUS partner is required, the connection is
then made to terminals A2 and B2.

ST-SERV1
11
SIEMENS
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_11E.30

General
PROFIBUS cables can be produced quickly and error-free with Fast Connect.
You require a special stripping tool, cable and connector for Fast Connect.
What to Do
1. Measure the cable length by placing the cable on the template.

2. Place the measured cable ends in the stripping tool. Limit for the
placement depth is the pointer finger of the left hand. Fasten the cable in
the stripping tool. Turn the stripping tool clockwise four times to strip the
cable.
3. Pull the closed stripping tool from the cable end. The residual cable parts
remain in the tool. After opening the tool you can remove the residual parts.
If the white filling did not come off during stripping, you can remove it by
hand. To make it easier to remove the protective foil cut it carefully between
the wires using a screwdriver. Remove the protective foil from the wires.
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Installing PROFIBUS-DP Slaves Later On
HW Config - IS7_300_Station (Configuration) -- My_Project]
1.1 atation edit Insert El-C

1
Dita:1:'1
11
view Option
1%1 dif
P117113
Window Help
Customize
; GSD-Datei for produkt 6F)0001-xxxxx, SIEMENS

; Version : (V2.0)-(Contact person Mr. Rechinger
+49 9131 913 3955)
; Copyright (C) SIEMENS AG 1999
; All Rights Reserved.
CtrkAlt*E
'L pecu
Configure Network
'Lyrnbol Table
Remit ,zrern Eiro:
flProfibus_DP
Eck Catalog Prone

Update Catalog
PrmText=1
Text(D)= Increasing clockwise (0).
Text(1 -Increasing counter clockwise (1)*
EndPrmText
PrmText=2
Text(0"Disable Text(1 -EnableEndPrmText
PrmText=3
4
1
Instal HW Updates ...

Instal New GSD...
Import Station GSD...
Updates the catalog contents by checking al GSD and type Pies.
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Type Files
Example of a Type File
18.09.2009
SERV1_11E.31

Tr Automation and Industrial Solutions
STEP 7 requires a GSD or a type file for every DP slave, so that you can select
the DP slave from the Hardware Catalog in the HW-Configuration tool.
All properties of a DP slave are stored in a GSD file and they conform to the
PROFIBUS standard. Type files conform to the Siemens specification.
For SIEMENS AG DP slaves, there is a type file for every DP slave type.
DP slaves from other manufacturers are supplied with a GSD or a type file.
Integrating DP Slaves
A new DP slave can be integrated into the Hardware Catalog as follows:

1. Select the menu options Options 4 Install New GSD
2. In the dialog field that then appears open the drive/directory with the
appropriate GSD file.
The slave is entered in the window "Hardware Catalog" (only in the catalog
profile "Standard"!) under "Additional Field Devices" and is then available
for the configuration.

ST-SERV1
11
SIEMENS
Rewiring a User Program

DO
DI
.0
1
.2
.3
0
s
e
0
.4
.5
T_System_ON
L_SYSTEM
T_System_OFF
L MAN
T_Jog_RIGHT
L AUTO
T_Jog_LEFT
S_M/A_ModeSelect
T_M/A_Accept
.6
7
.0
T_Ackn_Fault
L_Conv_Fault
.1
s
.3
.0
.2
.3
e
e
.2
0
0
.5
.7
.4
.5
6
.7
Set_Quantity
NI
0 0 1 5
.0
.1
.2
.3
SIMATIC PANEL
SIEMENS
.4
.5
.6
Ell
.7
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_12E.1
C)
start screen

= Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page
Contents
.....................................
Areas of Use ..................................

Rewiring using Absolute Addresses
Rewiring Results
Leading Symbols ..........................

Rewiring using "Leading Symbols"
Objectives
.................................
Rewiring with the LAD/STL/FBD Editor

Rewiring with the "Check Block Consistency... " Function
.........................
7
8
9
.......................................................
10
11
Exercise 1: Creating a Backup Copy of the S7 Program

Exercise 2: Rewiring using Absolute Addresses
..........
12
Exercise 3: Comparing Blocks
14
Comparing Blocks (1)

.........................................
Page 1
13
ST-SERV1
12
SIEMENS
Objectives
know how rewiring functions and how to apply it
be able to carry out a rewiring using the SIMATIC Manager
be able to carry out a rewiring using the symbol table
("Leading Symbols")
be able to compare S7 blocks online-offline and offline-offline
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_12E.2
Page 2

ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Areas of Use
program
Operation via
TP177B
program
Operation via
simulator
04.1
04.1
10.0
SR
SR
---
II
10.1
R
Rewiring
absolute addresse
Symbol information:
T_System_ON
T_System_OFF
L_SYSTEM
I0.0
I0.1
04.1
"S_N/
"T H/
A_Accept"
A_
ModeSelect
"LHAN
SR
II
"l_STSTIHT"
Rewiring using
symbolic addresses
Symbol information:
H_System_OH_HMI
130.0
H_System_OFF_HHI
130.1
L sysnim
04.1
"M_M/
A_
"H M/
A_Accept_ ModeSelect
HMI"
HMI"
1I
IA
Symbol information:
Symbol information:
M_M/AAccept_HMI
M_M/A_ModeSelect_HMI
L_SYSTEM
LMAN
10.S
10.4
Q4.1
Q4.2
T_M/A_Accept
S_M/A_NodeSelect
L_SYSTEH
LMAN
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_12E.3
M30.5
M30.4
04.1
04.2

gler
In all blocks, one address is to be exchanged for another.

In one module, a defective channel (input or output) is determined. If, on the
same module or another module, not all channels are occupied, the sensor
or actuator in question can be reconnected to the free channel.
Rewiring
"L_SYSTEM"
IA
Areas of Use
MAN"
SR
The program is to be adapted to another process in which the sensors or

actuators are wired to other addresses.
The program must be adapted to the new situation by rewiring (inserting the
new addresses in the program).
There are three ways to rewire a user program:
SITRAIN
Rewire using absolute addresses

(independent of the symbol table, Address Priority Absolute Value)
Rewire using symbolic addresses

(Address Priority "leading symbols")
- in the LAD/STL/FBD Editor
- with the Check Block Consistency function
Rewire using a source program
Training for
Page 3
ST-SERV1
12
SIEMENS
Rewiring using absolute Adresses

!SIMATIC Manager - [My_Project DA57_Courses \My_Proje].
File Eck Insert PLC View Options Window Help
g?
IF.
S7_300_Station
CPU 315-2 DP
Ch13_1.114420
E
a Sources
Customize...
Access Protection
Change Log
Ctrl+Alt+E
Y.#
Filter >
I Th
MI I k?
Size in the work me...
Text Libraries
SDB
134 Organization
124 Function
FBD
FBD
Language for Display Devices...

Manage Multilingual Texts
FBD
104 Function
100 Function
76 Function
64 Function
112 Function
a MICRO
2 TP1708_
Compare Blocks...
Blocks: FC14:FC15fC16.FC175C18;FC195C42;0111
Blocks: FC14;FC155016507501850195C42;0131
Replacements:
Replacements:
Ord address
flew address
Old add, ess
M30.0
M301
M30.2
0.430 3
M30.4
M3OS
131.0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
2
3
5
6
ET 7
Note.
Insert Row
Delete Row
Cancel I
SIMATIC S7
Delete Row
..V141accesses
Help
hin the specified addresses (not for peripherals)
OK
Date:
File:
pred Row
r All accesses withrn the specined addresses [not lot peripherals]
OK
..
NOW addr
18.09.2009
SERV1_12E.4
Cancel I
Help

Rewiring...
Independent of the symbol table, the old addresses (in the example, bits of the
IW 0) are replaced with the new addresses (in the example, bits of the MW 30)
in the existing user program. The original blocks are overwritten with the new,
rewired blocks.
When you rewire using absolute addresses, you must select "Address priority:
Absolute value" in the Blocks folder's Object Properties.
...in Specific
Blocks
If you are only going to replace the addresses in one or several blocks, you
have to select these blocks before you start the function.
...in All Blocks
If you are going to rewire or replace the addresses in all blocks, you have to
select the Blocks folder of the S7 program before you start the function.
If you check (activate) this option, the individual bits of the specified byte, word
...All Accesses
Within the Specified or doubleword addresses are also rewired. In the example shown, all bits of the
"old address" IWO are rewired to the bits of the "new address" MW30.
What to Do
SITRAIN
1. In the SIMATIC Manager select the Blocks folder or the blocks to be rewired
2. Choose the setting "Address priority: Absolute value"
SIMATIC Manager - Edit 9 Object Properties 4 Address Priority tab
3. Start the rewiring
SIMATIC Manager 9 Options 4 Rewire...
4. In the Rewire screen, enter the old and the new addresses and, if
necessary, activate "All accesses within the specified addresses"
5. Acknowledge with "OK"
Training for
Page 4
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Wiring Results
FC15 "FC_Mode" -- SERV 1_5 57_300_5tationt,CPU 315-2 DP \\FC15
FC15
Title:
jj
Ilet.mork 4: System alum

.....
:
04.1
SR
N1S.1
4 -'
Symbol informmtlma:
T_System_ON
M_Aux_System_ON
T_Systea_OFF
L_SYSTEM
41 I
FC15 "FC_Mode" SERV I _5 57_300_Station \ CPU 315-2 DP
PCIS : Title:
Zttttla: System ON/OFF
.....
04.1
SR
M15.1
Tr
'
aI
Symbol information:
M30.0
MI5.1
M30.1
M_System_ONFRII
M_Aux_System_ON
M_System_OFF_HMI
l_SYSTEM
04.1
-----
Memory bit System ON (TP170)

Memory bit System OFF (TP170)
41 I
SIMATIC S7
11
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_12E.5
Mg

Result
In the rewired blocks and/or in the entire user program, the old addresses (in
the example, I 0.0 and I 0.1) have been replaced with the new addresses (in
the example, M 30.0 and M 30.1). The old blocks (FC 15 in the example) have
been overwritten with the new ones.
Rewiring Protocol
After rewiring, you can print out a protocol which shows how many
replacements were made in which blocks:
chwinlo.txt - Editor
Datei Bearbeiten Format Ansicht ?
Address list:
Old address:
Iwo
Block list:
FC14: Number of replacements:2
B1: Number of replacements:0
Page 5
New address:
MW30
ST-SERV1
12
SIEMENS
Leading Symbols
...11:11A1
..1.2121
6i LAD ,'511 .FEID - [FC15 --"FC_Mode"-- SERVI_S S7_300_Stritto

Hn.
Cl. File Edlt Insert PLC
Debug View Options Window Help
1:11 41-.1121
ell b
ji
Ned !1,!1 o_jr

gg
7C15 Title:
System OM/011,
T_System-
"N Aux
_SYSTEM
SR
System
P
oN"t
Q8.0/ L_SYSTEM j Indicator ight System
ea_
'4 Symbol Table:
Address Priority:
Address Priority:
Old Entry:
Absolute Value
1: Etta
LAD , STL ,F1313 - [FC15 "FC Mode -- SERVLSV
Cl Ile &It Insert
9tetion \CPU
PLC Debug Vow OptionsV
f2LJ
D102-1 611 A1
.11
-11-1+1-1-01EIL, -11}-t1
A ;
L_SYSTEM = Q8.0
ON"
PLC Deism
New Entry:
ill sk
L_SYSTEM = 04.0
Window Het.
41-1{
=tom System ON/OCT
mtmixis System ON/OFP

T System_
4: Address rim
MEDI=
Symbols
System ON"
T_Sys.A._
077
vi
er
thj
14 4 P 14
1: Eno
2 1r4o A
3 Cseeteletences
Press Fl to got Help.
SIMATIC S7
Adams iJo.
loffline
A 5: M.
bs
Date:
File:
FI
211111111.e
ter A
21NO
3Gesaelemnces
Press Fl SCO Help.
18.09.2009
SERV1_126.6
_A
Address into.
IthIn.
Oh. "
nr
Introduction
If you want to change the assignments in the symbol table of an already

existing program, you can also decide whether the absolute address or the
symbolic address has priority.
Selection
In the SIMATIC Manager, right mouse click the "Blocks" object of an S7

program. Select the Object Properties menu option and then the "Blocks" tab.
You can choose between "Absolute Value" or "Symbol" in the "Address priority"
field.
Address Priority:
With this setting, the absolute address of an operand does not change if you
change the address assignment in the symbol table later on.
In the example above, the output Q8.0 (symbol name "L_SYSTEM") was
changed to output Q4.0 in the symbol table. With the "Address Priority:
Absolute Value" setting, the program continues to use the output Q8.0.
Absolute Value
Address Priority:
Symbol
With this setting, the absolute address of the operand is changed to the
new entry in the symbol table (functionality: "Rewire with Address Priority:
Symbol").
In the example above, the output Q8.0 (symbol name "L_SYSTEM") was
changed to output Q4.0 in the symbol table.
Note
When you change the address priority later on, you must recompile all blocks
with the function
"Check Block Consistency... 4 Program 4 Compile All"
Without this compilation, the changed address priority is only valid for blocks
that are created after the address priority change.
Page 6
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Rewiring using "Leading Symbols"

jij
m 2si
Syr SIMATIC Manager - [My_Project ER,57_Cour
80 Fie Edlt beat PLC VIew Options Wmdow Help
re.irl' el c [47111,161[i 2E1 2g --- ET-- VIVI<"'""
LI7o
lily_Ptoject
111MTMIIIMPIMMEIIMIETTSIMATIC 300I1)
di/System data
6 II CPU 315-2 OP
LAD
OB_Cycle
Ck OB1
B
S7 Pim:m.151 0 FC1
LAD
Sauces
,
FBD
PC Mode
CI FC15
i5l 111"
LAD
otor
Ctrl+X
cut
conveys
Ctrl+C
Cagy
arl+V
posts
Ell
Delete
MIA?
Cal
General) Blocks I Checksums Address priority:
Insert New Object

PLC
Behavior as in
STEP? < V5.2
Rewire...
CompareWas...
Reference Data
Check Block Consistency...
Absolute
value
has
priority
Print
Recommended for symbolic

programming
Symbols are applied from

the symbol table and the
DB for all accesses
(I,Q.M,T,C and DB)
C Exception: symbol accesses

on the DB remain as they
were programmed in the
code block
Exception: for accesses in

structurally unchanged data
types, the current symbols
will be applied
V" Fa aU accesses (I,Q,M,T,C

and DB)
F2
Rename
Object Properties
Displays properties of the
'
101111=511 T.
SDB
54 Organization Bk
48 Function
104 Function
50 Function
Venable Table
Ak+Return

Symbol
has
priority
Cancel I Help
OK
After every change activate the "Check Block Consistency ..." function!
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
General
18.09.2009
SERV1_12E.7

lk
You can also rewire an S7 program using "Leading Symbols" with the
LAD/STL/FBD Editor or the function "Check Block Consistency...".
Prerequisites are
an existing symbol table
in the Block Folder's Object Properties, select the setting "Symbol has
priority.... For all accesses (I, Q, M, T, C, and DB)"
Before you rewire with the LAD/STL/FBD Editor or with the "Check Block
Adapting the
Absolute Addresses Consistency..." function, you have to enter the absolute addresses of the new
operands in the symbol table. The symbols of the operands must not be
changed.
Note
The property "leading symbols" offers considerable benefits when data block
variables are frequently used especially in connection with the function "Check
Block Consistency...". If variables are deleted or inserted later on within
already existing data blocks, the necessary address correction of the remaining
data block variables can automatically be undertaken with the function "Check
Block Consistency...".
The easiest way to replace the traditional PLC operands (I, Q, M, T, C) is to
use the previously described function "Rewiring with the SIMATIC Manager".
Page 7
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Rewiring with the LAD/STL/FBD Editor

SIMATIC Manager - [ SERV I _325 C: 57_Courses Servl
Fie Edit Insert PLC View Options Window Help
oluki ELT'
6.-9 SE RV1_325
E
My_Station
El -;SA chapt09
chaptl0
E
E ,21] Rewiringl
al Sources
1.0 Blocks
Rewiring2
Elia Upload
F5_1170. OB1
.,-, no'',
NI
< No Filter >
__Lq12_(1
,Lai2sj
Cr.IC
O FC16
At least one symbol assignment changed
Whig
CLAD; STL'FBD - [FC99 SERV1_3251.Ftewiringl
_LejJ
Edit Insert PLC Debug View Options Window
OK
lei L- Lioul rk7)

6
1
-Al
!<<I
rig
22
1!:11 *1-14-1-01D11.1-tk-:I
---
FC99 : Title:
Xietwork 11: Title:
"Inputl"
"Input2"
II
VI
'Inputl"
"Input2"
I
0-1
111:11111131 MiLOMMECIW
120.0
a Cross-references
4: Address ido.
I-loffine
Ifiym as C
A
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_12E.8
1
k

Rewiring
After you have set "Symbol" as the address priority in the Object Properties of
the Blocks folder and then adapted the absolute addresses in the symbol table,
you can proceed to rewire with the LAD/STL/FBD by opening the block. After
you acknowledge the message "At least one symbol assignment changed", the
modified addresses are automatically inserted by the Editor.
Attention
Rewiring is only made in the blocks that are explicitly opened with the Editor!
As well, rewiring of a block is only effective when the block is then saved.
If one or more addresses in several or all blocks of an S7 program are to be
rewired or exchanged, all blocks must be opened one after the other with the
Editor and then saved.
Page 8
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Rewiring with the "Check Block Consistency... " Function
:lc block consestency. [Demo_5 kly_Peoeecl]

& view Hob
Triv !1!! Jen) yj I d4 objects>

1
Object Hierarchy.
Cut
S7 program Call Tree [References I

"FC_Mode" [FBD]
FC15
"FC_Conveyor" IFBDI
FC16
'TC_Faults" [FBI)]
FC17
''FC_Math" [FBD]
FC19
"FC_MM420" [FBI)]
FC42
"Main_progiam" [FBI)]
OB1
"FC_Mode" [FBD]
FC15
"FC_Conveyor" [F131/]
FC16
FC17
"FC_Faults" [FBD[
"FC_Math" [FBI)]
FC19
"FC_MM420" [RD]
FC42
COW
Copy
Delete
Del
Insert New Object

PLC
Rewiring..
Compare Blocks...
Reference Data
STEP7 Project: D: \ S7_coueses \My_Proje

program' My_Prolect1Demo_5 Bausteme
Check Block Consistency...
program setting address alio* Symbol.

Number of Blocks: 6
The 57 program contains blocks of the folovang editors.
Pont
Rename
Object Properties...
F2
Att+Return
FBD
57 ptoryam Cal Tree (References

"FC_M ode" [FBD]
FC15
"FC_Conveyor" [FBD]
FC16
"FC_Faults" [FBD]
o FC17
"FC_Math" [FBD]
FC19
"FC_MM420" [FBD]
FC42
"M am_program" [FBD]
0 081
"FC_M ode" [HD]
o FC15
O FC16
"FC_Conveyor" [FBD]
"FCFaulte [FBD]
o FC17
o FC19
"FC_M ath" [HD]
"FC_MM420" [RD]
o FC42
2Into
less F1 for help.
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV112E.9

gr
Rewiring
After you have set "Symbol" as the address priority in the Object Properties of
the Blocks folder and then adapted the absolute addresses in the symbol table,
you can proceed to rewire with the function "Check Block Consistency... ".
This is a good method when addresses are used in several blocks, since the
blocks affected do not have to be opened.
What to Do
1.
IP I
SITRAIN
In the SIMATIC Manager, right click with the mouse on "Blocks" and
select the menu option Check Block Consistency...
2. If there are blocks that are displayed in red, a compilation is necessary. You
can trigger this compilation with the icon.
Training for
Page 9
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS

Compare Blocks - Results
Compare Blocics
Type of comparison:
t"; ONLINE/Offline
The block comparison resulted in the following differences:

Path 1/F
Path 1:
P Including SDBs
Pr Execute code comparison
r Including blocks created it different programming langi.
Path 2: ONLINE ISERV2_32S \Chapter6 \Blocks

Storage Location I
Selected
Path 1:
ISERV2_32S1Chapter6\Blocks
Storage Location: ICAS7_Courses1Sery2_32
SERV2_32SChapter6
Block List:
Blocks
Block
FC1
Result of compartson
xJ only exists in Path 2 ONLINE
Compere with.
Path 2:
OK starts the ONLINE/0in
Canc
OK
Hide instance data blocks of the same length

e:
lemesetless
! Path I
Lag radars chow s woop

IM Sloo cheas,rn
Oxf138.4
II.
Created In bronco LAD
Tad length of block 410 bytes
go Length et bed data 6 bytes
Length of eK7 code 310 bytes
lock yenta
2
.11Name (Header)
bki,Vciclgs are different.
Path 2 OMNI
051039 PM. 1110712000 OSM:511P1
OxA743
LAD
410 bytes
6 bytes
310 bytes
Details
Close
0.1
Clew I
Go To
Update
Pant
Help
mi
Mate
SIMATIC S7
...see next page4

Date:
File:
18n9.2009
SERV1_12E.10
ge
l SITRAIN Training for

Introduction
You can compare blocks between online and offline data management or
between two user programs on the hard disk of the PG.
With this function, you can determine whether, for example, program
corrections were made in the CPU later on and in which network the blocks
differ.
What To Do
1. With the right mouse button, select the Blocks folder of an S7 program.
2. Select the Compare Blocks menu option.
3. Choose whether you want to compare online/offline or between 2 offline
programs and acknowledge with the "OK" button.
4. In the follow-up screen, the blocks that differ are listed.
5. Select the line in which a difference was determined and then select the
"Details" button.
6. In the "Compare Blocks - Details" window you can ascertain when the block
was modified and if the block length was changed.
7. After you select the "Go To..." button, the differing block is opened online
and offline in two windows, for example, and the network, in which the first
difference was determined is displayed.
Note
Program corrections can only be made in the offline window.
Page 10
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Go To...
--.
,..Lcij id
-._
He Edt Insert PLC Debug View options Window 11*,
Ir1-1I ell x Nei .L-1-_j Lkkii F ezj thl nrit Li'

FCI7 SERY2_325 \
-H-144-1-nr771
14-I .1211
"M_Feultl" Freport_liessory
"N_Feul tl" Repot t_Dersory

i,,
_Fault.l. Edge _Edge_rieaory_B
eul tl_Edge
Edgefienory_13
it
e 2
Net
Network 11: Eveluetton Disturbance 2
"DB_Instence F
eult2"
"DBInstance_F
sal t2"
EN
"FBFaults"
_
EN
Disturbence_I
"4_Fault2" nput
Display-89.4
Al
A
ENO
_J
Display -89.2
"T_Ferul t_Itst^ Acknowledge

Flash_f re guen
"2 Hz" cY
Flesh_f re quen
"2 Hz" c1`
"FEI_Faults"
Disturbance _I
"4Fault2" zPut
"T_Feult_Ret" Acknowledge
_IIoJ al
.s.al,I. -
Ilki::E...
,_1P_125.1
Le-..: I 0,1 :
1.4 4 ijj\
1. ii.i
1u
Next
1:Effo
,10 ,,...
?: Cros eferencas
,,pdare
7: Coe arson J
4 Address info.
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Differences
18.092009
SERV112E.11
0111111.111.11 Abs < 52
144 4
P----
SITRAIN
tr
Training for
After you select the "Go To..." button (see previous page), the Program Editor
is opened with two windows side-by-side, in which the network with the first
difference is displayed.
You can navigate between the differing networks or program locations using
the "Previous" and "Next" buttons.
Example
In the example shown above, the blocks of two different S7 programs are
compared in an offline - offline comparison. Both S7 programs contain an FC16
block, but each have a different program code. You can read out which of the
two blocks was the last one saved or which has the newer date from the time
stamps in the "Compare Blocks - Results" screen.
Page 11
ST-SERV1
12
SIEMENS
Exercise 1: Creating a Backup Copy of the S7 Program
JJJ
VSIMATIC Manager - [My_Project D:\ST_Courses \My_Projej

gp File Edit Insert PLC
View
Options Window He
Rkeltal
E
My_Project
SIMATIC 300(1
111 CPU 315-2 DP
F,
E
CID Source
Blocks
E sr My_Program
E
-41227:-EElint
Object name
Symbofic name
=LJ XI
1_1 70
No Filter
ig I %Fl
Type
Size Author
Source Folder
Block Folder Offline
53198
1. Make a backup
copy as a
hardware-independent
S7 program
La
10
09
10
--/
2. Rename the original

program
lussigrom
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_12E.12
1r
Task
Before you rewire your S7 program, you are make a backup copy. This backup
copy is to be created as a hardware-independent S7 program in the project.
What to Do
1. With the mouse, drag your S7 program called "My_Program" directly onto
the project symbol so that the copy is assigned to the project as a
hardware-independent S7 program (see slide).
2. Rename the original S7 program assigned to the CPU "Rewire".
SITRAIN
Training for
Page 12
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Exercise 2: Rewiring using Absolute Addresses

Simulator
DI
I 0.0 \ID
I 0.1 \D
I 0.2 \c,
I 0.3
I 0.4 \D
I 0.5 O
\
DO
T_System_ON
T_System_OFF
L_SYSTEM
T_Jog_RIGHT
L_MAN
T_Jog_LEFT
L_AUTO
SIMATCPANEL
Q 4.1
Q 4.2
Q 4.3
0 =
S_M/A_ModeSelect
T_M/A_Accept
C
3
- 7
, 20
1=1111111111111111Matak ....
Blecke FC145C155C165C175C185C19fC42.GB1
RadxenaMx
Old address
I
10.0
C:)
El
H15.1
P
New addroos
3
4
5
04.1
SR
.1
3130.0
Effi
VI
Rewire
1115.1
04.1
OR
30.1
El I
Notes
Spiel tagesatioa:
T_System_ON
I0.0
M_Aux_Systea_OH
015.1
T_Systa._OFF
I0.1
L_SYSTEN
04.1
il
medRom
P /8 acmees within the spec:tied addresses (not fee Petherals1
Delft Row
S3441m43. lasfmertion:
H_Syscem_ON_HHI
H30.0
H_Aux_Systes_OH
H1S.1
M_System_OFF_HKI
H30.1
1_SYSTIM
04.1
OK
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_12E.13
IC
Task 1
The S7 program is to be adapted in such a way that operating the system or the
conveyor model (System ON/OFF, operating mode selection, specifying the
SETPOINT quantity, jogging RIGHT/LEFT) is no longer done via the simulator
but is done via the touchpanel. You are now to make the appropriate adjustments
to the S7 program with the function "Rewire".
What to Do
1. In the S7 program called "Rewire" select the property "Address priority:

Absolute value".
SIMATIC Manager 4 select the Blocks folder of the S7 program 4 Edit 4
Object Properties 4 Address priority tab
2. Activate the "Rewire" function.
SIMATIC Manager 4 select the Blocks folder of the S7 program 9 Options 4
Rewire...
3. In the table of the Rewire dialog, enter the old and the new addresses and
activate (check) the option "All accesses within the specified addresses" (see
slide).
4. In FC 17, the input "T_Ackn_Fault" (I 1.0) has been replaced with the memory
bit M 31.0. Modify the block in such a way that you can acknowledge a
conveyor fault (M17.0) either via the touchpanel (M 31.0) or, as before, via the
simulator momentary contact "T_Ackn_Fault" (I 1.0).
5. Download all blocks into the CPU and test the functions
6. The (hardware) NC contact "T_System_OFF" (I 0.1) has been replaced with
the (NO contact) memory bit "M_System_OFF_HMI" (M 30.1). Modify FC 15
so that the system can be switched on again
Result
With the exception of specifying the setpoint quantity, you can operate the system
completely via the touchpanel.
Task 2
Modify the program of the FC 19 block in such a way that the setpoint quantity no
longer has to be specified via the BCD thumbwheel buttons on the simulator but
can be made via the corresponding input field on the touchpanel.
Solution tip: The touchpanel transfers the setpoint quantity specified in the
"Parts Setpoint" input field into the variable "MW_SETP" (MW 22).
Page 13
ST-SERV1
12
SIEMENS
Exercise 3: Comparing Blocks
..
C1LAD
511 (BD FT 15 -- "I I moth,
Insert
nlryl coo + .J
ofra;12-lial J x
FC_Plode- - mael
n FCIS
PcIS
JQJJ
PLC Debug Mew Options Verde" Help
_5 \57_3003tation\CPU 315-2
plum
...121z1
..
"FC.Iiode SER1/1_S 57 3003tatimo \ CPU 315-2 DP \
FC1 5
FC1S : Title:
Title:
MUM:
11-141-1-01ff'11.1-1.1 -1
ff FC15
MOM System ON/OFF
system 01/011
IO.o
54.1
011.1
SR
:M30.0 %
015.1
04.1
SR
:50.1 1
4
e T.
1--7l a!
lafeammtion:
/0.0
010.1
$0.1
04.1
T_System_ON
M_Aux_Systea_ON
T_Systam_011,
L_V/STIN
-----
Momentary cont
14g. auxiliary
Momentary COD,
Indicator ligt
:tr
ml
Symbol lateaantioa:
5500.0
M_System_ON_HMI
5515.1
M_Aux_System_ON
5510.1
M_System_OFF_HM/
04.1
L_TYSTIff
-----
Memory bit
Edge auxil
Memory bit
Indicator
11
[EI DC111111111=1/WEEW
Press II to pet E
a Cross-references
4 Adders info
MIELL"
5: M
F-0 loots
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_12E.14
7:
lIME I

V
ir
Task
With the "Compare Blocks" function, check the changes you made during
rewiring. To do so, compare the rewired S7 program called "Rewire" with the
backup copy of the original program called "My_Program".
What to Do
1. In the SIMATIC Manager select the Blocks folder of the program "Rewire"
and start the "Compare Blocks" function
SIMATIC Manager - Options 4 Compare Blocks
2. In the follow-up dialog box choose "Type of comparison: Path 1/ Path 2".
Then, in the SIMATIC Manager window, click on the Blocks folder of the S7
program called "My_Program" and start the function via "Compare".
3. The box "Compare Blocks Results" appears. Use "Go To..." to display the
different versions of the FC 15 block
Task Expansion
SITRAIN
Also compare the program stored online with the current program called
"Rewire".
Training for
Page 14
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Introduction to Micromaster MM420
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_138.1
Page
Contents
Objectives
.......... 2
Principle of an Inverter
Overview: Standard Drives
.......... 3
Communication: PROFIBUS DP
Main Tasks of the Master Slave Communication
..........5
Structure of the Control Word

Integrating a Drive in the HW-Config
.......... 7
.......... 4
........ 6
.......... 8
BOP (Basic Operator Panel) Standard Operator Panels
.........9
Keys on the Operator Panel

PROFIBUS Communications Module: Setting the Address
........10
Exercise 1: Reset to Factory Default
....... 12
Exercise 2: Controlling the Micromaster via the BOP

Exercise 3: Setting the MM420 Parameters with the BOP
.......13
Exercise 4: Integrating a Drive in HW-Config
....... 15
Exercise 5: Controlling a Drive via the Touchpanel
....... 16
SITRAIN
Training for
Page 1
...... 11
...... 14
ST-SERV1
Introduction to Micromaster (1)
13
SIEMENS
Objectives
understand the principle of an inverter
be able to reset the inverter to factory defaults
be able to operate the BOP standard operating panel
be able to set basic parameters using the Basic Operator Panel
(BOP)
be able to integrate the Micromaster into the hardware configuration
be able to monitor and control the Micromaster
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_13E.2
Page 2

ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Principle of an Inverter
Infeed
(Rectifier)
DC
link
Power module
(Inverter)
zs
Three-phase mains system
such as 3 AC, 400V, 50 Hz
AA
Induction
mo Or
Variable
speed
Inverter
Voltage
Voltage
411111111011111107-
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Direct On-line
Operation
Motor Starter
Inverter
The Way it Works
Configuration
Rectifier
18.09.2009
SERV1_13E.3
Voltage
,111,1111111,
WNW
gir Automation
Three-phase AC motors (here: induction motors) can be operated directly on

the three-phase mains system. They are switched on and off by means of a
contactor (= relay for high currents). For example: a pump for a water storage
tank.
To achieve a smooth start-up, a reduced voltage starter (= motor starter) is
frequently used. After start-up, the motor is then operated directly on the mains.
For example: the drive of an escalator.
If the motor speed is to be variable, an inverter is used.
For example: the drive of a container crane.
Some applications require a precise adherence to a predefined speed. This is
frequently connected to positioning tasks. These are then servo drives. In
simple terms, servo drives are used everywhere where movement used to be
carried out manually.
For example: machine tools, packaging machines, robots.
With a rectifier circuit, the three-phase current of the public supply system is
rectified. This results in a DC voltage that is buffered by capacitors (DC link). A
power module with transistors generates a three-phase current with variable
frequency and voltage from this DC voltage.
Variable voltage? The motor represents an inductive resistance for the current
flow. With rising frequency the inductive resistance increases. For that reason,
the inverter must also increase the output voltage proportional to the output
frequency.
It is possible to connect several power modules for several motors to a rectifier
(such as SIMODRIVE 611, MASTERDRIVES).
If a rectifier circuit with transistors instead of diodes is used then electrical
energy can be fed back into the system during ramping down.

Page 3
ST-SERV1
13
SIEMENS
Overview: Standard Drives
4.
c7=
Application example:
Controlled pumps and
fans in an air
conditioner
MICROMASTER 4 Inverter
(here the different sizes with a
performance of about 0.1 to 250 kW)
SIMATIC S7
Application example:
Conveyor belt
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_13E.4

Categorization
Standard drives are used for applications that only require a low to medium
dynamic as far as speed control is concerned. Many applications in the past
used to be driven with three-phase motors connected directly to the mains. In
the 90s, inverters became so economical that the advantages of a speedcontrolled drive could be utilized in many areas (energy savings in the partialload operation, smooth ramp-up and controlled ramping down, quality
improvement in production).
Design
The MICROMASTER inverters are now in the fourth generation. They are
"Stand-Alone" devices. That is, the inverter is complete and is connected
between the mains and the motor.
The MICROMASTER 4 inverter family comprises several versions:
MICROMASTER 420: for simple control requirements such as pumps and
430: fans.
MICROMASTER 440: for demanding control requirements (dynamic and
precise speed control).
MICROMASTER 410: for the simplest requirements with only a limited ability
to parameterize.
MICROMASTER 411: the integration of motor and converter
(= COMBIMASTER). The inverter is located in a
special housing piggy-backed on the motor.
Applications
Pumps and fans (for heating, air conditioning, ventilation, chemistry,

foodstuffs ...)
Conveyor belt systems (for packages, baggage, mail)
Automatic doors ([house] entrances, elevator doors, garages)
Washing machines, dryers and ironing machines (industrial field)
Car washes ...
Page 4
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_13E.5
ittT

Field Bus
A field bus connects distributed sensors and actuators (such as, valves, light
barriers, measuring devices, drives, operator control panels) with the central
PLC. PROFIBUS DP is a manufacturer-independent, open field bus.
PROFIBUS has been standardized and continuously further developed by the
PNO (Profibus User Organization) since 1990.
Master-Slave
The master (usually a PLC with a PROFIBUS interface module, such as,
S7-315-2 DP) controls the data communication on the bus. Slaves only send
data when they are prompted by the master. That way, no collision results
between two senders.
Cyclical Range
The slaves are cyclically (= one after the other) supplied with process data by
the master and their process data is scanned. In Drives, process data are, for
example,
speed setpoint, switch-on signals from the master or
actual speeds, error signals from the drive.
The data telegrams consist of 2 to 16 words (a 16 bit).
Cycle times lie between about 2 to 20 ms.
Event-driven Range
As well, there is often the need to read or change the parameters of a drive.
This occurs (in today's applications) only when prompted. The cyclic operation
is then briefly interrupted and a longer data telegram with up to 117 words is
sent.
Master Class 2
The "normal" master is called Master Class 1. For commissioning, you can also
connect a PC or PG (= SIMATIC programming device) as a Master Class 2.
Independent of the actual data communication, the Master Class 2 can access
the drives.
PROFIBUS Address
The minimum requirement for commissioning the PROFIBUS option module is

the setting of the PROFIBUS address.
Page 5
ST-SERV1
13
SIEMENS
Main Tasks of the Master Slave Communication

Master-Slave Communication
Reading and writing of parameters
Reading out of fault and diagnostic values
Reading and modifying function values
Controlling the drive process

Permanent setting of control bits and setpoints
Constant reading of status bits and actual values
Parameter index value (PKW)
Process data (PCD)
Panama_
Size of the main setpoint
Source of the main setpoint
}to the inverter
Level of the control bit
Source of the control bit
Size of the main actual value
}from inverter
Level of the status bit
How does data transmission take place?
Only triggered if required

Freely accessible to all parameters
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Fast and permanently triggered

With fixed "wiring" to the process
18.09.2009
SERV1_13E.6

Process Control
Fast data transmission of short data telegrams to all participating stations with
the maximum speed available on the bus. In drive systems these are typically
setpoints, control commands, status replies and actual values (measured
values).
Operating Control
In addition to this permanently available data, there is data that is only needed
in particular cases. It would therefore be senseless to permanently put load on
the bus if this data is only needed once per hour or per day, for example, when
starting up the machine (Class 1 Master). Another reason for an expanded
communication need could be the commissioning, optimization or diagnosis of
machine components from a central location. In this case, (such as a fault) a
detailed access of an Engineering Tool to the system components or the drive
is enabled. Since, as a rule, only one affected device/component is directly
addressed, this window is only made available once per bus cycle for one bus
station and not simultaneously for every station.
Page 6
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Structure of the Control Word

. .....
E
:
15 14 13 12
8I7
= Motor ON
W # 16 #
W # 16 #
Rising edge for switching on !
:13 =
Motor OFF
ON/OFF 1
OFF 2
- OFF 3
- Pulse-Enable
Ramp-function Generator-Enable
Ramp-function Generator-Startup
Setpoint-Enable
Fault-Acknowledge
JOG right
- JOG left
- Control from PLC
- Reverse
--- Motor-Poti up
- Motor-Poti down
Command Data Set Bit 0
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_13E.7
glkT

Control Word
The control word (bits 0 to 10) conforms to the Standard PROFldrive Profile.
Bits 11 to 15 are MICROMASTER-specific.
ON/OFF1
To switch on the inverter, a rising edge of this bit is necessary, and the bits
OFF2 and OFF3 must have the state = 1. When switching off via this bit, the
motor is braked on the braking ramp of the ramp-function generator (P1121)
and the inverter then switches off.
OFF2
The inverter switches off immediately and as a result the motor ramps down
without braking (coasts to a standstill). To switch the inverter on again, this bit
must be set to 1 once more and a rising edge at ON/OFF1 is necessary.
OFF3
The motor is braked on the OFF3 braking ramp and the inverter remains
switched on. This function is often used as EMERGENCY STOP.
Note
For reasons of wirebreak safety, the inverter is always switched off if the signal
state of the associated OFF bit is = 0.
SITRAIN
Training for
Page 7
ST-SERV1
13
SIEMENS
Integrating a Drive in the HW-Config

station Edit Insert
izi.c Dew
=0A
be
Qptkins Window
iai; :-I5g
s7_300_5tation (Configuration) -- MyProject
CPU 315-2 DP
II
np
Properties - PROFIBUS interface MICROMASTER_4_PR

General
PROFIBUSI11. DP
master system (1) End

froliec
Parameters I
E d SIMOREG
dSIMOVERT
E al LARGE DRIVES CBP2
MASTERDRIVES CBP
MASTERDRIVES CBP2
0-/MIDI-/COMBIMA
al 1
'
ASTER 4
E
BIMASTER 411
Address.
Transmission ra
Subset:
IDriyeES
General Dove Unit / Bus Address

"-
Zevice type:
I'
Device version
HMI=
General Crnfifit.elim I Dala Etc:honor Broadcast Overview I

Qefralt
PPO type 3. PZD-2/2
0111221:11
1
MIIMIM111111111111111
MICROMASTER 430
mirRnmAqun tidy!
1PBOO-C1 A0 (4M4B)
ASTER 420 wilh
US Interface (see Ord&
ES / SIMOTION
Delete slot
Mastatislave configuration 1
121DP
Mester.
Stat.,
S7
OK
Staten
Corrrrent
Cancel
OK
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
General
Properties
Dialogs
'I*
Training for
S
lN
A
iT
utomati
on and Industrial
al Solutions
18.09.2009
SERV1_13E.8
The cyclic data exchange between CPU and MM4420 via PROFIBUS must be
configured in HW Config.
The following properties are defined in the dialogs:

PROFIBUS interface: PROFIBUS address and subnet
SINAMICS: Firmware version of the Micromaster (to be found on the
nameplate of the MM420 such as, "Issue: A06/1.17")
DP Slave: In addition to the I/O addresses for data exchange between CPU
and Micromaster, the type of communication must be defined here:
PPO Types: (Parameter Process data Object)
The structure of the user data for the cyclic data exchange is identified as the
PPO Type in the PROFIBUS profile for Variable-speed drives.
The PPO types 1 to 5 have a defined number of PKW (Parameter Index Value)
and PCD (Process Data):
PPO Type 3 permits a simple data transmission with which the controlling of
the Micromaster is possible as well as the specification of the speed setpoint
and the reading out of the speed actual value.
With PPO Type 1, you can also change all drive parameters per CPU program.
Page 8
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
BOP (Basic Operator Panel) Standard Operator Panels

BOP (= Basic
Operator Panel)
SDP (= Status
Display Panel)
Setting parameters (changeable parameters):
Index of a parameter (sub-parameters):
Parameter keypad
for easy
commissioning
or changing
individual parameters
As delivered from factory

LED Status display
SIMATIC S7
Monitoring parameters:
Date:
File:

18.09.2009
SERV1_13E.9
SDP
The MICROMASTER is fitted with the SDP (= Status Display Panel). The
MICROMASTER is already parameterized in such a way that it can be
operated through the terminal strip.
The SDP has a status indicator with a green and yellow LED (16 different
messages).
BOP
The BOP (= Basic Operator Panel) can be ordered as an option. It is inserted

instead of the SDP temporarily for commissioning or long-term. Available
functions are:
LCD display with 5-digit 7-segment display and unit symbols

(Hz, min-1, V, A, kWh)
Access to all parameters up to Access Level 3 (Expert)
Parameter List
Unlike a PLC controller (SIMATIC), drives are not programmed. No program is

written.
Settings are made in parameters. The basic program in the digital drive is fixed
and is called firmware. By assigning parameters, the inverter is adapted to the
task.
Indexed Parameter
Many parameters contain sub-parameters. Parameters with similar functions

are often grouped there.
Monitoring
Some parameters are only used to display values.

So that you can differentiate them from the others at first glance, an "r" (= read
only) is placed in front of them instead of a "P".
Parameters
Trigger Parameters
Some parameters can only be changed from 0 to 1. An internal action in the

MICROMASTER is usually triggered with this, for example, Reset to Factory
Default.
Page 9
ST-SERV1
13
SIEMENS
Keys on the Operator Panel
,. 1
0 Start the converter with parameterized ramp-up time

Bring the converter to a standstill with parameterized ramp
down rate. Press twice and the converter coasts to a
0 standstill.
iI rj u.0
nnn
u
(r
Fri
log
0 Changes the direction of rotation

e)
Parameter access. Is used to select the parameter number

and to accept the value
CI
Increase parameter number or value
MICROMASTER
420
.. . 4...
.
iii .......
,.....,
PC.A.54 .11
Ble
f
'
1,
Motor starts and rotates at the preset jog frequency. Motor

rotates as long as the button remains pressed
0
0
SIMATIC S7
Decrease parameter number or value

This key has a series of functions:
- Roll function to display the 5 most important values
- More exact setting of parameters, e.g. decimal places
- Jump to Parameter 0000. The display shows r0000
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_13E.10
NZ

Access Levels
For simple applications, only a few parameters have to be changed. For

complex applications, an "exotic" parameter may be needed from time to time.
For that reason, access levels were established in parameter P003:
Level 1 = Standard: Only the 17 most important parameters are
displayed
Level 2 = Extended: In this level, additional parameters are visible for the
input and output terminals, as well as for
communication through field bus or for example, for
the setpoint channel
Level 3 = Expert:
Here you have access to all necessary parameters.
For the MICROMASTER, this is about 600
parameters
Level 4 = Service:
Some specific parameters are only meant for
authorized service personnel. The level is protected
by codeword.
Command Source
Commands are: on signal, off signal, jog, and acknowledge fault messages, for
example. On the training unit, you can select the following sources using
parameter P0700:
Setpoint Source
P0700= 1
P0700 = 2
BOP operator panel

Switches S1-S3 on the demo case
P0700 = 6
From the CPU through PROFIBUS
Setpoint is, the inverter frequency, for example. On the training unit, you can
select the following sources using parameter P1000:
P1000 = 1
BOP operator panel with the higher/lower

buttons (only with r0000)
P1000 = 2
Potentiometer on the demo case
P1000 = 6
From the CPU through PROFIBUS
Page 10
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
PROFIBUS Communications Module: Setting the Address
Switch number
Add to address
16
32
64
Example 1: Address = 6
off
on
on
off
off
off
off
Example 1: Address = 88
off
off
off
on
on
off
on
Some addresses have a "particular meaning

Address
Meaning
PROFIBUS address is specified

by Parameter P0918
1 to 125
valid PROFIBUS address
126, 127
invalid PROFIBUS address
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_13E.11
1
17
Attention
The minimum requirement for commissioning the PROFIBUS communications

module is the setting of the PROFIBUS address.
Setting
You can set the PROFIBUS address in two ways:

- through the 7 DIP switches on the module or
- through Parameter P0918
Note
To change the DIP switch, the inverter must be in a switched off state (no voltage)
(for already mounted communications module). A change to the DIP switch only
takes effect after the PROFIBUS module is restarted.
The restart must be triggered by a Power OFF / Power ON. This is true for an
inverter supply as well as through a separate 24V supply.

Page 11
ST-SERV1
13
SIEMENS
Exercise 1: Reset to Factory Default

Parameter
Value
Comment
P0010
30
Reset to
Factory Default
P0970
1111101111
End
11111/141.1111.1
S1 = Drive On/Off
P0010 = Commissioning filter

P0970 = Reset to factory defaults
P3900 = End of quick commissioning
LI
S2 = Reverse direction of rotation

S3 = Acknowledge fault
H1 = Fault (is lit when there is no fault)
P1 = Potentiometer for the frequency/speed
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_13E.12
Task
First of all, carry out a Reset to Factory Default to establish a defined initial
state.
Factory Default
In the factory default, the inverter is already functional. It is parameterized for a

4-pole Siemens motor with the same power rating as the MM420 and can be
controlled via the binary inputs (see slide).
What to Do
1. Change the parameter P0010 to the value 30

2. Change the parameter P0970 to the value 1
3. Wait until the P---- indicator "disappears" on the display
4. Test the inverter using the switches and potentiometer on the demo case
(see slide)
Quick
Commissioning
If Parameter P0010 is set to the value 1, the quick commissioning mode of the
inverter is activated. Only the most important or the most frequently required
parameters are displayed.
The quick commissioning mode is always required when motor (characteristic)
data are to be changed. With the end of the quick commissioning via
Parameter P3900, additional parameter data are recalculated out of the
changed motor data:
P3900 = 1
4 Reset to factory default and motor data calculation
P3900 = 2
- Only motor data calculation

4 Reset the parameter assignments of inputs and outputs
P3900 = 3
This procedure is also described in the "Getting Started" Guide that is included
with every unit. We will not practice the quick commissioning in this exercise.
Page 12
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Exercise 2: Controlling the Micromaster via the BOP
Parameter number
Value
Comment
P0700
Control signals from BOP
P1000
Frequency setpoint from BOP
11

Reverse direction
ON.
OFF1.
With selected
Parameter r0000:
ncrease frequency
Decrease frequency
Jog operation
(set-up operation)
SIMATIC S7
Date
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_13E.13
Nt;
Task
Switching on and off as well as the specification of the drive's speed is to be

done via the BOP operator panel.
What to Do
1. On the BOP, set the parameters shown in the slide to the specified values
2. Switch on the motor using the ON key
3. Select the parameter r0000 using the arrow keys and press the P key so
that the current frequency is displayed
4. Change the frequency and with that the motor speed using the arrow
keys.
Note: Arrow Keys
Pressing the higher/lower (arrow) keys only affects the speed when the
parameter r0000 is selected and the parameterization mode has been exited
via the P key. Otherwise the arrow keys continue to used for assigning
parameters.
Changing the frequency or the speed using the arrow keys is also called motor
potentiometer (MOP).
Jog Key:
The drive or motor can be jogged using the Jog key.

By default, the control signals and the setpoint come from a SIMATIC S7-CPU.
When setting up the drive or in the case of service, it can become necessary to
control the MM420 "by hand" using the Jog key.
The Jog key only functions in the ready state. That is, the signal OFF1 = 1.
The frequency is 5 Hz in the factory default.
Fn Key
With the "Fn" (Function key) key, you can carry out the following actions:
acknowledge alarm and fault messages when the error no longer exists
jump between decimal positions in parameter changes
display important inverter data, such as, voltage of DC current link
(Roll function when "Fn" key is pressed for 2 seconds).

Page 13
ST-SERV1
13
SIEMENS
Exercise 3: Setting the MM420 Parameters with the BOP

If the PROFIBUS
address was set from the
hardware side,
P0918 can only display
Parameter number
Value
P0003
Expanded parameter access
P0700
Control signals from PROFIBUS
P0918
PROFIBUS address of the MM420
P1000
Frequency setpoint from Potentiometer
P1120
2.00
Ramp-up time 2 seconds
P1121
2.00
Ramp-down time 2 seconds
.__
Comment
Setpoint before ramp-function generator:
50 Hz
Setpoint after ramp-function generator:
Internally generated
/ ction
Setpoilt frequency ramp-fu
Setpoint frequency
50 Hz
AIL
P1120
P1121
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_13E.14

Task
The drive is to be assigned parameters in such a way that it receives the

control signals from the CPU via the PROFIBUS.
What to Do
Use the BOP to set the parameters as shown in the slide.
Diagnosis
An LED is located on the front of the PROFIBUS-DP interface of the MM420.

The following table explains possible LED displays and error causes and helps
you with the following exercise:
Off
no power
Red flashing
invalid PROFIBUS address (126/127 is invalid) or hardware / software error
Red on
temporary state during startup or new communication configuration; if constant

state, then PROFIBUS interface or inverter defective
Orange flashing
communication to inverter built-up; no connection to PROFIBUS, or PROFIBUS

connector not inserted or faulty or PROFIBUS master is switched off.
Orange on
communication is established, but no cyclic data exchange is taking place.
Green flashing
cyclic process data exchange exists, but setpoints are invalid (control word = 0,
because S7 master is in the "STOP" state, for example.
Green on
cyclic process data exchange is established.
Ramp-up Time
Internally, the setpoint value changes according to a step function. To achieve

a controlled ramp-up transition, a ramp-function generator is integrated that
generates a ramp-type setpoint for the controller.
Page 14
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Exercise 4: Integrating a Drive in HW-Config

:HW Coring - S7_300_5tation
aCation Edit Insert eLC Dew Qptions Window help
J o ci:1-ez wu a R2Ielimilimitolialtel
LZS7_300_Station (Configuration) -- MyProject
CPU 315-2 DP
OP
Properties - PROFIBUS interface MICROMASTER_4_PROFIBUS
General
JJ
PROFIBUS(1) DP master system (1)
El 0 SIMOREG
0 SIMOVERT
ID 0 LARGE DRIVES CBP2
MASTERDRrVES CBP
MASTERDRIVES CBP2
0-/MIDI-/COMBIMA
ASTER 4
Parameters
Address:
Genetel Drive Ur / Bus Addle.
Transmission ra
BIMASTER 411
Qeace type
5ubnet:
Des,ice yeeson
ilei"
Slat t
4
6
rI PPO type 3 F Tt 2/2
Nero
Type
A.
WON
PROFBUS partner
PR... 4/0 e._ Pro... Length 1 L0
Type
Actusiviss/... 2D1 Inratoeut
.2
1=1- - 2
Conaste
1Nerel UMW!
Cl
MI"!
MICROMASTER 430
mirP MASTFP
1P800-0AAO(MM4B)
TER 420 with
US Interface (see Order
e ES / SIMOTION
10
Merle-sieve conlIguation 1
121 DP
Menem
S7_300_Station
Stelon
OK
I
OK
Comment
_J
Cancel I Hein
OK
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_13E.15
gr

General
The cyclic data exchange between CPU and MM420 via PROFIBUS must be
configured in HW Config. Proceed as follows:
What to Do
1. Activate the HW Config tool.

2. Open the HW Catalog and set the Profile "DriveES".
3. From the SIMOVERT 4 MICROMASTER4 directory, select the
Micromaster 420 and drag this onto the PROFIBUS DP mastersystem using
drag and drop.
4. In the "Properties PROFIBUS interface MICROMASTER_4_PROFIBUS"
screen, enter the PROFIBUS address 6, select the subnet and confirm with
"OK"
5. In the "Properties SINAMICS" screen, choose the device version "1.0x" or
"1.1x" that fits for your training unit. You will find this version on the
MM420's nameplate (such as, "Issue: A06/1.17")
6. In the "DP Slave Properties" screen, in the "Configuration" tab, select PPO
Type 3 and assign the I/O address 42 for data exchange with the CPU (see
slide).
7. Save, compile and download the configuration into the CPU.
Result
When the MM420 has been successfully parameterized and integrated in the
hardware configuration of the S7 Station, the LED of the MM420 PROFIBUS
interface shows a green flashing or constant light.

Page 15
ST-SERV1
13

SIEMENS
Exercise 5: Controlling a Drive via the Touchpanel

SIMATIC PANEL I
4C.42 z
CPU
Meter as
latemor
.
-
gm.
e. am
'1F
01111171
. ti
om
P
R
..
Control_
je.zo-
.
40.0m1 lageenatlanz
11 14 4:0_0,12.11
,4_70ntat.12121430
M40. 0
.3t4J
Jyttch On Mulors tat M430 .1,1701

-- Control word tor 1115.1j0
Mlmenr. z 141.t. Motor Ogg
.
ILM420
014_11110 _
yjp.'=ew
so
111161143I xx
B
U
00
*
Con;rel_ .
114214120
tr.....
1171.40 1:01444441.gaz
On 102
=
11111110111:
M40 0
OW42
Stmtch On genory Olt MM430 17,1701

-- Control word for M430
Jo g Motor flat
044;'''''' 11
14 ''''
' 4.
JogIIIM_ Jog_14/7. 'X 111420
MS'
On 1017- 4 ...,
*
1---/1-0;70=M X110
.............. 141:1167-IM
Control_ .
20' .
................................... 1
111101 101440.04.04:
MM5430_J g CMMI
MJ143_Jo g _IFT__01
_M11430_0n_1171:3
OV_Contr ol101430
-- :Unary tat M420 Jog IS M 111.170.

-- Nemo, hat M11430 Jop 1Mt 111.1707
Sto.tth On gentry bat M11430 170170.
-- Control word for MM400
1140.
M40.3
M40.0
12
10,
A
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_13E.16
Task
You should be able to switch the drive on and off from the touchpanel. During
switched off continuous operation, the MM420 can be jogged to the right and to
the left via the appropriate keys; during switched on continuous operation, it
turns at the speed that is set on the potentiometer of the MM420 training unit.
What to Do
1. Copy the "FC_MM420" (FC 42) block from the project called "SERV1_B"
located in the S7 program called "Chap13_MM420" into your S7 program.
2. Put the block into operation
3. On the touchpanel, activate the screen "MM420"
4. Test the functions described.
Notes on the
Program
The QW42 output word declared by you in the Hardware Configuration serves
as so-called "control word" for the MM420. Per program you can control the
MM420 by transferring defined values.
The values (HEX constants) specified in our example have the following
meanings:
in NW1: W#!16#47F = switch on the drive
in NW2: W#16#47E = switch off the drive
in NW3: W#16#57E = jog the drive to the right
in NW4: W#16#67E = jog the drive to the left
Page 16
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Documenting, Saving, Archiving
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_14E.1
gir

Page
Contents
......... 2
Objectives
Other Documentation Tools
............ 3
Block Documentation
............ 4
Page Setup
Print Preview
Managing Multilingual Project Documentation
............. 5
............................ 6
........... 7
............8
Overview: Saving User Data

Uploading an S7 Program from the CPU to the PG
............9
Uploading a Hardware Station to the PG (PLC Copy)
........... 10
........11
Transferring a Program onto a Memory Module

Saving a Project onto a Memory Card
Loading a Project from the Micro Memory Card (MMC)
......... 12
........13
Archiving a Project
Memory Concept of the S7-300 until Oct. 2002
.......................................................14
Memory Concept of the S7-300 after Oct. 2002

Memory Concept of the S7-400
..........16
......... 15
......... 17
Exercise 1: Documenting a Block and Printing It Out
........ 18
Exercise 2: Saving the Program and Hardware Configuration (PLC Copy)

........ 19
Exercise 3: Archiving "My Project"
.............................................................................................................20
......... 21
MMC - as Additional Data Memory on the CPU

PLC: Storing Data on the Memory Card
........ 22
.......... 23
PLC: Getting Data from the Memory Card
..........24
SITRAIN
Training for
Page 1
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Objectives
be familiar with the documentation possibilities of blocks
understand the "Managing multilingual project" function
be able to print out programs
understand the memory concept of the SIMATIC S7-300/400
be able to make a "PLC Copy" (online data storage)
be able to load/read a program to/from a Memory Card
be able to archive/retrieve a project
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_14E.2
Page 2

ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Other Documentation Tools

Reference
data
Program structure
Cross references
Assignment of
I/Q/M/T/C
Unused addresses
Checklists
Addresses without
symbols
Symbol table
Configuration
Network
configuration
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_14E.3

r
Reference Data
If you print out the reference data it makes troubleshooting, in particular, easier.
You will find more information in the "Troubleshooting" chapter.
Symbol Table
The symbol table contains the association between absolute address, symbol
names and symbol comments. See the "Symbols" chapter for more
information.
Configuration
Configuration data generated with the "Hardware Configuration" tool. The

printout is in text form. If you want a graphic printout, you can copy the graphics
onto the clipboard and then paste them in another program such as Winword
and print it out.
Network
Configuration
Displays in graphic form the stations of a networked system with the relevant
configuration data such as the MPI address.
Printer
The printer used for documentation is the one installed under Windows. If you
want to use a different printer, you must set it up with the Windows Control
Panel.
DOCPRO
The DOCPRO optional software is also available for superior documentation

and for writing wiring manuals.

Page 3
ST-SERV1
14
SIEMENS
Block Documentation
,i_ol ,i
,
pLAD/STL/FBD - [FC4 -- My_Project \My_Station\CPU 314]

Ck He Edit Insert PLC Debug View Options
,.
DI ;[ I-1611
AI xltilal -1 -1
Window Help
Eldhl F
_J 1 1 nig 1-1d
-11-
<1
.119
._12_
0
1 -
1 4 1 D1 -01- 1
1 k?I
.fd
FC4 : Block Title up to 64 characters
_J
Block comment: To enter a comment, select menu options "View -> Display with ->
Comment". You have up to 64 kBytes per Block for block and network comments.
=aleiNetwork Title up to 64 characters
Network comment: To enter a comment, select menu options "View -> Display with
-> Comment". You have up to 64 kBytes per Block for block and network comments.
A
"T_System_ON"
// Statement comment up to 160 characters
// Comment can also be inserted between the lines
S
"L_System"
// LED for System ON
AN
"T_System_OFF"
// System OFF
R
"L_System"
// LED for System ON
_Li
Ell <Li I
1: Errs
2:14o
a Cross-references
_A
4: Address MM.
5: Modify
1---- Cr ickfline
A___ 6: Diaprrostics A
lAbs <5.2
INvii 1 In 6
7: Cowen=
triert {Cho
/
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
A SITRAIN Training for
18.09.2009
SERV1_14E.4
qr
Block Comments
The slide above shows the different comment facilities available for a program
block (OB, FC, FB).
Printing
To start the Print function:

Click the printer icon or
Select the menu option File 4 Print.
Print Setup
You can change the printer settings by selecting the File

option.
Print Setup... menu
BEI
El HP LaserJet 4000 Series PS Document Properties

Setup Advanced
Print Setup
r Printer
Name:
et0pe_
rties i
HP LaserJet 4000 Series PS
Status:
Ready
Type:
HP LaserJet 4000 Series PS
Where:
LPT 1:
> Paper Source I
Automatically Select
Copy
Copy Count:
999)
Comment
-Paper
Paper Size: A Letter
- Orientation
Size:
I Letter
Source:
!Automatically Select
Orientation
r Landscape
OK
Rotatild
Print on troth Sides (Duplex Printing)
r Landscape
EI 6 None
Network... I
I -V"1
( Portrait
r Short Side
[:0(- LongSile
Cancel I
Color Appearance
as
6' Gray Scale

-
r Color
OK
SITRAIN
Training for
Page 4
Cancel
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Page Setup
Seite einrichten
Pa terformat Schalk's,
Papierformat I Schrittfeldet
Layouts.
Kopfze4e
A4 Fend
Links:
A3
A3 Rand
A4
Mite:
{Objekt}
Recite: I
(Datum) {Uhrzeit) zLI

..LI
Ausrichturg
Fuezeie
Hochfonnat
1.
... d
AS
A5 Rand
Legal 8,5" x 12"
Legal 8,5" x 12" Rand
Letts 8,5' x 11"
Lena 8,5" x 11" Rand
Al
..
Koplzeile LINKS
Querformat
Links-.
IFullzeile LINKS
Meta
Rechtz
I_d
-.. .
...ji....d
FuBzeile AMITE
Sei!, {Seite} von (Seitenaneah) ...1

_
.2LI
Votgabe
11;
MAIO
111011111z_J
Abbrechen I
OK
SIMATIC S7
Gultig Ur.
Hale
Date:
File:
Z_I
I Protelkt
Abbrechen
OK
Ita.
*1
18.09.2009
SERV1_14E.5
Hie
Page Setup
When you select the File 4 Page Setup... menu option, a dialog box in which
you can select the print format (such as A4 Margin) appears.
Paper Format
Selection of the paper format that is used for printing.
Labeling Fields
The header and footer edited in the "Labeling fields" later appears on each
page of the printout regardless of with which tool (for example, HW Config or
LAD/STL/FBD Editor) the printout was undertaken.
Fields for printing out the current date of the printout, the page number, or the
name of the object are provided in the headers and footers (such as {Date}
{Time}, Page {Page}, {Object}).
14
SITRAIN
Training for
Page 5
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Print Preview
SINATIC
By Prolect\ My Station1CPII 314\ 11,020 - <offline>
01/22/2003 9:20:24
FC20 - <offline>
1C ?malt"
Evaluation of Faults no memory
Vanily:
Autbor:
WardLan: 0.1.
Aim* varsina: 2
00
stamp Cada:
10.01.2002 09:17:22
Istarfaca:
1.2.07.2000 14:24:45
Idadtbs (blackflafFinidnta): 00152 00048 00000
rte:
Name
Data lype
Address
PI
0.0
Disturbance Input Boo!

AcknoWedge
8001
Flash frequency :Soul
OUT
I
'
Display
Soul
IN OUT
I
Report_Memory 'Boni
Edge Memory Bit Bool
TEMP
RETURN
RET VAL
I
0.0
0.1
0.2
2.0
2.0
4.0
4.0
4.1
0.0
0.0
0.0
Initial Value
Comment
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
;FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
i
Ia.*. ocn
ftwork: 1
Disturboca *valuation
*Disturbance 2 Sldpa_Saaory 13 Siteport_llanory Illub_frequan

- it
EP=
SA
.
01-7
1
I 1---,.....-..-....--1( 0--3
I
SESaplay
(5----I
Sacknoaltdge -A
99isturbance_I
Sltaportilaaorp mina.
-IA
Page 1 of 1
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Print Preview
Note
SITRAIN
18.09.2009
SERV1_14E.6
26 .

For a preview of what your printout will look like, select the File 4 Print
Preview... menu option.
The appearance of LAD program printouts depends on the settings made under
the Options 4 Customize 4 LAD/FBD menu option in the LAD/STL/FBD
editor.
Example: The setting for the length of the address field affects the number of
contacts that can appear side by side in the printout and the number of
characters of the symbol name that fit on a line above the contacts.
Training for
Page 6
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Managing Multilingual Project Documentation

SIMATIC Manager - [TIA-PROI-Solution_en D:\ S7-Kurse TIA-PROI \TIA-PRD .];;
FIe Edit Insert PLC View Options Window Kelp
.3
DI I 1?lel
Customize...
Text libraries
2 titil TIA-PRO1-Solutton_en
Display language...
My project_C9_HMI
Manage h9ultiLnqual Te..
My_prolect_CI O_MM420
E
E II test station
Rewiring...
E. I CPU 315-2 DP
Run-Time Properties...
E. 0 CI OMy_Proi
al Sources
Compare Blocks...
Reference Data
MICROMASTER. Define Global Dote
My_project_C11_C14
Configure Network
test station
Simulate Modules
E. a C12 FC_FB_E1
C12_FC_FB_E2
E
SIMATIC PDM
IE Cl2_FC_FB_E3
III 0 Cl 2 FC_FB_E4
Configure Process Monitoring
C13_organisat_block
E
Charts
ad Sources
Ctri+Ak-FE
MEI
fill Blocks
C14_analog_value_E
E a Chapter12_FC_FB_ei
Manages user texts
SIMATIC S7
Function
Export
Import
J vg
o Fiter >
9
111*1
I Created in langur
I Symbolic name
Export...
Change Language...
Delete Language...
Reorganize
Settings for Comment Management...
FBD
FBD
STL
LAD
STL
FC_Faults
FC Count
FC_Edge_Detection
FC_MM420
FC_Scaing
Control Micromaster
Import
objects
PLC-OS Connection Data
Set PG/PC Interface...
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_14E.7
Raz

STEP 7 lets you multilingually manage the documentation (texts and

comments) created in a project. These can be exported from the project for
translation purposes and then later be reimported in the language in which they
were translated. The opportunity then exists to choose between different
languages for the documentation.
The following types of texts can be managed multilingually.
Block titles and block comments
Network titles and network comments
Line comments from STL programs
Comments from symbol tables, variable declaration tables, user-defined
data types and data blocks
Comments, status names and so on, of blocks that were created with
engineering tools such as S7-GRAPH or S7-PDIAG.
The Export is carried out for all blocks and symbol tables that are located in the
selected object folder. For every text type (see above), an export file is
generated that can then be edited with EXCEL. This file contains a column with
the source text in the original language and a column in which the translated
text can be written.
During Import, the translated text is accepted into the selected project. The
translated text is only accepted if the original source text still exists.
Change Language
For Change Language, all languages can be selected that were imported into
the project. The change is carried out for all selected object folders.
Delete Language
When you delete a language, all text in that language is deleted from the
internal data management.

Page 7
ST-SERV1
14
SIEMENS
Overview: Saving User Data

Uploading program
from the CPU to PG
1. Create a new S7 program in the SIMATIC Manager

2. Switch to the online view
3. Open the new S7 program and select Blocks folder
4. SIMATIC Manager 4 PLC 4 Upload
Upload station in PG
Load program from PG

to Memory Card...
1. Open two windows in the SIMATIC Manager:

"Blocks folder of the S7 program" and "S7 Memory Card"
(Flash EPROM or MMC)
SIMATIC Manager 4 PLC 4 Upload Station
2a. Use drag & drop to copy blocks to the "S7 Memory Card"
... inserted in PG/PC

or
... inserted in CPU
2b. PLC - Download user program to Memory Card
Copy program from CPU

to Memory Card
SIMATIC Manager - PLC - Copy RAM to ROM...
(only with S7-300 with Flash EPROM))

Project archiving
on Memory Card / MMC
(S7-400, S7-300 with MMC)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Project archiving
1. Select the CPU on whose Memory Card the project data

are to be saved
2. SIMATIC Manager - PLC 4 Save Project on Memory Card
SIMATIC Manager - File 4 Archive
Select project to be archived
Specify name and storage path of the archive file and start function
In the Windows Explorer, copy archive file (e.g. onto USB stick)
/
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved .
18.09.2009
SERV1_14E.8

Uploading a Program With this function, you copy all blocks and the system data without
from CPU into PG/PC documentation (symbol table, variable and parameter names, comments) from
the CPU into the selected program folder. The selected program folder then
contains a "PLC copy" with the current online program.
Upload Station
in PG/PC
With this function, you load the complete hardware station as a new
station in the project. It is not possible to overwrite an already existing station.
Load Program
from PG/PC to
Memory Card
You can load the blocks and system data from the blocks folder of an S7
program onto a memory card. You can insert the memory card in the interface
of the PG/PC or in the slot provided by the CPU if the CPU supports this service.
Copy Program
from CPU to
Memory Card
If a user program is stored on a memory card, you can still make program
changes online. The modified blocks are stored in the internal RAM of the CPU,
while the unchanged block remains stored on the memory card. You can store
the modified blocks on the memory card with the Copy RAM to ROM function.
Archiving Project
on Memory Card
You save the entire data of the project (such as user programs with all
comments, symbol tables, and hardware configurations from all hardware
stations) on the memory card with the "Save Project on Memory Card" function.
Archiving Project
With the "Archive Project" function, you save the complete data of the project
(such as user programs with all comments, symbol tables, and hardware
configurations from all hardware stations) in an archive file in compressed format
(*.zip, *.arj etc.). The archive file is much smaller than the non-archived project
and you can move or copy the archive as often as you like with the Windows
Explorer.
Page 8
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Uploading an S7 Program from the CPU to the PG

File Edit
Qptions
nsert
! g?
X, fib
MYRoiect
E 1111 S7_300 Station
CPU 315-2 DP
S7program
Blocks
a MICROMASTp.420
et3 S7
El II
ID 0
ffl
Program
,11:112(.1
Window Help
.:_17.17 I Pd*
Access Rights
Ctrl+L
Downloyi
and
Ctrl+K
Configure...
Compile
Download Objects...
Pi]
Copy RAM to ROM...
Manage M7 System...
Drive
Oise* Accessible Nodes
Change Module Identification...
CPU Messages...
Monitor/Modify Variables
Diagnostic/ Setting
PROFIBUS
Ass's p,rPC
Update Firmware
FC1
FC16
FC19
SFB2
SFB5
SFC1
SFC4
SFC7
SFC13
SFC17
SFC20
SFC23
SFC29
SFC32
SFC36
SFC39
SFC42
SFC46
SFC50
SFC54
SFC57
SFC64
SFC67
SFC72
Update the OPeret/MISYstem.Press Ft to get Help.
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
FIBUS)
Save Service Data.
18.09.2009
SERV1_14E.9

11.1
Before you make changes to an existing program, you should at least make a
Copying a CPU
Program onto a PG backup copy of the CPU's S7 program.
What to Do
1. In the SIMATIC Manager, create a new, hardware-independent S7 program

(in the slide "PLC Copy")
2. Select the Blocks folder of the new S7 program and activate the ONLINE
view so that all blocks stored in the CPU are visible in the right window.
3. Load all blocks from the CPU into the new Blocks folder
PLC 4 Upload.
Note:
Only the complete S7 program is "uploaded" into the project, not the complete
hardware station. Even though the CPU's "system data" are also copied during
upload it is not possible to retrieve the configuration and parameterization data
of the complete hardware station,
As well, the uploaded S7 program has no documentation whatsoever. That is,
there are no comments such as network titles, no symbols and also no variable
and parameter names.
Page 9
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Uploading a Hardware Station in the PG (PLC Copy)

VSIMATIC Manager - MyProject
Fib Edit insert
Window Help
0 a; I I? RP X, 13a
Access Rights
Ctrl+L
Ctrl+K
-2'.. MyProject D: Courses'; MyProject
t1 Fr
IE
1,399JBleilori.
VIIII.SIMATIC 390(1) . "*.
%.
a. CPU 315-2 DP
Eva 57 Program A t
'al Sources
el*,* *
TOMOkr
E sr 57 Program

Copy RAM to ROM.

MATIC 300 St
MAT IC 300 St
MATIC HMI S
Program
PI
OFIBUS
OFIBUS
Manage M7 System...
Drive
Display Accessible Nodes
CPU Messages,..
MonitorlModify Variables
Diagnostic/Setting
PROFIBUS
Assign PG/PC

Update Firmware
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_14E.10
Mr

PLC Copy
Before you make changes to an existing program, you should make a backup
copy of the entire hardware station (PLC copy) in the offline project.
What to Do
The uploaded station is always stored as a new hardware station in a new or

already existing project (as in the slide).
PLC - Upload Station to PG...
Note:
The uploaded hardware station contains all configuration and parameterization

data of the station (including networks and components) as well as the
complete user program. The uploaded S7 program, however, has no
documentation, that is, there are no comments such as network titles, no
symbols and also no variable and parameter names.
Page 10
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Transferring a Program onto a Memory Module
04====11M111=111111111L
delp
view
Qptions Window
He EdIt riser. 41,C
12
:fop
_jai X
LptlyProject DA,Co_rses \MyProject
MyRroiect
0 081
0 FC1
0 FC14
0 FC15
0 FC16
0 FC17
0 FC18
0 FC19
'q
._ VAT_I/0 -Conveyor
.
.
it
57 memory card
Symbolic name
Ob eel name
2,..) Systemdaten
= II S7_300 Station
- IN CPU 315.2DP
al S7program
za Sources
Blocks
+ 1 MICROMASTER_420 .
c -:. Touchpanel
n S7 memory card
< No Filter >
Er= Ill
--06_Cycle
FC_S ignal
FC_M ode
FC_ConvM otor
FC_F ault
FC_Count
FC_Count_Add
VAT I/0-Conveyor
Created in Ian, a.
.._
LAD
STL
LAD
LAD
LAD
LAD
LAD
LAD
2.11
7
/,1
,jinjal
21 System data
C} FBI
Cl. F Cl 4
0. FC17
0. FC20
0. DB2
0 OB1
0. FB20
ci. FC15
0 FC18
0 FC42
0. DB3
0. OB100
0. FC1
0. FC16
0. FC19
o 0131
oDB19
(This window can only be selected

if the Memory Card is inserted in the PG )
ICP5611(PROFIBUS)
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserve,'
Prerequisite
18.09.2009
SERV1_14E.11
itt-
SITRAIN
Training for
The memory module (Memory Card or MMC) must be inserted in the PG.
As well, the Memory Card driver must be loaded in the STEP 7 software. If this
is not the case, you can install the driver via
"Start" 4 Simatic STEP 7 Memory Card Parameter Assignment"
Then, the "Memory Card" icon exists in the SIMATIC Manager's toolbar.
Erasing the
Memory Module
Before you can transfer the program onto the memory module, the memory
module must be erased.
The Memory Card can always only be erased completely. That is, individual
blocks can not be erased or overwritten.
Transferring the
Program
1.
Note
With most of the CPUs, the Memory Card can also be written in the CPU using
In addition to the project window, open the Memory Card in a further

window in the SIMATIC Manager ( File 9 S7 Memory Card 9 Open)
2. Arrange the Project window and the Memory Card window one below the
other as shown in the slide.
3. In the Project window, in the appropriate Blocks folder, select the desired
blocks and drag them with the mouse into the Memory Card window.
PLC Download User Program to Memory Card

Page 11
ST-SERV1
14
SIEMENS
Saving a Project onto a Memory Card

_,L51.1 c1
Manager - Nyproject (Component view) -- si-Courses My_proje)
et) Fie Edit Insert rPtc View Options Varelow
D114:I ail,
Acce" RCit'
Dowrioad
MV_Porocl
E
SIMATIC 3(
E CPU 31
El
cam
tiI2!
EIC.343
test station
91
ED LI Chacter12
,12.111
c
Nab
J Yo
I < No Flue >
I Created in Anoxia,
Compie/Downbiel Proyams...
'13141
_I Sin in the wok
FBD
upload
FBD
Ibload Station
Copy RAM to ROM...
OIL
08
Downbad user program to memory card
Retrieve from Maxey Card...

ManageC17 S, itern...
Drive

McmitorlModfy Variables
STEP 7Daa
Caaulawaw
Ma ma wawa*
P Cieeipreo
aaa
Taraawavlbe waradaial Varna
POWarawkaad
Diagnostic/Setting
PROFIBUS
Assim Monet Address...
Assign PGIPC
Cancel PGIPC assignmer
Update Operating System...
area
Soechit
mix OP tr NC pa
mix a.m.*. x aiX re
Pao/MIX aw
:J
41 fEM
i
Saves desired data to the Memory Card.
SUM.loWatta PLC
May Led
_J
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_14E.12
'lltr
Function
With the functions "Save to Memory Card..."and "Retrieve from Memory

Card...", you can save and retrieve the complete data of a project (user
programs with all comments, symbol tables, hardware configurations etc. from
all hardware stations) on a memory card. The memory card can be located in a
CPU or in the memory card programming slot of a PG or PC.
The project data are compressed before they are saved on the memory card
and are extracted when retrieved. The size of the project data to be saved
corresponds to the archive file size of the project. If the memory capacity of the
memory card is not sufficient a message will appear indicating so.
Project Data
with / without
User Program
Similar to the archive of a project - the project data contains all data
belonging to the project and all user programs of the CPUs.
The user programs contained in the project data can not be read by the CPUs
and thus cannot be executed. With the option "Load the user program also", the
executable user program is also stored in addition to the project data. This user
program is the one assigned to the CPU on which the memory card is inserted.
Area of Use
If several co-workers in the service and maintenance area have the job of
maintaining the SIMATIC S7 PLC, it is difficult to quickly provide every worker
with the current project data for a service assignment. When the project data
are available locally in one of the CPUs to be maintained, every worker can
access the current project data and make changes, if necessary, which in turn
are current and available to all other workers.
Note
The functions Save to Memory Card and Retrieve from Memory Card are
unrestricted in the S7-400 system. They are available for the S7-300 system
after Oct. 2002.
Page 12
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Loading a Project from the Micro Memory Card (MMC)
File Edit Insert
Al
Ia' MILO 'IN
PLC View Options Window I1
olad 1?1,1
PROFINET 10
111 SIMATIC 3C
CPU 31
E
E CJ Tes
E
RE C7 Testprosran
Access Rights
Doe.inioad
!keine system...
Ctrl+L
is name
Configure...
KNOW HOW protec...
Load mem
EPROM
Compile/Download Programs...
Compile and Download Obje:ts.
EPROM
Upload to PG

Copy RAM to ROM...
Modified
Adobe Acrob... 06.02.2001
Download user program to memory card
...
Manage M7 System...
Drive
I7 Li /Referent Michael lemon
CPU Messages...
Diagnostic/Setting
V tSofivare
STIA_PRO123_v55
o abc
AX NF ZZ
File type:
PROFIBUS
Edit Ethernet Node,..
OK
Asnon PG/PC
F
N
Cancel PG/PC As5i:,,,,r[v.

Retrieves desired Nes se
Update Fume
Documents and Settings

f.D DOTS_SWP
RECYCLER
i SIMATIC 57 - Projekte
L-I SIMATIC 57 Archrve
0,th.; 157 COUSeS
OS
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_14E.13
Mauer ordneri

.Automation and Industrial Solutions
Introduction
With the PLC 4 "Save to Memory Card" and PLC 4 "Retrieve from Memory
Card" functions, you can save all project data and any files you wish for a later
application on a Memory Card and then you can retrieve it later on. The
functions for saving project data and retrieving from the Memory Card are,
however, only available for newer CPUs (after Oct. 2002).
The project data is compressed (zipped) before it is saved on the Memory Card
and is unzipped when it is retrieved. The size of the project data to be stored
corresponds to the archive file size of this project.
Application
If several employees in the service and maintenance department are

responsible for maintaining the SIMATIC automation system, it is difficult to
quickly provide each employee with the current project data and possible
service instructions that exist in file form.
If, however, the project data of a CPU is available locally in one of the CPUs to
be serviced, every employee can access the current project data and, if
necessary, make modifications, which in are then available for all other
employees.
Operating
If the project data does not exist on the programming device used (PG/PC),
you can select the source CPU in the window "Accessible Nodes". Open the
window "Accessible Nodes" with the menu options PLC - Display Accessible
Nodes and select the desired Connection/CPU with the Data on the Memory
Card. Now select the menu options PLC 9 Retrieve from Memory Card. In the
follow-up dialog, choose the data to be transmitted and the project path.
Note
You can protect CPUs against unauthorized access by using a Password. See
the Hardware Configuration chapter for more information.
Page 13
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Archiving a Project
IA=1===11111M1011111M111=1111V
File Edit Insert PLC View Options Window Help
New...
Ctrl+N

Open...
EI- *I d II<NoFiker>
Close
1_179 113
11111111111112k
Archiving
User projects I Libraries I Sample projects I Multiprojects I
Multiproject
Name
57 Memory Card
Storage path
MyProject
D: \Courses WyProject
Memory Card File

Save As...
Archiving - Select an archive -:
Delete...
Archive That Goes across Diskettes:
Reorganize...
Manage...
EMEZI
Retrieve...
I N
r Incremental Archiving
r Reset Archive Bit
r Check Consistency
>
Print
Page Setup...
1 57 memory card
2 Loesungsprojekt_PRO
3 SERV1 5 (Project)
User projects:
Libraries:
Sample projects:
Multiprojects:
File name:
4 SERV1_13 (Project)
Exit
OK
14 I
OK
IMyprojec zip
Cancel I Help
Save I
Save as lype: I PKZip 12.0-Archive('.zip)
Cancel
ell)
Lit
Saves project or library (compressed) h an archive.
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_14E.14
Introduction
Since the data in a project can take up a lot of memory space and might not fit
completely onto a disk, an archive function is provided.
This archive function compresses the data so that it only takes up
approximately 1/8 of its original amount of memory. It uses the normal file
compression utilities, such as PKZIP, ARJ, LHARC, RAR or WINZIP. One of
these programs must first be installed on the PG/PC. If you want to use long file
names for the projects, you will need PKZIP, WinZip or RAR.
The ARJ and PKZIP file compression utilities are supplied with STEP 7.
You set the path for the archive program by selecting the Options - Customize
4 Archive menu options in the SIMATIC Manager.
Archiving
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Retrieving
1. Select the File 9 Retrieve... menu option.

2. Select the "Look in: " location where the archived file is stored and select
the "File name" of the archived file and "Open".
3. In the next dialog box, select the destination directory and "OK".
4. Use the last dialog box to select options for overwriting and restoring the
storage path
The project to be archived must be closed in the SIMATIC Manager.

Select the File 4 Archive... menu option.
Select the project to be archived in the dialog window and press "OK".
Select the "Save in:" path and "File name" in the next dialog box.
In the last dialog box, you can choose between the following options:
- Archive That Goes across Diskettes = Can split the archive file
onto several diskettes
=
Only the files with the ACR
- Incremental Archiving
attribute (STEP7 files) are
archived.
Archive
only the files that have
- Reset Archive Bit
=
been changed since the last
archive.
Compare
the files to be archived
=
- Check Consistency
(only for ARJ)
Page 14
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Memory Concept of the S7-300 until Oct. 2002

Load memory:
Blocks:
Logic blocks
>
(OB,FC,FB)
Data blocks
(DB)
Additional info
Comments
-a-rn
RAM
Flash
EPROM
Working memory:
OB,FC,FB
Symbols
Blocks:
Logic blocks
(OB,FC,FB)
Data blocks
(DB)
Blocks:
Logic blocks
(OB,FC,FB)
Data blocks
(DB)
Additional info
DB
n. reten.I reten.
With Power
ON without
battery
backup
11111
System memory:
PII,PIQ
M, T, C
n. relent reten.
Retentive memor
Retentive
M, T, C
Retent. Data blocks
Flash EPROM
Memory Card in PG
(inserted later in the
CPU)
SIMATIC S7
Date
File
With Power
OFF without
battery
backup
18.09.2009
SERV1_14E.15
ikiT
z
Load Memory
The load memory is a component of a programmable module. It contains load

objects (logic blocks, data blocks, and additional information) created on the
programming device.
The load memory can either be a plug-in memory card (EPROM) or an
integrated RAM.
Work Memory
The work memory (integrated RAM) contains the parts of the S7 program
relevant for running your program.
The RAM work memory is integrated in the CPU and is backed up by the
battery.
System Memory
The system memory contains the memory areas for:

Process image input and output tables (PII, PIQ)
(M)
Bit memories
Timers
(T)
Counters
(C)
L stack
(L).
Retentive Memory
The retentive memory is a non-volatile RAM used for backing up bit memories,
timers, counters and data blocks even if there is no backup battery. A Flash
EPROM Memory Card must be used to do this. You specify the areas to be
backed up when assigning the CPU's object parameters.
Inserting a
Memory Card
When you insert a memory card, the operating system requests a memory
reset. (STOP LED flashes slowly). You perform the memory reset by turning
the mode selector to the "MRES" position. The sections of the program relevant
for execution are then transferred from the memory card (with load memory
function) to the work memory.
You must leave the memory card inserted while the program is being
executed..
Memory Reset
During a memory reset, all user data - with the exception of the diagnostic
buffer and the MPI parameters - are deleted.

Page 15
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Memory Concept of the S7-300 after Oct. 2002

Micro Memory Card
(CPU load memory)
Blocks:
Logic blocks
(OB,FC,FB)
Data blocks
(DB)
System data
Comments
Symbols
4j
Blocks:
Logic blocks
(OB,FC,FB)
Data blocks
(DB)
Load
Working memory:
Sections of the
logic blocks
Power
OFF
data blocks
relevant for execution
Blocks:
Logic blocks
(OB,FC,FB)
Data blocks
(DB)
complete
project, if
desired
Warm
restart
after
Power
ON
System memory:
PII, PIQ
Local data
Micro Memory Card
in the PG
CPU)
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Load Memory
Micro Memory Card
(MMC)
M, T, C
Power
OFF
retentive
n. retent.
18.09.2009
SERV1_14E.16
W.
The Micro Memory Card (MMC) is used as the load memory of the CPU. It is
used to store logic and data blocks as well as the system data (hardware
configuration, communication connections etc.). If you like, the complete project
can be stored. That way, you have the symbols, comments and configuration
data, for example, for HMI or drives, available.
The MMC contents are retentive.
If a block or the entire user program is downloaded into the CPU from the PG,
the information is stored on the MMC. All block sections relevant for execution
are automatically copied into the work memory (RAM).
It is only possible to load a block or the user program as well as operate
the CPU when the MMC is inserted!
A memory reset is required every time the MMC is pulled or inserted!
Work Memory
The work memory (RAM) is integrated on the CPU and only contains the parts
of the S7 program relevant for running your program (such as, only the current
values of the data blocks, not the initial values).
System Memory
Retentive
Process image input and output tables

Bit memories
Timers
Counters
Local data
(PII, PIQ)
(M)
(T)
(C)
(L)
All data that are saved in a power failure and/or which don't lose their contents
are considered retentive. This is all the work memory data as well as the bit
memories, timers and counters declared as retentive in the hardware
configuration.
Retentiveness is achieved in that the above-mentioned data are stored on the
MMC in a power failure and are written back to the RAM after a warm restart
when the power comes back on.
Page 16
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Memory Concept of the S7-400

Load memory:
Blocks:
Logic blocks
(OB,FC,FB)
Data blocks
(DB)
Additional info
Comments
Working memory:
OB,FC,FB
Symbols
Blocks:
Logic blocks
(OB,FC,FB)
Data blocks
(DB)
Blocks:
Logic blocks
(OB,FC,FB)
Data blocks
(DB)
Additonal info
RAM
Flash
EPROM
Backup
via
battery
DB
System memory:
PII,PIQ
M, T, C
rm.
-111
Flash EPROM
Memory Card in PG
CPU)
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_14E.1 7

Rtr
Load Memory
The load memory can either be a plug-in memory card or integrated RAM. In
the S7-400, the memory card (RAM or Flash EPROM) expands the internal
load memory. A memory card is always required for the S7-400, since the
internal load memory only has a limited size.
Work Memory
The work memory contains only the data relevant at runtime. The RAM work
memory is integrated in the CPU and is backed up by the battery.
System Memory

Process image input and output tables (PII, PIQ)
(M)
Bit memories
(T)
Timers
Counters
(C)
L stack
(L).
Memory Card
When a RAM memory card is used, the system must be operated with a
battery. The battery backs up the data on the memory card and any internal
RAM in case of a power failure.
When a Flash EPROM memory card is used, the user program is stored in the
memory card making it power failure safe. The data found in the internal RAM
are backed up by the battery.
The "Hot Restart" mode is possible only in a backed up system.
Inserting a
Memory Card
When you insert a memory card, the operating system requests a memory
reset (STOP LED flashes slowly). You perform the memory reset by turning the
mode selector to the "MRES" position. The sections of the program relevant for
execution are then transferred from the memory card (load memory) to the
work memory.
You must leave the memory card inserted while the program is being executed.

Page 17
ST-SERV1
14
SIEMENS
Exercise 1: Documenting a Block and Printing It Out

NV DcoiccNY NC-etion CD13 314 \ -A MIN - <off1112.
3121TIC
Rea/or. 2
01 22 20 3
0 10:05150
IDDIAL Dodo
'1' NM Accept -
is WV Z. occ
DoeleS21
191
:C Disoulemee
SETSSE -IV
-
CD
.S2/ANodmEel
eet .
SMILE
::D ConveyorE
S_POL111
-
TV
SIMATIC S7
BCO
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_14E.18
Vir

Task 1
Provide the networks of a block with network comments and network titles.
Then take a look at a print preview of the block with headers and footers.
What to Do
1. Edit the headers and footers for the printouts

SIMATIC Manager - File - Page Setup... - Labeling fields...
2. In a block, edit the network titles and network comments
LAD / STL / FBD Editor 4 View 4 Display with 9 Comment
3. Take a look at the block in the print preview
LAD / STL / FBD Editor 4 File 4 Print Preview...
Task 2
Also take a look at the symbol table as a printout.

Open the Symbol Editor and select Symbol table 9 Print Preview
Page 18
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Ex.2: Saving the Program and Hardware Configuration (PLC Copy)

File Edit Insert PLC lAew Options Window Help
D
M11
MyProject
E
E
MI
E0
F
S7_30
Touch
Which module do you want to reach?
Access Rights
Download
Ctrl+L
Configure...
ttrl+K
Back
r6 E.
Slot:
71
..,
Upload tc PG
d Sr.ahrri to PS
Copy RAM to ROM...
Target Station:
6 Local
Can be reached by means of gateway
Enter core ection to target station:
PROFD3U5 address 1 Module type I Station name I Module name I Plant designation
CPU 315-... S7 300 S... CPU 315-2...
2
Manage M7 System...
Drive
Accessible Nodes

57 300
CPU Messages...
St...
IM1511
,_1_11125.1
pe
EcIA Insert KC Dew captions Niindow bslip
gib e
,igjiLci
IL3; MyProject -- D: \ Courses \ MyProject

E
z., MyProject
E II F LC_ _. ,,
E ffii S7_300_Stalion
Hardware
UPdate
CPU 315 DP
Cancel I Help
II D Touchpanel
05611(1 4
Press F1 to get help.
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
J I
18.09.2009
SERV1_14E.19

Task
You are to make a data backup (a so-called "PLC Copy") that includes the
hardware configuration and parameter assignment data and the complete S7
program as well as the current production data (quantities etc.).
What to Do
1. Load your complete hardware station into your current project

SIMATIC Manager PLC 9 Upload Station to PG...
2. In the dialog "Select node address" that then appears, activate the button
"View" to display all the accessible nodes.
3. Select your CPU and start the upload by pressing "OK".
4. Rename the newly created station "PLC Copy".
Result
A new hardware station has been created in your project (in the slide "PLC
Copy") whose CPU contains the current S7 program with the current
production data, such as, quantities etc. The "uploaded" S7 program, however,
does not contain any comments, any variable and parameter names and also
no symbols!
Page 19
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Exercise 3: Archiving "My Project"

VSIMATIC Manager
Fie PLC View Options Window Help
Archiving
New...
New Project' Wizard. , .
Open...
Open Version 1 Project...
User projects I Libraries Sample projects Mukiprojects

Name
I Storage path
GD_Cornmunication CAS7_Kurse1GD_Kommu
Mein_Nojekt
C: S7_Kurse Mein_Pro
S7 Memory Card
Memory Card Fie
ojec
7_Lourses My_Proje
SERV1_32S
SERV2_32S
Delete...
Reorgaize...
Manage...
C. S7_Courses S ervl _32

C: S7_Courses Serv2_32
Archiving - Select an archive

User Projects:
Print Setup...
Save in:
Libraries:
Sample Projects:
1 My_Project (Project) - CA57_Courseskley_Proje

2 Accessible Nodes - MPI
3 SERV2_325 (Project) - CA,57_Courses1.5erv2_32
4 SERV1 325 (Project) CA57_Courses Serv1_32
Exit
Multiprojects:
cn,
S7_Courses
My_Proje
....1 5erv132s
5erv2
J5erv2_32
OK
Ak+r-4
Saves project or Itcary (compressed) in an archive.
Filename
Save
I HY_Proie. zip
Save as type: IPrZip 0-Aidwive zip)

-
Cancel
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_14E.20
gr
Task
Archive your project called "My_Project" for data backup.
What to Do
1. Start the archive function

File 4 Archive... - Project

2. In the following dialogs, select the settings displayed in the slide

3. Using the Windows Explorer, check the success of your archive and
compare the size (memory requirement) of the original project with that of
the archive created.
Windows Explorer 4 right mouse click on Archive or Project - Properties
- Size
Page 20
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Note
18.09.2009
SERV1_14E.21

complete a topic.
14
Page 21
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
MMC - as Additional Data Memory on the CPU
Ilcr!SIMATIC Manager -1**PROFINET-IO (Component view ) -- U....Siemens \ StepTks7proj \##PROFIN)

.,_1=21
a He
Insert Pic View Options Window Help
,ItyjLci
1. d I < No Fite; >
D Ical .1?16,1
Access Rights
In_d
VI*I
AIMIrl
t
lj
Crl+L
E '', tIPROFINET-I Dwriad
I Created in language I Size in the work me.. I T. ,
rtrk-K. Symboic name
3(
c
`-'
1
f'
g
u'
e
E II SIMATIC
- SI
a III CPU 31 Compile/Downbad ProgramsFBD
86
0
Compile and Download Inlets .
E,
0:1
38 0
Upload to PG
FBD
Load Memory
:hi! Upload Station to PG..
3838 00
FBD
Copy RAM to ROM..
FBD
38 0
Download user program to memory card
FEI
D
48 Ft
Save to Memory Card..
Data Memory
Retrieve from Memory Card..
lana e (17 S,;ten...
Drive g

CPU Messages..
Diagnostic /Setting
PROFIBUS
Edk Ethernet Node..

Assi n PG /PC
Cancelg PG/PC
Assi nment
Update Firmware g
Update the Operating System..
A
141
Downloading and controlfrig blocks and programs, modifying and monitoring modulI es.
4
Ed[
a s71
Date:
File: 18.09.2009
SERV1_14E.22
SIMATIC S7
TrainIndustri
ing for al Solutions
Automation and
111 SITRAIN
mc
General
The Micro Memory Card (MMC) is used by the CPU operating system as a
load memory and can also be used by the user for any data storage.
The loading procedure is the known procedure for integrated load memories:
Menu option: PLC - Download or the appropriate icon in the toolbar.
Load Memory
The load memory is used in the CPU to store:

Logic blocks (FC, FB, OB),
Data blocks,
System data (hardware configuration, communication connections etc.)
The load memory as an additional data storage area can be used, by the user,
to store:
S7 project data (complete S7 project, that is, user programs with all
comments, symbol tables, hardware configurations etc., of all hardware
stations). The data storage is realized as a compressed archive.
any other non-compressed files, such as, *.doc or *.pdf project
documentation and device descriptions
Commands
Menu options:
Note
It is not necessary to compress the MMC. Deleted areas (pages) are

completely reused the next time information is saved. During CPU startup,
there is also an MMC Check in which "lost pages" are "recaptured".
The loading times vary depending on the operating mode of the CPU:
Operating mode RUN - slow, since the user program has priority in
processing. Operating mode STOP 4 fast, since the user program doesn't
have to be processed.
PLC - Save / Retrieve to / from Memory Card
Page 22
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
PLC: Storing Data on the Memory Card

Save to Memory Card in the PLC
Corresponds to
"Load user program
on MC"
STEP 7 Data
/7
Currently open project

is compressed and
copied
All individual files except
archives (e.g. *.zip) and
directories
Caution!
The memory card will be completely deleted if
program' is selected
Current user program

find HW configuration)
t3fies in cu I
rn,Piproject
Other ties
each
avant user
MM420_Manuals_englisch
sfi
DA1ITIA_PRO123_V551Entivi
DAV IA_PRO123_VS5 \Entwi
D 18TIA_PRO123_V55LEnhvi
MM420_0perating Instruction.pd1
MM420 Parameter Listpci
Current Selection List !!

No current MMC content
Dateien laden in EPROM Memory Card our CPU
Storage location
Deleien Ubeitragen ins Zietsyslem

Sunk D: \S7_SERV1 \Ubtrgen \MM420_Pmerroteriste.pd1
Zost CPU
on PLC
Memory Card
Detenialsombegung rn Zielsystem lault

IF14,1,11
Geschatzte Dauer
Geserries Derenvoiumen.
Bemis ubereagen.
OK
Starts transmission
Help
.**
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
What to Do
4 me 23 sec
1 396 MB
1.396 MB
t for
N T rai n
41 SlT RAl
n and 1 inni
a l Solutions
:
Automa t io
18.09.2009
SERV1_14E.23
11
1. An S7 project must be open, otherwise the function

"PLC - Save to Memory Card..." is inactive !!
2. Configured S7 CPU with Micro Memory Card (MMC) must be selected.
3. The target CPU must be in the STOP mode.
Note
The transmission is finished when the blue bar has reached the end and the
message "Data transmission to the memory card is finished" appears.
Download files to EPROM Memory Card on the CP
Transfer files to target system

Source C:tS iemensIS tep71s7proj11#13PR 0 Fl N=PR 0 Fl N s7p
Target: CPU
The data transmission to the memory card is finished.
Innummilemmommmummounnommo
Total duration:
35 s
Total data volume:
981 kB
Total transmitted:
981 kB
Close

it
Page 23
ST-SERV1
14
SIEMENS
PLC: Getting Data from the Memory Card
=2=1:1=11=NIMIIINIMIMPwr.'
Contents are displayed

Attention! File type by
default only "S7
Projects"; if necessary,
set to "all files"
File name
Size
Type
SOPROFILIET-I0... 1009840
Mr44 PPOFIBUS... 525792
STEP Pry
Adobe Acrob.
I Modified
in 10.2005
06.02.20
I
Fie name:
Res C m)
Fie bee.
STEP7 wee: r.srpj

STEP 7 Lbseies
STEP 7 Lie projects r.k7p)
STEP 7 Lie smolt lies t'.k7e
OK
Select + highlight
particular files
111=111=12MEML
Save where ?
Oderert von Perlsystern oolen
I ease
57-Proples7p
Help
1209696
I Typ
keendert
Deteien holm eon Memory
Deleien ibertragen on PG
Om* MM420_Psameterkte pu (CPO)
Zet D \ T
03 0 aretsteise
fReferent %Owl )ant=
E43 Software
Et3 {Z) rrIA_PRO123_,55
Er;
abc
0AXPFZZ
E 0 Documents and Settngs
DOTS_swp
n RECYaER
STEP ... 23.01.2004 13:36:20
Datenobernagung is PG laud
Gezehatze Daue,
Geserntes Detenvoiurnen
Bemis ti:ertiven
3 rrn 54 one
1 396 MB
1 396 MB
Datenstna
IMM420_Pererroderiste prE
Da 400
Vie Deleon( 1
OK
E
6e_j
Ab eken
Ordner
Mee
lit
sEmAric S7 - ProJekte
piles
ems
Starts transmission
I...
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
What to Do
18.09.2009
SERV1_14E.24
gr,
1. An S7 project must be open, otherwise the function

"PLC - Retrieve from Memory Card..." is inactive !!
2. Configured S7 CPU with Micro Memory Card (MMC) must be selected.
3. The target CPU must be in the STOP mode.
Note
The transmission is completed when the blue bar has reached the end and the
message "Data transmission to the programming device (PG) is finished"
appears.
- When S7 projects are "gotten", they are copied, unzipped and, if necessary,
opened (after being prompted).
- When other files are "gotten", they are only copied in the target directory.
Get files from memory card
Transfer files to PG
Source IIIIPROFINET -10 (CPU)
Target: D: \S7 courses
The data transmission to the programming device (PG) is finished.
Total duration:
27 s
Total data volume:
358 kB
Total transmitted:
358 kB
Close
SITRAIN
Training for
Page 24
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
SIMATIC S7
Date.
File:
18.09.2009
SERV115E.1

.
N'41
Page
Contents
Objectives
...
Task
3
.......... 4

Exercise 3: Deleting an Old Project and Retrieving a New Project
.......... 5
Exercise 4: Hardware Commissioning
.......... 7
Exercise 5: Software Commissioning

Exercise 6: Software Expansion
8
9
..........
.......... 6
15

Page 1
ST-SERV1
Closing Exercise
SIEMENS
Objectives
be able to perform a CPU memory reset

be able to adapt a given HW station to a real HW station
be able to debug simple program errors
be able to program simple program expansions
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_15E.2
Page 2

ST-SERV1
Closing Exercise
SIEMENS
Task
DO
T_System_ON
T_System_OFF
L_SYSTEM
L_MAN
T_Jog_RIGHT
T_Jog_LEFT
L_AUTO
S_M/A_ModeSelect
T_M/A_Accept
SIEMENS
SIMATIC PANEL
T_Ackn_Fault L_Conv_Fault
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_15E.3

%Er
Task
The TIA project that is now to be commissioned is to fulfill exactly the same
functions as the project you have already created during the course. As well, it is
also to be expanded by some smaller functions.
Commissioning
Hardware Commissioning:
For this, the automation components of the TIA project have to be adapted to
the actual components in your training station by ...
replacing the components (CPU, IM151, I/O modules...) that are not the
same as the existing exercise components
setting the addresses (PROFIBUS addresses, addresses of the I/O modules)
Software Commissioning:
The logic errors in the given S7 program have to be eliminated.
Expansion
Small function expansions have to be programmed.
15

Page 3
ST-SERV1
Closing Exercise
SIEMENS

Until Oct. 2002
After Oct. 2002
RUN-P
RUN
RUN
STOP
MRES
STOP V!!
MRES
RUN-P
RUN
STOP (V

the STOP position.
if
MRES
RUN-P
RUN
STOP Cl.
MRES
tIN
S
TOEs
P
mR
within 1 sec
3. Turn (press) the mode selector switch to the MRES position once more until the STOP LED begins to flash quickly.
the STOP position.
I1RUN
STOP
MRES
RUN-P
RUN
STOP CI)
MRES

position. (A warm restart is carried out in the transition
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_15E.4
qr'
RUN
STOP
MRES

Task
You are to perform a CPU memory reset and check whether the memory reset
was successful.
What to Do
1. If a CPU with MMC is used at your training area, the MMC must first be
explicitly erased.
For example, SIMATIC Manager 9 Accessible Nodes 9 in the Blocks
folder select all blocks 9 Delete
2. Carry out the memory reset according to the steps in the slide above
(manually and from the PG).
3. Check if the memory reset was successful. It was successful if only system
blocks (SDBs, SFCs, SFBs) are left in the CPU
SIMATIC Manager 9 Accessible Nodes 9 Double-click on MPI=2
9 Click on Blocks
Notes
To make sure that no "old" blocks are left in the CPU, a memory reset of the
CPU should be performed. The following steps are carried out during a
memory reset:
All user data is deleted (Exception: MPI parameter assignments and the
contents of the diagnostic buffer are retained).
Hardware test and initialization
If an Eprom memory card or a Micro Memory Card (MMC) is installed, the
CPU copies all data on the cards that is relevant for execution back into the
internal RAM after the memory reset.
If no memory card or Micro Memory Card is installed, the preset MPI
address on the CPU is retained. If, however, a memory card is installed, the
MPI address stored on it is loaded.

Page 4
ST-SERV1
Closing Exercise
SIEMENS

SIMATIC Manager
Q>Options
>=1=1.111.11
Access Path 1
Access Point of the Appkation

Properties
1CP5611(M PI)
Diagnostics
CP5611(MPI)
CP5611(PPI)
CP5611(PROFIBUS - DP Slave)
_J
Copy..
CP5611(PROFIB US) <Active>
zi
Delete
MPI
Station Parameter-.
r PG/PC is the only master on the bus

Address:
ID
Parameter assignment of your

communications processor CP5611 for an
MPI network)
Interfaces
Timeout
Select...
Add/Remove:
11 s
Network Parameters -
OK
Cancel 1
He
Transmission Rate:
1187 5 Kbps
Highest Station Address.
131
OK
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_15E.5
Default I
Cancel
I He

gr
Task
Depending on the type of CPU used, it could be that after the CPU memory
reset the PROFIBUS interface is no longer parameterized and so the PG can
no longer access the CPU. If this is the case, the PG's interface has to be
switched to MPI and connected to the MPI interface of the CPU.
What to Do
1. Using the "Accessible Nodes" function, check whether you can set up a
connection to the CPU.
SIMATIC Manager 4 PLC 4 Display Accessible Nodes
If you can not set up a connection to the CPU:
2. Activate the "Set PG/PC Interface" function
SIMATIC Manager 4 Options 4 Set PG/PC Interface
3. In the Properties dialog, change the properties so that they appear as those
shown in the slide

Page 5
ST-SERV1
Closing Exercise
SIEMENS
Exercise 3: Deleting an Old Project and Retrieving a New Project

V5IMATIC Manager - MeinProjekt
File Edit Insert PLC View Options Window Help
New...
Open...
Close
Retrieving - Select an archive
Ctrl+N
Ctrl+O
JJ
Li 4- C(3 de El'
Look jn: t;:_) Archive

SERV l_A. zip
SERV I _B. zip
11 SERV I JtartUp.zip
4
Multiproject
57 Memory Card
Memory Card File
Save As...
Ctrl+S
Reorganize...
File name:
2pen
I SERVl_StartU p. zip
Files of lype: I PI(.74. 1 2.0-Archive (".zip)
Pitt
Page Setup.
SERVI_Startlip D: Courses SERV1_StartUp
1 Loesungsprojeld_PRO1 V59
2 SERV1_5 (Project) D:\Courses\5ERV1.
3 5IZRVI_B (Project) DACoursesliSIERVI.
4 SERVl_A (Project) DACcurseASERVI
Exit
Object name
E
S7_300_Station
CPU 315-2 DP
ID 0 Chap15_StartUp
al Sources
Blocks
E
MICROMASTER_420
Touchpanel
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
S7_300_Station
Touchpanel
_1J xl
Symbolic
SIMATIC 300
SIMATIC HMI
MPI
PROFIBUS
VMPI(1)
VPROFIBUS(1)
4l
18.09.2009
SERV1_15E.6
r,
Task
Delete insofar as it exists the old project "SERV1_StatUp" and then retrieve
the project archive "SERV1_StatUp.zip"
What to Do
1.
Delete the old project "SERV1_StatUp"
SIMATIC Manager - File - Delete... - User Projects
2. Retrieve the project archive "SERV1_StatUp.zip"

SIMATIC Manager - File - Retrieve...
3. As the destination directory in the dialog, select the directory in which your
project "My_Project" has already been stored
Result
SITRAIN
...is the retrieved project "SERV1_StatUp" that you are now to commission.
Training for
Page 6
ST-SERV1
Closing Exercise
SIEMENS
Exercise 4: Hardware Commissioning

ji_1
:1 2<j
LS7.1iW Con - f57_300_Station (Configuration) SERVI_Stardip]
LJJ
gation Ot Insert PLC View Qptions Window deli,
Dcairt-ta
(0) UR
PROFIBUS(1): DP master system (1)

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
PROFIBUS address OK?

I/O addresses OK?
DI32xDC24V
D 0 32xD C24V/0.5A
DI8/D08x24V/0.5A
Al2x1264
PROFIBUS address OK?

Module types OK?
I/O addresses OK?
CPU type OK?

Clock Memory MB10 OK?
.
A.,17
..,...\
V
Order number
Module
PP
3
]
4
r DI 32xD C24V
5
D 0 32xDC24V/0.5A
D18/D08x24V/0.54
6
7
Al2x1213it
I address
Q add...
Comment
6657 31 5-2AF01-0ABO
CPU 315-2 DP
MPI ...
Firmware
7C47..;'
0 ..3
6E57 321-113L00-0AA0
6E S7 322-1 BLOO-OAA0
6E S7 323-1BH 00-QoA0
6E S 7 331-7KB 01.0AB 0
88
88
304...307 4 .7
R11,...1111,
-.
CJUU
Ftrsetc
y fJG
rat.,
n A
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_15E.7
.1 SITRAIN Training for
%I"
Task
The hardware configuration and parameter assignments given in the project

"SERV1_StartUp" must be adapted accordingly to your actual training unit.
What to Do
Check the parameterization data highlighted in the slide and make as far as
necessary the appropriate corrections.
15

Page 7
ST-SERV1
Closing Exercise
SIEMENS
Exercise 5: Software Commissioning

DI
I 0.0
T_System_ON
I 0.1
T_System_OFF LSYSTEM
I 0.2
T_Jog_RIGHT
I 0.3
T_Jog_LEFT
L_MAN
L_AUTO
10.4
S_M/A_ModeSelect
I 0.5
T_M/A_Accept
11.0
SIMATIC S7
"L_Bay1" "LBay2"
(Q 8.1)
(Q 8.2)
"L_Bay_LB"
(Q 8.4)
"T_Bay1" "T_Bay2"
(I 8.1)
(I 8.2)
"T_Bay_LB"
(I 8.4)
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_15E.8
vg- Automation and Industrial Solutions
Task
The given program is to fulfill exactly the same functions as the program that
you have created during the course.
The given S7 program is to be corrected by you and commissioned.
Note: The touchpanel program is error-free !
What to Do
Check the following functions and as far as necessary correct the program:
1. Can you switch the operating modes "L_SYSTEM" (Q4.1), "L_MAN" (Q4.2)
and "L_AUTO" (Q4.3) on and off via the touchpanel?
2. Can you jog the conveyor motor to the right and to the left in the
MAN (Q4.2 = '1') operating mode?
3. While in AUTO mode (Q4.3 = '1'), are the parts placed at Bay 1 or Bay 2
transported through the light barrier?
Page 8
ST-SERV1
Closing Exercise
SIEMENS
Exercise 6: Software Expansion

DO
DI
1 0.0
T_System_ON
1 0.1
T_System_OFF L_SYSTEM
1 0.2
T_Jog_R1GHT
L_MAN
1 0.3
T_Jog_LEFT
a
a
a
L_AUTO
1 0.4
S_M/A_ModeSelect
1 0.5
T_M/A_Accept
4.1
Q 4.2
Q 4.3
1 1.0
Q 5.0
left
Jog
"L_Bay3"
(Q 8.3)
"T_Bay1" "T_Bay2" "T_Bay3"
8.3)
(1 8.1)
(1 8.2)
"L_Bay1" "L_Bay2"
(Q 8.1)
(Q 8.2)
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Task
18.09.2009
SERV1_15E.9
right
"L_Bay_LB"
(C) 8.4)
"T_Bay_LB"
(I 8.4)

gr
The S7 program commissioned by you is now to be expanded in its functional

scope as follows:
1.
MANUAL mode expansion:

The range in which a part placed on the conveyor can be moved by jogging
the conveyor motor is to be limited for safety reasons:
When jogging to the LEFT, the conveyor is to stop as soon as the part
reaches the proximity sensor "BAY1" (I 8.5) of Bay 1 (even when the "Jog
left" button is still pressed on the touchpanel).
When jogging to the RIGHT, the conveyor is to stop as soon as the part
reaches the light barrier "LB" (I 8.0) (even when the "Jog right" button is
still pressed on the touchpanel).
2. AUTO mode expansion:

Up until now, the transport functions could only be started from Bay 1 and
Bay 2. Expand the program so that transport can also be started from Bay 3.
Just as before, you should only be able to start a transport function from
where the part lies on the conveyor via that Bay's momentary contact.
As well, you must ensure that exactly only one part lies on the conveyor, that
is, is detected by the proximity sensors of Bays 1 to 3.
Furthermore, the indicator light at Bay 3 (Q8.3) is to perform the same as the
already configured lights at Bays 1 and 2:
- Continuous light at all bays when a new part can be laid on the conveyor
(all bays free)
- 1Hz flashing light at the bay where the part was placed and the conveyor
has not yet started
- 2Hz flashing light at all bays during conveyor movement
Page 9
ST-SERV1
Closing Exercise
SIEMENS
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_168.1
Contents
Exercise Solutions
Symbol List
Symbol List
Ch3 Ex1: Using the S7-300 Manuals
Ch3, Ex2: Wiring the Signal Modules
Ch8, Ex1 + 2: Jogging the Conveyor Motor (FC 16) / Calling FC 16 in OB 1
Ch9, Ex1 : Sensors and Symbols
Ch9, Ex2: Programming the Operating Mode Section (FC 15)
Ch9, Ex3: Conveyor in AUTO Mode (Expanding FC 16)
Ch9, Ex4: Integrating the Edge Detection in FC 16
Ch9, Ex5: Putting Indicator Lights + Horn (FC 14) into Operation
Ch9, Ex6: Optimizing the Operating Mode Section (FC 15)
Ch10, Ex2: Counting the Transported Parts (FC 18, C 18)
Ch10, Ex3: Monitoring the Transport Functions (FC 17)
Ch10, Ex4: Counting the Transported Parts (FC 19)
Ch10, Ex3 - 4: Lock-out in FC 14
Ch10, Add.-Ex5: Counting the Conveyor Belt Fault Conditions (FC17)
Ch10, Add.-Ex5: Lock-out in FC15
Ch10, Add.-Ex6: Timely Lock-out of the Conveyor Motor Jogging (FC16)
Ch12, Ex2: Rewiring using Absolute Addresses (FC15)
Ch13, Ex5: Controlling a Drive via the Touchpanel (FC 42)
Page 1
Training for
A SITRAIN
Page
......... 2
......... 3
......... 4
......... 5
......... 6
......... 7
......... 8
......... 9
....... 10
....... 11
....... 12
....... 13
....... 14
....... 15
....... 16
....... 17
....... 18
....... 19
....... 20
....... 21
....... 22
....... 23
....... 24
....... 25
....... 26
ST-SERV1
Exercise Solutions
SIEMENS
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_16E.2
Contents
gam
Page
Ch15: Closing Exercise: Overview
........ 27
Ch15: Software Commissioning (0B1)
........ 28
Ch15: Software Commissioning (FC14)
........ 29
........ 30
........ 31
........ 32
........ 33
........ 34
........ 35
Ch15: Software Expansions (FC14)
........ 36
........ 37
........ 38
........ 39
Page 2
ST-SERV1
Exercise Solutions
Symbol List
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
Symbol
C_Conv Fault
C Parts
DB Instance_F620_Fauft2
DB_Instance_FB20_Fault3
DB Parts
FB FaultEvaluation
FC_Signal
FC Mode
FC ConvMotor
FC_Fautt
FC_Count
FC Count Add
FC_FauttEvaluation
FC MM420
T System ON
T_System_OFF
T_Jog_RIGHT
T_Jog_LEFT
S_M/A_ModeSelect
T_M/A_Accept
T_Ackn Fault
S_Fault1
S Fautt2
S_Fault3
LB
T_Bay1
T Bay2
T_Bay3
T_Bay-LB
BAY1
BAY2
BAY3
IVV Thumbw
rIN State MM420
WV Act MM420
M_Flash_2Hz
M_Flash_1 Hz
M_Aux_System_ON
M_Aux_Man_ON
M_Aux_Auto ON
M_Aux_C17
M_Aux_LB
M_Jog_RIGHT
M_Auto RIGHT
M_Conv Fault
M_Fault1
M_Aux_Fault1
M_Fault2
M_Aux_Fault2
M_Aux Auto
M_Aux_Count
M_System ON_HMI
M_System OFF HMI
M_Conv_Jog_RIGHT_HMI
Address
C 17
C 18
2
DB
DB
3
DB 19
FB 20
FC 14
FC 15
FC 16
FC 17
FC 18
FC 19
FC 20
FC 42
I
0.0
I
0.1
I
0.2
I
0.3
I
0.4
0.5
I
I
1.0
I
1.1
I
1.2
I
1.3
I
8.0
I
8.1
I
8.2
I
8.3
I
8.4
I
8.5
I
8.6
I
8.7
2
WV
NV 42
NV 44
M 10.3
M 10.5
M 15.1
M 15.2
M 15.3
M 15.7
M 16.0
M 16.2
M 16.4
M 17.0
M 17.1
M 17.2
M 17.3
M 17.4
M 18.0
M 19.0
M
30.0
M
30.1
M
30.2
Comment
Data type
COUNTER
Counter transported parts
COUNTER
FB 20
FB 20
DB with parts data
19
DB
FB for evaluating faults
FB 20
FC 14 -FC Indicator lights + Horn
FC Set operating modes
FC 15
FC 16
FC Fault evaluation
FC 17
FC Count parts
FC 18
FC Count parts using addition
FC 19
FC for evaluating faults
FC 20
FC Control MM420
FC 42
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
Switch - Operating Mode Preselect: '0'=MAN, '1'=AUTO
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
Simulate Fault 1, 0=OFF/1=ON
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
Light barrier
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BCD thumbwheel
WORD
WORD
State word of MM420
Actual speed of MM420
INT
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
Page 3
ST-SERV1
Exercise Solutions
Symbol List
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
Symbol
M_Conv_Jog_LEFT_HMI
M_MIA_ModeSelect_HMI
M_MiA_Acceist_HMI
M_Ackn_Fault_HMI
M_Bays_occup_HMI
M_Conv_Fault_HMI
M_MM420_0n_HMI
M_MM420_Jog_RIGHT_HMI
M_MM420_Jog_LEFT_HMI
M_SlaveFailure
MB_SlaveAddress
MW_ACT
ki1W_SETP
OB_Cycle
OB_SlaveFailure
OB WarmRestart
L_SYSTEM
L_MAN
L_AUTO
L_Restart_man
L_Restart_aut
L_Conv_Fault
L_Fault1
L_Fault2
L_Fautt3
L_Bayl
L_Bay2
L_Bay3
L_Bay-LB
K_Conv_RIGHT
K_Conv_LEFT
Horn
QW_DigDisp
QW_Control_MM420
QW_Setp_MM420
OD_Conv_Monitoring
VATI/O-Conveyor
VAT_Numberformats
Address /
M
30.3
M
30.4
M
30.5
M
31 .0
M
33.0
M
33.1
M
40.0
M
40.2
M
40.3
M
86.0
MB 87
MW
20
NW 22
OB
1
OB 86
OB 100
Q
4.1
Q
4.2
Q
4.3
Q
4.5
Q
4.6
Q
5.0
Q
5.1
Q
5.2
Q
5.3
Q
8.1
Q
8.2
Q
8.3
Q
8.4
Q
8.5
Q
8.6
Q
8.7
OW
6
QW 42
44
GAN
T
17
VAT 1
VAT 2
Data type
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BYTE
INT
INT
OB
1
OB 86
OB 100
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
WORD
WORD
INT
TIMER
Comment
Memory bit Operating Mode Preselect: '0'=MANUAL, '1'...
all Bays 1 to 3 occupied
Switch On Memory bit MM420 (HMI)
Memory bit MM420 Jog RIGHT (HMI)
Memory bit MM420 Jog LEFT (HMI)
Memory bit DP Slave has failed
DP address of failed slave
OB for cyclic program
Error OB for slave failure
Warm restart OB
Indicator light for manual warm restart
Indicator light for automatic warm restart
Run conveyor RIGHT
Run conveyor LEFT
Horn
BCD digital display
Control word for MM420
Setpoint speed for MM420
Page 4
ST-SERV1
Exercise Solutions
Ch3, Exl: Using the S7-300 Manuals
1.
How many racks with how many modules each can be installed in the
S7-300?
max. ..... 4 ........ racks with ...... 8 ....... modules each
2. The PS 307 power supply module, 6ES7 307-1EA00-0AA0 (5A output) is

designed for an input voltage of ...... 120 ........ VAC or ...... 230 ............ VAC
3. An S7-300 and its various modules rated at 24 VDC have a voltage

Tolerance Range of ...... 20.4 ........... VDC to ...... 28.8 ......... VDC
4. How many digital inputs and outputs can the CPU 314 address and how
large is the process-image input table (PII) and the process-image output table (PIQ)?
Process-image input table: ...128 ..... bytes = ....1024 ....... digital inputs
Process-image output table:
128
...... bytes = ....1024 ....... digital outputs
5. At which voltage levels does the digital input module SM321; DI32/24V deliver
signal state "0": ...-30... V to .+5 .... V
signal state "'I': ...+15...V to ....+30 .. V
6. What is the maximum output current that the digital output module SM322;
D032; DC24V/0.5A delivers at
signal state "0": ....0.5.mA (residual current)
signal state '1 ": ....0.6...A
7. What is the maximum operating frequency of this output module?

for resistive load: ...100... Hz
for inductive load: ...0.5..
Hz
8. Is the output module short-circuit proof?

........ yes (electronically) ....................................................
Page 5
ST-SERV1
Exercise Solutions
SIEMENS
Ch3, Ex2: Wiring the Signal Modules
Mom. Contact 1
Mom. Contact 2
LED
Power Supply
L+
00
0 0
1720
1316
00
DI/
DO
323
1 2 3 4 5
SIMATIC S7
6 7 8 9 10
Date:
File:
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
18.09.2009
SERV1_16E.6
Page 6
qr

ST-SERV1
Exercise Solutions
Ch8, Ex1-2: Jogging the Conveyor Motor (FC 16) / Calling FC 16 in OB 1

OBI : cyclic Program
: Control the Conveyor
EN
FC16
ENO
Symbol information:
FCConvMotor
FC16
-- FC Control of conveyor motor
FC16 : Control Conveyor Motor

I
tietmork 1j: Jog to the right

10.3
10.2
Symbol information:
10_2
T_Jog_RIGHT
T_Jog_LEFT
10.3
Q8.5
K Conv RIGHT
Q8.5
-- Jog conveyor RIGHT, momentary contact

-- Jog conveyor LEFT, momentary contact
Nettiork 2 : Jog to the le ft

I0.2
10.3
II
I/I
Q8.6
Symbol information:
10_2
10.3
Q8.6
T_Jog_RIGHT
T_Jog_LEFT
K_Conv_LEFT
-- Jog conveyor RIGHT, momentary contact

-- Jog conveyor LEFT, momentary contact
-- Run conveyor LEFT
Page 7
ST-SERV1
Exercise Solutions
SIEMENS
Ch9, Exl : Sensors and Symbols

Task: In all three examples, the light should be on when S1 is activated and S2 is not activated!
Hardware
I
11 S1
I
I- 2
I
I 1.0
I 1.1
Programmable Controller
Q 4.0
OU
I= S1
I= S2
I
I 1.0
I 1.1
Q 4.0
)Light
Software
OU
I 1.0
I 1.1
LAD
[111
FBD
I 1.1
Q 4.0
MEI*
SIMATIC S7

Q 4.0
I I
( )
&
A
A
=
Date:
File:
1 1.0
Page 8
Q 4.0
C)
&
1 1.1
I 1.0
I 1.1
Q 4.0
18.09.2009
SERV1_16E.8
1 1.1
-H- I
1 1.0
- Q 4.0
I 1.1 -
A 11.0
AN I 1.1
= Q 4.0
1 1.1
11.0
Q 4.0
)Light
1 1.0
I
&
(1) Light
)
I 1.0
1=-- S1
I=1 S2
I
I
I 1.0
I 1.1
Q 4.0
Q4.0
AN 11.0
A I 1.1
= Q 4.0
Ric

ST-SERV1
Exercise Solutions
Ch9, Ex2: Programming the Operating Mode Section (FC 15)
maw
FC15 : Mode Section

Indicator Light System On/Off
I0.0
Q4.1
SR
I0.1
Symbol information:
T_System_ON
I0.0
T_System_OFF
I0.1
L_SYSTEM
Q4.1
-- Momentary contact System ON

-- Momentary contact System OFF (NC contact)
-- Indicator light System ON
Network 2: Indicator Light MAN Mode

Q4.2
IO.S
II
10.4
IA
SR
Q-
Q4.1
IA
10.4
Symbol information:
I0.5
T_M/A_Accept
S_M/A_ModeSelect
10.4
Q4.1
L_SYSTEM
LMAN
Q4.2
-----

Switch - Operating Mode Preselect: '0'=MANUAL
Network 3: Indicator Light AUTO Mode
10.5
04.3
10.4
SR
QQ4.1
I/I
10.4
I/I
Symbol information:
I0.5
T_M/A_Accept
10.4
S_M/A_ModeSelect
Q4.1
L_SYSTEM
Q4_3
LAUTO
SITRAIN
Training for
-----

Switch - Operating Mode Preselect: '0'=MANUAL
Page 9
ST-SERV1
Exercise Solutions
Ch9, Ex3: Conveyor in AUTO Mode (Expanding FC 16)

FC16 : Title:
Network 1: Jog to the right
Q4.2
10.2
10.3
M16.2
I I
Symbol information:
Q4.2
L_MAN
10.2
T_Jog_RIGHT
10_3
T_Jog_LEFT
M16.2
M_Jog_RIGHT
-----

Network 2: Jog to the left

04.2
I I
10.2
I/I
10.3
Symbol information:
Q4_2
L_MAN
10.2
T_Jog_RIGHT
10.3
T_Jog_LEFT
Q8.6
KConvLEFT
-----
08.6

Run conveyor LEFT
Network 3: Memory bit Conveyor Motor in AUTO Mode
18.5
I I
18.5
18.6
I/I
18.6
M16.4
SR
18.1
018.2
04.3
I/1
18.0
I/1
Symbol information:
BAY1
18.5
BAYZ
18.6
T_Bayl
18.1
T_Bay2
18.2
L_AUTO
Q4.3
LB
18.0
M_Auto_RIGHT
M16.4
--------

Light barrier
Network 4: Control the Conveyor Motor to the right

M16.2
II
08.5
M16.4
Symbol information:
M_Jog_RIGHT
M16.2
M_Auto_RIGHT
M16.4
K_Conv_RIGHT
Q8.5
-- Memory bit Jog conveyor RIGHT

-- Memory bit Conveyor AUTO RIGHT
Page 10
ST-SERV1
Exercise Solutions
Ch9, Ex4: Integrating the Edge Detection in FC 16

FC16 : Title:
04.2
I I
10.2
II
M16.2
10.3
1)-1
I/1
Symbol information:
L_MAN
Q4.2
T_Jog_RIGHT
10.2
T_Jog_LEFT
10.3
M_Jog_RIGHT
M16.2
-----

Network 2: Jog to the le ft

04.2
I I
10.2
I/1
08.6
(
10.3
Symbol information:
L_MAN
Q4.2
T_Jog_RIGHT
10.2
10.3
T_Jog_LEFT
XConvLEFT
08.6
-----

Run conveyor LEFT
18.5
II
18.5
I/I
18.6
'1/I
18.6
P116.4
SR
18.1
0-
18.2
04.3
I/I
18.0
M16.0
(P)
Symbol information:
18.5
BAY1
18.6
BAYZ
18_1
T_Bayl
18.2
T_Bay2
Q4.3
L_AUTO
18.0
LB
M16.0
M_Aux_LB
M16.4
M_Auto_RIGHT
---------

Light barrier

1116.2
II
08.5
M16.4
Symbol information:
M16.2
M_Jog_RIGHT
M16.4
M_Auto_RIGHT
Q8.5
KConvRIGHT


Page 11
ST-SERV1
Exercise Solutions
Ch9, Ex5: Putting Indicator Lights + Horn (FC 14) into Operation
FC14 : Indicator Lights + Horn
Network 1: Indicator Light Bay 1
Q4.3
II
Q4.3
H
04.3
II
Q8.5
I/I
18.5
II
18.5
18.6
18.6
H10.5
soo
I/I
ppor.....
Q8.5
I I
Logic Error:
Q 8.2 -> Q 8.1
H10.3
Symbol information:
Q4.3
Q8.5
18.5
18.6
M10.5
M10.3
Q8.2
L_AUTO
K_Conv_RIGHT
BAY1
BAY2
M_Flash_lHz
M_Flash_2Hz
L_Bay2
--------

Run conveyor RIGHT

04.3
Q8.5
18.5
18.6
Q4.3
18.5
18.6
H10.5
Q4.3
08.5
II
II
H10.3
08.2
II
Symbol information:
Q4.3
Q8.5
18.5
18.6
M10.5
M10.3
Q8.2
L_AUTO
K_Conv_RIGHT
BAY1
BAY2
M_Flash_lHz
M_Flash_2Hz
L_Bay2
--------

Run conveyor RIGHT
Network 3: Horn
M10.3
Q8.5
08.6
Symbol information:
K_Conv_RIGHT
Q8.5
11
Logic Error:
Remove negation
08.6
Q4.2
M10.3
Q8.7
Q8.7
K_Conv_LEFT
L_MAN
M_Flash_2Hz
Horn
------
Page 12
Run conveyor RIGHT

Run conveyor LEFT
Horn
ST-SERV1
Exercise Solutions
Ch9, Ex6: Optimizing the Operating Mode Section (FC 15)

FC15 : Title:
Network 1: Indicator Light System On/Off
Q4.1
SR
M15.1
S
Symbol information:
T_System_ON
10.0
M_Aux_System_ON
MI5.1
T_System_OFF
I0.1
L_SYSTEM
Q4.1
Q-
-----

10.5
MI5.2
(P)
Q4.2
SR
10.4
I/I
Q-
Q4.1
Symbol information:
T_M/A_Accept
10.5
M_Aux_Man_ON
M15.2
S_M/A_ModeSelect
10.4
L_SYSTEM
Q4.1
L_MAN
Q4.2
------

Switch - Operating Mode Preselect: '0. =MANUAL

Q4.3
10.5
II
M15.3
10.4
SR
(P)
Q-
04.1
I/I
10.4
I/I
Symbol information:
I0.5
T_M/A_Accept
M15.3
M_Aux_Auto_ON
10.4
S_M/A_ModeSelect
Q4.1
L_SYSTEM
Q4.3
LAUTO
------

Switch - Operating Mode Preselect: '0'=MANUAL,
Page 13
ST-SERV1
Exercise Solutions
Ch10, Ex2: Counting the Transported Parts (FC 18, C 18)

FC18 : FC-Count using S5-Counter
Network 1: Count
18.0
parts
M18.0
C18
04.3
S_CU
CU
Q4.1
PV CV BCD 0W6
I/I
Symbol information:
18.0
LB
M18.0
M_Aux_Auto
Q4.3
L_AUTO
04.1
L_SYSTEM
QW6
QW_DigDisp
------
Light barrier
BCD digital display
Page 14
ST-SERV1
Exercise Solutions
Ch10, Ex3: Monitoring the Transport Functions (FC 17)

FC17 : Title:
Network
Conveyor fault (time monitoring)

T17
S_ODT
Q8.5
Q4.3
BI
S5T116S- TV
BCD
Symbol information:
L_AUTO
Q4.3
K_Conv_RIGHT
Q8_5
OD_Conv_Monitoring
T17
-- Indicator light Automatic mode

-- Timer, Conveyor monitoring in Auto mode
Network 2: display Conveyor fault

H17.0
SR
T17
Q5.0
M10.3
Il. 0
Symbol information:
OD_Conv_Monitoring
T17
M_Conv_Fault
M17.0
T_Ackn_Fault
I1.0
H_Flash_2Hz
M10.3
LConv_Fault
Q5.0
------

Page 15
ST-SERV1
Exercise Solutions
Ch10, Ex4: Counting the Transported Parts (FC 19)

FC19 : Count parts
Network 1: reset the counter to 0
04.1
I/1
EN
08.4
MOVE
ENO
0 IN
18.4
OUT NWZO
I I
Symbol information:
Q4.1
L_SYSTEM
Q8.4
L_Bay-LB
18.4
T_Bay-LB
MW20
MW_ACT
-----

Network 2: count the parts in AUTO node

18.0
M19.0
04.3
ADDJ
EN
(P)
ENO
MW2O IN1
OUT NWZO
1 INZ
Symbol information:
18.0
LB
M19.0
M_Aux_Count
Q4.3
L_AUTO
MW20
MW_ACT
-----
Light. barrier
Network 3: read in Setpoint and convert

BCD!
EN
ENO
IW2 IN
OUT 11W22
Symbol information:
11E2
IWThumbw
MW_SETP
MWEZ
-- BCD thumbwheel
-- Memory word, SETPOINT quantity of parts to be transp.
Network 4: Indicator Light ACTUAL=SETPOINT

04_3
CMP > I
08.4
MW20 IN1
MWZ2 INZ
Symbol information:
MW_ACT
MW20
MW_SETP
MW22
L_AUTO
Q4.3
L_Bay-LB
Q8.4
-----

Network 5: Display the actual no. of parts

L8CD
EN
MWZO IN
Symbol information:
MW_ACT
truzo
QW_DigDisp
0.16
ENO
OUT QW6
-- Memory word, ACTUAL quantity of transported parts

-- BCD digital display
Page 16
ST-SERV1
Exercise Solutions

FC14 : Indicator Lights Horn
18.5
18.6
M17.0
Q8.4
IA
VI
IA
I/I
VI
18.5
18.6
M10.5
M17.0
Q8.4
II
III
VI
Q4.3
08.5
I I
Q4.3
II
IA
Q4.3
08.5
110.3
.1 I
Symbol imformatioa:
Q4.3
Q8.5
18.5
18.6
M17.0
08.4
M10.5
110.3
08.1

Run conveyor RIGHT
L_AUTO
R_Conv_RIGHT
BAY1
BAY2
MConv_Fault
LBay-LB
M_Flash_lHz
/1 Flash_ZHz
L_Bayl

Q4.3
08.5
18.5
18.6
117.0
Q8.4
II
IA
IA
IA
VI
IA
04.3
18.5
18.6
110.5
117.0
08.4
I1
VI
11
II
VI
VI
Q4.3
08.5
110.3
08.2
I I
Symbol iaformatioa:
04.3
08.5
18.5
18.6
M17.0
Q8.4
M10.5
110.3
08.2

-- Proximity sensor Bay 1
-- Proximity sensor Bay 2
-- Memory bit Conveyor fault
-- Indicator light Light barrier bay
-- Memory bit - flashing frequency 1Hz
-- Memory bit - flashing frequency 2 Hz
-- Indicator light Bay 2
LAUTO
RConv_RIGHT
BAY1
BAY2
MConvFault
L_Bay-LB
M_Flash_lHz
MFlash_2Hz
LBay2
Net-work 8:Horn
Q8.5
04.2
1 I
I110.3
Q8.7
08.6
I 1
Symbol information:
08.5
Q8_6
04.2
M10.3
Q8_7
K_Conv_RIGHT
K_Conv_LEFT
L_MAN
M_Flash_2Hz
Horn

Run conveyor RIGHT

Run conveyor LEFT

Horn
Page 17
ST-SERV1
Exercise Solutions
NW 1 and NW 2 are not modyfied
18.5
1 I
18.5
18.6
1/1
1116.4
SR
18.1
18.6
Q4.3
I/I
18.0
M16.0
1 1
(P)
1117.0
1 1
08.4
Symbol information:
18.5
BAY1
18.6
BAY2
18.1
T_Bayl
18.2
T_Bay2
Q4.3
L_AUTO
18.0
LB
M16.0
M_Aux_LB
M_Conv_Fault
M17.0
L_Bay-LB
Q8.4
M_Auto_RIGHT
M16.4
-----------

Light barrier

M16.2
1 1
Q8.5
01
M16.4
Symbol information:
M_Jog_RIGHT
M16.2
M_Auto_RIGHT
M16.4
K_Conv_RIGHT
Q8.5

Page 18
ST-SERV1
Exercise Solutions
Ch10, Add.-Ex5: Counting the Conveyor Belt Fault Conditions (FC17)

FC17 : Title:
atellat
: Conveyor fault (time monitoring)

117
Q4.3
08.5
I I
S_0 DT
0
BI
SST#6S TV
BCD
Symbol information:
L_AUTO
Q4_3
K_Conv_RIGHT
Q8.5
OD_Conv_Monitoring
T17

Network 2: display Conveyor fault

H17. 0
T17
M10.3
______i
SR
I I
QS.0
11.0
Symbol information:
117
OD_Conv_Monitoring
M17.0
M_Conv_Fault
I1.0
T_Ackn_Fault
M_Flash_2Hz
M10.3
Q5.0
LConv_Fault
------

Network 3: count Conveyor faults

C17
M17.0
I1------- CD
S_CD
04.3 S
CV...
Cf 3 PV CV BCD
...
Symbol information:
M17.0
M_Conv_Fault
C17
C_Conv_Fault
Q4.3
L_AUTO

-- Counter Conveyor faults
1111:

Page 19
ST-SERV1
Exercise Solutions
Ch10, Add.-Ex5: Lock-out in FC15

FC15 : Mode Section
I0.0
II
M15.1
04.1
SR
I0.1
I/I
Symbol information:
I0.0
T_System_ON
M15.1
I0.1
Q4.1
-----
M_Aux_System_ON
T_System_OFF
L_SYSTEM

I0.5
II
M15.2
04.2
10.4
SR
S
(P)
Q4.1
I/I
10.4
Symbol information:
IO.S
T_M/A_Accept
M1S.2
10.4
Q4.1
04.2
M_Aux_Man_ON
S_M/A_ModeSelect
L_SYSTEM
L_MAN
------

Switch - Operating Mode Preselect: .0'=MANUAL,
Network 3j: Indicator Light AUTO Mode
Q4.3
10.5
H15.3
10.4
(P)
1 1-S
C17
1I
-
SR
0-
M15.7
(N)--
Q4.1
IA
10.4
VI
Symbol information:
10.5
M15.3
10.4
C17
M15.7
Q4.1
Q4.3
T_M/A_Accept
M_Aux_Auto_ON
S_M/A_ModeSelect
C_Conv_Fault
M_Aux_C17
L_SYSTEM
L_AUTO
--------

Switch - Operating Mode Preselect: '0'=MANUAL, .1'=AUTO
Page 20
ST-SERV1
Exercise Solutions
Ch10, Add.-Ex6: Timely Lock-out of the Conveyor Motor Jogging (FC16)

FC16 : Title:
Q4.2
10.2
10.3
IA
M16.2
T16
0-1
IA
T1S
S_OFFDT
0
SST#25 TV
BI
BCD
Symbol information:
L_MAN
04.2
T_Jog_RIGHT
10_2
T_Jog_LEFT
10.3
M16.2
M_Jog_RIGHT
-----


04.2
10.2
10.3
Q8.6
T15
T16
S_OFFDT
Q
S5T#2S TV
BI
BCD
Symbol information:
04.2
L_MAN
10.2
T_Jog_RIGHT
10.3
T_Jog_LEFT
08.6
K_Conv_LEFT
-----

Run conveyor LEFT
ti
Page 21
ST-SERV1
Exercise Solutions
Ch12, Ex2: Rewiring using Absolute Addresses (FC 15)

FC15 : Mode Section
1
4fetmork
4: Indicator
Light System On/Off

Q4.1
M30.0
SR
M30.1 R
Symbol information:
M30.0
M_System_ON_HMI
M15.1
M_Aux_System_ON
Q4.1
L_SYSTEM
M30.1
M_SystemOFFHMI
-----
Memory bit System ON (TP170)

Memory bit System OFF (TP170)
M30.5
I I
M15.2
(p)
Q4.2
M30.4
SR
1/
Q-
Q4.1
IA
M30.4
Symbol information:
M30.5
M_M/A_Accept_HMI
M15.2
M_Aux_Man_ON
M30.4
Q4_1
L_SYSTEM
Q4.2
L_MAN
------
Memory bit, confirm operating mode (TP170)

Memory bit Operating Mode Preselect: .0..MANUAL

04.3
M30.5
I1
M15.3
M30.4
SR
Q-
(p)
04.1
N30.4
SyMbol information:
M_M/A_Accept_HMI
M30.5
M_Aux_Auto_ON
M15.3
M30.4
L_SYSTEM
Q4.1
L_AUTO
Q4.3
------
Memory bit, confirm operating mode (TP170)

Memory bit Operating Mode Preselect: '0'=MANUAL
Page 22
ST-SERV1
Exercise Solutions

FC16 : Title:
Q4.2
M30.2
Symbol information:
L_MAN
04.2
M30.2
M_Conv_Jog_LEFT_HMI
M30.3
M_Jog_RIGHT
M16.2
M16.2
M30.3
-----

Memory bit Jog Conveyor RIGHT (TP170)
Memory bit Jog Conveyor LEFT (TP170)

04.2
I I
1130.2
I/I
Symbol information:
L_MAN
Q4.2
M30.2
M_Conv_Jog_LEFT_HMI
M30.3
Q8.6
K_Conv_LEFT
Q8.6
M30.3
II
-----

Memory bit Jog Conveyor RIGHT (TP170)
Memory bit Jog Conveyor LEFT (TP170)
Run conveyor LEFT
NW 3 and NW 4 are not modyfied

Page 23
ST-SERV1
Exercise Solutions

FC17 : Title:
etwork 1: Conveyor fault (time monitoring)
Q4.3
T17
S_ODT
Q8.5
S
S5T#6S TV
BI
BCD . .
Symbol information:
Q4.3
L_AUTO
Q8.5
H_Conv_RIGHT
T17
OD_Conv_Monitoring

Network 2: Title:
T17
I
M17.0
SR
M10.3
0
05.0
01
11.0
I I
M31.0
I I
Symbol information:
T17
OD_Conv_Monitoring
I1.0
T_Ackn_Fault
M31.0
M_Ackn_Fault_HMI
M17.0
M_Conv_Fault
M10.3
M_Flash_ZHz
Q5.0
L_Conv_Fault

Memory bit, acknowledge conveyor fault (TP170)
Page 24
ST-SERV1
Exercise Solutions

FC19 : Count parts
Q4.1
MOVE
EN
ENO
0 IN
OUT
IA
18.4
Q8.4
MW20
Symbol information:
- - Indicator light System ON
- - Indicator light Light barrier bay
- - Momentary contact Light barrier bay
- - Memory word, ACTUAL quantity of transported parts
L_SYSTEM
L_Bay-LB
T_Bay-LB
MILACT
Q4.1
Q8.4
18.4
MW20
Network 2: count the parts in AUTO mode
18.0
04.3
M19.0
AUDI
EN
(P)
ENO
OUT 111120
MW20 IN1
1 IN2
Symbol information:
- - Light barrier
-- Edge auxiliary memory bit Light barrier
- - Indicator light Automatic mode
LB
M_Aux_Count
L_AUTO
MW ACT
18.0
M19.0
Q4.3
MW20
CMP)=1
Q4.3
08.4
()1
NW20 IN1
NW22 INZ
Symbol information:
MW20
MW22
Q4.3
MILACT
MW_SETP
L_AUTO
LBay-LB
Q8.4

Memory word, SETPOINT quantity of parts to be transp
- - Indicator light Automatic mode
- - Indicator light Light barrier bay
LBCD
EN
MW20 IN
ENO
OUT QW6
Symbol information:
MY20
MILACT
QW_Dignsp


- - BCD digital display
Page 25
ST-SERV1
Exercise Solutions
Ch13, Ex5: Controlling a Drive via the Touchpanel (FC 42)

FC42 : Control MM420
Motor ON
M40.0
MOVE
1------ EN
1416:47FIN
ENO
OUT QW42
Symbol information:
M40_0
M_ME420_0n_HMI
QW42
QWControlMM420
-- Switch On Memory bit MM420 (TP170)

Network 2 : Motor OFF

M40.0
MOVE
EN
W#16#47E IN
ENO
OUT QW42
Symbol information:
M_MM420_0n_HMI
QWControlMM420
M40.0
QW42
-- Switch On Memory bit MM420 (TP170)

Network 3: Jog Right

M40.2
M40.3
M40.0
EN
IA
MOVE
ENO
11#16#57E- IN
OUT QW42
Symbol information:
M40.2
M40.3
M40.0
M_MM420_0n_HKI
QW42
QW_Control_MM420
Memory bit MM420

Memory bit MM420
Switch On Memory
Control word for
Jog RIGHT (TP170)

Jog LEFT (TP170)
bit MM420 (TP170)
MM420
Network 4: Jog Left

M40.3
M40.2
I/1
M40.0
MOVE
EN
OUT QW42
W#16#67E IN
Symbol information:
M40.3
M_MR420_Jog_RIGHT_HMI
M40.2
M_MM420_0n_HMI
M40.0
QWControlMM420
QW42
ENO
-----
Page 26
Memory bit MM420

Memory bit MM420
Switch On Memory
Control word for
Jog LEFT (TP170)

Jog RIGHT (TP170)
bit MM420 (TP170)
MM420
ST-SERV1
Exercise Solutions
SIEMENS
Ch15: Closing Exercise: Overview

Hardware Commissioning:
Error
Correction in the given HW Config
What doesn't fit in the given HW Config?
CPU type and I/O module types
...replace with CPU actually used
PROFIBUS addresses of ET200 and MM420
." set accordingly to the actually used

ET200 and MM420
ET200:
Module types and I/O addresses
...set to I/O address 8 according to the

given S7 program
Software Startup
Error
Malfunction
Correction
Error Location
System (Q4.1) can not

be switched on
OB 1, Network 1
CALL
Jog Cony. Right

doesn't work
FC 16. Network 1
= Q 8.5
M.
Cony. doesn't transport

the parts through the LB
FC 16, Network 3
FN 18.0
11111. FP 18.0
SIMATIC S7
Date.
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_16E.27

Page 27
FC 15
insert
= M 16.2

gir
ST-SERV1
Exercise Solutions
Ch15: Software Commissioning (0B1)

OBI : "Main Program Sweep {Cycle)"
Network 1: Mode section
insert
CALL FC15
Network 2: Control the Conveyor Motor
EN
FC16
ENO
Symbol information:
FC16;
FCCorfollot or
Network 3: Indicator Lights + Horn
FC14
EN ENO
Symbol information:
FC14
FC_Signal
FC Indicator lights + Horn
Network 4 : Count parts
FC19
EN ENO
Symbol information:
FC_Count_Add
FC19
-- FC Count parts using addition
Network 5: Conveyor monitoring
FC17
EN ENO
Network 6: Control 121420
FC42
EN ENO
Symbol information:
FC42
SITRAIN
FC 241420
Training for
Page 28
FC Control 11/1420
ST-SERV1
Exercise Solutions

FC14 : Indicator lights + Horn
Network 1: Indicator Light bay 1
Q4.3
08.5
18.5
18.6
M17.0
Q8.4
II
I/I
I/I
I/I
I/I
lid
Q4.3
Ie.s
18.6
H10.5
M17.0
Q8.4
II
II
VI
II
I/I
I/I
Q4.3
Q8.5
M10.3
Q 8.1
-
1 I
Symbol information:
L_AUTO
04.3
K_Conv_RIGHT
Q8.5
BAY1
18.5
BAY2
18.6
M_Conv_Fault
M17.0
L_Bay -LB
Q8.4
M_Flash_lHz
M10.5
M_Flash_2Hz
M10.3
L_Bayl
Q8.1
----------

Run conveyor RIGHT

04.3
Q8.5
18.5
18.6
M17.0
Q8.4
Q4.3
18.5
18.6
H10.5
M17.0
Q8.4
04.3
Q8.5
H10.3
II
II
Symbol information:
L_AUTO
Q4.3
K_Conv_RIGHT
Q8.5
18.5
BAY1
18.6
BAY2
M17.0
M_Conv_Fault
Q8.4
L_Bay-LB
M10.5
M_Flash_lHz
M10.3
M_Flash_2Hz
Q8.2
L_Bay2
I/I
I/I
II
III
----------
I/I
08.2
I/1

Run conveyor RIGHT
Network 3: Horn
Q8.5
II
04.2
1110.3
1 1
Q8.7
()
1
Q8.6
Symbol information:
08.5
K_Conv_RIGHT
Q8.6
K_Conv_LEFT
Q4.2
L_MAN
M10.3
M_Flash_2Hz
Q8.7
Horn

------
Run conveyor RIGHT

Run conveyor LEFT
Horn
Page 29
ST-SERV1
Exercise Solutions

FC15 : Mode Section
M30.0
Q4.1
M15.1
SR
Symbol information:
M30.0
M_System_ON_HMI
M15.1
M_Aux_System_ON
Q4.1
L_SYSTEM
M30.1
M_SystemOFFHMI
-----

M30.5
II
M15.2
(P)
M30.4
Q4.2
SR
1/1 S
Q4.1
I/1
QL
M30.4
Symbol information:
M30.5
M_M/A_Accept_HMI
M1S.2
M_Aux_Man_ON
M30.4
Q4.1
L_SYSTEM
Q4.2
L_MAN
------

Memory bit Operating Mode Preselect: '0'..4LU

Q4.3
M30.5
M15.3
M30.4
SR
0
Q4.1
I/1
M30.4
I/I
Symbol information:
M_M/A_Accept_HMI
M30.5
M_Aux_Auto_ON
M15.3
M30_4
L_SYSTEM
Q4.1
L_AUTO
Q4_3
------

Memory bit Operating Mode Preselect: '0'.=MA/
Page 30
ST-SERV1
Exercise Solutions
FC16 : Title:
Q8.5 -> M 16.2
Network 1: Jog conveyor motor to the Right

Q4.2
M30.2
M30.3
T16
If
TIS
S_OFFDT
0
BI
SST#2S TV
BCD ...
Symbol information:
L_MAN
04.2
M30.2
M_Conv_Jog_LEFT_HMI
M30.3
KConvRIGHT
Q8.5
-----

Run conveyor RIGHT
Network 2: Jog conveyor motor to the Left

Q4.2
1
M30.2
M30.3
/1
Q8.6
TiS
IA
}
1
T16
S_OFFDT
Q
SST#28 TV
R
Symbol information:
04.2
L_MAN
M30.2
M30.3
M_Conv_Jog_LEFT_HMI
08.6
K_ConvLEFT
-----
Page 31
BI
BCD

Run conveyor LEFT
ST-SERV1
Exercise Solutions
Network 3: Memory bit Conveyor motor in AUTO mode
18.5
18.1
M16.4
SR
I I
18.6
18.2
04.3
1/1
18.0
II
M16.0
M17.0
II
->
08.4
I
Symbol information:
18.5
BAY1
18.1
T_Bayl
18.6
BAY2
18.2
T_Bay2
Q4.3
L_AUTO
18.0
LB
M16.0
M_Aux_LB
M17.0
M_Conv_Fault
Q8.4
L_Bay-LB
M16.4
MAuto_RIGHT
-----------

Light barrier
Network 4: Control the conveyor motor to the Right

H16.2
II
Q8.5
N16.4
SyMbol information:
M_Jog_RIGHT
M16.2
M_Auto_RIGHT
M16.4
K_Conv_RIGHT
Q8.5

Page 32
ST-SERV1
Exercise Solutions
FC17 : Title:
: Conveyor fault (time monitoring)
etuark
Q8.5
Q4.3
II
------ S
T17
S_ODT
S5T#6S
TV
Q
M31.0
BI
M17.0
SR
M10.3
1
------
Q5.0
It
BCD
Symbol information:
L_AUTO
Q4.3
H_Conv_RIGHT
Q8.5
OD_Conv_Monitoring
T17
M_Conv_Fault
M17.0
M_Ackn_Fault_HMI
M31.0
M_Flash_2Hz
M10.3
L_Conv_Fault
Q5.0
--------

Run conveyor RIGHT
Network 2: Count Conveyor faults
M17.0
I I------ CD
Q4.3 S
C#3
C17
S_CD
CV ...
PV CV BCD
Symbol information:
M17.0
M_Conv_Fault
C17
C_Conv_Fault
Q4.3
L_AUTO


-- Counter Conveyor faults
Page 33
ST-SERV1
Exercise Solutions

FC19 : Count parts
Q4.1
I/I
MOVE
ENO
EN
08.4
0- IN
18.4
OUT MWZO
I I
Symbol information:
Q4.1
L_SYSTEM
Q8.4
L_Bay-LB
18.4
T_Bay-LB
MW20
MW_ACT

Memory word, ACTUAL quantity of transported
Network 2: count the parts in AUTO mode

18.0
M19.0
Q4.3
(P)
I I------ EN
AD DI
ENO
MATZO- IN1
OUT 111120
INZ
Symbol information:
18.0
LB
M19.0
M_Aux_Count
Q4.3
L_AUTO
MI620
MW ACT
-----
Light barrier
-----

Memory word, SETPOINT quantity of parts to

CMP>=I
04.3
------
I I
08.4
C)
131120 IN1
MWZZ-,INZ
Symbol information:
MW_ACT
MW20
MW_SETP
MW22
L_AUTO
Q4.3
LBay-LB
Q8.4
EN
LIMO
ENO
TIWZO- IN
OUT 0116
Symbol information:
MW_ACT
MW20
QW_DigDisp
QW6
-- Memory word, ACTUAL quantity of transported

-- BCD digital display
Page 34
ST-SERV1
Exercise Solutions

FC42 : Title:
Network 1: Motor ON
M40.0
I I------ EN
MOVE
ENO
OUT QW42
W#16#47F IN
Symbol information:
M_MM420_0n_HMI
M40.0
QWControlMM420
QW42
-- Switch On Memory bit MM420 (HMI)

Network 2: Motor OFF

M40.0
1/1
MOVE
EN ENO
OUT QW42
W#16#47E- IN
Symbol information:
M_MM420_0n_HMI
M40.0
QWControlMM420
QW42
-- Switch On Memory bit MM420 (HMI)

Network 3: Jog to the Right
M40.2
M40.3
M40.0
EN
MOVE
ENO
W#16#57E- IN OUT Q11142
Symbol information:
M_HM420_0n_HMI
QW_Control_HM420
M40.2
M40.3
M40.0
QW42
-----
Memory bit MM420

Memory bit MM420
Switch On Memory
Control word for
Jog RIGHT (HMI)

Jog LEFT (HMI)
bit MM420 (HMI)
HM420
Network 4: Jog to the Left
M40.3
II
M40.2
I/I
M40.0
EN
MOVE
ENO
W#16#67E- IN
OUT
Symbol information:
M40.3
M40.2
M40.0
QW42
M_HM420_Jog_RIGHT_HMI
M_MM420_0n_HMI
QWControlHM420

Page 35
Memory bit MM420

Memory bit MM420
Switch On Memory
Control word for
Jog LEFT (HMI)

Jog RIGHT (HMI)
bit MM420 (HMI)
MM420
ST-SERV1
Exercise Solutions
All bay indicator lights

show the same behavior:
-> query all bay proximity
FC14 : Indicator lights + Horn
switches

Q4.3
Q8.5
18.5
1 1
04.3
Q4.3
18.6
1/1
18.5
18.6
18.7
18.7
M17.0
Q8.4
Q8.1
... :
M10.5
II
01
M17.0
Q8_4
I/I
ICI
1671.......... Af675 ..............
Symbol information:
Q4.3
L_AUTO
Q8.5
R_Conv_RIGHT
18.5
BAY1
18.6
BAY2
18_7
BAY3
M17.0
M_Conv_Fault
Q8_4
L_Bay-LB
M10.5
M_Flash_lHz
M10.3
M_Flash_2Hz
Q8.1
L_Bayl

Run conveyor RIGHT

04.3
II
Q4.3
1 1
04.3
08.5
I/I
18.5
I/I
I8.5
--
: VI
18.6
M17.0
IA
08.4
Q8.3
01
/1
18.6
18.7
M10.5
1 1
I/I
M17.0
08.4
'dirt ...... Wiry ................
II
II
Symbol information:
Q4.3
L_AUTO
R_Conv_RIGHT
Q8.5
BAY1
18.5
BAY2
18.6
BAY3
18.7
M_Conv_Fault
M17.0
L_Bay-LB
Q8.4
M_Flash_lHz
M10.5
M_Flash_2Hz
M10.3
L_Bay3
Q8.3

Run conveyor RIGHT
Page 36
ST-SERV1
Exercise Solutions

new NW for
indicator light
Bay 3
04.3
Q8.5
04.3
18.5
18.6
/I
08.5
18.7
M17.0
08.4
18.7
18.7
M10.5
M17.0
I/I
Q4.3
18.6
I/I
I/I
II
II
Q8.3
Q8.4
I/I
ICI
2110.3
I I
All bay indicator lights

show the same behavior:
-> query all bay proximity
Symbol information:
Q4.3
08.5
18.5
18.6
18.7
M17.0
Q8.4
M10.5
M10.3
Q8.3
L_AUTO
K_Conv_RIGHT
BAY1
BAY2
BAYS
M_Conv_Fault
L_Bay-LB
M_Flash_lHz
M_Flash_2Hz
L_Bay3
Indicator
Run convey
Proximity
Proximity
Th.
T
Proximity se
___ switches
Network 4: Horn
Q8.5
04.2
II
II
1110.3
08.7
08.6
I I
Symbol information:
08.5
Q8.6
Q4.2
M10.3
Q8.7
K_Conv_RIGHT
KConv_LEFT
L_MAN
M_Flash_2Hz
Horn
------
Run conveyor RIGHT

Run conveyor LEFT
Horn
Page 37
ST-SERV1
Exercise Solutions

FC16 : Title:
Network 1: Jog conveyor motor to the Right
Q4.2
M30.2
M30.3
I I
I I
III
T16
I8.0 .. M16.2
........
T15
S OFFDT
Jog RIGHT
only up to LB
S5TO2S- TV
BCD ...
Symbol information:
Q4.2
L_MAN
M30.2
M30.3
M_Conv_Jog_LEFT_HMI
18_0
LB
M16.2
M_Jog_RIGHT
Network
------
BI

Light barrier
2j: Jog conveyor motor to the Left
04.2
I I
.........
H30.2
III
H30.3
-I I
T15
III
18.5
I/I
Q8.6
........
116
S_OFFDT
0
Jog LEFT
only up to Bay1
S5T/12S- TV
BI
BCD
Symbol information:
Q4.2
L_MAN
M30.2
M_Conv_Jog_LEFT_HMI
M30.3
BAY1
18.5
K_Conv_LEFT
08.6
------

Run conveyor LEFT
Page 38
ST-SERV1
Exercise Solutions

Network 3: Memory bit Conveyor motor in AUTO mode
18.7
18.6
18.5
.... ti..... M16.4

Is.1 ;
SR
1-H-S
18.7
18.5
18.6
18.2
18.6
18.5
18.7
18.3
I/I
Q4.3
1/
18.0
M16.0
(p)
Conveyor Start
possible from
all bays
M17.0
08.4
Symbol information:
BAY3
18_7
BAY2
18_6
BAY1
18.5
T_Bayl
18.1
T_Bay2
18.2
T_Bay3
18.3
L_AUTO
Q4_3
LB
18.0
M_Aux_LB
M16.0
M_Conv_Fault
M17.0
L_Bay-LB
Q8_4
M_Auto_RIGHT
M16.4
-------------

Light barrier
Network 4: Control the conveyor motor to the Right

M16.2
-I 1
08.5
C)-1
M16.4
Symbol information:
M16.2
M_Jog_RIGHT
M16.4
M_Auto_RIGHT
Q8.5
KConvRIGHT


Page 39
ST-SERV1
Exercise Solutions
SIEMENS
Training and Support
SIEMENS
1011111001
1111011101101 7/110,01
Mr...V. c OmeHia
.1
lirmemelgessenweneare
..
SIMATIC S7
Siemens AG 2008. AS rights reserved.
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_17E.1

Rtr
Page
Contents
Do You Still have Questions about our Learning Offers?
www.siemens.com/sitrain or sitrain.automation.siemens.com/sitrainworld
..........2
..........3
SIMATIC S7 Courses on Totally Integrated Automation
Do You Need Service & Support ?

Know-How in the Service & Support Portal
6
7
Communication in the Service & Support Portal

... just a few mouse clicks away from the required information 1/2
8
9
........10

Page 1
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Do You Still have Questions about our Learning Offers?
We'll help you!

... With the Infoline:
Tel
01805 23 56 11
Fax 01805 23 56 12
he Intern t:
siemens
/sitrain
4
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_178.2
Page 2

%T
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
www.siemens.com/sitrain or sitrain.automation.siemens.com/sitrainworld
LI fi7 G
Acrotess
http://streineutomatron.semax.cornistrernworkdi
Lairs
re
SIEMENS
SITRAINTM - Training Courses
by Siemens for Automation and
Industrial Solutions
Getting directly applicable know-how fast practical tralning courses from the
manufacturer!
In over 200 locations in 62 countries, Strain oilers tramp

courses for Siemens Industry products and the interplay of
the products 0 systems. Thts worldwide presence makes t
possible tot vailo build up know-how on sitewherever
you wish your training curse.
In addrtron to traditional classroom trainng courses, you can
acquire your krrwlevige wth the help of rrinovalive
and communications media such as Learning with Web Based,'
Tiering.
> New Training front SITRARI'.?
Training Topics Worldwide

You ere looking for a Paring arse on a specific product and would like to know where n
the world this course is offered, Here you wil Ind an overview of the worldwide tree wog
courses on offer.
> Arnomation Systems
> Low Voltage Controls and DiSll ibution
> Communication Ilet works
> More Ti Miring Courses by Siemens
> throes Technology
> Process Automation
0 Electrical Installation Technology
> Sensor s. Test and Measurement
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_17E.3
Gal In Contact
> SITRAIW. worldmap
> SITRA111`. contacts worldwide
I SITRAIN'. Worlehencie
z.1 CI
1
_1
NIT.
The complete course selections are accessible through the following links:
www.siemens.de/sitrain or
www.siemens.com/sitrain
Course Search
With Course Search it is possible, through various search filters, such as,
keyword, target group etc., to find your desired course selections. The filters
can also be combined.
Top Links
With Top Links, various course selections can be accessed directly, such as,
SIMATIC S7, SINUMERIK solution line ...
Training News
Here, new SITRAIN course selections and actions are presented at a glance.
Course Catalog
The Course Catalog enables you to find the desired course through learning
paths or through the structure of the Siemens Mall.
Page 3
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Service personnel, Operators, Users,
Maintenance personnel
Programmers, Commissioning
engineers, Project engineers
W8 2)
wATZ
PLC's for Beginners (WBT)
PLC's for Beginners (WBT)
Micromaster 420 (WBT)
PROFIBUS (WBT)
SIMATIC S7
TIA Service Training 1
SIMATIC S7
TIA Programming 1
Decision makers, Sales

personnel, Project managers,
Project members,
engineers, Project engineers,
Service personnel,
SIMATIC TIA for

Non-Technicians
wAT4
WinCC flexible (WBT)
PROFIBUS (WBT)
MICROMASTER 420 (WBT)
SIMATIC S7
SIMATIC S7
TIA Programming 2
WRIO)
Industrial Ethernet (WBT)

Industrial Ethernet (WBT)
Siemens Certified Service

Technician Level 1
SIMATIC S7
wRT2)

SIMATIC S7
TIA Programming 3
SIMATIC S7
Exam for Siemens certified

Service Technician Level 2
Production Automation
with TIA
Learning path ST 2
Date:
File:
Exam for Siemens Certified

Programmer
18.09.2009
SERV1_17E.4
Page 4
ST 4

ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Mtcroma star 420 t WI3TY:3
Decision makers, Sales

personnel, Project managers,
Project members,
engineers, Project engineers,
Service personnel,
engineers, Project engineers
Service personnel, Operators, Users,

4
SIMATIC 57
TIA Programming 1
SIMATIC 57
it
tfdlik,
Non Technicians
wIrrn
MICRoMASTER 420 (WEl"
SIMATIC S7
TIA Programming 2
mat ethernet
Siemens Certified Service
Technician Level 1
Produ lion Automation

with TIA
*'
.inCC flexible IWET)
ra
SIMATIC S7
TIA Programming 3
TIC 57
IA Service Training 3

Service Technician Level 2
Learning path ST 2
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:

Programmer
18.09.2009
SERV1_17E.5
ST 4
1111
,r;
Sitrain Certified Program
The SITRAIN Certification Program is the new international certification

program from SITRAIN
The SITRAIN Certification Program consists of different modules in which

you can participate
After passing the examination of a module, the participant receives an

international diploma and certificate
Page 5
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Adrenal
Do You Need Service & Support ?

Li El endow, w I two ' fp sow Di
IC Ittpollsupport.eutoination.samens.can/WW/Isap.dtMuncacslissosinfoautadwoseus
SIEMENS
International
Intranet
siemans.com
-s Automation and Drives
E q3anoll
Contact I Semen
I. tigri 1 Register
[Advanced]
I Product Support I Applications & 1 oohs Services !Firm glaring I For um

Service & Support
Supp
Subwribe to our newsletter now
4
Release for delaery, SIMOTION C240
7 Pon, T-Tap PRO Cornedor Released fa Deivery
SalesfDekvery Release Basic Versions of the Model IPC 840 P4 for SIMATIC PCS 7 V5.20 SP4
APPlicatun sample Mir degnosis end set up of ETXOS FC via Too:Peened TPI 708
Se artti
world wide support
I Cheese a rout
nrySupport -s re,
led-help
Ertee your specific ;sabot Int median Wow to Welty
extract the IMP related entries from ea globel dateesse
as
-0 to personal:cabal
go to our globe Menne we webs** enact specr
FAGS, menial& downbede and approvelskertil cations

4 Product Support
Protect Nese or Pan Wenner
For automaton system nteraction end connectally

Wenn.. old Woe to nantaban examples, samples.
demonstration systems and more'
Search Teed (hay wads)
4 Application & Tools
Support by experts worldwide
le= Ones Help
View eesong careeredions

and talk to other users sboal
specific scaliest applications and issues. Please note the

you we reed to Login to actively partcpate
A Now start your discussion math other users
Send your question drectir to a Siemens !anneal ni
en Weal Toe
expert Ws our aerie Support Request
-8
Support Request
Our service offer
SWAMI
Our Service products are designed to meet yap support needs to Its Mire We cycle or your nelallatat
4 Spare parts and repairs
Service on-see
4 Optimization and modernization
4 Technical consulting
4 Configuring and Software engineering
4 Technical Support
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_17E.6
HM0111011 CM Vs
entomb:in LMT cad
User wee
kennel

Under www.siemens.com/automation/service&support the Service &

Support portal offers online access to the wide range of information and
services regarding the Automation & Drives portfolio whenever required.
Online support is divided into two principle topics:
Know-How
Communication
Product support:
Technical information and downloads for products
(manuals, FAQs, software updates, etc.)
Applications & Tools:

Automation solutions
(solution examples, system descriptions, demo versions, calculators, tools
etc.)
Services:
Information on wide range of services offered
by Service & Support (contacts, repairs etc.)
Forum:
Direct customer - customer communications in case of technical questions
Support Request:
Technical requests are answered by experts
Page 6
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Adnue
Know-How in the Service & Support Portal

Wectaaln to I Unks
ml
htti 1 survort seutornabon
1,-.4111L4i.z,
.cornIww *tic drf unc
SIEMENS
sinntfins.com
Itslianta
)Automation and Drives
International
Snap ty
a.cs.f
paooll rf.:Z
Intranet
Contact i nfamy
I Product Support I Applications & Tools I Services Information I Forum
Service Support
!ogint Register [Afwara-mf]
Delivery
IPC 840 P4 for SIMATIC PCS 7 V524 SP/
S FC vie Touchpenel TP17013
Product Support
Services & Infos
Techn. information and

downloads for products
btormalion below to quid*
s trom our global database
to Our glabal dobbin. and explore the

FACts, mammas, dovenloads and approvals
4 Product Support
Prock.rct None or Part
or sttornabon system internam and c

cbcii below 10, erbecatIon examPle7 . 7.7007.
Search Text (key words)
aeon systems and more

-1Jnnhr.
prodixt
View exestrog carwersations end let
aorsceccs and
Tnni
4 field Semite
4 Sweepers
Applications & Tools
Support by experts world,
specific
Information on range of
services offered
Information on
automation solutions
you we need to Login to actively pa
A Now start your discussion and
er users
Our service offer
SIEMENS
4
One Service products are dessgned to meet your support needs la the elite lie cycle or Your ttStalabbnTechnical consulting
-t Spare parts and repairs
-a Configuring and Software engineering
- Service on-site
-a Optimization and modernization
SIMATIC S7
Technical Support
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_17E.7
Wormetion maw
Automation Value Card
Warfel
w User stew

kV Automation
General
The online support with its comprehensive information system and many types
of services is available around the clock. From product support over service
information to interactive services, online support is always your first step you
need to take for obtaining a quick solution.
Product Support
Profound expertise in our products and systems and up-to-date information are
the Product Support's support know-how basis in form of FAQs, downloads of,
for example, updates / upgrades, up-to-date product information from
Marketing & Sales, manuals in electronic form in PDF format, test certificates
and characteristics
Applications & Tools Applications & Tools is the new platform for solutions and system overviews in
the Service & Support portal. Applications & Tools help you solve your
automation tasks. This support is provided in the form of programming
examples and tools, background knowledge, functional descriptions,
recommendations on possible actions, performance data etc. The focus is not
on the individual product but rather on the individual products working together.
Services
Here you can find our complete range of services and detailed information on
our Service & Support processes and a database containing the contact
persons.
Information
Are you looking for the latest Service & Support brochures - or do you want to
know at which trade show you can meet us personally? All of this and much
more can be found under "Information".
Page 7
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Communication in the Service & Support Portal

SIEMENS
International
Home
4 siemens.com
I ntranet
Genteel I Stamp
I Product Support I Applications & Tools I Services I Information I Forum
Service & Support
Loon I RecKler
bscrIbe to our
Release for delivery, SIMOTION C240

7/Er Power T-Tap PRO Connector Released for Delivery
Sales/Delivery Release, Basic Versions of the Model IPC 840 P4 for SIMATIC PCS 7
4
Application sample for diagnosis and set up of ET2005 FC via Touchpanel TP170B
4
Choose a country
Self-help
Search Product Support Documents
melon below to quickly
om our global database.
Technical Forum
Discussion platform for

Browse Support Docu
customers
Go to our global database
FAQs, manuals, clownloa, and appro s ce ic Ions
-0 Product Support
Online requests to the A&D
Contact
For automation system interaction and connectivity

questions, click below for application examples, samples,
demonstration systems and more
hotline
Go
Spare parts
4 Application & Tools
Help
Support by experts worldwide

lechnical Forum
Onins risc
the Siemens expert
View existing conversations and talc to other users about

specific product applications and Issues Please note that
you will need to Login to actively participate.
es Now start your discussion with other users
Send your question directly to a Siemens technical support

expert via our online Support Request
SIEMENS
IIIPMEMILIMPLIMIPPAPPARIk
Date:
File:
Guided Tour
4121 Support Request
Our service offer
SIMATIC S7
Contacts worldwide
-0 Field Service
18.09.2009
SERV1_17E.8
%Or

Technical Forum
In addition to the comprehensive scope of services, we support the direct dialog

among experts with the help of modern web technology. The new Technical
Forum is an attractive discussion platform (English and German) where users
and experts can exchange information.
Support Request
With the online Support Request you will always find direct answers to your
questions. In the online screens you can describe your requests. Through the
knowledge base you will immediately be informed about possible solutions. If
the suggested solution does not resolve your problem, you can send the web
form directly to your team of experts in Technical Support (Hotline).
Page 8
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
.. just a few mouse clicks away from the required information 1/2
SIEMENS
International
I ntranet
4, siemens.com
Home Product Support Applications & Tools
Contact I Siternap
Deutsch I Francais] Itahanoi EsparlelI PIZ
->Automation and Drives
I Services I Information I Forum
Service & Support
Login I Register
-4Subscribe to our newsletter now.
A clearly structured, user-friendly navigation in a

"Product tree" or an Index
Service & Support
Service & Support
Product tree
Product tree
Index (A-Z)
Index (A-Z)
ABCDEFGHI J
Product Information
_
L ft
Drive Technology
HOP ORSTUVW X Y
Automation systems
Search in the Index

Go
9 J Communication/Networls
database and explore the product s

downloads and approvelskertificat
rduct Support
An intelligent,
comprehensive
Search function
s,,,-,terri inter action and connectivity

below for application examples, sermls-_____
yrterri, and more
alication & Tools
Lov.Voltage Controls
Electrical Installation Technology
Process automation
Poorer supplies
n Spare parts
Help
f-=2
Online Help
Notes:
9 J Sensor technology, measuring and t
SIMATIC PCS 7 V5.2 0 SP4

-ral el TP1708
The Index is the fast access to our

Product Support.
ion directly to a Siemens technical support
Guided Tour
Support Request
port Request
9 _j Safety systems - Safety Integrated

Select a letter from the above
overview of make use of our Index
search.
9 J Industries
9J Service
SIEMENS
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_17E.9

To find the required information, you can use the intelligent Search function and
a the user-friendly navigation:
Search
An intelligent and comprehensive search function provides you with the relevant
results.
Automatic recognition of key words
Automatic spell-check
Automatic sorting of the hitlist based on topicality
Navigation
You can also do a targeted search in the product tree to obtain

the required information. Use the index for easy selection of the product.
Page 9
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
SIEMENS
International
Horne 1 Product Support
-) siernens.corn

Applications & Tools I Services
Deutsch' Franca1A Itall no/ Espanol

-
htforrnation
Intranet
Carted! StaMag
Forum
Service & Support
Loge; I Register
(Advanced)
Search
Functions:
Forum: Experts exchange in forum contributions
Newsletter: Always up-to-date thanks to daily news on pre-selected
topics
Support Request
Jechnischeoeien
myTree: Define your personal,

transparent product tree
'llachaairee
Personal data is automatically filled

in forms, e.g. in the
Support Request
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Registration
IMutterrnann
Imintermennallenline.de
Finto
Testcompieve
Aare*
"Musterstrasse 3
18.09.2009
SERV1_17E.10
L2
INN trimidw Mon Login
vans
'Michael
'Telefon
1.49 123 45678
Abtellung
'Quaid&
'PLZ 'Sue
73
1 4- 1Musterstildt
2.1 SITRAIN
Training for
gr Automation and Industrial Solutions
After registering with our service "mySupport", you can utilize our complete
range of online services after entering your data only once.
You will then have exclusive access to the following functions:
Your personal newsletter

Through the Automation and Drives Newsletter system you receive daily, upto-date news on selected topics - sent direct to your mailbox. As a mySupport
user, you can individually adjust the mailing options.
myTree
Your personal product tree. As a mySupport user, you can adjust the product
tree so that it only shows those products and services from the comprehensive
A&D range that are important to you.
Thus you can always maintain an overview and find the required information
faster.
Online Support Request

You need to enter your personal data only once and they will be automatically
entered in the Support Request forms. You don't have to repeatedly enter the
same information in every form which saves you time for more important
things.
myForum
Direct access to our Technical Forum. As mySupport user you also

automatically have direct access to our Technical Forum
Page 10
ST-SERV1
Siemens AG
Industry Sector
Gleiwitzer Str. 555
90475, NURNBERG
DEUTSCHLAND
www.siemens.corn/automation

TIA Service Training 1 S

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

TIA Service Training 1 S

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SN3lA1315

Ausnpu! Joj saamsuy

The SIMATIC S7 System Family

Training Units and Addressing

The SIMATIC Manager

Block Architecture and Block Editor

10. Digital Operations

This document was produced for training purpose.

11. Introduction to HMI and PROFIBUS DP

12. Rewiring a User Program

13. Introduction to Micromaster

14. Documenting, Saving, Archiving

15. Closing Exercise

(--) SIEMENS AG 2009

17. Training and Support

2.1 SITRAIN Training for

Automation and Industrial Solutions

SITRAIN Training for

SITRAIN Training for

Automation and Industrial Solutions

SITRAIN Training for

Automation and Industrial Solutions

li SITRAIN Training for

Automation and Industrial Solutions

Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.

SITRAIN Training for

Automation and Industrial Solutions

Production processes are no longer seen as individual partial processes, but

a common communication between all participating automation components.

SITRAIN Training for

What does "Totally Integrated Automation" Mean

Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.

11 SITRAIN Training for

Automation and Industrial Solutions

A scalable hardware platform. The optimal (price/performance)

An open totally integrated automation environment. An existing

SITRAIN Training for

Powerful software increases the productivity in the implementation of a

Automation and Industrial Solutions

The SIMATIC S7/C7 and WinAC Controllers

Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.

SITRAIN Training for

This complete system is the combination of a PLC (S7-300) and an operator

WinAC is a PC-based solution. It is used when various automation tasks (control,

SITRAIN Training for

Automation and Industrial Solutions

Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.

SITRAIN Training for

Automation and Industrial Solutions

Modular small control system for the low-end performance range,

Performance-graded range of CPUs,

Extensive selection of modules,

Expandable design with up to 7 modules,

Backplane bus integrated in the modules,

Can be networked with

Central PG/PC connection with access to all modules,

No slot rules for peripheral modules,

"Complete package" with power supply, CPU, I/O in one device,

"Micro PLC" with integrated functions.

SITRAIN Training for

S7-200 Micro Controller

Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.

SITRAIN Training for